Home

NEC UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS User's Manual

1. Call Teardown Page 13 32 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Quality of Service QoS In order to obtain quality of service QoS for the voice traffic routers or layer 3 switches in the network must support a queuing mechanism The queuing mechanism allows for the prioritization of the voice packets to pass through the router before the routine data traffic The NEAX PBX system allows for customizing the priority of the voice traffic out of the PBX This prioritization occurs with the IP precedence bits inside the IP header With a higher level of prioritization the voice traffic will not accumulate as much delay as traffic with lower levels of priority With Diff Serve Differentiated Services prioritization can be made if the routing devices support it NEAX PBX IP trunks support Diff Serve QoS should be pushed as close to the network edge as possible At the edge this is considered CoS Class of Service A layer 2 switched environment is recommended to obtain full throughput to a routing device for NEAX IP telephony and for CoS management Specific ports on the data switch may be prioritized for QoS or CoS If this is available the port that is connected to a NEAX IP telephony device should be prioritized in this manner Additionally in the network the port that has been prioritized in the above manner must also be set as a trusted value
2. Q 931a Dterm PS III user can originate or receive a call in any place of a Roaming over network provided by the plural PBXs which are interfaced by JT IP Trunk Q931 a protocol over IP Trunks This feature is to Supervise and changeover the channel automatically to avoid the interference and to maintain the speech quality Speech Encruolion This feature protects a call from being tapped Speed Dial PS This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to dial the certain frequently P called numbers using two digit abbreviated call codes This feature allows a call placed to a Dterm PS III station which is out of zone or power off to be forwarded to an idle station in a hunt group Two Station Hunting arrangements are available Radio Channel Changeover Station Hunting Not Available Station Hunting Circular processes the call no matter which station in the hunt group is called Station Hunting Terminal initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of a hunt group is called Voice Mail When a message is mailed in the Dterm PS III an indication of the Indication envelope icon is displayed in the LCD of the Dterm PS III UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 11 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System System Description Dterm PS III The user terminal for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless system is the Dterm PS III This terminal is specifically designed for the mobile user off
3. ViewMail ViewMail organizes messages on screen making them much easier to manage than on the telephone ViewMail displays a list of messages that you can quickly scan for important information You can see who sent the message the date and time it was sent the length and a subject if one was included When used with Automatic Number Identification ANI and Caller ID or when entered manually through NEAXMail AD 64 call screening feature the name and number of the person who sent the message is also included You can sort messages in any order and see details about them at a glance Intuitive buttons and icons make ViewMail easy to use You can play and review selected messages send a message to another subscriber send a copy of a message to another subscriber save a message as a WAV file to a desired location and delete messages from your mailbox all with a click of a mouse ViewMail can be used on Windows 98 NT 3 51 NT 4 0 2000 and XP Here s a quick review of some of these features e Archiving messages Push button message control e Call return Return receipt e Copying or pasting messages Save as WAV files Password controlled access ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging Lotus Notes GroupWise ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging Lotus Notes GroupWise gives you the flexibility to send and receive different types of messages interchangeably With ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging Lotus Notes GroupWise all types of messages voic
4. Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission Loop Back Test Local Remote Loop Back Cyclic Redundancy Checking based on ITU T Rec G704 Page 15 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN For connections of 24PRT and transmission line twisted pair cable can be used For connection of 30PRT and transmission line either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used Note SDN requires B8ZS Line coding with Extended Superframe ESF format BRT The Basic Rate Interface Trunk BRT provides one or two physical interface to the ISDN Basic Rate Interface service 192 kbps PCM 2B D The BRT has the following functions Unipolar Bipolar Conversion AMI B8ZS Format S T Interface Signaling Insertion Extraction Frame Synchronization Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission For connections of BRT and transmission line twisted pair cables can be used Note We recommend the point to point connection when connecting the system to the public network using the BRT card Set the second data of CM35 Y 79 to 0 For the point to multipoint connection using the BRT card when the system is established far from the public network a communication error occurs easily because the ISDN signal fades away UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 11 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN
5. SPN SCO1 This circuit card controls the signal link D channel when Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN PRI Primary Rate Interface 23B 1D is employed in the system This package will support one signaling link on a single DTA package A maximum of 8 ISDN spans are allowed per system SPN SCOO This circuit card controls signal links when Common Channel Interoffice Signaling CCIS is employed in the system This package will support one signaling link on a single DTA package A maximum of 8 CCIS links per system is allowed SPN 24PRTA This circuit card is a 24 channel 1 5 Mbps digital interfacing trunk card that also provides a built in D Channel Handler DCH This package provides one DTI span with ISDN Data Link on a single package A maximum of 8 ISDN links per system is allowed per system SPN 24CCTA This circuit card is a 24 channel 1 5 Mbps digital interfacing trunk card that also provides a built in C Channel Handler CCH for CCIS This package provides one DTI span with CCIS Data Link on a single A maximum of 8 CCIS links per system is allowed per system SPN 30DTC This circuit card is a 30 B channel 2 Mbps E1 digital interfacing trunk card 2 048 MHz Typical E1 applications apply to any CCIS Q SIG and TIE Line application via continuous property Complies with U LAW PCM voice coding standard used in North America Note Does not support A LAW coding used in Europe Mexico and South America The follo
6. Transfer the Call Conference the Call Place the Call on Hold Retrieve a Call on Hold Multilingual Announcements Up to seven 7 language sets can be configured and recorded in QueWorx Each set is selected based on pilot number to accommodate multilingual applications For example a pilot may be defined to send calls to a group of agents who support Spanish speaking customers Global Repeat Verification This feature allows callers to verify their customer input such as account number of callback number This feature helps ensure the proper handling of customer calls Customer Profile Records Database The profile contains information specific to each customer This information is used to display pertinent customer information to agents via the Que WorX Agent screen pop application Unlimited Multi Level Automated Attendant Up to 10 menu options and unlimited levels are recorded and offered to customers With this option customers can provide more options for callers Multiple levels allow callers to provide more detailed routing For example when the PBX option is chosen from the menu callers may receive additional selection choices such as For NEAX 2000 press 1 for NEAX 2400 press 2 and so on up to 5 levels deep Up to 10 distinct automated attendants can be configured to accommodate multiple customer menus Calls can be routed via the automated attendant to selected departments or groups of agents UNIVERGE N
7. gt NEC UNIVERGENEaAx 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide May 2006 NEC Unified Solutions Inc LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC Unified Solutions Inc reserves the right to change the specifications functions or features at any time without notice NEC Unified Solutions Inc has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions Inc and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Unified Solutions Inc UNIVERGE NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation All other product references and or company references are registered trademarks or trademarked for their respective products and or company The UNIVERGE Neax 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide has been developed to provide technical information on the UNIVERGE Neax 2000 IPS which is required when responding to the majority of questions asked on Request For Proposals The information provided has been compiled from a variety of available documentation and has been consolidated into a single manual For this reason it may be necessary to gather additional information from other supporting documentation to fulfill the Request For Proposal RFP requirements Informati
8. 64 kbps Clear Channel 64 kbps Restricted 56 kbps Restricted International 64 kbps Clear International 64 kbps Restricted X X X International 56 kbps Restricted X X X HO 384 kbps x xX xX H11 1526 kbps N x 64 kbps o xX Local Exchange Carrier Network Voice Services and Features UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Compatibility SERVICES AND FEATURES LEC CARRIERS CALL BY CALL SERVICE AT amp T SELECTION SESS DMS100 Basic Call WATS Maximal Band X Banded 800 Service INWATS X FX LINE E A TIE LINE To e Virtual Private Network xp x Electronic Tandem Network fe Operator Access Note 2 LEC Operator X Default IEX Operator X 5 Other IEX Operator X rove EPI Basic Call a WATS Maximal Band x x 800 Service INWATS x x FX LINE AN TAR TIE LINE p f gt x Virtual Private Network xf x Electronic Tandem Network A X Feature Available NOT Available UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 15 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN AT amp T NTI SIEMENS 5ESS IDMS100 EWSD UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Operator Access Note 2 LEC Operator Default IEX Operator Other IEX Operator X X Xx FACILITY MANAGEMENT D Channel Back Up Non Facility Associated Signaling X X AT amp T NTI SIEMENS SESS DMS100 EWSD X VOICE FEATURES CPN to Network Presentation Restrict Allow CPN BPN Delivery
9. Area Code Routing This feature allows calls to be routed based on one or a combination of the following factors ANI Automatic Number Identification Account Code Area Code This feature allows callers to be routed based on a match of any of these criteria For example callers may be prompted to enter their account number as they enter the system Based on a match by the QueWorX system their call may be redirected to a group of agents or their personal agent at a higher priority Account Code Routing This feature allows the system to route a caller to a specific split or agent based on Account Code Page 12 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Screen Pop Provides an application that is installed at each agent s desktop Agents can log into Que WorX and the CallCenterWorX system via this application Customer information provided in the Customer Profile Records Database can be displayed in the form of a pop up at each agent s desktop as calls are received Additionally the softphone capabilities of this application can be utilized to allow agents to enter break mode ready mode enter tally codes etc right from the computers Soft Phone Using the agent Soft phone application from the agent client PC the agent has the ability to Answer the incoming Call Release disconnect the Call Set Break Mode Tally the Call
10. Prog allows access for programming DISA System Speed Dial Date amp Time and Tone Ringer Keys while answering or originating SPB Out Pulse Short Basic Display LPB Out Pulse Long SHF Flash Over Trunk Keys while calling a busy station B V Busy Verification Keys while calling a DND station DDOVR DND override Keys while accessing Hotel feature RC Room Cut off MW Message Waiting DD Do not Disturb WU Wake up call RESET Reset UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 SN716 Specifications Power Options SN716 PN 8DLCP 1 8 ATT DESKCON PN 4DLCM 1 4 ATT PN 4DLCQ 1 4 ATT PN 2DLCN 1 2 ATT PN PWOO ACA U Unit Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Remarks Interface Card 27V Distance Max 984 3ft 350m Interface Card 27V Distance Max 984 3ft 350m Interface Card 27V Distance Max 984 3ft 350m Interface Card 48V Distance Max 984 3ft 350m DC DC Converter 27V to 48V Distance with 2 4 8 DLC 350m 24V AC DC Adapter Distance w 8DLC 350m Distance w 4DLC or 2DLC 1200m The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can support up to 8 SN716 Desk Consoles Dimensions 10 inches 25 4 cm wide x 9 inches 22 9 cm deep x 4 inches 10 2 cm high UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Page 7 7 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Business Attendant System BAS NEC s Business At
11. QoS sianalin IP Precedence DiffServ ieee assigned on an IP trunk basis Speech encoding decoding G 711 G 729a G 723 1 G 711 G 729a 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms G 723 1 30 ms fixed Gatekeeper Routed Direct Normal Connect Fast Connect Not available Static registration Not supported Not available Controlled in a node basis Controlled in a node basis IPT to IPT IPT to ACIS available but voice quality may deteriorate IPT to CCIS available IPT to ISDN available IPT to analog C O available IPT to MFC not available IPT connection mode Point to Multipoint Dynamic jitter buffer 10 to 600 ms 10 ms increment Tandem connection Required Equipment for H 323 Equipment Name IP Trunk Card Accommodates the IP network and SPN IPTB A transmits receives compressed voice or signals over IP PN IPT network 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card 4 channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk max of four per IPTB W Cable Voice compression protocols G723 1 G729A G711 FAX 14 4 kbps DTMF signals Used together with PN IPTB card SPN 4VCTI A Page 13 20 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP FAX and Modem over IP This feature allows the system to transmit facsimile or modem communications over IP network via Local Area Networks LAN and corporate Wide Area Network WAN Since PBX regards facsimile and mod
12. Total number of lines Single Line Telephone Dterm e IP PAD No of channel 82s Single Line Telephone ae e e IIS A Lines Not Available Dterm Lines 7 Long Line DiermiP DtermIPANASET SP30 PTPConnection Note3 952 as ISA Station A topsn s m Central Office Trunk Lines ISDN PFT Connections AAA D O D 3 Party Conference Max 16 conference groups per system 6 Party Max 4 conference groups per system 6 10 Party Conference 10 Party Max 2 conference groups per system groups per system UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 21 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction IPS DM IPS DML System Capacity Cont Capacity Per MC Built in Router Max 1 card per Site DTMF Sender Max 32 circuits per system Attendant Terminal Dterm ATT Position Max 8 per system Max 2 Interface ports RS232 mM en eitace Max 1 interface port IP per system Max 1 Interface port RS232 PS ENARE Max 1 interface port IP per system Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS ACD MIS or OAI Interface Max 1 Interface port per system Remote PIM over IP Number of PIM for Remote i k Sites Note 3 Up to 30 depending on network Authorization Code Forced Account Code Remote Access to System DISA Code Speed Calling Station Station Speed Dial Set 10000 MP built in SMDR Call Record Note 3 1024 Note 1 Each Modular Chassis has 8 Virtual LT Ports that can only be used to expand the PAD ch
13. the date the person last called the voice mail system the number of days the system saves the subscriber s old and archived messages and the access code Extension List Reports Extension list reports show every subscriber on the system with the corresponding extension number ID and the system IDs for any transaction boxes and interview boxes the subscriber owns This report does not include guests For each subscriber the report lists whether call transfer is currently on or off the telephone number that calls will be transferred to the call transfer type the number of times the extension rings call transfer options and whether call holding is on or off Group Reports Group reports provide information about message groups in the system There are three different group reports List of Message Groups lists groups Group Membership lists members of groups and Groups Including Person lists all the message groups of which a subscriber or guest is a member Busy port report The busy ports report shows the total number of times all or selected ports were busy It also shows the average percentage of time the ports were busy during a specific time period The busy port report can be run for all ports on the system or for a selected group of ports UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 21 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Call log The call log provides a record of every call NEAXMail AD 64
14. CCIS This service feature provides the Attendant with a visual indication of incoming and outgoing trunk calls during an attendant to trunk connection within the CCIS network Trunk Group number and trunk identification code are displayed Direct In Termination CCIS This feature automatically routes incoming exchange calls through CCIS to a pre assigned station in the network without Attendant assistance Distinctive Ringing CCIS This feature provides distinctive station ringing patterns for terminated calls through the CCIS network so that a station user can distinguish between incoming internal and external calls Do Not Disturb CCIS This feature allows a station user to establish Do Not Disturb DND status on a temporary basis during which time access to the station from CCIS calls will be denied Dual Hold CCIS This feature allows two connected Multiline Terminals to be placed on hold simultaneously over the CCIS link This enables the held parties to answer or originate a call from a secondary extension or the idle primary extension Elapsed Time Display CCIS This feature provides an LCD which shows the duration of time that a Multiline Terminal is connected to any trunk through the CCIS network Page 9 37 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Flexible Numbering of Stations CCIS This feature allows voice and data station numbers to be assigned to any instrument in the CCIS network based s
15. Chapter 11 Open Application Interface MR Benefits Read your messages even when away from your desk from any Dterm phone set Save valuable operator time because they no longer have to read the message back to the employee Automatically dial call back numbers preventing paper clutter or misdialed numbers Open Worx Short Text Messaging Short Text Messaging STM is a service running on the OpenWorX Server designed to facilitate the delivery of text messages to NEAX Wireless Dterm PSIIl handsets on the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS This is accomplished with either Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP on a Local Area Network LAN or Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol TAP Version 1 8 This application turns your PSIIl handsets into one way internal text pagers in addition to their normal functionality The interface allows for an audible alert when messages arrive Users should be aware that the volume for the text message arrival notice is the same as the ringer volume In addition if the PSIII is set to vibrate it will also vibrate when a text message arrives Messages can be stored for later reading as well as deleted Messages cannot be received while the user is on the phone STM Functionality in an SMTP Environment The STM server can be installed on your enterprise network as an SMTP mail gateway In this configuration users simply send messages up to 128 characters always the limit of text messages no matter what SMTP se
16. Cont Reliability Description Availability co e ae am Years a ma 5849 195 9 10256220 99 999951 s li a IS E eee ee neo TO wre A someon UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 5 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Reliability and Availability Chart Cont Reliability Description MTBE MTBE MTTR Availability DA WHITE DTR 1 4 TEL 1 1 TEL 1359 44180640 99 99 999980 ne CC mo TN moara meo EAN peson m oo AN Page 3 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Mean Time To Repair MTTR The Mean Time To Repair has been studied with the following conditions 1 A mid to high level technical person will attend to the site for the detection of the fault and replacement of the faulty circuit board 2 All critical circuit boards for replacement are stocked at each Fault Dispatch Center FDC 3 All non critical circuit boards for FDCs are stocked at NEC The calculation result of the MTTR is 1 0 hour Reliability Calculations The following information is to show you how to calculate the reliability for the system you are configuring Remember that these calculations are used to determine a partial system outage Reliability Calculation 1 Defect 1 FIT 10 1 FT _i q cx MTBF _ _ 1 000 000 000 Hours Parts Total FITS Total FITS System Cal
17. Feature Compatibility Table Inter Exchange Carrier Network Voice Services and Features UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Compatibility SERVICES AND FEATURES INTER EXCHANGE CARRIERS CALL BY CALL SERVICE AT amp T AT amp T ae MCI SPRINT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 SELECTION 4ESS NET jee NET NET Note1 Noted X Virtual Private Network X X X X X e 900 Service Note2 X X XxX X po Xx _ _ 900 Service Flexible Billing MES 0 o o Y Y o Foreign Exchange FX X Tie Line O AX XK DEDICATED ACCESS AT amp T AT amp T NT MCI SPRINT Basic CallNote1 X Note1 Note Noted X 900 Service Note 2 X X X Xx Xx 900 Service Flexible Billing X X o Y Foreign Exchange FX XxX X X o Xx _ __ Tie Line A xX XxX X _ ZY o_o Y oo AT amp T AT amp T NT MCI SPRINT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 aw B Channel Negotiation X X e poo o Y D Channel Back Up X X X XX X poo o Non Facility Associated Signaling X X X X X S o oo Release Link Trunks X X Feature Available NOT Available Page 15 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN AT amp T AT amp T E MCI SPRINT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 VOICE FEATURES 4ESS NET Doo NET NET IPS 2 A AAA x lt CEN Dee XO
18. Following parameters can be assigned on a Location basis The Location is a kind of group similar to Tenant in a PBX that is defined for bandwidth management and parameter settings for LAN traffic based on the location of IP terminals Maximum 64 Location numbers can be assigned per system Options Per Location Type of Codec selection list DiffServ Operation when over usable Type of Service ToS Setting Area Country bandwidth threshold PAD control pattern IP PAD Group number Jitter buffer 13 14 15 16 17 18 Echo canceller ON OFF Usable Bandwidth AAA When the IP adapter unit is attached with a Dterm Series E Series i terminal other optional adapters except for AD DC adapter unit cannot be attached with the Dterm Series E Series terminal Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP cannot be used to assign an IP address to an MP Login is restricted in following conditions When designating a non existent station number Unregistered is displayed on the LCD When designating a station number that is not assigned to Multiline Terminal Illegal LEN is displayed on the LCD Logout should be allowed by a station class of service If not allowed reorder tone will be heard and Restrict will be displayed on the LCD Intranet to support Quality of Service QoS is preferable to connect IP Stations to reduce the delay of connection and voice and the inferior grade of voice quality IP Stations operate
19. It permits the terminal to be installed to a flat wall surface With this unit any option adapter may be installed to the terminal for high functionality The built in wall mount unit should be used for wall mount operation when no option adapter except ADA U unit is installed on the Multiline terminal Note This unit is designed to enhance the hands free operation of Multiline Terminal by providing an echo canceling circuit However this unit is primarily designed for a typical small office environment and not for conference rooms lts performance should not be compared to commercial expensive audio conference units The HFU U requires an AC adapter Wall Mount Unit for DTP 2DT 1 terminal PC Telephony Adapter The PC Telephony Adapter provides an integration link from a desktop PC to the Dterm Series E telephone Using Microsoft Windows Telephony API Windows applications users can now control or use many of the features desktop message notification calling line identification and calling functions of the Dterm Series E telephone from their PC IP Adapter for Dterm Series E For use with 32 Button Display Terminal and PN 32IPLA ELC station card only Requires either ACA U local power or SN1604 Power Hub 12 Port The IPW 2U P P adapter is a full duplex switch which can be installed on any of the NEC LCD Dterm Series E phones when using Peer to Peer IP stations Requires either ACA U local power or SN1604 Power Hub 12 Port UN
20. MP Card az One card per system Mount on PIMO PZ M606 A ETHER Ethernet Control Card aa Mount on MP card One card per MP e 10BASE T Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX As Cable length Cable between Ethernet required Maximum 100 m 328 ft e 100BASE TX Cable Card and LAN UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 17 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution ACD with MIS Automatic Call Distribution ACD An Automatic Call Distribution ACD feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a prearranged group of stations Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within the group based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time Stations may log on log off from the ACD group Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of agents In addition to basic ACD NEC has a Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2003 Server ACD MIS system CallCenterWorxX ACD MIS that enables a user to efficiently manage a call center NEC offers an Infolink Application QueWorX that provides IVR Internet and Desktop integration for UNIVERGE NEAx 2000 IPS Call Centers Finally Q Master which offers a modular call center environment allowing for more flexible options by choosing just the application needed The MIS system analyses statistical data received from the ACD displays real time activity screens and generates and prints graphs and re
21. Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone within the system or a trunk party to establish a conference among as many as 32 parties It also enables a station user to page a maximum of 31 parties simultaneously excluding the conference leader Three Group Call methods are available Group Call Automatic Conference Group Call Broadcasting and Group Call 2 Way Calling Group Call Automatic Conference This feature enables a station user to establish a conference among as many as 32 parties From a station or Attendant a maximum of 31 stations trunks can be paged simultaneously except the conference leader Group Call Broadcasting This feature enables a station user to page a maximum of 31 parties simultaneously except the group call leader After paged parties answer the leader can speak to the paged parties the paged parties only hear the leader s voice Group Call 2 Way Calling This feature enables a station user to page a maximum of 31 parties simultaneously except the group call leader After one of the paged parties answers paging becomes 2 way calling between the leader and the first answered party and automatically stops paging other parties UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Meet Me Conference This feature enables station users PS Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone within the system Attendants or trunk parties to join a conf
22. Page 13 24 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Remote PIM over IP Remote PIM over IP targets users who have 1 30 relatively small offices that accommodate 10 30 extensions at the Remote Site When UNIVERGE neax IPS DMR or UNIVERGE NEAx 2000 IPS PIM are installed at remote site and connected to an IPS or IPS DM at main site over IP network the Main Site system controls and maintains the Remote PIM operation as one single system If a communication failure occurs between the Main Site and Remote Site the Remote Site automatically changes over to a survival mode and operates as a stand alone system UNIVERGE NEAx IPS DMR IPS Distributed Model Remote with CP31 A C UNIVERGE neEax 2000 IPS IPS PIMMK with CP24 A B C The UNIVERGE neax IPS DMR is designed primarily for distributed IP networking but also supports traditional analog and digital trunks for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN The UNIVERGE neax IPS DMR supports up to 128 peer to peer IP stations and 56 TDM ports in a single modular chassis Up to two chassis can be stacked providing maximum capacity of 112 TDM ports while still supporting as many as 128 peer to peer IP stations Note The MP card at Remote Site has the same system data as the CPU at the Host Site the Host Site automatically downloads system data to the Remote Site at the time of setup In normal operation Main Site au
23. Provisioned by Service x X X x x x x lt Callby CallRequest x x x x xX While All Trunks Busy X x x CPN Sub Address xX X X X xX x Calling Party Name J xX xX xX xX Dialed Number D Service ONIS X X X x X xX Original PN AAA Original OPName AAA Redirecting Number RRA Redirecting Name AAA Redirection Number RARO Redirecti n Name RAR Called Party Sub Address X X X Connected Party Number XX X X xX Connected Party Name x X xX User To User i Message Associated UUI xX X Call Associated TSC xx Non Call Associated TSC_ X x X X X NetworkRingAgain J X X X Customer Group Info Transport X X X Alternate Destination xx x X Feature Available NOT Available Note 1 The use of a Basic Call type of call is unique to NTI in the direct connection to the long distance network This is sometimes referred to by the IEX carriers as Megalink service Note 2 AT amp T and NTI have used different signaling to indicate the 900 service selection The NEAX2000 IVS supports the AT amp T defined signaling UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 13 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN Local Exchange Carrier Network Voice Services and Features UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS C
24. RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS 6 Center office Maximum of eight local offices can be accommodated Maximum of 3 600 calls per hour can be received If the center office exceeds 3600 billing information is stored at local office 7 Local office By predetermined office data local office number of the calling station can be forwarded to the center office and output to the SMDR Incase of using internal SMDR a The billing information cannot be output at local office b When a failure of center office occurs or CCIS link is disconnected the billing information is stored up to 1 024 calls at local office System initializing loses stored information c Maximum of 3 600 calls per hour can be sent to center office tandem office Incase of using APOO a Internal SMDR cannot be used b Maximum of 3 600 calls per hour can be sent to center office tandem office c The billing information can be sent to center office tandem office and at the same time it can be output at local office The billing information can be stored as follows and system initializing does not lose stored information AP00B MRC C AP00B MRC C APOOB MRC F APOOB MRC F without expansion memory up to 800 calls with expansion memory up to 27000 calls without expansion memory up to 1965 calls with expansion memory up to 22925 calls P P 2905p gt gt P P gt gt 8
25. Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Service Conditions on Automatic Program Download 1 For program download the FTP or TFTP server is required 2 This service is available for the IP Enabled Dterm with Peer to Peer connections Terminals with IPELC connections are not supported 3 Maximum of four terminals can be downloaded at the same time regardless of the type of download 4 Firmware version filed in FTP TFTP server is assigned by the system data CMOC YY 00 07 1 02 When the latest firmware version is filed in the server be sure to update the system data 5 When the FTP server is used for program download login from the IP Enabled Dterm with a login name anonymous and password 2000 IPS authentication by FTP server is required 6 Conditions on Program Download at Appointed Time Program Download at Appointed Time service is available by the system data assignment CM15YYY 482 on a station class of service basis By the same command mentioned above program download can be retried just one time When the download results in failure two times in succession the IP Enabled Dterm operates with previous firmware When this service is executed neither Program Download at Login Time nor Program Download for Designated Terminal can be executed PBX system checks the firmware version of each terminal starting from the terminal with the smallest LEN number and executes this service if requir
26. Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Feature Descriptions Feature Description Analog PBX Interface This feature allows the IPS WCS to be integrated with many types of PBXs and to activate various PBS services by sending hook flash signal and DTMF tone This feature allows calls to a Dterm PS IIl which cannot be paged in a predetermined period of time to be routed to the announcement notifying the calling party that the Dterm PS III cannot answer Announcements can be divided between Announcement PS No Answer and Announcement PS Out of Zone depending on the Dterm PS III condition Announcement PS No Answer Announcement PS Out of Zone When a Dterm PS III user engaged in a call moves out of the service area or enters a radio zone where all the channels are busy and the communication becomes unavailable the call will be disconnected automatically and the other party receives reorder tone Automatic Release Out of Zone Calls When a PS is power off or out of zone a call directed to the PS is Call Forwarding forwarded to a VMS and a voice mail message can be recorded to Not Available the VMS and checked from the PS Also the VMS can page the PS automatically after the voice mail message is recorded CCIS Interface This feature allows the IPS WCS to be integrated with NEC PBXs with CCIS interface Without answering incoming calls or hold calls terminates to the Dterm PS III the c
27. Service Conditions 1 The system transfers only DTMF signals to the connected VMS It cannot transfer dial pulses to the system Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal DTMF telephone or the Attendant Console but not from DP telephones When the calling party is connected to the Voice Mail System only DTMF signals can be sent to the VMS for registering a message DP telephones cannot be used Stations can set Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding No Answer and Call Forwarding Busy Line to the VMS The system sends out a mail box number to the VMS Calling a station that has Call Forwarding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS The DTMF signal pause Inter Digit Pause and DTMF signal width of the station number automatically sent out to the VMS from the system are as follows a Pause Variable from 1 second to 12 seconds in 1 second increments b Inter Digit Pause Variable from 32 milliseconds to 240 milliseconds c DTMF signal width Fixed at 64 milliseconds or 128 milliseconds A special number of up to 4 digits including an Inter Digit Pause can automatically be added both before and after to the station number that is sent to the VMS from the system This can be used for a variety of identification codes as required Two types of Inter Digit Pauses can be set per system One is fixed at 1 5 seconds the other is programmable from 1 5 seconds to 16 seconds The VMS can control the M
28. Tandem Office One center office and maximum of seven local offices can be accommodated Maximum of 3 600 calls per hour can be received from local office If the center office exceeds 3600 billing information is stored at local office Maximum of 3 600 calls per hour can be sent to center office Tandem office also can function as a local office UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 9 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Centralized E911 CCIS This feature allows the system to transmit a calling party number to the 911 Emergency system over CCIS tandem connection Galing Party Murtas CHI Service Conditions 1 The Calling Party Information Transferring Service must be provided between calling office and tandem office 2 The calling through CCIS must be Least Cost Routing LCR calling Page 14 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Call Set Up Times Standard tie line networks typically require from two to eight seconds to complete the set up of a call and return ring back tone to the caller With a CCIS network call set up times are much lower averaging from 100 msec to two seconds depending on the number of systems in the network Look Ahead Routing In a standard non CCIS network using tie lines to connect two nodes when a station in nod
29. The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS supports National ISDN 1 and AT amp T 5ESS specifications for Basic Rate Interface Desktop Video Applications From the desktop users can place and receive 128 K video conference calls F E A Desktop Video Desktop Video UNIVERGE NEAX2000 IPS Video Conferencing for large conference rooms or classrooms Using an I MUX to receive 3 BRI ports a bandwidth of 384 kbps is possible This provides good quality video for large conference rooms Se ee Ly Video CODEC f Page 15 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN ISDN Data Modems ISDN Data Modems will provide users with access to the Internet at speeds of 64 or 128 kbps ISDN modems can place and receive ISDN calls at 56 64 and 128 kbps Data calls within the PBX or external using ISDN PRI can greatly increase the user s productivity by using the higher rates of ISDN BRI NEC America has successfully tested the IBM Waverunner series of ISDN modems Group four Fax Fax machines capable of G4 can send faxes at speeds of 56 kbps using ISDN BRI System Requirements BRI stations within the IPS can place calls to other BRI stations or outside the PBX by using ISDN PRI lines to the public network Each IPS system can support up to 24 BRI Terminal ports The PN 2ILCA card is used for to connect
30. Two transferring destination number can be designated per tenant in system data programming This feature can be used together with the Caller ID Display feature UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Call Transfer This feature permits a station user to transfer a call to another station in the system directly or with assistance from the attendant Call Transfer All Calls This feature permits a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing calls to another station within the system without attendant assistance Call Transfer Attendant This feature permits a station user while connected to an internal or outside call to signal the Attendant and have the Attendant transfer the call to another station within the system or to an outside connection Caller ID Class This feature receives the calling subscriber s name and number sent from a public network using a MODEM signal and displays the name or number on an LCD of a Multiline Terminal and Attendant Console Caller ID Display Without answering incoming calls or held calls which terminate to the line keys of a Multiline Terminal the calling party s information can be confirmed by the indications on the LCD Caller ID Station This feature enables a user to connect an analog telephone with Caller ID display function and provides the calling party s number and name on the display without answering
31. additional memory capacity as shown below Note2 Each CFIC reduces system trunk capacity by 32 No EXPMEM With EXPMEM Type of Local Office of Center Office Centralized Center Office PN AP00 B Centralized of Centralized Billing CCIS of Centralized Billing CCIS Billing CCIS is Stand alone is Billing CCIS is Stand alone is Provided Provided Provided Provided Local Office of Rae ee 800 27000 Call Record for CIS is not provided program 26000 Call Record for CIS is provided PN APOO B with MRC F 23580 22925 program UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 4 7 Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Line Trunk LT Cards The following table shows a summary of the Line Trunk LT cards for UN VERGE NEAX 2000 IPS The LT cards may be installed in slot 00 to 11 of PIM 0 7 with the following conditions Line Trunk LT Cards Function Name Pon emarks Analog Station 8 Line Analog Station Card Message Waiting Control 8 circuits Momentary Open 8 circuits Loop Resistance Max 600ohms including telephone set PN 8LCAA 8 Line Analog Station Card Caller ID for Analog Station PN 8LCAD Loop Resistance Max 600 ohms Message Waiting Lamp control Momentary Open for each circuit 8 Line Analog Station Card Momentary Open 8 circuits Message pice Waiting notification via Stutter Dial Tone only Loop Resistance Max 600 ohms 4 Line Analog Station Card with MW Lamp PN 4LC
32. billing information cannot be recorded 0 The Visitor PS can allow following service features ae Originating a call to a station of the same office Originating a call to a station of the different office Terminating a call from a roaming trunk PS Exclusive Hold Call Forwarding 11 The visitor PS cannot allow Calling Name Display 12 Maximum 64 Visitor PSs can originate or receive a call in a network at the same time 13 The Visitor PS can answer a call only from the roaming trunk 14 Billing of Visitor PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number 15 Billing information for the Visitor PS can be recorded only when the Visitor PS originates a call UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 5 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Wireless Definitions Virtual Station Individual PS number Network ID method Visitor PBX Visitor PS Home PBX Home PBX ID Home PS Roaming number HLR VLR Page 16 6 Virtual Station exists only on the system data provided via non hardware supported LEN The Virtual station must be assigned by the system data programming for operating Home PSs and Visitor PSs used for Roaming Individual PS number is assigned to a PS to identify the PS on the Roaming network It must be a unique number in the network Network ID method is one method to operate Roaming A Roaming PS must have two SYS ID on the Network ID method One is main SYS ID for
33. diskette drive CD ROM drive Mouse Valid NEAX hardware connection direct serial modem or TCP IP Page 8 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 8 System Administration System Diagnostics When a fault occurs in the system an audible and visual indication will be given at the following units External alarm indicating unit Fault messages reported at MAT Worx for remote reporting Alarm lamps in front of each package mounted in the frame Self Diagnostic System Messages The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a sophisticated array of self diagnostic routines that are continually and automatically being performed Various system messages are printed when a fault occurs in a central processor system switch network processors Many other miscellaneous system messages and change of key status messages are also printed Remote Maintenance This feature allows station and trunk changes or reassignments to be performed without a site visit by service personnel and can be used to retrieve fault codes prior to visiting a site One Remote Maintenance center can service an unlimited amount of systems thus reducing the amount of personnel to maintain each site travel costs and customer billing for each site Service Conditions 1 The following additional equipment is required for this feature A modem at the maintenance center and one at each remote site When the internal modem o
34. e gt Dh ib lO Page 3 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 IP PAD Calculation __ Number of extensions 120 200 208 264 Legacy Number of PAD Ports 23 34 0 MumberoriP PAD Cris 1 2 2 Legacy 34 10 Numerot P PAD Cards 1 2 2 Legacy NumberolPAD Pons 2 tat 2 alar 20 Number of IP PAD Cards Chapter 3 System Highlights 300 320 376 432 48 2 27 2 2 2 44 AMARA 2 2 2 2 Number of PAD Ports 41 30 Number of IP PAD Cards Number of PAD Ports 40 Number of IP PAD Cards a Number of PAD Ports 50 Number of IP PAD Cards Legacy 15 Number of IP PAD Cards Legacy 80 Legacy 88 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Legacy Ez cor Number of P PAD cards 1 1 1 Legacy 20 a fia ft 34 37 HERNEN 30 34 35 HUA DEGENE 1 2 27 a a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Number of PAD Ports 19 Number of IP PAD Cards Number of PAD Ports A io Number of IP PAD Cards Calar Legacy Number of PAD Ports ee A T 95 NumberofIP PAD Cars 1 1 1 Legacy Number of PAD Pots 8 41 14 OANTTITITEN EEE EE Ae CEE aa 14 14 16 18 ad 1 1 Page 3 15 Chapter 3 System Highlights System Specifications AC Power Requirements Specifications AC Input Voltage 90 to 132Vac or 180 to 264Vac 47 to 64Hz AC
35. exceeded incoming callers are connected to busy tone Silent Monitor UCD This feature provides the UCD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to a UCD agent The silent monitor function gives no indication as an option to either the agent or the calling party Uniform Numbering Plan UNP Voice and Data In the numbering plan for a network to be configured through the use of Tie Lines a Uniform Numbering Plan UNP is employed When UNP is employed a station user from any PBX within the network can call a desired party by using a uniform dialing method based on the UNP Variable Timing Parameters This feature gives the IPS the versatility to change timing duration using the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or the Customer Administration Terminal CAT All timing parameters are set initially in the Resident System Program These timing parameters can be changed according to the customer s requirements Page 9 32 Voice Guide This feature provides a station user with an announcement that informs 1 The result of the operation when the station user set or canceled the service feature instead of service set tone 2 Which service has been set to the station such as Call Forwarding All Calls Do Not Disturb or Message Waiting when the station goes off hook instead of special dial tone Voice Mail Integration This feature is used to interface the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS with a locally pro
36. first in first out thereby eliminating unnecessary delays UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Call Splitting This feature allows the Attendant to confer privately with one party on an Attendant handled connection without the other party overhearing Call Waiting Display This feature provides a visual indication to the Attendant when one or more calls are waiting to be answered Common Route Indial This feature allows assignment of incoming DID calls to different Attendant Call Selection keys based on the last 4 digits dialed into the system Up to eight individual Listed Directory Numbers can be assigned in system programming When an incoming call to any of these trunks is received an Attendant Call Selection key will flash and the LCD display will indicate the Listed Directory Number associated with that trunk route Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS This feature provides a display of the company name on the Attendant Console when the Attendant has answered a Listed Directory Number or a Tie Line call Incoming Call Identification Incoming calls are identified by various means Refer to Attendant Called Calling Number Attendant Call Selection Attendant Source Key Attendant Listed Directory Number and Common Route Indial Features and Specifications Individual Trunk Access The Attendant Console is provided with the ability to access each indiv
37. have the Return Schedule displayed on a calling Multiline Terminal with a Liquid Crystal Display LCD during his absence Room Cutoff This feature allows the Attendant Console Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument or Property Management System PMS terminal or guest room telephones using a special access code to temporarily restrict guest room telephones from making unauthorized calls when guests are away from their room and when rooms are in Check Out status Room Status This feature provides the Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument with a visual display of the guest s room status A supplementary print out individual and summary can be provided Route Advance This feature automatically routes outgoing calls over alternate facilities when the first choice trunk group is busy Users select the first choice route by dialing the corresponding access code and the equipment then advances through alternate trunk groups only if the first choice is busy UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Save and Repeat This feature allows a Multiline Terminal to save a specific dialed number and then redial that number at a later time Security Alarm This feature provides an indication on the Attendant Console when a contact closure occurs Set Relocation This feature enables two stations to be moved from one location to another without reprogramming station
38. kbps 6 3 kbps is available for those connections The CCIS Networking via IP provides users with all TDM based CCIS functionality such as feature transparency centralized management and centralized facilities There are two types of connections available for CCIS Networking via IP Page 13 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP CCIS Networking via IP Peer to Peer Connections Basis When the distant systems are 2000 IPS the systems are connected on a peer to peer basis The CCIS call control signals are transmitted between the built in IP trunks CCIS Handler CCH on the MP card over the Local Area Networks and Wide Area Networks LAN and WAN For connections between IP Enabled Dterm terminals voice signals are also transmitted over the LAN and WAN For connections between legacy terminals voice signals are transmitted via IP PADs This connection is also available when the distant systems are 2400 IPX that supports peer to peer connections OD DPS Protocol cathe e Protocol estos Protocol PROTIMS E CCIS PROTIMS IP PAD Intranet pa lel Ma nel Fa j t i A a E amaf j IF Enabled D IP Enabled DA Example IP Enabled Terminals Peer to Peer Connection SLT D TDSwW TRS sn LE DLC i TLAN Intranet a o De rr Example IP between Legacy Terminals via Peer to
39. modem SLT etc also a second voice channel to permit calls from the Multiline Terminal and devices installed to the APR U simultaneously The APR U requires an AC adapter APR U Note 1 When a modem is installed to the Multiline Terminal with the APR U the modem and the Multiline Terminal handset speakerphone and headset cannot be used simultaneously Note 2 Dual voice channel capability is available and special programming may be required from the NEC PBX KTS systems to support two simultaneous voice channels Computer TAP ADAPTER Unit CTA U The Computer TAPI Adapter Unit CTA U permits connecting a Dterm Series E multilane terminal to a PC Each CTA U unit is shipped with Multiline Phone Kits software a complete turnkey package offering a graphical telephone user interface and call logging CTA U UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 11 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Series E Accessories amp Adapters Cont PC Telephony Adapter IPW 2U ELC IPW 2U P P Page 5 12 AC Adapter Unit ACA U The AC adapter provides the Dterm Series E terminal with the voltage required to power the built in long loop adapter and APR units One AC adapter can power up to three optional adapters External Wall Mount Unit WMU U The External Wall mount Unit is ONLY required if an option adapter is required on the Multiline terminal which is being mounted on a wall
40. unused pairs or o Direct powering with external wall plug adapter PBX System Requirements NEAX 2000 IPS R6 1or higher IP PAD Card 8 Seat Licenses Supports up to 8 INASET terminals UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 19 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm PS Ill Wireless Handset The Dterm PSIIl is a wireless handset designed to support the professional s schedule and the special needs of people on the run At less than 3 80z and with 300 hours of standby time the Personal Station continues to offer the size weight and battery life demanded by the user constantly on the go The phone uses digital technology with audio quality approaching that of a digital desk phone The new DtermPSlIl wireless handset moves freely throughout the building with seamless handover when moving from one zone transceiver to another Note Dterm PS III Features e Separate Call Hold amp Transfer keys e Name Display e Last Number Redial 2 Line Operation Directory Dial e Automatic Answer O e Enhanced Short Text Message STM e Speed Dial e Vibration Alert e Reminder tones for unread STM e 4 Line 18 digit LCD Display A Dterm PS Ill OPTIONS Standard Charger for the Dterm PSIII handset Single AC adapter is included There are three cases available for Dterm PSIII Two types of Leather Case provide a Glove like fit for ease of handling and are designed for indoor use One includes a swivel belt
41. 0 138 0 161 0 194 0 242 0 323 28 COT 0 069 0 081 0 097 0 121 0 162 32 COT 0 082 0 096 0 115 0 144 0 191 3841 40 COT 0 108 0 126 0 151 0 189 0 252 44 COT 0 121 0 141 0 169 0 212 0 282 48 COT 0 134 0 157 0 188 0 235 0 313 64 COT 0 188 0 220 0 264 0 329 0 439 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Page 3 11 Chapter 3 System Highlights PEG Count The PEG counter is used for maintenance purposes to verify various data in the system PEG counters can be set by system programming to start and stop by month day hour and minute A system reset will clear all PEG count data The following data can be measured by PEG count Trunk PEG Count Number of outgoing trunk seizure by Trunk Route Number of tandem connections established Number of times a busy station was encountered Number of all types of calls to Attendant Console Number of connections giving Dial Tone Number of station to station connections established Number of failures caused by all senders being busy Number of failures caused by all registers being busy Number of failures caused by all ringing trunks being busy Number of failures caused by all IP PAD channels being Number of forced release of communication between station and Trunk Tandem connection Number of call forwarding caused by the calling number is not informed from network Number of rejection of the incoming call the calling is not i
42. 2 color LED Line keys eleven Function Keys built in Speakerphone headset jack wall mount unit 24 character by 3 line display four soft keys Large LED Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand ATTENDANT ADD ON CONSOLE Requires an AC R ADP included Fully modular with 48 programmable 2 color LED keys for station trunk appearances 12 Function keys with red LED and tilt stand Terminal available in black BK or white WH 16 LCD DESI LESS ADD ON MODULE available in black BK or white WH Provides Speed dial directory and one touch speed dial Page 5 5 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Standard features Adjustable Base Built in Wall Mount Unit Four Local Soft Key Controls detail functions are dependent on PBX only provided on terminals with display Built in Half Duplex Hands free Unit Large Message Waiting LED 24 Character 3 Line LCD on display equipped models Built in Headset Jack Connector Note Speed Dial DSS Buttons Programmable Line Keys with 2 Color LED Eleven Dedicated Function Keys Feature Recall Conf Redial Hold Transfer Answer Speaker MIC Directory and Message Note Ringing Sound Variation LCD indication of volume control FCC Part 15 Class B Approved Replaceable Function Dial Key pad o Used for foreign languages ACD instruments etc Un tangler compatible handset The Directory card can swivel 360 Note DTR 4D 1 does not include he
43. 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS family consists of the IPS IPS DM IPS DML and IPS DMR These UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 Internet Protocol Servers fuse existing NEC technologies with dynamic advancements in hardware and software to satisfy the most stringent system requirements NEC s modular design sensible migration comprehensive network solutions and the ability to customize functionality to match specific business applications are just a few of the NEC benchmarks that the new IPS builds upon UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS users have access to hundreds of service features that enhance productivity reduce operating costs and improve communications efficiently The innovative modular hardware and software design allows efficient effective growth within each module from its minimum to its maximum configuration This is achieved by a unique building block architecture allowing growth without the loss of existing hardware or software Voice and Data Switching The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS systems support advanced applications such as Tandem Networking Centralized Attendant Service Direct Digital Interface and other voice features The system s non blocking architecture and distributed processor control hierarchy are designed to support the traffic and control the load generated by voice and data switching Station users may perform simultaneous voice and data transmissio
44. 3 all 5 Volt 5 one 5 Volt 8 Four 3 3 Volt Chassis Style Rack Mount Not Available Optional Maximum Voice Port 16 Analog 16 Digital 72 Analog or 64Digital Capacity Size s 6 x 36GB PCI Redundant Power N A Standard Supplies UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 9 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems NEAXMail AD 64 The NEAXMail AD 64 voice unified messaging system offers a powerful centralized message solution to meet the communications needs of your business You can manage your communications over the telephone or from your personal computer PC using the Microsoft Outlook Lotus Notes and GroupWise Inbox The NEAXMail AD 64 offers advanced unified messaging voice mail and automated attendant functionality helping your organization become more responsive than ever Through its suite of unified messaging and desktop call management applications NEAXMail AD 64 provides you with one of the most complete unified communications solution available These unified communication applications integrate the NEAXMail AD 64 with your Local Area Network LAN to give you control over live telephone traffic and messages voice fax and e mail all from your desktop PC The ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging module for example works with Microsoft Exchange to allow you to access your messages from one familiar inbox ViewMail for Lotus Notes and ViewMail for GroupW
45. A 1504 1502 A O O NEC Number Emerad Page 7 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position BAS Benefits Centralized company database that can link and replicate with other databases including AIMWorx Sound playback and recordings on the operator telephone Provides operators with the ability to do more than answer the phone since the client resides on a PC Meet me paging to enhance operator productivity Unlimited global parked calls Different greetings displays available for DID calls to the operator which is especially useful in a multi tenant environment Single key call processing Directory dialing for accuracy Look ahead status from the directory that saves time key strokes and enhances decision making Sort and searchable directory by key fields Configurable screens for each operator Time stamped recordings with caller ID and optional note field that can be saved permanently or used for sampling quality Queue types allowing flexibility to answer certain call types first if so desired Configurable information about the caller is displayed upon answering the call allowing personalized service MAPI compliant e mail integration Ability to set cancel call forwarding and DND for other phones within the business Delay announcements capabilities to ensure callers are informed and provided other options during busy ca
46. CCIS Note Live Record Over CCIS is not supported to a NEAX 2400 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 17 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS System Capacity System Capacity for CCIS with Digital Interface Capacity ae Po Capacity pestle 24D11 30DTI 24CCT 30CCT DTI Card CCH Card 8 8 Trunks forDTl_____________ 12 28 _ CCIS Routes 8 8 8 8 Trunks per DTI Card 24 3a CCT Card S O eB EC Trunksfor CCT 20 248 Trunks per CCT Card 23 32 System Capacity for CCIS with Analog Interface CCH Card RAI System Capacity for CCIS Networking via IP o Description Capacity CCIS Trunks IP Trunk Peer to Peer CCIS via IP non Peer to Peer SPN IPTB A CCIS via IP Peer to Peer SPN BIPLAIPPAD C 8 O 8 Page 14 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Required Equipment Required Equipment for Digital CCIS EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL FUNCTION NAME NAME PN 24CCTA CCIS 1 5 Mbps Trunk Card Provides a built in Common Channel Handler CCH of CCIS PN 24DTA C DTI T1 Digital Trunk Interface 1 5 Mbps Card Accommodates 24 channel PCM digital lines PN 30DTC C DTI E1 Digital Trunk Interface 2 Mbps Card Accommodates 30 channel PCM digital lines PN SC00 CCH Common Channel H
47. CCIS Features Descriptions Attendant Camp On with Tone Indication CCIS This feature permits the Attendant when the desired station at another switching office is busy to hold an in coming call in a special waiting mode A distinctive Camp On tone is sent to the busy station when the Attendant sets Camp On When that station becomes idle it is automatically rung and connected to the waiting trunk party Attendant Controlled Conference CCIS This feature permits an Attendant 2400 IPX to establish a conference through CCIS with up to eight parties of stations and or trunks inside and outside parties Automatic Recall CCIS This service feature works as a time reminder When an Attendant handled call through CCIS remains on hold camped on or ringing unanswered for a fixed interval the Attendant is automatically alerted Brokerage Hot Line CCIS This feature provides a ringdown connection between two stations each using a Multiline Terminal in different offices in the CCIS network Busy Lamp Field BLF CCIS This feature provides a busy status indication of the predetermined stations within the CCIS network The visual indication is provided with a red LED associated with each DSS button on the DSS BLF Console and Multiline Terminal Pressing the DSS button allows a direct access to the preprogrammed station within the CCIS network UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide
48. Callers are then prompted to select the appropriate destination from a list reducing wait times and connecting customers to the correct agents Multi language Capability record each queue announcement in multiple languages The language played to the caller is determined by the inbound number they dialed the menu option they selected or their calling line ID Audiotext pre recorded information menus provide answers to commonly asked questions Audiotext saves valuable agent time that could be more effectively spent handling callers with complex queries Customer Query identify callers based on their calling line ID or their response to an automated query such as please enter your customer number and use this information to play customized messages direct the call to a specific agent or escalate their priority within the queue UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 11 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Agent Desktop Q Desktop As the importance of contact centers increases so does the need to monitor operational parameters Q Desktop lets managers and agents view real time information on queue and agent performance across all contact media whether phone email or the web providing supervisors and agents with the tools for making the right decisions at the right time Agents have access to a wide range of contact center functionality directly from their PC des
49. Code Forced Account Code Remote 3000 Access to aad Message Reminder Set Reminder Set a Name Display Guest Name Display Speed Calling Station Station Speed Dial Set aaa MP built in SMDR Call Record 1024 Note Remote PIM networks using the IPS DML as the main are not supported UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 23 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction IPS DMR Capacity Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS Capacity Per MC A q 2 CC e cs Si No No of ports No of ports Max 256 ports per network AP card Modas 7 J u IP PAD No of channel Single Line Telephone Lines Standard Dterm Lines DtermlP DtermIP INASET Peer to Peer Connection Note 2 Central Office Trunk Lines DID w 4DID 2W 4W E amp M CI EA A SPA IA IC ISDN IPS PIMMJ As Remote PIM Capacit Number of PHYSICAL PIMS Capacity Per PIM No ofcards 8 16 No of ports Max 256 ports per network AP card Motas J 2 ae Single Line Telephone Lines A Dterm Lines l DtermlP DtermIP INASET Peer to Peer Connection Note 2 Central Office Trunk Lines DID w 4DID o 4 amp 8 G Wi EBM a e A EAS ISDN SORT Cord oe p n Note 1 Each Modular Chassis has 24 Virtual LT Ports that can only be used to expand the PAD channels from 8 to 32 using the 8IPLA w 24IPLA Note 2 Remote PIM s Support up to 2 Virtual PIM s for assignment of DtermIP DtermIP INASET only Page 1 24 UNIVERGE NEAX
50. Cutoff Console This feature allows a DCU 60 1 unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Room Cutoff Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console The Room Cutoff status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Terminal user can set cancel Room Cutoff to another station using the Room Cutoff Console Wake Up No Answer Console This feature allows a DCU 60 1 unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Wake Up No Answer WU Console This feature is activated by a function mode key on a DSS BLF Console The No Answer status for each station is indicated by a flashing green LED associated with each button Distinctive Ringing This feature provides Distinctive Ringing patterns to the station so that the station user can distinguish between internal and external incoming calls This feature also enables the LED associated with the line key of the Multiline Terminal to flash in two colors according to the kind of incoming call Page 9 18 Do Not Disturb This feature restricts incoming calls to a station and can be set by an individual station or from the Attendant Console Placing a station in Do Not Disturb DND does not prevent a station from originating a voice or data call or from receiving a data call This feature also allows a station to ensure privacy from telephone interruptions while on an outg
51. DSS BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Message Waiting MW Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console The Message Waiting status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Terminal user can set reset MW status using the MW Console The MW Console only displays cancels the set status for those stations to whom Message Wait was set by the station user of the MW Console If the system is initialized reset the Console function mode will return to DSS BLF UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 17 9 Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Property Management System PMS The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a data interface to a customer supplied Property Management System PMS accommodating Hotel Management Features The PMS Model 60 only can be any computer connected to the PBX via a RS 232C Interface It communicates with the PBX using the specified protocols The Data Link Interface allows the PMS to accommodate both front and back office Hotel Management Features by providing a means of communication between the PMS and the PBX for features such as Check In Check Out Message Waiting Station Message Detail Data and control features such as Do Not Disturb and Room Cutoff The PMS can communicate with the PBX to obtain the following information 1 Maid Status This i
52. Ee ee ee eee eer ee 8 Systems PSCIICATIONS a 16 System Compliance 2 s 23 Chapter 4 Equipment Lis Lariam A A ens ecto A da 1 Module lnstallation Hardware coccion id ri didas 1 CIRCUIT CA Sia il 3 Chapter 5 Statlon EQUID MON E arras 1 Termnal UNS UD nia dio 1 Analog eMail 2 Diem Seres ir Terminal A d 3 Dterm Series i TDM Multi line Digital Terminals cooocccoccccccccocncocnncccnconnnconnnnncnnnnncnncnnnnnnonononons 5 Dterm Series E Multi line Digital Terminals occoocccconccocnccccococncccnonoconoononnnnonononannnnnnonanonaninenons 8 Dterm Cordless Terminals iii a A A is 15 INASE Dats tac he caters sio a er 18 Dier PSUs Handset siria 20 DIETS PSO SONANDO A ia 21 DIS mM EXTON GSI Si A crooaa 26 Ghapter o TrUNKIN O ai A AER 1 TYPEOF T AK See A II S 1 Tunk Gard SPECICATION Scan did 2 System URUK ING GAD ACI aerie a E E E NE E A eet ead 6 Least COSCROUUDO EGR anson e oli 8 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position iia is 1 Attendant Console CONT 10 a a E a oi 1 Business Attendant System BAS usina di id isa 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page i Issue 6 Chapter 8 System AdmMmiNniStratiOn sssrin e aA aa 1 System Administra lO serosa 1 Customer Administration Terminal GAN asias er 1 Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT cc ccccceccceeceeececeeeesececeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeseueeseesseeeseeesanees 2 SAS A te tater he tater ead pet teat at acacene
53. Functionality The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Main Processor MP is a heart of pure IP connections and TDM based connections The MP employs a high speed CPU which is equivalent with Pentium With this processing power and System On Chip SOC technology the MP integrates Device Registration Server DRS AP01 OAI functions which are provided by an additional card in the previous IVS Also by means of today s advanced LSI technology the MP card size is minimized and On board Ethernet Interface Card is mounted on MP without using an additional slot space in PIM This interface card is linked with LAN for call control processing of DtermIP and inter work with MATWorX and OAI server RS 232C interface Authorization Code service and FLF facility are deleted Application Processors The processing architecture of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS allows the system to be configured with Application Processors that provide processing capacity for a specific application or multiple applications These EPROM based processors support applications such as ACD Processor for call center applications SMDR for call accounting Hotel Processor for Hospitality applications Message Center Interface MCI Open Applications Interface OAI which connects to external computing devices to support a wide range of host computer supported features These application processors provide the power and flexibility to meet specific users applications and traffic nee
54. Home PBX and another is Network ID for Roaming network The Network ID is used to define whether the PS can operate under the control of PBXs on the Roaming network The network ID must be the same for all PBXs within the same network When a PS leaves control of a PBX to which it belongs originally and is operating in a zone of another PBX the PBX is called Visitor PBX When a PS leaves control of a PBX to which it belongs originally and is operating in a zone of another PBX the PS is called Visitor PS Home PBX is a PBX to which a PS ordinarily belongs Home PBX ID is a unique number to identify the PBX on the Roaming network When a PS operates under control of a PBX to which the PS originally belongs the PS is called Home PS Roaming number is assigned to a Visitor PS temporarily when the PS is roaming to a Visitor PBX The actual Roaming number is Virtual station number assigned as a pilot station of Station Hunting group on the Visitor PBX Home Location Register A database to store the location registration data of the Home PS Visitor Location Register A database to store the location registration data of the Visitor PS temporarily when the Visitor PS is in the zone of another PBX UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Wireless Short Text Message Notification OAI This feature enables a Short Text Message hereafter STM
55. Input Current 3 5A at 100V 2 0A at 200V AC Power Consumption Thermal Output Maximum Battery Requirements 260AH per 4 PIM 65AH 12V x 8 24V 3 4AH 12V x 2 approx 30min backup Physical Size of Built in Battery one 12V battery 133 W x 60 H x 67 D mm Operating Environment Description _ Specifications Ambient Temperature 0 to 40 Celsius Relative Humidity Max 90 non condensing Electrical Characteristics Central Office Trunk Specifications Insulation Resistance 15 mega ohms or more at 100Vdc DC Resistance On hook conditions 30 mega ohms Off hook conditions 1 700 ohms On hook conditions 20 kilo ohms 300 to 3 400Hz Impedance 8 kilo ohms at 24 Hz Looped conditions 600 ohms Leak Current Page 3 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Transmission Characteristics For TDM Circuits Description Specifications PCM Coding System Insertion Loss Return Loss Longitudinal Balance Attenuation Frequency Distortion Group Delay Distortion Total Distortion Idle Channel Noise 67 dBmop or less psophometric noise 50 dBm0 or less single frequency noise Impulsive Noise 0 counts at 35 dBm Cross Talk Attenuation 90 dB or more 90 dB or more o o O Inter modulation Products 40 dB or more Spurious In Band Signals 49 dBm0 or less Signal Attenuation Attenuation rate 12 dB per octave or more a
56. Line Dterm Series E Digital 2 Line Hotel Motel Attendant Console SN716 DESKCON House Phone Analog Single Line Dterm Series E Series i Digital Terminal Administration Phone Analog Single Lines Dterm Series E Series i Digital Terminal Page 17 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting AIMWorx NEC s Applications Integration Manager or AIM WorX is an application suite of management software based on a call accounting foundation It provides an easy way to cost calls with a variety of features to use this information AIMWorX has a wide range of predefined administrative reports and gives you the ability to create your own AIM WorX first gathers Station Message Detail Records SMDR from the switch This data stream is sent each time a call is completed It contains data about the call including trunk and route information phone numbers of where the call was placed from and where it went to what time it started and ended and variable information that may include authorization codes account codes or office codes AIMWorX costs each record using costing data that you have defined to create Call Detail Records CDR These records provide the data to run queries and reports AIM WorX supports many Single Point of Entry SPE plug in modules and add on applications Single Point of Entry modules share AIM WorX databases allowing user information to be entered once for
57. MS Access or MS Excel formats Configuration of trunk group data and holiday calendar performed by single point and click interface System Data configuration allows the ACD to be customized for specific features including Info link and MIS message generation debugging tools and phone set operation Trace Client view provides the ability to see ACD call processing on screen Call Control Vector CCV programming diagnostics allow the call flow to be monitored in real time aiding in the design or re engineering of call center installations A Windows event viewer provides access to critical ACD event messages such as ACD state changes and helps technicians identify other critical events such as an inability to connect to the PBX or indicating that the system security key is not attached UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 5 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS CallCenter WorX MIS The CallCenterWorX Management Information System MIS 3 0 offers call center managers access to the most important real time and historical data available for workgroups With this tool you are able to maximize agent productivity and assure quality performance in handling the incoming and outgoing call volume of the center CallCenterWorX MIS has a menu driven user interface All of the menus show a list of choices available under a particular topic Each choice is preceded by a number which is enter
58. Max 15 m 49 2 ft between PBX and PMS without modem Note 2 10 bits 1 start 7 data 1 parity 1 stop or 11 bits 1 start 7 data 1 ied stop Parity VRC i ll even parity odd parity selected by PBX system Parity LRC Exclusive OR of message text Frame Contents US ASCII 7 bit codes Bren edende Primary office PBX y gt eq Secondary office PMS Note 1 For the Port 1 and Port 3 data speed 9600 bps cannot be used Note 2 When modems are used full duplex asynchronous type modems are required Interface Distance Word Framing Built in PMS over IP tem Description Application Port Number 60050 Fixed Number of Connections l Server PBX Client Server Client PMS Frame Contents US ASCII 7 bit codes Pseudo Normal Restriction 1 At connection release Condition 2 Status monitoring text UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 10 9 Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces Service Conditions 1 Only one Interface Port can be provided for PMS 2 The system sends information relating to the following features to the PMS upon request from the PMS Do Not Disturb Room Cut off 3 The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS system can support PMS Model 60 via APOO B or PMS Model 90 120 via TCP IP connection 4 The APOO B with MRC F program is used for Executed task Print out Request for MP Built in PMS Hardware Required for PMS Qt ooo Remarks gt SPN CP24 C MP U
59. NEAX 2400 IPX NEC continues to focus its activities on the integration of computers and communications NEC research and development production marketing and service based on this integration positioned it to meet diversifying needs in worldwide markets Worldwide Leadership NEC is committed to the linking people and information through technology with over 15 000 different products distributed worldwide Innovative award winning products featured in top publications form the foundation for NEC s leadership in these high tech industries Components NEC is the world leader in integrated components with billions of dollars in annual sales NEC provides major processors and component chips to other leading manufacturers of communications computers and electronic equipment Very Large Scale Integrated VLSI memories Micro and Mini computers Application Specific Integrated Circuits ASIC Semiconductors A broad spectrum of other electronic components UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 3 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Communications NEC is one of the world s top suppliers in the production and distribution of communications equipment With billions of dollars in sales NEC is not the largest manufacturer of communications products but offers the broadest spectrum of products and a demonstrated commitment to the total integration and networking of those products Teleph
60. NEC s premier flagship product the NEAX 2400 IMS In 1983 NEC introduced the NEAX 2400 IMS In 1983 NEC introduced one of the world s first super computers In 1985 NEC introduced the Electra IMS In 1986 NEC created one of the first 4MBit processor chips In 1988 NEC opened the Software Development Center in the U S market In 1989 NEC introduced the NEAX1400 IMS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction The Information Age Once again NEC is delivering powerful communications systems Systems that interface today s computers and telephones deliver a broad spectrum of integrated answers to today s modern communication challenges In 1993 NEC introduced the world s first 64M DRAM samples In 1993 NEC introduced the NEAX 2400 ICS In 1994 NEC introduced the NEAX 2000 IVS In 1997 NEC introduced the NEAX 1000 IVS In 1998 NEC introduced the NEAX 2400 IMX In 1999 NEC introduced the NEAX 2000 IVS In 1999 NEC introduced the NEAX EXPRESS In 2000 NEC introduced the NEAX 2400 IPX In 2001 NEC introduced the NEAX 2000 IPS In 2002 NEC introduced the NEAX 2000 IPS DM In 2002 NEC introduced the NEAX 2400 IPXi In 2003 NEC introduced the NEAX 2000 IPS DMR In 2004 NEC introduced the UNIVERGE SV7000 In 2005 NEC introduced the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS In 2005 NEC introduced the UNIVERGE NEAx 2000 IPS DML In 2005 NEC introduced the UNIVERGE
61. PAD C 8IPLA IP PAD C 153154 2 FP IP Interface Card for IP PADwWCT A laiia 241PLA ce 1 8IPLA Expansion Internet Protocol Line Circuit for IP PAD w VCT Connectable combinations between facsimile stations are shown below Connectable Combinations source via Destination _ IPS FAX station IPS FAX station Station to Station connection IPS FAX station Peer to Peer CCIS IPS FAX station MA IPS FAX station Peer to Peer CCIS IPS DM FAX station Co IPS FAX station Peer to Peer Local IPS DMR FAX Station to Station connection station PIM over IP IPS FAX station Peer to Peer CCIS IPX FAX station IPS FAX station Peer to Peer CCIS IPX MC FAX station Opposite Office 2000 IPS 32IPLA IP 32IPLA IP 32IPLA IP Opposite Office SIPLA IP SIPLAIP 32IPLAIP PAD E PAD E PAD C 2400 MC PAD B PAD A PAD E 16VCTAA IP 16VCTAA IP 16VCTAA IP PAD B PAD A PAD A SIPLA G 711 G 711 e ura em oa NA N A 6 711 SIPLA IP PAD A G 711 G 711 G 711 G 711 EE N A G 711 QD 32IPLA EE papel 971 G 711 G 711 G 711 N A G 711 32IPLA q IP PAD E G711 S711 G 711 En T 30 T 30 an 16VCTAA G 726 0 ees T 30 IP PAD B 5 32IPLA IP PAD E E 16VCTAA N A T 30 T 30 6 IP PAD A 32IPLA IP PAD C CTAA N A T 30 T 30 IP PAD A UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 23 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Required bandwidth for FAX Connection e
62. Reference Guide Page 2 11 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture IPS DMR Modular Chassis MC There are 2 types of MODULAR CHASSIS Physical MODULAR CHASSIS and Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS The Physical MODULAR CHASSIS is a hardware MODULAR CHASSIS and is used to accommodate an MP IP PADs legacy LT AP cards and power supply units The IPS DMR can consist of one or two MODULAR CHASSIS depending on the system configuration The Physical MODULAR CHASSIS provides 56 LT ports in hardware slots and provides 64 ports in software port allocation 56LT ports and 8 virtual ports The Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS is a software MODULAR CHASSIS with a port capacity of 64 ports A maximum of two Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS can be assigned per remote site for a total of 128 ports used to accommodate IP stations by system data programming The maximum number of Remote Sites is 30 This system allocates the maximum of 64 FP AP cards per system at multiple Remote Sites The number of FP AP cards accommodated at one Remote Site should be a maximum of eight including the MP with built in FP If more than eight FP APs are assigned the system does not operate normally The following illustration shows MODULAR CHASSIS hardware configurations software port allocation face layout and rear view of MODULAR CHASSIS for IPS DMR IPS DMR MODULAR CHASSIS Hardware Configuration 1 MODULAR CHASSIS 2 MODULAR CHASSIS Virtual MODULAR Virtual CHASSIS
63. Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Processors The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS IPS DM IPS DML and IPS DMR are distributed multiprocessor systems Their control system consists of a Main Processor MP Firmware Processors FP and Application Processors AP Both the FP and APs execute their predetermined functions under the control of the MP Main Processor MP Name Code Remarks O Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS and IPS DM PN CP24 C One card is required per system Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Dual MP System PN CP27 A l E One card is required per system Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DML One card is required per system Stand Alone system or CCIS end point PN CP31 C Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DMR One card is required for each Remote Site Ethernet Control Card e Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit receive a signal of TCP IP protocol e 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card PZ M606 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 1 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Major specifications and functionality of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS MPs are shown below PN CP24 C ElanSC520 Flash ROM 16MB SDRAM 64MB Note 1 1 024 1 024 Time Division Switch 16 sets of 3 way conference circuitry 32 circuits digit O to 9
64. Required Equipment Equipment Description Qty Remarks PN 24DTA C 24 Channel DTI Card PEI E PN 24PRTA 24 Channel PRT Card B PN SC01 DCH D Channel Handler Card 1 DTI Card ISDN BRI Required Equipment Equipment Description Qty Remarks PN BRTA BRT Line BRT Card MP PN 4BRTA F BRT 4 Line BRT Card MA ISDN Terminal Required Equipment Equipment Description Qty Remarks PN SC03 ISDN Channel Handler Card Supports 4 ILC Cards PN 2ILCA ISDN Line Circuit Card Supports 2 Terminals Event Based CCIS Required Equipment Equipment Description Qty Remarks PN SCOO Common Channel Handler Card Supports 1 DTI Card Page 15 20 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN Capacity for ISDN PRI Description 24DT1 24PRT PI O a y O DTI DTI Card DCH Card Bss Trunksfor DTI 192 G a PRT Card S o G 8 Trunksfor PRT A ARAS ISDN Routes 8 J 8 Port per DTI Card AA Se ee tg se Port per PRT Card 4 DCH Bort per ICH Card ae Port per ILC Card _ 8 8 System Capacity for ISDN BRI Port per ILC Card 2ILCA 8 Documentation More information regarding the ISDN capabilities of the UNIVERGE NEAx 2000 IPS can be found in the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS ISDN System Manual and the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS ISDN Features and Specifications UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15
65. The MAT PC must have the MATWorX IPS program properly installed to communicate with the PBX MATWorX is required for system software registration activation and system data backups Message Center Interface MCI This feature provides an interface with a customer supplied Voice Mail System VMS which can send Message Waiting lamp control data to the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS using an RS 232C interface Message Registration This feature provides output from the system to a call accounting system using an RS 232C interface This allows the Hotel Motel clerk to retrieve the information needed to charge for local and toll calls Message Reminder This feature allows a user or Attendant to turn on the message waiting MW lamp of a Single Line Telephone or the Message Reminder MSG LED of a Multiline Terminal if assigned Message Waiting This feature allows the Attendant Console Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument administrative station or Property Management System PMS terminal to light a lamp on an uninterrupted or interrupted basis on a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal to indicate a message is waiting In addition to the lamp indication control this feature also provides the Voice Message Waiting service that an originating station user can set to Message Waiting with a prerecorded message by using the Digital Announcement Trunk card PN 2DATA UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Refere
66. User has a reliable voice connection with the voice server Dterm SP30 user has a terminal device which can be ported from place to place without the need for programming call forward functionality on the phone The user can be reached by one number no matter if call forwarding is set or the user is located next to the Dterm SP30 User has a physical device which they can use for dialing and answering calls instead of working with mouse and keyboards User is no longer locked to their PC for receiving and answering calls The user is as portable as the in building wireless network when using the PS Voice Recording A user will be able record the voice connection and save the wave file on a network storage place of their choice It is recommended all voice recording be stored on a local hard drive and not a network drive With the activation of the voice recording of the Dterm SP30 no extra recording equipment other than the Dterm SP30 application with a USB headset is required For those specific regions which require the notification to the remote party that a voice connection is being recorded the Dterm SP30 provides for the setting of an automatic beep tone in the configuration menus Beep tone can also be conditioned to send a tone notification at user selectable intervals Application Collaboration The NEC Dterm SP30 allows users to share ideas information and programs in a variety of ways while either in a point to point connec
67. VMS with the Message Center Interface MCI Voice Mail Live Record CCIS This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to record the conversation with another station trunk within the CCIS network by the Centralized Voice Mail The conversation in the office without Voice Mail can be recorded to Centralized Voice Mail in other office via CCIS network Voice Mail Private Password CCIS Voice Mail Password can be prevented from displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when connected to the voice mail system via CCIS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions ISDN Feature List Addressing Advice of Charge Display Call By Call Service Selection Called Party Recognition Service Direct In Termination DIT Channel Negotiation Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR ISDN Terminal Subaddress Present Trunk Provisioning Service Selection UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 9 41 Issue 6 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions ISDN Feature Descriptions Addressing The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS supports E 164 numbering plan as Type of Number TON Numbering Plan Identifier NPI combination in Calling and Called Party Number Information Element for ISDN calls Advice of Charge Display When an outgoing connection is made on the ISDN trunk this feature provid
68. Virtual IPT when the called calling station is the legacy terminal Dterm Single Line telephone ATTCON etc Configuration Application Integrated Type and Adjunct Type with CCIS interface Service Conditions 1 A roaming service network can be provided by maximum 512 PBXs 2 One APOO card for Data Base Module DBM is required per PBX 3 An APOOB DBM C is required when accommodating 257 or more PS s per site 4 Both Multi Site Roaming using DTI and this feature cannot be provided in the same system i e the roaming network must be configured in only DTI trunks or IP trunks Visitor Location Register VLR information for maximum 512 Visitor PSs can be recorded to a system When the VLR information exceeds for more than 512 Visitor PSs APOO deletes the oldest VLR information in the system 6 When a call terminates to a Multiline Terminal from a PS the ringing of the Multiline Terminal is as follows regardless of Home PS or Visitor PS on When the PS is under control of the same PBX Ringing for Internal call When the PS is under control of the other PBX Ringing for External call 7 When the Home PS is roaming the Home PBX cannot route Announcement PS No Answer PS Out of Zone to the calling party If the Visitor PBX allowed it will inform the Home PBX that the PS cannot answer the Home PBX activates Call Forwarding Not Available Billing of Home PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number While the Home PS is roaming
69. Yes No or the alternative Menu Mode conversation whether they want to hear the date and time stamp before or after a message or if they want the voice mail system to greet them by name when they call in to retrieve their messages Set message delivery options subscribers can establish rules governing message delivery options for the type and urgency of message or frequency of delivery For example a subscriber can set the message delivery options so that when he or she receives urgent voice messages on Wednesday the NEAXMail AD 64 will call the subscriber s home or cellular telephone to deliver them Set call screening and holding options subscribers can set call screening and holding options to handle incoming calls with ease Two or more of these options may be combined The following call screening and hold options are available Announce before connecting caller The system plays a beep before transferring the call Screen Name The system asks the callers name before ringing the extension The system plays Call from lt caller s name spoken by the caller gt before transferring the call Ask me if want to take the call The system says Enter 1 to take the call or 2 and I ll take a message and then waits for a response from you before transferring the call Remember screen name The system asks and plays the callers name as above and if the caller leaves a message will append the caller s name to the beginnin
70. _ gt DID AND DOD ADDRESSING___________ EXTENSO MEGACOM ACCESS IWATS _ __ _ _ _ Z MEGACOM 800 SERVICE 800 WATS ULTRA WATS __ MULTIQUEST 900 SERVICE TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION _ _ PRI Services amp Features Services provided by ISDN carriers are separate and different from features supported by ISDN carriers Services in general terms are often entire packages provided by the carriers such as AT amp T s Megacom which provides routing options and many reporting features Features of ISDN trunks provide the user with items such as Calling Party Number CPN and Sub Addresses The distinction between services and features should be recognized to a certain extent This section will explain which features and services the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS supports UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 1 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN Call By Call Service Selection Services can be selected on a call by call basis to all channels of a single PRI interface according to applications That is unlike Trunk Provisioning Service in which services are assigned to specific channels services may be used on any available channel Service Conditions 1 The services that can be designated include ACCUNET MEGACOM MEGACOM 800 INTERNATIONAL 800 SDN MULTIQUEST AT amp T and PRIVATE INWATS OUTWATS FX TIE Northern Telecom 2 Channel select
71. a Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal or an ISDN Terminal calls a busy ISDN Terminal an other ISDN Terminal in Station Hunting group is called Note An ISDN Terminal cannot be included in the same Station Hunting group as Single Line Telephone Multi line Terminals Call Forwarding An ISDN Terminal cannot set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer and cannot be the destination of a Call Forwarding When an ISDN Terminal is a calling station it can be forwarded to another Single Line Telephone Mul tiline Terminal but cannot be forwarded to central office trunk or tie line trunk Call Transfer A Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal cannot transfer a call in progress with an ISDN Terminal to another station In the same way an ISDN Terminal cannot transfer a call in progress with a Single Line Telephone Mul tiline Terminal to another station While a Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal converses with CCIS trunk and ISDN trunk the Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal cannot transfer the call to an ISDN Terminal Call Pickup Call Pickup Designated group An ISDN Terminal cannot be assigned to Call Pickup group and cannot pickup a call to another station A Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal cannot pickup a call to an ISDN Terminal Executive Override During voice communication between a Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal and an ISDN Terminal another Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal can i
72. a caller s wait for assistance and improving customer satisfaction Its real time and historical reporting abilities provide call center managers and supervisors a tool for maximizing agent productivity assuring quality performance in handling the incoming and outgoing call volume in the call center CallCenterWorX Business helps businesses make a good first impression on new customers better manage existing customer relationships and inspire customer loyalty leading to increased revenue potential CallCenterWorX ACD 3 0 for Business is a Microsoft Windows based software system that enables you to efficiently manage your call center It does so by providing a complete and flexible feature set allowing you to customize the ACD based on your particular business needs In addition it provides a powerful Graphical User Interface GUI to a UNIVERGE NEAxX 2000 IPS ACD System that allows you to program additions deletions and changes via your computer You can also query and print ACD data from CallCenterW orX UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 3 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS The CallCenterWorxX ACD 3 0 for Business suite includes the Automatic Call Distribution ACD system and the Management Information System MIS 3 0 The ACD system supplements the call processing capabilities of the PBX with typical call routing designed to connect each caller with the most appropriate ag
73. a maximum of three DtermlPs per Internal Zone Page Group Internal All Zone Paging will not access IP Dterm Set Relocation Set Relocation is not available between Dterm IP terminals This feature is for legacy terminals only Note Legacy stations trunks means the ones connected to the Time Division Switch TDSW Examples of legacy station trunk cards are LC DLC COT PRT CCT DTI 8RST DTMF receivers CF TB conference trunk etc Conditions DSS BLF A DSS BLF Console can be associated with the Dterm IP and can be used in a Remote PIM but the DSS BLF console must be connected to DLC card IP PAD The IP PADs are required for the following connections statuses Connections between Dterm IP terminals and legacy stations trunks Connections between Dterm IP terminals and IP trunks H 323 Connections between legacy stations trunks and IP trunks H 323 Connections for CCIS networking via IP from to legacy stations trunks While Dterm IP terminals are on hold Consultation Hold Call Transfer Music on Hold etc When any override service is activated Executive Override etc Three four party conference including Dterm IP terminals Page 13 36 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS The UNIVERGE NEax 2000 IPS offers a very powerful proprietary networking feature called Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS This
74. adding on the adjunctive configuration This feature allows the Dterm user to have a Dterm PS lll as Sub Station and to get service with one telephone number In case that one user has both Dterm and Dterm PS III with this feature used the user is not required to have separate two telephone numbers When user is at his desk a call is terminated to Dterm When user leaves his desk with Dterm PS Ill a call is automatically terminated to Dterm PS Ill In this feature the Dterm and Dterm PS Ill are referred as Main Station and Sub Station respectively UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System When a Dterm PS III user moves out of the service area and the electric field strength becomes weak this feature notifies it to the user with the warning tone and the LCD display Overlap Dialin This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to receive dial tone and dial p J the desired number to originate a call PS This feature is to confirm the identity of a Dterm PS III to avoid an Authorization unauthorized Dterm PS III from accessing the system This feature allows the WCS to supervise the location of each Dterm PS Ill upon receiving the location registration request to allow call termination Out of Zone Indication PS Location Registration This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to confirm the number to be Preset Dialing dialed before originating a call
75. and Web pages specifically tailored for the small screen format The INASET s basic load includes a graphical telephony application that provides an abundance of telephony information and desktop control that is easy to use with its menu based interface Information and controls accessible via the soft keys and feature buttons include Line status showing a visual icon display for the status of all assigned phone lines and DSS lines Caller information showing a visual text display for things such as time date and call status information Telephony Directory for storing searching and dialing different profiles which you can categorize and store in one of three different groups corporate personal and group Web access providing browsing capabilities to display HTML web based information located on the Internet or Intranet Also includes support for Java applets Virtual keys providing access to features functions and recent keys activated on the terminal The user can program display and functions for how they see fit with limited or no administrative support necessary By converging a company s voice and data networks there is only one network to manage The INASET includes a built in switch so you can use a single Ethernet switch port for the computer data and the INASET Because it s an IP based telephone it can be installed anywhere on a corporate IP network The INASET is Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP compati
76. answers dials or transfers The call log can be run for the entire system or an individual subscriber Error log The error log lists system errors The report lists each error code the port on which the error occurred and the date and time the error occurred This report can be used to diagnose and solve system problems The system manager can look up the error code on line and follow the steps to correct the error Remote maintenance With NEAXMail AD 64 s remote maintenance feature support and problem solving can be provided without an on site visit Visual Messaging Visual Messaging is a suite of optional unified messaging and call management modules that can enhance your NEAXMail AD 64 voice messaging system by linking your telephone and your Local Area Network LAN Using an intuitive Microsoft Windows interface the Visual Messaging modules bring calls and messages to your desktop PC and make managing them as easy as clicking a mouse Instead of listening to calls and messages one by one on the telephone you can visually manage multiple calls or messages on screen and work more efficiently and effectively than ever before As your organization grows you can add seats of the different modules Each module ViewMail ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging ViewMail for Lotus Notes ViewMail for GroupWise and ViewCall Plus addresses a specific need and can be purchased to customize your NEAXMail AD 64 as your organization s requirements change
77. be determined based on internal or external calls on groups of caller IDs or even morning or afternoon A different greeting can be recorded for any of the scenarios above allowing the attendant to present a pleasant and consistent greeting BAS Offline Mode Pseudo Night Mode Night Mode allows for calls to be handled differently during off business hours When no BAS attendants are logged into the system the OWxX server is still monitoring calls to the attendants Since there are no attendants to send the calls the server will instead send the calls to a configurable number such as the voice mail system or play a night announcement In the case where the server itself goes down it is recommended that the user set up a UCD degrade Since the OAI cannot route the calls it will instead send the calls to a UCD group which includes the operators Typically a separate set of virtual sub lines are put into a UCD group and assigned on each attendant s Dterm and the pilot number of this UCD group is associated with the BAS queues to be used in the event of failure BAS Authorization and Account Code Dialing BAS supports dialing with Account Codes or Authorization Codes However it uses a slightly different number format for the dial string To denote an account code an exclamation point is used and for authorization codes a dollar sign is used Here are some example strings Account Code 2145551212 1234567890 Authori
78. benefit from many messaging options and the ability to set up their mailboxes to suit individual needs From a multimedia PC subscribers can even play and record messages eliminating the need to pick up a telephone Access email messages by phone with the text to speech option Enjoy 24 hour two way access to messages without the need for a laptop or modem connection Communicating by fax is faster easier and totally confidential with NEAXMail IM 16LX Inbound and outbound documents are password protected and can be stored electronically until previewed and printed from any networked desktop PC Full Digital Integration Through its fully customized digital integration the NEAXMail IM 16LX combines important business communication functions into one comprehensive voice processing system a system that can help you increase productivity and improve service dramatically Page 19 24 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Digital integration enables feature options such as Soft key Navigation Constant Message Count Live Record Live Monitor and Mailbox Manager Soft key Navigation allows you to navigate your Dterm Series E or Dterm IP phone as well as your NEAXMail IM 16LX voice mail menu options using the LCD screen Constant Message Count gives you an accurate count of your new or old messages on the LCD screen With Live Record subscribers can record call
79. calls to specified station when the station NANS a does not ee within the predetermined time Incoming station call for attendant assistance Recall Recall Basic Key amp Lamp in transferring an established outside call to Additional incoming special service calls PAGE Key amp Lamp Allows the attendant to connect with pager overhead paging recorder Allows the attendant to answer incoming Emergency Basic Key amp Lamp calls from the station where the station leaves the receiver off Busy Basic a Allows the attendant to enter into station to station connection 18 TRKSL Basic Key Lamp Allows the attendant to individually select a To desired trunk Allows the attendant to establish incoming call to Call Park 19 Call Park Call Park Basic Key amp Lamp mote ane amena ve ieee us CaN once again by dialing a specific number and individual number of the console from an ordinary extension telephone Allows the attendant to be automatically cl recalled when the station user replaces the 20 SC Basic Key amp Lamp handset by depressing the key after Set i extending a central office incoming call to the station user Allows the attendant to supervise a call by Supervisory i 21 SVC Basic Key amp Lamp depressing the key after extending a central Call Set office incoming call to the station user Allows the attendant access to various 22 Option Optional Option Key amp Lamp optional features provided as requ
80. card for active MP MPO and another card for stand by MP MP1 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 4 3 Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Common Control Cards Cont Main Processor Card for Remote PIM DML DMR Provides LAN control function System based Device Registration Server DRS built in FP 33 MHz PCI BUS Memory SDRAM 64 MB Flash ROM 16 MB TDSW 1024CH x 1024CH 16 line CFT PB sender Clock 2 line PN CP31 MP PLO receiver mode source mode one RS 232C port 4 line PB receiver internal Music on Hold tone BUS interface BUS interface functions as a driver receiver of various signals adjusts gate delay timing cable delay timing monitors I O Bus and PCM BUS Supports MP Program Download One card is required per system Firmware Processor Card for the IPS Provides Line Trunk interface Memory RAM 768 KB and inter module BUS interface BUS interface functions as a driver receiver of various signals adjusts gate delay timing cable delay timing monitors I O Bus and PCM BUS When the system consists of three PIM s or more one each of this card is mounted respectively in PIM2 PIM4 and PIM6 3 4 PIM System 1 per System 5 6 PIM System 2 per System 7 8 PIM System 3 per System PN CP15 ON 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX cable is connected directly to this card Power Supply Card for DESKCON Provides 48 V DC power her ee ENE AR Maximum 3 cards per PIM One card pe
81. centralization than a global network that is intended to be compatible with all telecommunications systems For this reason alone the benefits of a CCIS network are much greater than those of an ISDN network And with CCIS it is possible to create a mixed network of CCIS and ISDN UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 3 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Digital and Analog CCIS The PBX can provide No 7 CCIS via either a digital network or an analog network Regardless of the relevant network being a digital network or an analog network CCH Common Channel Handler to control the common signaling channel is required Digital CCIS Digital CCIS uses standard 24 channel digital T1 facilities to provide 23 B voice data channels and 1 D signaling channel for the first CCIS dedicated T1 span Additional T1 spans can be added and all 24 channels of each additional T1 span could be used for voice and or data transmission In this case the D channel of the first T1 span is using non facilitated associated signaling for the additional T1 spans A second D channel of the first T1 span can be configured to provide a redundant signaling link between nodes to increase network reliability To provide even more reliability one channel of a second T1 span can be programmed to serve as the redundant signaling link In this configuration network reliability is at a maximum because if the
82. clicking on the number My Controls The always available tool bar interface of My Controls gives the user the flexibility to change status and contact numbers on the fly The always available tool bar interface of My Controls gives the user the flexibility to change status and contact numbers on the fly The user can make a call using the number entry box in the My Control toolbar They don t have to enter 9 or 1 the OpenWorX dialing rules take care of it automatically These intuitive controls give the user the functionality they need to stay in touch and be more productive in a fast paced business environment Contact Rules and Methods Communications Portal employs user based contact rules and methods Users can create methods for each status and by the device they want to be contacted by depending on who is calling them Contact rules and methods can be customized by the user to reflect how they wish to be contacted Up to 6 different methods can be established for any status and each rule can be assigned to any caller or groups of callers Outside calls are automatically routed to the next device and inside callers can forwarded the call to the next available device My Outlook The portal mail client is integrated with MS Outlook This gives the user the ability to manage messages and other personal information without leaving the portal Calendar link controls are built in to automate the user s status by
83. code In addition to a personal ID each subscriber can also set a security code to safeguard his or her mailbox The code which can be any number of digits up to ten can be changed at any time from any touchtone telephone or by using their Mailbox Manager from their PC Subscriber to subscriber messaging Subscribers can dial NEAXMail AD 64 directly to leave a message for a fellow subscriber without ringing that extension In this way co workers can exchange routine information and ask questions without disturbing one another The co worker can also be dialed directly and if unavailable the call is automatically forwarded to the co worker s voice mail with the caller being identified automatically Address messages to multiple subscribers Subscribers can send a message to many other subscribers at once without creating a group for them Immediate reply NEAXMail AD 64 allows subscribers to reply to a message from another subscriber immediately after hearing it without using touch tones Message cancellation If the recipient has not listened to a message yet the subscriber sending the message can delete it and record a new message Multiple message action Subscribers can reply to or redirect one message several times For example subscribers can listen to part of a message interrupt it and reply then start listening again and forward a copy of the message to another subscriber Message redirection NEAXMail AD 64 allows subscribe
84. combination of the previously mentioned integrations and is used whenever multiple NEAX PBXs are networked together via CCIS With this method the local PBX subscribers may continue to use the Live Record Constant Message Count Soft Keys and ANI Capture amp Display features All other integration is performed through the MCI link Single Point of Entry SPE AlIMWorx6 Voice Mail SPE is an optional product that lets subscribers manage the most commonly used voice mail functions from their computers This product provides single point of entry data management between information in the AIMWorX database and the NEAXMail AD 64 voice mail system You can assign mailboxes set preferences and other administrative duties from the Users screen in AIMWorX Manager and then download it to the voice mail system Maintenance The NEAXMail AD 64 is designed to be as easy to maintain as possible All system hardware requires minimal maintenance Software maintenance including backup and restore is designed to be virtually foolproof System Administration Console By using the Windows based system administration console NEAXMail AD 64 can be administered from any Windows based PC on your LAN This new console is intuitively designed and Page 19 20 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems is accessible via an IP connection making system administrators more efficient when managing the
85. configured to provide redundant signaling channels and multiple alternate routing schemes for maximum network reliability CCIS is so flexible it can be used with standard digital T1 spans analog tie lines or satellite transmission systems The CCIS architecture is similar to ISDN Both use 23B D type trunks Both networking types conform to and comply with the Open Systems Interconnection OSI 7 Layer Model The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS can be interfaced to another UNIVERGE neax PBX by No 7 CCIS Signaling Analog Digital CCIS Networking via IP non Peer to Peer connection or via IP Peer to Peer connection For adding No 7 CCIS to the system it is necessary to install the 24 channel DTI Digital Trunk Interface for a digital network or LDT Loop Dial Trunk ODT 2 wire E amp M or 4 wire E amp M Trunk for an analog network via a MODEM and a PLO Phase Locked Oscillator for network synchronization Also it is necessary to install a CCH Common Channel Handler The CCH receives transmits common signaling data to from the distant office In each local office the PBX can provide Centralized Billing function in addition to a variety of inter office service features For addition of the Centralized Billing function an AP Application Processor is required when the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS is the center office and Built in SMDR when the UN VERGE NEAx 2000 IPS is used as a tandem or local office Note Centralized Day Night Mode Change and C
86. controlling their call forwarding schedules Regular User can view group and call forwarding jobs within GCFC as well as maintain a group if given permission by the group owner The users of the groups can also be given or denied permission to group level There is no limit to the number of users to each individual group nor is there a limit to the number of people who can modify the group members or call forwarding patterns Jobs can be configured to occur only once or recur at specific time intervals These time intervals can be as small as forwarding all calls to voice mail at 5 00 PM every weekday to as broad as forwarding all calls to an automatic announcement for holidays that occur once a year GCFC Functionality Allows calls for individuals or groups of people based on schedules No more forgetting to un forward your phone after returning from vacation or a business trip Insure privacy for users such as in a hospital or dormitory OpenWorxX Personal Call Assistant PCA In NEC s continuing effort to bring better efficiency to the standard telephony user s desktop Personal Call Assistant was created PCA includes functionality like Desktop and INASET in a much more convenient form PCA replaces Clipboard Dialer the ability to dial from any application that supports the Windows Clipboard PCA brings screen pops to the user desktop via text to speech agent small pop box or specially written customized pops The text
87. data at MAT Single Digit Dialing This feature provides the station user the ability to dial single digit codes to access certain features while still allowing the same digit dialed to be used as the first digit of station number Single Digit Feature Access Codes This feature allows stations to access certain other system features by the direct dialing of a single Digit Access Code while receiving Busy Tone or Ring Back Tone SIP Trunk Interface 2000 IPS supports Session Initiation Protocol SIP based connections SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a standard protocol for TCP IP network management which enables a network management application software to query a management agent network device such as router PC host and hub using a supported MIB Management Information Base The MIB is a database of network performance information that is stored on the network devices The UN IVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can support the SNMP standard MIB MIB II defined in IETF RFC 1213 and private MIB and TRAP This feature also enables the network management system SNMP manager to manage the IPS via Network Address Translation NAT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Software Line Appearance Virtual Extensions This feature permits assignment of circuits which do not physically exist to be used as secondary extensions on Multiline Terminals There are a possible 1020 virt
88. determined on the basis of a three digit Area Code or six digit Area and Office Code numbering plan Trunk Answer From Any Station CCIS This feature allows any station not restricted from incoming calls to answer incoming calls when the network is in Night mode Trunk to Trunk Restriction CCIS This feature allows Trunk to Trunk tandem restriction by caller s information sent from each office e g caller is a trunk through the CCIS network Uniform Numbering Plan CCIS In a CCIS network a Uniform Numbering Plan enables a station user to call any other station in the network Two alternative numbering plans are provided In the first plan the station user dials any digit station number from three to eight The location of the office is identified by the first one two or three digit of the station number In the second plan the station user dials a one two or three digit office code and any digit station number from two to eight Page 9 40 Voice Call CCIS This feature provides a voice path through the CCIS network between a Multiline Terminal in one office and a Multiline Terminal in another office This path is established from the calling party to the called party s built in speaker If the called party s MIC lamp is on the called party can have a conversation in hands free Voice Mail Integration CCIS This feature allows any station user in the CCIS network to utilize the Voice Mail System
89. dial tone to the caller The caller can then dial the desired extension number and be directed to that station UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Automatic Call Distribution ACD The Automatic Call Distribution ACD feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a prearranged group of stations Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within the group based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time Stations may log on log off from the ACD group Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of agents Busy In Busy Out ACD This feature allows an agent in an ACD group to log their station into or out of the group This allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the ACD group goes to that station or not This prevents incoming calls from being directed to stations at which no agent is available Call Waiting Indication ACD This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to an ACD group is placed in queue due to an all agents busy condition On external relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting Indication Delay Announcement ACD This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller placed in queue to an ACD group A single announcement or two separate announcements can be provided Hunt Past N
90. distributor Oracle database If you choose to use an Oracle database you must purchase it separately Oracle 7 3 x versions may be installed on the AIMWorX server computer or on a computer networked to the AIMWorX server In either case all AIMWorX clients must have Oracle Client 7 3 x installed This is done automatically during the AIMWorX client installation Licensing AIMWorX modules are sold and licensed on a per customer basis You purchase an AlMWorxX tier the AIMWorX modules you need and the number of seats for each module Your security key is programmed with these variables and gives you access to the appropriate parts of the installed program Seat licenses Each module you purchase comes with five seats or instances of this module The license server will let you have five copies of the module active at a time Starting a sixth copy will cause an access violation error Purchase groups of five seats for any module from your AIMWorX distributor SQL Server database licenses are sold separately based on the database manufacturers requirements Security A security program on the server prohibits AIMWorX usage beyond what you have licensed This program keeps track of the number clients using AlMWorX the modules you have licensed and the instances of each module It interacts with your security key and the application on each client to allow or disallow you access based on the license you purchased and what is currently ru
91. eat ties ica tas Ml be et neta ae aaeecte odes calies 5 Sell Diagnostic System Messages ii dene vee Mapsiaciatedes 5 PRETO CSc Malena Cdad 5 MP PrOOMal is OW Ill O Ad de e da do 6 MA4000 Management System ceo ocacion ii a iaa 8 Chapter 9 Feature DescriplON Semanita 1 BUSINESS mote Data Feature Stilo 1 Business Hotel Data Feature DescriptiONS cooocoocccocnconoconcconcornnocnonononcncnnnnnnononononnonnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnonnns 5 COS Feature USE bo 34 COIS Features DeESCAPUDAS rai a aaa PTET EaP 35 SON Fere Sos acid 41 ISDN Feature Description Sra sd 42 O5I5 Feat ES araa A 44 OSG Feature SSC il OOM S aaa 2s ste cerns a A E A A ates 44 Wireless FeatutS LIS toryene E iia 45 Wireless Feature Descriptions a 47 Chapter 10 System Input Output 1 0 Interfaces cccceeseeesseeeeeesseennseeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeooesseeeeeeseonaeeanseeeeessseaes 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR occcoccccccncccnccccncocncnncncnccconcnconncnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnss 1 Message Center Interface MCI 0 0 cccccccccesccaececeeeeea cece eeseeeesaeeeeeeseeessueesaeeseeessaeesageesaeesseessseeesanes 6 Property Management System PIM Saito wera ve sdentyadnestinedbeds 8 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface iii an 1 System QUISAS it 1 OpenWorX Attendant Statistics occooccoonccnnconncocncocnnorononoconoconoonnconnnonnnonnnnrnonrncnnonnnnnnnnnannnnnanonnnns 1 Open WorX Business Attendant System BAS cooccccccc
92. executing the MP program download DATA NOT SET is displayed For the TCP port the specified port is used for file transfer control and the port in front of it is used for the file transfer For example when the TCP port is set to 3000 Port No 3000 is used for the file transfer control and Port No 2999 is used for the file transfer Port 21 File transfer control Port 20 File transfer default If you read the issue number of the standby side outdated side and change the settings of FTP information during MP program downloading WAIT BUSY NOW is displayed When using a single FTP server to update multiple sites in remote PIM network schedule the file transfer at least 7 minutes or more apart so that bandwidth and the number of connections to the FTP server are not exceeded Program Changeover Service Conditions The system is initialized automatically after executing the program changeover any data that is not backed up will lost Be sure to execute the office data backup before executing the program changeover If an error is detected during system initialization after executing the program changeover the PBX starts automatically with the previous program If the program download is executed while the program version matching is being executed the program version matching is interrupted and program download is executed If the program changeover immediate is executed while the program version matching is being e
93. first T1 span fails the 23 B channels and the redundant D channel of the second T1 span would keep the network operational The D channel can be programmed to transmit the signaling information at rates of 48K 56K or 64K bits per second At these high transmission rates one D channel can easily handle the signaling requirements for multiple T1 spans non facilitated associated signaling When using a Satellite system as the transmission medium the NEAX Family of systems are usually configured for digital CCIS however it should be noted that many Satellite systems can be configured to accept multiple analog tie lines which would be compatible with analog CCIS Analog CCIS For applications requiring analog tie lines CCIS requires the use of modems at each end of the dedicated signaling tie line These modems can operate as high as 56K baud rate The voice and data lines B channels also use standard analog tie lines If the customer requires 7 voice data channels between nodes 8 tie lines are ordered providing one extra tie line to be dedicated as the signaling channel This may appear to require more tie lines then a non CCIS network but actually less tie lines are required when CCIS is used thanks to the intelligent Look Ahead Routing feature Page 14 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS IP CCIS Peer to Peer Connections Peer to pee
94. for Built in SMDR MCI on MP R RS RVS 4S CA C 1 SMD RS 232C cable 4m 13 1ft MP DTE RS NORM 4S CA A 1 SMDR RS 232C cable 4m 13 1ft MP DCE MODEM SMDR PMS Hotel Printer MCI with APOOB MRC C The PN APOO B card provides 4 RS 232C interface ports for SMDR PMS CIS Printer Hotel Printer MCI and Centralized SMDR Connection to SMDR PMS or Printer is made on a port basis by a front cable Cable for AP00 RS RVS 4S CA C 1 SMDR or RS 232C cable 4m 13 1ft PMS PN APOO DTE A PMS PN APOO DCE MODEM RS PRT 15S CA A RS 232C cable 15m 49 2ft PN APOO Printer External Alarm Display The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can provide an optional external alarm display unit ALM DSPP to indicate Power ON OFF Major Alarm and Minor Alarm status External Alarm Display Panel NameCode Qty Remarks ALM DSPP 1 System External Alarm Display Panel Digital Trunk Interface DTI Primary Rate Interface PRI CCIS Trunk Interface CCT The DTI PRI CCT connection is available through twisted pair cable via the MDF Page 2 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture UNIVERGE neax IPS DM IPS DML IPS DMR System Configuration IPS DM IPS DML Modular Chassis MC The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM consists of one to three MODULAR CHASSIS depending on the system configuration The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DML consists of one or two MODULAR CHASSIS depending on the system conf
95. for interface of Cell Station CS of a wireless system Since this power supply is mounted in the space under the AC DC power additional Power Module card slots are not required SN716 Attendant Console The SN716 Attendant Console connection is available through one twisted pair cable when using an AC adapter When using the PN PWOO one twisted pair cable is required for voice data and one pair is required for power from the PWOO to the Console Analog Digital Telephones The analog digital telephone connection is available through one twisted pair cable IP Telephones The IP telephones can communicate with other IP telephones over the LAN on a peer to peer connection basis The Main Processor MP provides call control with an Ethernet adapter card Voice packets are transmitted between IP telephones over the LAN not through Time Division Switch Voice compression of G 729a 8 kbps and G 723 1 5 3 kbps 6 3 kbps is available for these connections The IP telephones can communicate with legacy stations and trunks including H 323 trunks via an IP PAD that converts voice packet data to PCM signals Call control signals are transmitted to the MP over the LAN while voice packets are transmitted via the IP PAD The number of IP PADs depends on the traffic volume of connections between the IP Enabled Dterm and legacy stations and trunks UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 2 3 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System A
96. functional and extremely flexible intelligent network capability allows two or more UNIVERGE telecommunications systems to be networked together to provide feature transparency and to centralize many important telecommunications functions such as Attendant Consoles Call Accounting Billing Systems Voice Processing Systems Management systems and Trunk Facilities to name a few A variety of NEC s UMNIVERGE family of telecommunications systems can be networked together using CCIS creating a proprietary corporate network This network can serve multiple company facilities in the same building or town in different towns in different states and even in different countries Centralized services provide a great cost reduction in the initial system hardware costs ongoing maintenance costs trunk and tie line costs and overall operations costs Feature transparency increases user productivity by providing a common numbering plan for simplified on net calling and a common feature package Feature transparency allows most features to be accessed using similar procedures throughout the local national or global corporate network Alternate Routing capabilities provide increased network reliability additional cost savings and increased user productivity Based on the industry standard CCITT Signaling System 7 which is the frame work for ISDN CCIS offers 64k Clear channel voice data transmissions The CCIS Intelligent Network can be
97. hold or sent to voice mail Several operators can monitor the same queues and share the same directory for call operation BAS Benefits Centralized company database that can link and replicate with other databases including AIMWorx Greeting playback and call recording PC based call processing Meet me paging Unlimited global parked calls Different greetings displays available for DIDs Single key call processing Directory dialing for accuracy Look ahead status from the directory sort and searchable directory by key fields Configurable screens for each operator Queue types allowing flexibility to answer certain call types Configurable screen pop information MAPI compliant e mail integration Set cancel call forwarding and DND for other phones Delay announcements capabilities to ensure callers are informed and provided other options during busy call times Configurable night station or announcement when operators are not logged in Flexible DID number assigned to each operator that follows them regardless of what PC phone they use Optional statistics package to track queue and operator statistics Optional integration with OpenWorX Location Status Information to see an employee s availability return time and alternate phone number Optional integration with Open WorX Dialer providing Dterm users access to the same employee and external database Optional integration with Open WorX Mess
98. in increments of 64 CCIS Link 1 Adds support for one CCIS Link CCIS Link 4 Adds support for four CCIS Link CCIS Link 8 Adds support for eight CCIS Link 1 IPT Card Adds support for one IP trunk card IPT Card 4 Adds support for four IP trunk card IPT Card 8 Adds support for eight IP trunk card IP Remote PIM 1 Site License Adds IP Remote Capability and is required for each Remote Site Dterm IP Software Seat Licenses DtermIP terminals are controlled by the CPU and do not use digital line cards Instead they require DtermIP seat licenses The licenses are available in 8 seat increments and are cumulative For example if you have 8 existing DtermIP Seats and need a total of 16 add another 8 seat license for a total of 16 seats 8 IP Seat License Key Each SP 30 4 Seat License can support up to four simultaneous sessions via the SP 30 Soft Phone The SP30 Soft Phone also SP 30 4 Seat License requires IP 8 Seat License To support eight simultaneous soft phone sessions would require eight Soft Phone Licenses and 8 IP Seat Licenses Each SP 30 4 ACD Seat License can support up to four simultaneous sessions via the SP 30 ACD Soft Phone and can support either Business or ACD mode The SP30 SP30 ACD Soft Phone also requires IP Seat License To support eight simultaneous soft phone sessions would require eight Soft Phone Licenses plus 8 IP Seat Licenses SP 30 4 ACD Seat License Page 2 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
99. in the network When CoS is used on the edge map it to a higher level layer 3 QoS value This mapping allows for a consistent prioritization throughout the entire network By using the prioritization methods described for the PBX and the network optimal data transfer in the core and edge devices throughout the network may be accomplished Device Registration Server DRS and DHCP The Device Registration Server DRS is built into the MP card System based DRS The System based DRS can provide log in log out function and registration authorization function of IP Enabled Dterm terminals Up to 956 IP Enabled Dterm terminals can be managed by the system based DRS Once the Device Registration Server DRS is located depending on the configuration chosen the IP Enabled Dterm will prompt for a login and password Network based DRS external DRS 3 0 is not supported DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol can be used for ease of administration for IP Enabled Dterm terminals in the network The IP adapter can be set to use a DHCP server to supply its IP address and the address of the DRS Network administrators can set up the option in the DHCP server to give the IP Enabled Dterm terminal the information needed to find the DRS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 33 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP TCP UDP RTP PORT NUMBER CONDITIONS Tables below show the default TCP UDP RTP port number and
100. in the simultaneous paging groups Handover When the signal transmission quality becomes inferior a Dterm PS III re originates a call automatically and seizes another radio channel making the WCS handover the call to another zone transceiver to maintain the speech quality Individual PS Calling This feature allows the calling party to page the individual Dterm PS III Last Number Redial PS This feature enables a Dterm PS III to store the numbers dialed in the previous five calls including the last number dialed The stack dial numbers are sequentially displayed on the LCD allowing the station user to make an outgoing call by selecting the desired dialed number from the display Multi Line Operation PS Dterm PS III equipped with two line keys L1 key and L2 key and different station numbers can be assigned to each of two lines The number assigned to L1 key of the PS is called My Line and the other number assigned to L2 key is called Sub Line My Line and Sub Line of a Dterm PS III can be assigned to appear on the Flexible Line Keys of a Multiline Terminal and the Multiline Terminal can share the Dterm PS III lines Page 9 48 Multi Site Roaming Dterm PS II user can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by multiple PBXs which communicate through JT Q931 a UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Wired for Wireless This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to have the Wireless PBX feature The IPS pr
101. installed on the top PIM in four or more modules of stack It provides 1 1G shockproof construction 19 RACK BRACKET A 19 inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A One bracket is required for one PIM configuration One bracket is required for the top PIM of multiple module configurations 19 RACK BRACKET B 19 inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B One bracket is required for the bottom module of multiple module configurations I F BRACKET ASSEM Inter Frame Bracket Assembly Used to join the frames in two stack configuration for Floor Standing Installation BASE TRAY ASSEM Base Tray Assembly One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor Standing Installation of Stationary Equipment Page 4 2 NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Circuit Cards The circuit cards used for UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS systems are divided into the following types According to these card types the mounting locations of card and port allocation of the Time Division Switch are varied Common Control Cards m Main Processor MP Firmware Processor FP a Ethernet Power Line Trunk LT Cards IP PAD Line Circuit LC Central Office Trunk COT Tie Line Trunk LDT ODT etc Application Processor AP Cards SMDR PMS MCI Hotel Printer Interface AP00 T1 E1 Digital Trunk Interface DTI Common Control Cards The following table shows the names and functions of each control card C
102. is configured within the voice switch and the voice trunk channel is configured in the program utility for the Dterm SP30 a user can dynamically setup and save future dated collaboration conferences All the conferences can be activated immediately upon configuration or saved for a future date upon activation When the conference is activated the Dterm SP30 with the help of the Voice sever places calls to the configured participants based on the number which are user predefined Conferences do not require users to be Dterm SP30 users for voice only conference calls Only Dterm SP30 users will utilize additional features like application sharing and messaging during call Collaboration Collaboration of a Dterm or PS handset links capabilities to the Dterm SP30 GUI In this mode all the voice connections will be directed to a Dterm or across the PS infrastructure instead of through Dterm SP30 USB handset The Dterm SP30 GUI will give the indication that it has received a call such as caller ID ringing information and notification as to the state of the line The only thing that changes is voice path being directed to the Dterm or PS handset The Dterm SP30 will provide data collaboration interface Collaboration Terminal list ITN Terminal NEC SIP Dterm Dterm IP Analog Terminal PCS PHS Page 5 22 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Benefits of this functionality
103. kbps Restricted X X Z HO 384 kbps X E H11 1526 kbps X E 2 N x 64 kbps X AT amp T NTI SIEMENS SESS DMS100 EWSD X a VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS 64 kbps Clear Channel NE ES PA 64 kbps Restricted X a 5 56 kbps Restricted X a HO 384 kbps X H11 1526 kbps X N x 64 kbps YX DEDICATED ACCESS EIA SIEMENS yyy ERGENEAX 2000 PS SWITCHED DATA 64 kbps Clear Channel X X X 64 kbps Restricted X X p 56 kbps Restricted X X 2 HO 384 kbps o X E H11 1526 kbps X N x 64 kbps YX a f VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK 64 kbps Clear Channel X i a 64 kbps Restricted X a 56 kbps Restricted X p HO 384 kbps X H11 1526 kbps o X N x 64 kbps o X X Feature Available NOT Available UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 17 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI The UNIVERGE nNeax 2000 IPS systems equipped with Basic Rate Interface BRI provides the user with a vehicle for circuit switched data at rates of 64 or 128 kbps to the desktop ISDN BRI connects BRI terminals stations to the PBX ISDN PRI is used to connect the PBX to the public network Circuit switched data is the focus of the IPS Basic Rate Interface Features such as Group Four Fax video conferencing and data calls are the main objective of BRI on the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS Applications
104. like Desktop can be masked from certain users Searching can be done by entering a letter combination and hitting GO You can search by Full Name Last Name First Name or Extension In addition to the corporate directory each user gets a Personal Directory This directory is stored on the server but is only accessible by that user and operates the same way as the Corporate Directory The Personal Directory will also support importing from a CSV comma separated values text file PCA also includes the ability to synchronize the user s Personal Directory with their Outlook Contacts The mappings of the fields are controlled by an XML file mappings xml in the PCA directory which is easily modified to suit the individual s needs PCA Limiting User Views Occasionally it is necessary to make certain fields un available except by certain users For example the company may not wish for non executives to have access to employee home phones Because of this the OpenWorX administrator can put the login Ids of Desktop users into groups that do not allow the viewing of specific fields PCA Open Worx Desktop Desktop is now a part of Personal Call Assistant as a standard feature Desktop is designed for general day to day UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS users who have a PC with a web browser No application installation needs to take place on the PC Access is directly via the web Desktop Directory The user can look up individuals within the company direc
105. m 0 33 ft PN 8IPLA IP PAD 8 channel IP PAD card 1 8 PN 24IPLA 24DSP 24 channel expansion DSP card for 8 1 8 channel IP PAD card Note The SPN APOOB DBM C is required when accommodating 257 or more PSs Page 16 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System WCS Required Equipment Cont e 10BASE T Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Cable As required For Q931a Roaming TIA EIA category between ETHER card and Ethernet over IP Trunk 3 or larger Cable Length Virtual IPT Note Maximum 100 m 328 ft e 100BASE TX Cable TIA EIA category 5 PN APOO B PN APOO B DBM Roaming Data Base Module card Roaming Data Base Module card PN IPTB IPT IP Trunk card For Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk PN 4VCTI 4VCT 4 channel CODEC card 1 32 Physical IPT Note IPTRK BUS CA Set of 3 BUS Cables between IPT and 1 32 sets AVCT cards Length 0 1 m 0 33 ft e 10BASE T Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Cable As required TIA EIA category between IPT card and Ethernet 3 or larger Cable Length Maximum 100 m 328 ft e 100BASE TX Cable TIA EIA category 5 PN APOO B PN APOO B DBM Roaming Data Base Module card f Roaming Data Base Module card PZ M606 A ETHER Ethernet Control Card For Short Message Notification OAI e 10BASE T Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Cable TIA EIA category between ETHER card and Ethernet 3 or larger Cable length Maximum 100 m 328 ft e
106. m 4000 ft 1219 m DTP 32D 1 TEL 21 2800 ft 853 m 4000 ft 1219 m DCU 60 1 Console N A N A 2800 ft 853 m Page 5 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Cordless Terminals Dterm Cordless Il DTR 4R 2 BK The Dterm Cordless II is fully digital and operates in the 90MHz frequency range It includes Base Unit Handset with a standard battery 6 hours of Talk Time or 4 days of Standby Charging Stand Belt Clip Wall Plate Adapter and 2 AC Adapters Specifications Digital Up to 350 feet 900 MHZ digital spread spectrum 4 programmable line keys 10 Simultaneous channel access Headset connection Volume slide switch 6 ring tones Weight 8 8 ounces w battery Options Headset EXP 9530 Lightweight headset with foam covered ear and microphone Mounts over the head REPLACEMENT CHARGER UNIT w o AC Adapter EXP 9785 The charging cradle is used to charge the batteries used with the Dterm Cordless II Terminal Use to clip the handset to clothes or belt REPLACEMENT AC ADAPTER FOR CHARGING UNIT AD 970 Provides 9Vdc to the Dterm Cordless Il Charging Unit Requires 120V 60Hz 14W AC input from standard AC plug REPLACEMENT AC ADAPTER FOR BASE UNIT EXP 9704 Provides 10Vdc to the Dterm Cordless II Terminal Unit Requires 120V 60Hz 14W AC input from standard AC plug LEATHER CARRY CASE Leather case for DTR 4R 1 BK Handset Used to mount the D
107. of Alarm Manager that will notify your own security department with the same information when someone places a 9 1 1 call Alarm Manager The Alarm Manager feature of AIMWorX provides a service that collects and forwards 9 1 1 OSN Traffic Collector Auth Code and other alarm notices to Alarm Clients Alarm Clients must be networked to AIMWorx but do not need to be AIMWorX clients Through the Alarm Manager you can define which clients receive which alarm notices and what happens if the alarm is not acknowledged Asset Manager The Asset Manager module of AIMWorX is a way to track stock inventory once it becomes an asset Asset Manager lets you record all assets and assign them to categories and subcategories It track warranties vendors and manufacturers for assets and lets you bill them to a user department or customer This program works in conjunction with the other AIMWorX modules and has extensive import export capabilities in order to share data with your current accounting and inventory programs Auth Code Manager Auth Code Manager is in charge of tracking and monitoring authorization codes as well as granting permissions at the time of a call Use authorization codes to define limits and access for specific users Auth Code Manager interfaces to the AIMWorX database for user information and appears as a tab on the user screen Billing Manager Billing Manager is a module of AIMWorX that provides a way to charge a customer depa
108. of the AD 120 into an existing network requires the operating system software and Exchange to be loaded while connected to that Local Area Network LAN RAID hard disk drive redundancy Level Il may only be added at the time of purchase and is not field upgradeable The optional RAID package provides four 4 additional hard drives for a total of six 6 hard drives in the Level II server and doubles the internal storage capacity Rack Mount Kits allow the Level Il Dell Servers to be mounted in a standard 19 rack UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 7 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Description 6 Dri Optional Software Feature Packages Dell Level Il 6 Drive RAID Array PE2800 only it ActiveNet AMIS VPIM and Third Party Fax Server Integration options may only be installed by an NEC Certified NEAXMail AD 120 engineer or an AD 120 technician with the assistance of a qualified MCSE Oo Description ActiveNet for Unity AD 120 per 1 node AD120 AMIS Analog Networking per server AD120 VPIM Digital Networking per server E Mail Reader Text to Speech The AD 120 offers a Text to Speech TTS Reader The TTS read text in English only TTS is required for Outlook Calendar Access and is not available on Voice Mail Only systems Capacities Minimum of 2 Maximum of 20 RealSpeak simultaneous sessions per system RealSpeak Note 1 to 3 session
109. or add to the special delivery settings of a message after it s sent Future The sender can mark the voice message for delivery at a later date and time up to one year later Private The recipient of a private message cannot redirect the message to anyone else Return receipt requested The sender of the message is told when the recipient hears the message Subscribers can request return receipts for messages sent to individual subscribers or to groups Urgent Messages marked with urgent will be heard first before regular messages Urgent messages from other subscribers and guests are played before urgent messages from outside callers The system also tells subscribers how many new messages are marked urgent Speed control during message playback Subscribers can slow down or increase the speed of each message during playback using the telephone keypad Subscriber controlled groups Subscribers can create name add and delete subscriber groups from their telephone Subscriber controlled message delivery Messages can be delivered to any telephone home work extension pager or mobile telephone Each subscriber can have up to four separate telephone numbers and dial out schedules The message delivery options can be sequential for each telephone number and programmed by the subscriber A subscriber can use any touchtone telephone to turn message delivery on or off or change the delivery times Subscriber language Th
110. programs these fields Another great feature of these buttons is that they act as Busy Lamp Fields BLF When that user s phone is off hook the speed dial button becomes red and when that phone is ringing the speed dial button blinks red By right clicking the button the operator can enable or disable monitoring as well as change the name forward the person s Dterm set DND or initiate a screened blind or announced voice call This is useful for an operator who also has a set of VIPs for whom they answer calls Business Attendant System Additional Features As the BAS continues to grow more features will be added and existing features will be enhanced Currently there are several adjunct applications under development for use directly with the BAS directory Apart from the directory another powerful feature integrated into the BAS client is the ability to record conversations and playback greetings over the telephone With the addition of a Dterm Play Record Module the client will be able to automatically record voice conversations and instruct the software to save the last specified number of conversations Conversations are saved as wav files which are time date stamped and rotated in a circular buffer When it is determined that a call needs to be saved the operator simply presses the Save Recordings button and the selected call is automatically saved Conversely the operator can save a set of greetings to be played back immed
111. provided Page 17 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System The PMS can send the following information to the PBX Maid Status Message Waiting Lamp Status Changes Telephone Restriction Status Changes Check In Out Messages Room Data Image Inquiry Wake Up Status Changes Room Change Room Swap and Room Copy Note Room Occupancy and Room Data Change Status inquiry for routine activity checks 0 Guest Name and Guest Information to be displayed on Administration Station Front Desk Instrument or Attendant Console Note Se ee oe ee Note Room copy and Guest Room Information is available only when MP built in PMS over IP is provided Room Cutoff This feature allows the Attendant Console Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument or Property Management System PMS terminal or guest room telephones using a special access code to temporarily restrict guest room telephones from making unauthorized calls when guests are away from their room and when rooms are in Check Out status There are two types of Room Cutoff conditions depending on the type of calls restricted External Call Restriction All outgoing calls from guest room stations are restricted in the Room Cutoff status Toll Call Restriction All toll calls from guest room stations are restricted during Room Cutoff status Internal and local calls are available Stations in Room Cutoff condition are able
112. real time online interaction with a contact center via text based chat sessions with agents Agents have the ability to push links directly to online customers The possibilities are endless and the impact on customer service is significant UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 13 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Outbound Dialing Q Outdial Why wait for your customers to call Your customers can generate additional revenue proactively manage customers and improve the productivity of every outbound customer contact by intelligently managing outbound call campaigns from within the existing Q MasterEX solution Blend Inbound and Outbound Calls agents can be set up to work in dedicated outbound queues or take a mix of inbound and outbound calls By sharing agent resources between inbound and outbound call activity contact center managers can optimize agent productivity in periods of low inbound activity Flexible Call Delivery Options two types of call delivery modes are available Power Dial and Preview Dial Information on Call Outcomes resolution and wrap up codes allow agents to record the outcome of every call indicating the status and commercial outcome of a call Build and Manage Campaigns Easily Q Outdial is administered and managed using an easy to use administration interface Fully Integrated Solution Q Outdial utilizes a common interface to manage and delive
113. required VoIP Log Collection This feature provides Voice over IP VoIP log collection functions for analyzing VoIP related 2 Transferring Camp On call to VMS When problems caused by IP device usage method an Attendant sets Camp On to a busy destination station for an external call and if the destination station does not answer by predetermined time the call can be automatically transferred to a VMS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 network environment and other effects A maintenance person will be able to understand its cause and figure out how to solve the problem The following functions are supported Whisper Page This feature allows a secretary to interrupt the boss in a private way By pressing a feature key or dialing an Access Code the secretary station can voice override the conversation between the boss and another party station or trunk When the conversation is interrupted the boss can hear the secretary but the other party is unaware of the Voice Override Page 9 33 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions CCIS Feature List Do Nor Disturb ES Dual Hold ECIS Elapsed Time Display CCSS Flexible Numbering of Stations CEST Hands Free Answerback CCIS SSS Hot Line 808 House Phone cs o Incoming Call Identification ces OOO Individual Atendant Access CCSS Page 9 34 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6
114. responsive business based on the steadfast foundation of the traditional NEC business philosophy NEC s organization has become a recognized leader in linking people and information through technology The logo evolved from the simple abbreviation of Nippon Electric Company in the late 1890 s into a dynamic symbol featuring the traditional NEC letters with bold sharp lines expressing technology and confidence combined with gentle curves that are associated with humanity and friendliness The logo has a holistic design that each letter expresses an independent character and at the same time represents the harmony of the logo as a whole or unit NEC blue has been designated as the corporate color This subtle blue was selected to symbolize human intelligence life and the protection of the environment UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 1 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction The Invention Age NEC began its solid tradition with some of the first manual telecommunications systems in Japan During the Invention Age NEC had achieved the following In 1900 NEC began manufacturing its own products In 1903 NEC manufactured the first battery phone in Japan In 1923 NEC entered the radio transmission field In 1927 NEC began automatic switching manufacturing In 1938 NEC began manufacturing crossbar switching systems The Industrial Age The Industrial Age in America brought great strides in business
115. send a release signal to the peripheral equipment when the calling party disconnects System Clock Setup by Station Dialing This feature enables a station user to set up the system clock from Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal and PS Page 9 30 System Speed Dialing This feature provides all users the ability to dial frequently called numbers using an abbreviated call code System Traffic The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is the stored program controlled digital electronic PABX employing PCM time division switching technique Single stage time division switching is employed for all configurations of the IPS up to its maximum line and trunk configuration Traffic capacity is expressed in Busy Hour Call Attempts BHCA This value is the number of call attempts that can be generated in the busiest hour of the day Tenant Service This feature provides for more than one organization tenant to share the same UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS system Through system programming each organization may be restricted to its own Central Office trunks Attendant Consoles and extension group In addition incoming calls are directed to the specific tenant Terminal Login via NAT The NEAX 2000 IPS supports network configuration via a router with NAT NAT is a technology that translates an internal local IP address to a globally unique IP address before sending packets to the outside network NAT is configured on the router at the border of the i
116. set or reset Do Not Disturb Room Cutoff Message Waiting Automatic Wake up Room Status Check In Check Out Successful and unsuccessful Wake Up attempts are printed out The Print Out function allows selection of output based on individual station numbers except for Room Status When Check Out is done the following functions are set or cleared DND cleared Message Wait cleared Room Cutoff set Automatic Wake Up cleared Room Status Codes are totally flexible and the user determines the meaning for each code The system will print the maid ID or station number if other than guest room that set the specific code Up to eight codes 1 8 are available UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 17 7 Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System House Phone This feature allows selected stations to reach the Attendant simply by going off hook House Phones may be equipped without dials House Phone assignments are programmed into system data from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or the Customer Administration Terminal CAT There is no limit to the number of House Phones permitted in the system provided the maximum amount of available ports is not exceeded The Attendant has the option to process the call using the delay or non delay operation or passing dial tone to House Phones with dials The system s response to a hook flash from a House Phone can be assigned to pro
117. special details for a caller which may be screen popped with the call Multiple views users can make their view of the contact center as simple or as detailed as they wish and flick from one view to another with a single mouse click They may choose to view o the queues and which agents are logged into o the individual agents and the type of call they are on o both queues and agents Precise and convenient dialing point and click directories ensure fast and accurate dialing Agents can also dial directly from their PC keyboards Specialized features for supervisors supervisors will always have a current picture of contact center activity queue status service level abandonment rates traffic volumes and agent statistics A number of specialist features are also available for supervisors including o On demand call delivery Remote log in out option to control agent status Conversation monitoring and intrusion Direct access to Q Master s administration package for dynamic changes Emergency queue re routing At a glance icon indications of call and agent status 0000 0 Page 12 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Callbacks Q Callback Callback allows callers who are waiting in the queue to leave a message and then hang up The callback request retains its position in the queue so when an agent becomes available the caller is automatic
118. telephone terminals that can generate push button DTMF signals The called party subaddress must not exceed 8 digits The called party subaddress can be sent with trunk direct dial access This feature cannot be used when a call is originated to ISDN using Speed Dialing or Call Forwarding features ole Trunk Provisioning Service Selection Each channel of a PRI interface can be dedicated to a particular service Services are designated to specific channels once designated a channel can be used only for that service Service Conditions 1 The services that can be designated include MEGACOM WATS and MEGACOM 800 800WATS 2 Arrangement with the carrier at the time of provisioning is needed Event Based CCIS This feature allows a PBX customer that does not have a tie line or when a customer cannot use the tie line due to the busy or fault of the line to use the various CCIS feature by using the ISDN line as a CCIS virtual tie line on the 2400 IPX 2000 IPS connection or the 2000 IPS 2000 IPS connection Service Conditions 1 Event Based CCIS is available between 2000 IPS to 2400 IPX and 2000 IPS to 2000 IPS 2 The maximum number of virtual tie lines is 16 channels per system This includes the common signaling channels and voice channels 3 The ISDN line used for the virtual tie line can also be used as a regular ISDN line 4 This feature supports voice calls only Supported object at PBX transmission side Single
119. the BRI terminal to the PBX An SPN SCO3 card is required to control D channel activity for the BRI terminals One SCO3 card supports four 2ILCA cards The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can support 48 ILCA cards that mount in LT slots and 12 SCO3 cards that mount in AP slots Ti e 5 i Ff 19 wt e A a e e Leas ONE SC03 SUPPORTS ES CUR e So na FOUR 2ILCA j psi A arar rra PEI H UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 19 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN ISDN Equipment List Functional PN BRTA BRT 1 line Basic Rate 2B D Interface Trunk Card Accommodates one 2 channel PCM digital lines 4 line Basic Rate 2B D Interface Trunk Card accommodates four 2 channel PCM digital lines Digital Trunk Interface 23B D 1 5 Mbps Card accommodates 24 channel PCM digital lines PN 2ILCA ILC 2 line ISDN Line Circuit Card provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals Occupies 8 time slots per one card ISDN Primary Rate 23B D Interface Card provides a built in D channel Handler DCH PN SCOO CCH Common Channel Handler Card transmits receives ene el A CCIC PN SCO1 DCH D channel Handler Card transmits receives signal PSW on the D channel of ISDN Primary Rate 23B D interface or WCS Roaming interface PN SC03 ICH ISDN channel Handler Card provides the D nnn channel signaling interface and controls Maximum four ILC cards Layer 2 and 3 ISDN PRI
120. the PBX MATWorX is required for system software registration and activation Password Entry In a system with password service a maintenance person is required to enter an authorization level number Password Level and appropriate password prior to engaging in programming the system data with the MAT CAT A maximum of eight 8 Password Levels can be set up The number of commands that the maintenance person can access is determined by the Password Level Resident System Program This resident system program generates system data automatically according to the system hardware configuration thereby providing immediate operation and shorter programming time When activated the system scans hardware configuration such as line trunk card location and assigns the system data such as station numbers trunk numbers etc according to a predetermined generic program assignment Service Conditions This service is applicable for equipment installed in PIMO through PIM3 Data for any vacant slot is not assigned Virtual stations are not assigned Some line trunk cards PN AUCA PN DKOO PN CFTA PN CFTB PN 2AMP PN 4DAT PN 4RSTF A PN 4VCTI PN 32IPLA are not assigned even if mounted An application card is not assigned even if mounted No tenant assignment is provided Tenant 01 is assigned Customer Administration Terminal CAT The Customer Administration Terminal CAT is a digital multi function telephone Dterm which is equ
121. the terminals in Logout status When this service is assigned retry in download failure status is not available UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 13 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Required Equipment for IP Station Equipment Name Fea O PZ M606 A On board Ethernet Interface card One per system SPN 32IPLAA IP PAD 32ch IP Interface card for IP PAD 16ch Codec card for IP PAD Compression PPPA TON eel RAR Max 2 per 32IPLA Card optional SPN 8IPLA IP PAD PZ 24IPLA PW 2U Unit P R Unit AC R Unit AC DC Adapter for Dterm Series i terminals ACA U Unit AC DC Adapter for Dterm Series E terminals DtermIP terminals IP Terminals Dterm Series i E terminals w IP adapter INASET terminals SP30 SP30 ACD Softphones For Powering the IP stations use one of the following AC power supply ACA U SN1604 Power Hub Cisco Catalyst switch power feed CCIS Networking via IP This feature provides CCIS networks with Voice over IP VoIP capabilities to provide a converged infrastructure over corporate Wide Area Networks WAN The IP Enabled Dterm can communicate with other IP Enabled Dterm over the CCIS network IP based on a peer to peer connection basis The legacy terminals TDM based terminals can communicate with other legacy terminals or IP Enabled Dterm terminals over the CCIS network via IP Packet Assembler Disassembler IP PAD Voice compression of G 729a 8 kbps and G 723 1 5 3
122. they manage their networks Web Browser Operation Email Alarm Notification Alarm Client Notification LDAP Auto Provisioning Service LDAP Authentication Windows Authentication IT Friendly Interface Flexible Access Levels Roles Application Program Interface API amp SDK Security HTTPS supported Audit Trail Logging Customizable Portals Command Line Interface Integration to OpenWorX Centralized Authentication Service NEC CAS System Health Monitoring Range programming that is schedulable The MA4000 IPS Assistant gives the power of station management directly to the end user Limited by access rights an administrator can allow his users to manage their own phones Supported features include Button Programming Call Forwarding and Speed Dial Programming Page 8 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Business Hotel Data Feature List Account Code Attendant Delay Announcement Analog Port Adapter Add On Module Attendant Lockout Alarm Indications Attendant Overflow Alphanumeric Display Attendant Override Authorization Code Announcement Service Answer Key Automated Attendant Automatic Call Distribution ACD Attendant Assisted Calling Busy In Busy Out ACD Attendant Camp On Full and Semi automatic Call Waiting Indication ACD Attendant Console Delay Announcement ACD Attendant C
123. to indicate the location name of the ZT Il that is connected to the Dterm PS III on the LCD of the Multiline terminal PS Location Registration This feature allows the IPS WCS to supervise the location of each Dterm PS III upon receiving the location registration request to allow call termination Q931a Roaming Over IP Trunk Dterm PS III user can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by multiple PBXs which are interfaced by JT Q931 a protocol over IP Trunks Radio Channel Changeover This feature is to supervise and changeover the channel automatically to avoid the interference and to maintain the speech quality Short Message Notification OAI This feature enables a Short Text Message STM once arrived at a mail box of the STM Server external equipment to be automatically distributed to the addressee Dterm PS lll via Open Application Interface OAI This feature also provides TM Full notification on the display LCD of the address D term PSII that is busy If the Dterm PS Ill is out of zone the feature makes retransmission of the STM after the PS returns to the zone UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Soft Phone Wireless Handset This feature allows a Soft Phone Dterm SP30 user to use a PS terminal as the handset of the Soft Phone The user can select a handset Soft Phone Handset or PS by pressing the Handset Swi
124. to speech agent and small pop box are standard features The customized pops must be specially written It is recommended that PCA s server reside as an intranet application with clients treating it as a Trusted Site in their internet options The icon is the same as Clipboard Dialer a small yellow phone in the system tray This icon will turn red when the user has missed calls Hovering over the red icon with your mouse will list the number of calls that have been missed The user can then access their inbound call log to see a list of the calls that have come in to their phone The name of the caller will be there if that person is in the OWX database The inbound number whether extension or caller id is recorded as well as the time and date of the call A day of the week will be shown for the last 7 days of calls Calls going back more than 7 days will show a date such as 1 10 Clicking on the call number will return the call with the correct dialing rules The user can also check their outbound call log in the same way Page 11 14 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface If the user simply wishes to find someone internal to the company they can use the corporate directory Clicking on the telephone icon next to the person will dial that person Dialing rules are applied automatically Other numbers can be stored and displayed this way as well as email and pager These fields just
125. trunk access key or a trunk access code The BAS software does not have the ability to utilize these methods Because of this if the user wishes to overhead page from BAS they must manually initiate it from their Dterm However the user may create a special speed dial key instead In the PBX the user must create a trunk access dial string Using LCR a dial string can directly access the trunk and provide voice path to the paging system For example the user creates the number 19 in their LCR to access trunk 1 in route 1 This trunk is terminated to the overhead paging Now when the attendant hits their speed dial to dial 19 they will be able to overhead page BAS Call Recording and Playback Apart from the directory another powerful feature integrated into the BAS client is the ability to record conversations and playback greetings over the telephone With the addition of a Dterm Play Record Module the client will be able to automatically record voice conversations and instruct the software to save the last specified number of conversations Conversations are saved as wav files which are time date stamped and rotated in a circular buffer When it is determined that a call needs to be saved the operator simply presses the Save Recordings button and the selected call is automatically saved Conversely the operator can save a set of greetings to be played back immediately every time the phone is answered via the BAS Greetings playback can
126. vary depending on the type of transport Frame Relay ATM Ethernet etc Depending on what type of algorithm is in place and how many devices are deployed dictates the amount of bandwidth needed The bandwidth for call setup for the CCIS signaling channel over IP is 7 2 Kbps per call and the FCCS signaling channel is 83 2Kbps per call Call teardown requires the same amount of bandwidth This number varies and 7 2 Kops and 83 2 Kbps are averaged values from the start sequence until setup or teardown is accomplished This means to make an FCCS or CCIS call from PBX A to PBX B PBX A will transmit 83 2 Kbps FCCS or 7 2 Kbps CCIS as the F C channel until the call is established Once the call is established PBX A will stop sending the 83 2 Kbps 7 2 Kbps setup information and will begin sending the appropriate voice payload per the encoding decoding algorithm selected G 711 G 729A G 723 1 To make multiple calls the system will send 7 2 Kbps 83 2 Kbps for each call until all the calls are established During tear down 7 2 Kbps 83 2 Kbps will be transmitted for each call again If an IP station has been idle for up to 4 seconds a 7 6Kbps Keep Alive packet will be sent to those respective devices A Keep Alive packet is not generated to an idle station if it is configured across a WAN This same process occurs on IP trunk routes A Keep Alive packet is sent to the trunk route for each system or Point Code in the network If t
127. voice mall equipment The types of Call Forwarding provided are Attendant Call Forwarding Setup and Cancel Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Destination Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer Split Call Forwarding All Calls Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Split Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Logout Dterm IP Call Forwarding Override Group Diversion Attendant Call Forwarding Set up and Cancel All of the various types of Call Forwarding can be set up or canceled from both Attendant Consoles Call Forwarding All Calls This feature allows all calls directed to a particular extension to be rerouted to an alternate destination regardless of the busy or idle status of the extension Call Forwarding All Calls can be set by an Attendant Console the individual station user a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station s extension or from another station which can program itself to be the destination of the rerouting Page 9 11 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Call Forwarding Busy Line This feature permits a call to a busy extension to be routed to a pre designated station Attendant Console or voice mail equipment Call Forwarding Busy Line can be set or canceled by an Attendant Console the individual station user or a Multiline Ter
128. when receiving or placing a call i e you receive a Call from a customer and need to look up information that is contained in a database Previously you needed to locate and launch the application before loading the file Now with the Dterm SP30 simply select the Internet link and the database file is opened bringing it all together in one user interface Real Time Communication In addition to providing a voice and data collaboration link you can also chat with a remote Dterm SP30 This is ideal for the real quick conversation you need with a distant Dterm SP30 user Maybe youre on a Call and need to get a quick response from a co worker There s no need to put the customer on hold and call the co worker for an answer Instead send a chat message and get your answer in real time The Dterm SP30 will store all your chat messages in a log so that you can use them for future reference Additional features of the Dterm SP30 forwarding control selection for different call modes videoconferencing capabilities automatic downloading of telephony features to the display and diagnostic capacities for audio problem notification Presence Status The presence status functionality allows the user to confirm a buddy s presence status with a visual indication ICON and text message on the Dterm SP30 GUI The presence status information is provided by the OpenWorX servers LSI package 8 6 Party Conference Control When the trunk conferencing card
129. with non locking keys Light Emitting Diodes and a 4 x 40 character Liquid Crystal Display The LED s provide continuous information relative to the status of calls in progress The display provides station and trunk identification class of service and the number of calls waiting The LCD changes with different call states and instructs the user which Multifunction keys are available for each state Keys such as Busy Verify DND Override etc only appear when needed The Multi function Keys reduce the number of different buttons and greatly simply operation UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 9 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction 9 Intelligent Digital Multifunction Terminal In addition to supporting conventional station equipment the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be equipped with the Dterm series digital electronic multifunction terminals The Dterm terminals are intelligent microprocessor controlled terminals which enhance the feature capabilities offered by the system and provide the service of conventional key telephones over 1 pair wiring The Dterm instrument may be equipped with an interface adapter to allow simultaneous voice and data switching without compromising the voice communication system 10 Ease of Installation Because the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS uses pre assembled modules and plug in type circuits packs it is easy to install Wiring connections both internal and external are made throug
130. 0 ft 13000 ft 13000 ft Local Power Supply 3350 m 3958 m 3958 m 3958 m System Capacity Capacit Description Adjunct Analog Adjunct CCIS 1PIM 2PIM 3PIM 4PIM 5PIM 6PIM 7PIM 8PIM_ Zone Transceiver ZT 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 A a TZ o p 6 32 128 Note A existing CSH cards in a system should be SPN SC03B 8CSH C AP when accommodating 257 or more PSs UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 15 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System WCS Required Equipment 1 8 PZ PW122 48V Power supply card for ZT Analog Interface DC DC PWR One per PIM CCIS Interface 16 ZT powered card Wired for Wireless PN 4CSIA A CSI ZT Interface card 1 32 4 per PIM PN SCO3 B CSH ZT Handler card 1 16 1 per 2 4CSIA cards PN 4COT COT for Analog Interface 4COT 64 PN 8COT 4COT 4 PS per card 8COT 8 PS per card Penna SPN 24CCTA 1 5M AMI 24ch CCIS Interface Trunk As req Max 8 per sys PN 24DTA C 24DTI 24 channel DTI card For Multi Site Roaming Note PN 30DTC C 30DTI 30 channel DTI card PN SC01 DCH D channel Handler card PN AP00 B DBM Roaming Data Base Module card PZ M606 A ETHER Ethernet Control card For Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk PN 32IPLA IP PAD 32 channel IP PAD card Virtual IPT PN 16VCTA 16VCT 16 channel CODEC card IPTRK BUS CA Set of 3 BUS Cables between IP PAD 1 8 sets and 16VCT cards Length 0 1
131. 000 IPS to restrict presentation of the connected party s ISDN number in the 2000 IPS to the calling party CPN To Network Present This feature allows the ISDN network to be informed of the Calling Party Number CPN when a Call originates from a terminal connected to the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS CPN To Terminating User Display This feature provides a visual display of the originating station s number and sub address information on a Multiline Terminal for incoming ISDN calls This provides the terminal user with a quick and accurate way to identify the originating station s number Calling Number DID Addressing This feature allows incoming ISDN PRI calls to terminate to stations Attendant Console Automated Attendant etc based on the Called Party number Direct Inward Dial trunks will be terminated to programmed destinations without Attendant assistance DID and DOD Addressing This feature allows the system to use DID and DOD on the same B Channels Trunk Provisioning Service election is not required B Channels can be used for DID and DOD without separating the trunk routes UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Event Based CCIS This feature allows a PBX customer who does not have a tie line or when a customer cannot use the tie line due to busy or fault of the line to use the various CCIS feature by using the ISDN line as a CCIS virtual tie line between the 2400 IPX
132. 00B Replacement Battery 5 hours of Talk Time or 40 hours of Standby Capacity 500mAH 4 0V EARSET Dterm EARSET Lightweight ear set with microphone Page 5 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Plantronics CT Cordless Package includes Base Unit Handset with a standard battery 6 hours of Talk Time or 3 days of Standby Belt Clip M175 Headset User Guide and AC Adapter This compact unit is an Analog single line device that operates in the 2 4 GHz Digital Spread Spectrum frequency range This unit is compatible with and Analog single line port Analog Port Adapter or Analog telephone line from Telco Specifications 2 4 GHz Cordless Headset Phone Range of Up To 150 Feet Audible Low Battery Indicator Single Line Operation Ultra Compact Remote Unit with Belt Clip Variable Range Volume Control 10 Number Speed Dial Page Find Feature Redial Flash Mute with Audible Reminder Talk Charge Power Indicator Lights Built In Headset Stand UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 17 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment INASET INASET terminals are members of the Dterm IP family INASET terminals have a Web browser with a large color display and a built in multi port Ethernet switch for connectivity to the user s local PC INASET terminals bring a wealth of information to the desktop including short text display messages
133. 100BASE TX Cable TIA EIA category 5 Note The SPN AP00B DBM C is required when accommodating 257 or more PSs UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 17 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Wireless LAN The current Wireless LAN supported interface to the UN IVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is the UNIVERGE WL System Telephony Gateway The UNIVERGE WL System Telephony Gateway is a wireless telephony product that provides high quality packetized voice communications using Internet Protocol IP This configuration uses a Digital Interface from the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to integrate with the mobile handsets to emulate digital telephone sets to deliver advanced capabilities such as multiple line appearances and LCD display features Wireless LAN Handset The MH110 and MH120 Wireless Telephones are mobile handsets for workplace telephone systems The Wireless Telephones operates an 802 11b 802 11 for FH wireless Ethernet LAN providing users a wireless voice over IP VoIP extension By seamlessly integrating with the Telephone Gateway and the site PBX Wireless Telephone users are provided with high quality mobile voce communication throughout the workplace The Wireless Telephones gives users the freedom to roam throughout the workplace while providing all the features and functionality of a desk phone The Wireless Telephones reside on the wireless LAN with other wireless devices using Direct Sequence DSSS or F
134. 21 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless Communication System WCS NEC s wireless technology offers high system capacity proven system reliability high voice quality network integration investment protection into the future and extensive user mobility The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless Communication System WCS provides interface for Personal Station PS via a Zone Transceiver ZT When installing the WCS there are three types of Configuration Applications 1 Integrated Type Wired for Wireless The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides both PBX and WCS functions together 2 Adjunct Type 1 Analog PBX Interface The WCS is positioned as a behind system of the existing PBX linked by LC COT connection 3 Adjunct Type 2 CCIS Interface The WCS is positioned as a behind system of the existing PBX linked by CCIS Wired for Wireless This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to have the Wireless PBX feature The IPS provides several integrated features adding on the adjunctive configuration Service Conditions 1 The service conditions of each feature are the same as for the Single Line Telephone except for the following Calling Number Display PS Last Number Redial PS Speed Dial PS 2 The station number of a Dterm PS IIl can be assigned flexibly The limitation of the number and maximum digits depends on the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Analog PBX Interface This featur
135. 30 can be displayed in 1 of 4 different colors black red gold and neon blue in order to reflect the personality of the day The Dterm SP30 also allows for 3 different modes of operation Maximized mode Access to full line of softphone features such as application sharing member lists conference mode chatting capabilities Internet access and many others are just one click away Compact Mode L shaped user interface operating in a small footprint on the PC screen Compact view allows the softphone to remain active while another application window such as a Word document database file or email is the primary focus on the PC With the compact view the most popular features of the converged softphone are just a click away Task Mode The softphone can be minimized and shown as a task within a Microsoft Operating System While operating in this mode the softphone will output an audio notification to the user upon receiving an incoming call It will be up to the user to utilize the hot key in order to activate the Dterm SP30 application and answer the call ACD Mode The Dterm SP30 ACD client can support two operation modes ACD and Business The Business mode is the default mode When the ACD mode is configured a new set of function keys becomes available to the Dterm SP30 ACD user A popup menu is also available when in the ACD terminal mode While in ACD mode the Instant Messaging feature functions to the MY Line of the terminal not t
136. 32 data port is incorporated allowing the user to connect off premises RS 232 equipment to equipment at the Office Module location The Office Module emulates your telephone and the Remote Module emulates your NEC PBX Each module uses a V 90 internal modem operating in V 34 mode for the transmission of all signals between the two modules Network configurations that support V 34 modems should work well Through the use of soft keys the remote user signs on with a secured password When the extender is online a voice data connection is made through public facilities via an Analog line from the remote location to the office PBX system The Extender offers the flexibility for the user to operate in Continuous or Call On Demand modes The continuous mode maintains the connection until the remote user signs off The Call On Demand mode helps in avoiding continuous connection charges by only staying connected when a call is in progress Page 5 26 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Service Conditions for Dterm Analog EXT 911 calls should not be made via remote terminals since the telephone number at the PBX location is sent to the emergency center The user should use a separate line that is not connected to the Dterm EXT system If a dedicated line is used it should be an unlisted number in order to minimize busy signals No custom calling features such as Call Waiting or Cal
137. 323 IPT card and IP PAD card are required Jitter Control Dynamic Jitter Buffer Qos e TOS IP Precedence Quality of Service DiffServ LAN Interface 10BASE T 100BASE TX Auto Negotiation is available 100BASE TX is recommended Echo Canceller G 168 IP PAD Payload Size DtermlP CCIS 10 ms 40 ms Max voice channels per card Virtual IPT G 723 1 30 ms unit 10 ms 12 ch 20 ms 20 ch 30 ms 30 ch 40 ms 32 ch H 323 IPT 20 ms 40 ms 10 ms Maximum voice channels per card increments G 29 G 711 G 723 1 G 723 1 30 ms fixed 20 ms 6ch och 30 ms 8ch 7ch 40 ms 12ch 10ch PAD Control O dB to 16 dB 2 dB unit Setting is available per Location No O dB to 16 dB 2 dB unit O dB to 16 dB For connection via the IPT card LAN interface transmission modes DEE civDS Auto 100 Mbps fixed mode 10 Mbps fixed mode yp negotiation Full Duplex Half Duplex Full Duplex Half Duplex Az y yo MP M606 x Default 32IPLA 32IPLA A_ X Defaut X X l CX SIPLA x Default XxX _ __ X available not available Page 3 22 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights System Compliance HIPAA Summary The security standards set forth within HIPAA require encryption authentication and audit trail measures to safeguard patient medical information during electronic data interchange EDI transactions between healthcare provi
138. 32IPLA A 16VCTA A Connection Conditions Conditions Connection Conditions Required Bandwidth One way T 30 G711 Payload 40ms 150 kbps estimated T 30 G729a Payload 40ms Communication 23 6 Kbps FAX Payload 78byte speed 14 4Kbps No IP Header compression in Router T 30 G729a Payload 40ms Communication 16 6 Kbps FAX Payload 78byte speed 14 4Kbps with IP Header compression in Router e 8IPLA 24IPLA Connection Conditions Conditions Connection Conditions Required Bandwidth Required Bandwidth One way G 711 pass through Payload 40 ms 72 kbps FAX Payload 320 byte No IP Header compression in Router G 711 pass through Payload 40 ms 65 kbps FAX Payload 320 byte with IP Header compression in Router G 726 pass through Payload 40 ms 40 kbps FAX Payload 160 byte No IP Header compression in Router G 726 pass through Payload 40 ms 33 kbps FAX Payload 160 byte with IP Header compression in Router Note The data in the above tables does not include MAC Header Required bandwidth for Modem Connection pauiond IP Header Required Connection Conditions y compression in Bandwidth One a Router way 72 kbps 74 67 kbps G 711 pass through 80 kbps 1O0ms 96 kbps O ms OS 40 kbps 3Oms 42 67 kbps G 726 pass through CC 20ms 48 kbps 64 kbps 65 kbps 65 33 kbps G 711 pass through 66 kbps 68 kbps 33 kbps 33 33 kbps G 726 pass through 34 kbps 36 kbps
139. 65 gauge 22 ABAM twisted pair cable Maximum 400 m 1312 4 ft With 0 65 gauge 22 ABAM twisted pair cable Page 14 21 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN ISDN Primary Rate Interface ISDN is becoming a basic requirement for any PBX system sold today The UNIVERGE NEAx 2000 IPS supports many ISDN BRI PRI features and services AT amp T and Northern Telecom specifications are both supported by the IPS ISDN PRI trunks can use all of the same features of the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS that any DID or DOD type trunk can use For example ISDN PRI trunks can terminate to the PBX and use features such as Internal Automated Attendant DISA Attendant Overflow etc In a typical installation ISDN trunks will be terminated as DID type lines but the IPS also allows ISDN trunks to terminate as ring down type lines As this section will convey the UNIVERGE Neax 2000 IPS provides a very attractive ISDN PRI package ISDN FEATURE LIST CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTION CALLING PARTY RECOGNITION SERVICE DIRECT IN TERMINATION DIT CPN TO NETWORK PRESENT CPN TO TERMINATING USER DISPLAY DID ADDRESSING DID AND DOD ADDRESSING EVENT BASED CCIS SDN TERMINAL MEGACOM ACCESS WATS MEGACOM 800 SERVICE 800 WATS ULTRA WATS MULTIQUEST 900 SERVICE ADDRESS PRESENT TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION CPN TO NETWORK PRESENT _ _ _ o o CPN TO TERMINATING USER DISPLAY _ _ _ DID ADDRESSING _
140. A 1 per system SPN AP00B MRC C AP 1 per system SPN AP00B MRC F AP 1 per system PZ M606 A ETHER 1 per system RS RVS 4S CA C 1 per SMDR PMS RS NORM 4S CA A 1 per SMDR PMS RS PRT 4S CA A 1 per Printer PMS Terminal Serial 1 per system PMS Terminal over IP 1 per system SMDR Terminal 1 per system AAA Printer As required AAA MODEM As required IN Note Only one APOO at a time can be mounted in the system Page 10 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface System Outline The UNIVERGE vneax 2000 IPS is equipped with an Open Application Interface OAI to provide user applications through an external processor which transmits and receives the control signals via Ethernet interface on the MP The interface is supports TCP IP protocol Open Worx Attendant Statistics OpenWorX Statistics operates in conjunction with the Business Attendant System in order to provide near real time statistics about the operators and the queues A variety of information is gathered and stored in a database that allows for a multitude of differing reports With the power of Crystal Reports the user can then view the data with a web interface allowing for HTML PDF and RPT formats An additional purchase of Crystal Reports Viewer is required for the RPT format Below is a list of the types of reports the user can run Attendant Reports Attendant Call Summary Attendant Answer
141. A IP PAD E SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD B SPN 32IPLA IP PAD E SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD A Serles 3200 software or later X Series 3200 software or later SPN 32IPLA IP PAD C SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD A X Available Not available 4 The analog Media Converter used by 2400 IPX cannot be accommodated in 2000 IPS It is possible to connect facsimiles between 2400 IPX and 2000 IPS 5 A problem may occur such as expected transmission speed is not obtained or not connectable depending on a facsimile model even if it supports T 30 6 Ifa Super G3 facsimile is used the transmission speed will be equivalent to G3 7 Ifa facsimile with Error Correction Mode ECM function is used ECM does not work 8 Connection speed for Modem over IP are a G 711 Pass through 24kbps 14kbps b G726 Pass though 14 4kbps 9 6kbps Note Due to many factors these speed are not guaranteed and an evaluation is suggested before actual use Page 13 22 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Required Equipment for FAX or Modem over IP item Description Stock oy memes 1 PZ M606 A 151492 ee On board Ethernet Interface Card ETHERNET TCP IP 2 SPN 32IPLAA IP PAD E 153158 2 FP IP Interface Card for IP PAD w o FP Max 2 w FP Max 2 FP Max 8 Sys 3 SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD B 153136 2 32IPLA 16ch Codec Card for IP PAD Option Max 2 32IPLA Card ES SPN BIPLA IP
142. ASE TX is recommended ee LAN Interface Echo Canceller IP PAD Payload DtermIP Size CCIS Virtual IPT 321PLA DtermIP PAD Control Page 14 20 Specifications item a ee G 29a G 723 1 G 711 FAX Relay Method Pass through G 711 G 726 H 245 H 245 H 323 10 ms 40 ms G 723 1 30 ms fixed 10 ms 40 ms G 723 1 30 ms fixed 20 ms 40 ms 10 ms increments G 723 1 30 ms fixed AR Am O dB to 16 dB O dB to 12 dB America For North America Outside North LAA UA 8 Kbps CS ACELP 5 3 6 3 Kbps MP MLQ ACELP 64 Kbps PCM G3 FAX up to 14 4 Kbps Super G3 Reciprocal Not allowed FAX communication with H 323 Not available PN 32IPLA IPPAD card PN 8IPLA IP PAD card is not available PN 8IPLA IP PAD card PN 32IPLA IPPAD card is not available DtermlP to DtermIP connection DtermIP to IP PAD connection Maximum voice channels per card G 729a_ G 711 G 723 1 10 ms 12 ch 12ch 20 ms 20 ch 20ch 30 ms 30 ch 30ch 24ch 40 ms 32 ch 32ch _ Maximum voice channels per card G 729a G 711 G 723 1 10 ms 20ch 20ch 20 ms 32ch 32ch 30 ms 32ch 32ch 24ch 40 ms 32ch 32ch Maximum voice channels per card G 29a G711 G 723 1 20 ms 6ch och Tch 8ch 10ch 30 ms 8ch 40 ms 12ch O dB to 16 dB 2 dB increments Setting is available per Location No O dB to 16 dB 2 dB increments For connection betwee
143. Assign by CMOB Y 20 gt 00 Base Port 1024 65534 Assign by CMOB Y 20 gt 01 Port for Client PBX UDP el Be ero ee Select by Round Robin method Use from lowest in blank port For H 323 IP Trunk H a 0 RAS ar Control For Voice Control Voice Packet 2000 IPS Main Site Port for Remote PIM 2000 IPS Control UDP Main Site 2000 IPS Main Site UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 1024 65534 Assign by CMOB Y 10 gt 70 DHM Self Port Communication port between the Main Site and Remote Site Common Port Port per Remote Site MP MP 3300 Remote Site Port per Remote Site No Setting data of CMOB Y 10 gt 70 Site No 1024 65534 Assign by CMOB Y 10 gt 00 59 Virtual FP No of Remote Site Port per Remote Site MP FP 50000 FP AP No of Remote Site x 64 Page 13 35 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP System Conditions Limitations Peer to Peer IP Limitations Add on Module Dterm IP does not support Add on Module feature Analog Port Adapters When the IPW 2U unit is attached with a Dterm Series E terminal other optional adapters except for ADA U Unit cannot be attached with the Dterm Series E terminal Back Ground Music BGM Service features requiring continuous voice transmission such as Background Music feature cannot be used because the traffic may reduce overall performance of the Local Area Network LAN Internal Zone Paging There is
144. Business Receptionist they must manually initiate it from their Dterm However the user may create a special speed dial key instead In the PBX the user must create a trunk access dial string Using LCR a dial string can directly access the trunk and provide voice path to the paging system For example the user creates the number 19 in their LCR to access trunk 1 in route 1 This trunk is terminated to the overhead paging Now when the attendant hits their speed dial to dial 19 they will be able to overhead page Page 11 6 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface BAS Call Recording and Playback Apart from the directory another powerful feature integrated into the Business Receptionist client is the ability to record conversations and playback greetings over the telephone With the addition of a Dterm Play Record Module the client will be able to automatically record voice conversations and instruct the software to save the last specified number of conversations Conversations are saved as wav files which are time amp date stamped and rotated in a circular buffer When it is determined that a call needs to be saved the operator simply presses the Save Recordings button and the selected call is automatically saved Conversely the operator can save a set of greetings to be played back immediately every time the phone is answered via the Business Receptionist Greetings pla
145. C DC Power Card Remarks PZ PW121 1 per PIM AC DC Power Supply Input 100 V 200 V Output 5 V 27 V 90V CR DC DC Power Unit The DC DC Power Unit is mounted under the AC DC Power Card and generates 48 V power for the circuit cards that need such power DC DC 48V Power Card Name Code Qty Remarks PZ PW122 1 per PIM DC DC Power Supply Input 27 V Output 48 V Battery Backup Internal Short term option For customers requiring battery backup short term and or long term options are available Two 3 4AH batteries are required per PIM and installed inside of each PIM Backup time is approx 30 minutes when PHS Wireless PS is not accommodated and approx 10 minutes when PHS Wireless PS is accommodated in the system Internal Battery Option Name Code ay Remarks PWR CA A 1 per 2 PIM s DC Power Cable 27v input BATT CA INT 1 per PIM Internal Battery Cable External Long term option Two 24AH batteries are required per each 2 PIM s and installed inside of Battery Module in a stack basis Backup time is approx 3 hours when PHS Wireless PS is not accommodated and approx 2 hours when PHS Wireless PS is accommodated in the system The batteries are varied depending on the requested backup time The battery shall be locally provided External Battery Option NameCode Qty Remarks PWR CA A No of PIM 1 up to 4PIM DC Power Cable 27v input No of PIM 2 5 to 8PIM BAT
146. C was created out of a joint venture between Western Electric from America and a Japanese investment group Japan s first joint venture combined the technology and manufacturing techniques of the Bell Company with the vision of Japanese investors to form one of the oldest established telecommunications companies in the world NEC is one of only a small number of companies within the world that have successfully pioneered technology and delivered products within every major evolution of business communications systems NEC recognized as a worldwide leader in high technology is one of the few companies capable of offering a full spectrum of products and systems in computers communications and semiconductor devices NEC first established a United States presence over 40 years ago when it opened a sales office in New York in 1963 Since that time NEC has broadened its operations in the United States by expanding into manufacturing research and software development operations by employing 7 000 people and by establishing extensive marketing sales and service networks nationwide with revenues exceeding 5 9 billion In 1993 NEC introduced a new corporate logo WEL The logo represented the beginning of a dynamic era in the life of a company with a distinguished past The changing dynamics of domestic and international markets mandate that the world s leading companies evolve with those changes In response to this evolution NEC is building a more
147. CIS This feature allows calls to an inoperative number through a CCIS trunk to be intercepted and automatically routed to a recorded announcement informing the caller that an inoperative number was dialed and giving the Listed Directory Number for information Call Forwarding Override CCIS This feature allows a target station user Station A to call a station Station B that has set Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS Call Processing Indication CCIS This feature provides visual indications of all CCIS calls being processed or waiting processing at the Attendant Console Call Transfer All Calls CCIS This feature allows a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing Central Office intra office and inter office calls to another station in the CCIS network without Attendant assistance Call Transfer Attendant CCIS This feature permits a station user while connected to a CCIS network call to transfer a call to an Attendant Console via the CCIS network Called Station Status Display CCIS This service feature provides on the LCD display of the calling Multiline Terminal a display of the called station status of the remote office within the CCIS network Calling Name Display CCIS This feature permits the station name of a calling or called party at another switching office through the CCIS network to be displayed either on a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console Page 9 36 Calling Number Disp
148. Calling Party Name Original CPN Original CPName Redirecting Number Redirecting Name Redirection Number Redirection Name UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Connected Party Number Connected Party Name User To User Message Associated UUI Network Ring Again Network Message Waiting Message Waiting Indicator X Message Waiting Activation X X Feature Available NOT Available X X X X X X X X X X Xx gt X lt Note 1 The Siemens EWSD offers PRI support via both a National ISDN Bellcore and an AT amp T Custom implementation The above information pertains to the Custom implementation only NTI has no National ISDN support Although this interface is based on the AT amp T 5ESS NEC products have not been tested on the EWSD Please contact NEC Product Management for any potential sales requiring PRI connection via the EWSD Custom interface Note 2 Support for Operator Access by the AT amp T and NTI systems are realized in different ways The NEAX2000 supports the AT amp T implementation Page 15 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN Local Exchange Carrier Network Data Services and Features UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Compatibility SERVICES AND FEATURES LEC CARRIERS Call By Call Service Selection AT amp T NTI SIEMENS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS SWITCHED DATA SESS DMS100 EWSD 64 kbps Clear Channel X X X 64 kbps Restricted X X 5 56
149. Centralized System Maintenance and Administration occccocncccnnnccncconcncocncnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnonannnonononcnnns 13 Centralized Call Accounting Billing Systems occoocccconccconcccncnocncnonocnnnonanocnnnonanonannonnnonnnnnnanonannnnos 14 Centralized Voice Processing Messaging cccoccococncccnoconncocnnoccnnnnnonononnnnononnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnenaninnas 15 Centrallzea Attendant Consoles ot O ES 15 UnitorirNumberna Pla Sica ista 16 COIS Feature Oe a gt g A iaa 16 System E apa ei ca de ra e 18 FREQUIFEO EQUIP nati A A Ad 19 I gga OL e164 ere lO 9 kone ee erent er nee te aa cr On OE a eee ee 20 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN cccecceecsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeensneeeeeeseeooeseenseeesssooes 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interlace e oia E 1 PRISENMCES S Fedre ogee ee Pe A ee ee nee 1 O A 0 ene eeat are ce eee O Mere eae eee ene ee T BUSINESS Feature Ss A as 8 ISDN Network Requirements for Layer One 1 cooccccccnccccncccnconcccocncconcnnnnnonnonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnncnnns 9 Supported Network Services Trunk provisioned ONly ooocccocccoccccocnccccncocncnocncncnconnnonnnnnnnnonononaninnnoss 9 ISON PR SPECIES o 10 ISDN Basic Rate Interface BR eesosa a E E E 17 ISDN Basic Rate Interface BR dida e REE 18 BOCUMENAUON asa a 21 Chapter 1G Wireless SUSTO acaricio E ae Ni 1 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Wireless Communication System WCS cc cccccsececeeeeesee
150. Console or the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument using the DNDOVR key Do Not Disturb is automatically cleared when Check Out is performed Depending on system programming an incoming call addressed to a station in DND condition is routed to one of the following on a per tenant basis o Reorder tone o Attendant Console o A pre assigned station Call Forwarding Busy settings by stations in DND will result in calls being forwarded even if the stations are idle Do Not Disturb System This feature simultaneously restricts incoming calls to a pre assigned group of stations by operation from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments Attendant Consoles and Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments can use the DND OVR key to override this Do Not Disturb setting Stations are assigned to the Do Not Disturb DND Group in Class of Service Calls to extensions whose stations are in Do Not Disturb will receive reorder tone The station in Do Not Disturb can originate calls in the normal manner Verification of stations in Do Not Disturb is possible from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument and Attendant Consoles Only Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments and Attendant Consoles have the ability to place a group of stations in Do Not Disturb There is only one group available and the stations within the group are programmed in system data There is no limitation on the number of stations in the group A station included in a DND group retains the a
151. D A control Momentary Open 4 Circuits On Board power 80V is included Loop Resistance Max 600o0hms including telephone set 2 Line Analog Universal Trunk 2 Line Long Line Circuit with PFT PN AUCA Loop resistance max 25000hms LLC Two reverse circuits is included On Board power 48V is included 4 Long Line Analog Station Card Works in either mode Long Line Station Requires Ferrite Core Caller ID Requires PN 4RSTF A Loop Resistance Max 25000hms including telephone set PZ PW122 is required Can not be used in IPS DM or IPS DMR PN 4LLCB Page 4 8 NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Line Trunk LT Cards Cont Function Name Port Remarks _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 Line ISDN Line Circuit Card e Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals e Occupies eight time slots per one card ISDN Station SPN 2ILCA 8 line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i E III Dterm Elite IPK DSS Console DESKCON 27 V version two wire type PN 8DLCL 8 line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series PN 8DLCP E Il DSS Console DESKCON 27 V version 2 wire type 4 line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series E Dterm Elite DSS Console DESKCON 27 V version 2 wire type Provides Line Test function PN 4DLCM 4 line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series Datalsiaton praoica a Y5 BSS Console DESKCON Provide
152. DMR locations CCIS requires each location to have separate software and applications CCIS over IP can be combined with Remote PIM over IP to accommodate larger network configurations Up to 255 host sites can be connected via CCIS each host site can have up to 15 Remote PIM over IP locations User Mobility User Continuance allows a user to relocate from one site to another then login using the same station number and password User Mobility User Continuance is only available to the 2000 IPS in a Remote PIM network using a DtermIP terminal Service Conditions 1 It is a requirement that the same software version be loaded in the Main Site and All Remote Sites 2 Host site can be an IPS IPS DM or IPS Retro system Main plus Remote PIM over IP is available in any combination of the following CPUs Main Site CP24 A B C CP27 A CP26 A CP28 A Remote Site CP31 A B C CP24 A B C CP27 A CP26 A CP28 A Note The CP27 CP28 can not be used as Backup CPU system in a Remote PIM 3 Software and Key FD for the whole system must be loaded at the Main Site No software or key s can be loaded into the Remote Site 4 All system data changes for the whole system must be performed in the Main Site No system data changes can be done in the Remote Site 5 A TCP IP network is required between the Main Site and Remote Site A closed and bandwidth guaranteed network is preferable such as IP VPN layer 3 VPN or wide area Ethernet service layer 2
153. DN 2BRT card 14 23 4BRT card 6 12 18 24 24 24 24 24 Pte 2 apa sora O E IIA 3 Party Conference Max 16 conference groups per system 6 Party Max 4 conference groups per system oT ean SOnicience 10 Party Max 2 conference groups per system 32 Party Conference Max 8 conference group per system Built in Router Max 8 cards per PIM DTMF Sender Max 32 circuits per a Attendant Attendant Consoles UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 19 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction IPS System Capacity Dual MP System Cont d Cs ma mo pma pms o emo ma Attendant Terminal Dterm ATT Position Max 8 sets per system Max 2 Interface ports RS232 Max 1 interface port IP per system Max 1 Interface port RS232 f PIM for R Remote PIM over IP Number o or Remote pio soesndlia nea Sites DID Dial Conversion 1000 Authorization Code Forced Account Code Remote Access to System DISA Code Message Reminder Set Name Display Guest Name Display Speed Calling Station Station Speed Dial Set MP built in SMDR Call Record Note Capacity is for Main site only For Total System Capacity see IP Remote Network System Capacity Page 1 20 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction IPS DM IPS DML System Capacit Capacity Per MC LT card Note 1 No of ports Max 256 ports per system AP card Noofcards 7 a
154. DOT RPM M B Coy RICO K O Note Any combination of the above cards is allowed with a limit of 256 trunks per system UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Page 6 1 Chapter 6 Trunking Trunk Parameters Trunk Impedance 600 900 ohms selectable by programming Trunk Resistance Characteristics Central Office Trunk 1200 maximum Trunk Set Up Procedure o Loop Start o Ground start o Wink Start o Ring Down o EGM Signaling Release and Incoming Detect Immediate Start and Timing Variable Start Trunk Card Specifications PN 4COTB This card provides 4 Loop Ground Start trunks with disconnect supervision mounts in any PIM 0 to 7 and supports the following interface mixed in any combination Interface for standard Analog trunks Centrex type lines Interface card for CO ring down trunks Interface with 4 paging equipment lines Interface with external music announcement source for Music On Hold feature PN 8COTS This card provides 8 Loop Ground Start trunks with disconnect supervision and mounts in any PIM 0 to 7 and supports the following interface Interface with 8 CO lines Interface with 8 paging equipment lines Interface with external music announcement source for Music On Hold feature The above interfaces can be mixed on to one card in any combination PN 4COTG This card is used to provide the system with Caller ID Class SM This feature requires the SPN 4RSTC
155. Dell GX280 Level Il Dell PE2800 CPU Type Speed Pentium 4 2 8GHz Xeon 2 8GHz Dual CPUs RAM Installed max 512GB 4GB 512GB 6GB PCI Slots voltage 3 slots total all are PCI 5 5 slots total 4 PCI X J Volt 3 3Volt and 1 PCI 5Volt cose Rack Mount Not Available Optional Cabinet Color Max Voice Port Capacity Note 48 Analog or Digital 96 Analog or 64Digital 42 5 cm 44 5 cm 18 1 cm 23 0 cm 44 7 cm 62 3 cm 12 7 kg configuration 10 to 35 C 10 to 35 C Storage Temperature 40 to 65 C 40 to 65 C 40 to 149 F 40 to 149 F Relative humidity 20 to 80 non 20 to 80 non condensing condensing Note may require Expansion Chassis UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 11 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Additional Hardware Components Expansion Chassis Available in a 7 slot PCI form factor the Expansion Chassis provide additional card slots for voice or fax cards Note The Expansion Chassis can be added to any NEC provided platform NEC Associate assumes all responsibility of PCI Expansion Chassis compatibility with all other Associate provided hardware Up to two expansion chassis may be connected to a Level II or equivalent server platform ActiveFax Board The VFX 41JCT LS fax card provides 4 fax ports on a single PCI Card ActiveFax software licenses are not included and are sold separately Tape Backup The tape ba
156. Destination Code RSC and Toll Data Index TDI The TDI can be assigned as Connection is restricted Connection is allowed 3 6 Digit toll restriction or C O operator call When 3 6 Digit toll restriction is used the system will ask what digit to check the restriction upon 3rd or 6th 3 6 Digit Toll Restriction 3 6 Digit Toll allows restrictions to be assigned starting with a specific digit place in the dialed number This command will request the Route Number RSC Digit Code 3 or 6 digits and whether it is allowed or restricted For example if wish to restrict stations with an RSC of 4 from dialing 555 numbers only if a specific route Route n gets chosen in the LCR sequence In the Toll Restriction data assignment would be to check the 6th digit 9 1 201 5XX XXXX In the 3 6 digit toll table assign Route n RSC4 DC 555 RES 0 restricted Priority Restriction Class These provide 8 levels of control over a user s route access eligibility The system allows a call to reach its destination if the RSC is greater than or equal to the Priority Restriction Class of the outgoing trunk group route UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 6 9 Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Attendant Console SN716 The Attendant Console SN716 DESKCON has an ergonomic design and provides full access to all PBX Console features The SN716 DESKCON uses the same interface cards as the dig
157. E Max 60 sec per channel Announcement Trunk PN 4DATC 4 circuit Digital Announcement Trunk Max 120 sec per channel Power Failure ES a 2 line Tone Music Source Interface Card e Used for BGM or Music on Hold e Provides two jacks for an external tone music source 8 line Power Failure Transfer Card e Mounted in PFT slot of PIM e One card per PIM Transfer PN AUCA 2 Line Analog Universal Trunk card that provides 2 Lines of Power Failure Transfer SPN IPTB A SPN 4VCTI A IP Trunk SPN IPTB B SPN 4VCTI B Page 4 12 IP Trunk card for VoIP CCIS p mp This card is used together with a max of four PN 4VCT cards 16 channels for connection with 2000 2400 non peer to peer connection 1 card PIM 8 cards Max 127ch system 4 channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk Voice compression protocols e G 723 1 G 729a G 711 e FAX 14 4 Kbps DTMF signals e Used with PN IPTB card VoIP H 323 IP Trunk card Supports up to 12 channels G 729a PAYLOAD 40ms Also requires CCIS and IPT key per IPTB and NEC GK1000 software Has one RJ45 connectors for 10 100 Ethernet Fast Ethernet to router 4 channel voice translator CODEC card for H 323 includes BUS cable Voice compression G729A G723 G711 Max 3 VCT s per SPN IPTB B NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Line Trunk LT Cards Cont Wireless Zone Transceiver SPN 4CSIA interface Fiber Optic
158. EAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 17 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Customized Announcements QueWorX can be configured with up to 89 custom announcements These announcements are recorded in Que WorX and invoke utilizing the Call Control Vectors of the CallCenterWorX application with the IVR Announcement command Customizable Reports The Reports can be customized using the default reports as templates The modified reports can be saved for later use Professional Services for Que WorX While QueWorX provides an advanced set of features some customers will require applications specific to their contact center that are outside the scope of QueWorX With hundreds of successful solutions deployed Professional Services has developed many custom solutions that allow us to provide Call Center CTl and speech applications that meet the customer s business needs and demands Requests for these applications can be forwarded to your NEC representative who will work with NEC Professional Services to help define the requirements of unique applications or you may contact Professional Services via ProServ necunified com Page 12 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice over IP VoIP VoIP Solutions The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS Internet Protocol Server is a communication system that can convert voice signals into IP packets and
159. FP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Module and Installation Hardware The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is comprised of up to 8 Port Interface Modules PIM s For installing the PIM s in various installation methods additional installation hardware is required Modules 1 Port Interface Module PIM A PIM provides 13 card slots for common control Line Trunk LT and Application Processor AP cards It also houses an AC DC Power Supply DC DC Power Supply for 48V and batteries for protection from short term about 30 min power interruption Four champ connectors for Line Trunk LTC O to 3 are located at the lower front side of the PIM A PIM provides a maximum of 12 card slots for Line Trunk LT and Application Processor AP cards At maximum configuration the system is comprised of 8 PIM s There are two types of PIM PIMMJ and PIMMK depending on the system type as follows Single MP System PIM MJ Used for PIM 0 7 Used for PIM 1 7 PIM MK Used for PIM 0 PIM MJ PIM3 PIM MJ PIM7 PIM MJ PIM3 PIM MJ PIM7 PIM MJ PIM2 PIM MJ PIM6 PIM MJ PIM2 PIM MJ PIM6 PIM MJ PIM1 PIM MJ PIM5 PIM MJ PIM1 PIM MJ PIM5 PIM MJ PIMO PIM MJ PIM4 PIM MK PIMO PIM MJ PIM4 Single MP System Dual MP System Unit Configuration 2 Battery Module BATTMH The BATTM is an optional module for installing optional long term about 3 hours backup batteries The BATTM is designed t
160. GE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 20 1 Issue 6
161. Guide Navigator Reports Manual Navigator Real Time Screen Manual CallCenterWorX ACD User Guide ACD Terminals With the Dterm Series i E ACD terminals enjoy the convenience of having the most frequently used ACD function keys silk screened right on the terminal Availability The 32 button Series E ACD terminals are available in soft white or black User Guides and spare parts are also available DTP 32DA 1 WH DTP 32DA 1 BK i de Dterm Series E Supervisor User Guide 10 pack Dterm Series E Agent Console User Guide 10 pack Detachable dial pads are available for Dterm Series and Dterm IP instruments in an ACD environment BS ACD R Dial pad for ACD Available in black and white UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 9 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Q Master 3 1 Q Master is a scalable contact center solution offering high end functionality at a reasonable price Q Master is completely modular allowing contact center management to select the components that best meet operational and budgetary requirements while retaining the flexibility to add additional modules in the future One of the key advantages of this is the range and scalability of the solutions This is the first contact center application available that is capable of providing the same functionality to end users regardless of whether they deploy a small medium or large PBX or Key system us
162. Handsfree operation for both internal and external calls No optional Handsfree Unit is required I Hold l Use Indication Multiline Terminals provide indication of which line keys have been placed on Hold or are in use by that Multiline Terminal The LED associated with the line key will give the appropriate indication Microphone Control All Multiline Terminals are equipped with a Microphone Control button with an associated LED Multiple Line Operation This feature allows for the appearance of multiple lines on the Flexible Line Keys and feature keys of all Multiline Terminals UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Mute Key This feature allows the distant extension user of a station user that presses a mute key during conversation not to hear the station user s voice though the station user can hear the distant extension user s voice By pressing the mute key again the mute status returns to original conversation My Line Number Display This feature allows the display of the Prime Extension in the LCD display of the Multiline Terminal during an Idle state Preset Dialing This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to prepare and verify a number in the display on the LCD before dialing When a wrong number is entered the user can correct the number before originating the call Prime Line Pickup This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to go o
163. IP based on a peer to peer connection basis and the IP stations can communicate with legacy stations and trunks TDM based via IPPAD IP Packet Assembler Disassembler The IP stations provide users with all features currently available in Dterm Series E Series i terminals The following figure shows a typical network configuration using IP stations 2000 TPS 2000 IPS i Ptn ER i ar _ 11323 GK ol mie E Handler IA IO Ls MN Switching Hub 100Mbps iR outer oe A O MATWorX DHCP Server outer P Enabled DD E Client PC ae os i Sa O IF Enabled D Clicnt PC IF Enabled Db UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 3 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Peer to Peer Connections between IP Enabled Dterm The IP stations can communicate with other IP stations over the LAN on a peer to peer connection basis Call control is provided by the Main Processor MP with Ethernet adapter card and voice packets are transmitted between IP stations over the LAN not through Time Division Switch Voice compression of G 729a 8 kbps and G 723 1 5 3 kbps 6 3 kbps is available for its connections wey Call Control Signal THSw Protocol y PROTIMS LAN Ste ire r E IP Enabled D Peer to Peer Connections over CCIS Networking via IP The IP stations can communica
164. ITR 32D 3 WH ITR 32D 3 BBK UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 3 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Call Handling Features Four Local Soft Key Controls detail functions are dependent on PBX Large Message Waiting LED 24 Character 3 Line LCD Built in Headset Jack Connector Note Speed Dial DSS Buttons Programmable Line Keys with 2 Color LED Eleven Dedicated Function Keys Feature Recall Conf Redial Hold Transfer Answer Speaker MIC Directory and Message Note Built in Half Duplex Hands free Unit Note DTR 4D 1 does not include headset jack or directory and message functions Convergence Features Two 10 100 full duplex Ethernet ports One which connects the Dterm IP to the local Ethernet Network the other provides connectivity for a local workstation Three types of powering options o Local AC adapter o CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol power for those infrastructures with an installed base of Cisco gear o Spare pair power across the Ethernet network Transportable QoS which follows the user no matter where they log in o Multiple Voice Coding support which automatically negotiates to a common setting o G 711 providing an international standard for encoding decoding telephony signals on a 64 Kbps Non compressed channel o It also supports the compression algorithms G 729A 8Kbps and G 723 1 5 3 6 3 Kbps Line Conditions Max 328 ft between Ether IP
165. IVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Dterm Series E Specifications Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Series E Digital Terminals DTP DCU 60 pealure rupeten 2DT 8 8D 16D 32D Add On DSS Housing color White White or Black Two colors LED Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Line Feature keys 2 8 8 16 16 48 ext 60 One touch keys None None None None 16 12 None Fixed feature keys 8 8 8 8 8 None None REDE Or neta te N A N A 24 24 24 N A N A per line on display pet ones on N A N A 3 3 3 N A N A display Volume Control Speakerphone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Headset No Yes Yes Yes Yes Ring Volume Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A LCD Contrast N A N A Yes Yes Yes Soft keys N A N A Yes Yes Yes N A N A Off hook ring on off key No No Yes Yes Yes N A N A Mute on off key No No Yes Yes Yes N A N A Microphone on off key No No Yes Yes Yes N A N A Headset on off key No No Yes Yes Yes N A N A Built in speakerphone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A Built in headset jack No Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A Built in wall mount unit Optional Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes AC adapter required Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Yes Yes Data Adapter No No No No No N A N A Message Waiting Lamp Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A poe O CORSO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A supported ADA supported No Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A APR supported No Yes Yes Yes Y
166. If bandwidth is a priority you will need to employ G 729A Page 13 30 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Network Consideration There are several network considerations that must be met before deployment of IP Telephony These items are The network must support the Internet Protocol and the local interface must meet 802 3 Ethernet standards t is recommended that the managed network be based on Switched Fast Ethernet environment for IP telephony Packet Delay or Latency one way should be less than 100 milliseconds optimal with a maximum of 250 milliseconds one way Jitter or out of sequence packets should be between 10 150 milliseconds optimal with a maximum of 300 milliseconds while packet loss of 1 or less is recommended with the maximum of 3 from end to end Network Bandwidth Network bandwidth requirements are based on the total number of IP trunks or IP stations installed in the PBX The multiple algorithms available the bandwidth needed for a voice call out to an IP network can range from 10 7 Kbps to 96 Kbps The most common algorithm used for NEAX IP trunks is G 729A which allows the voice to be compressed to 8KBps Once the layer 3 IP overhead is added to the voice payload the approximate bandwidth is 16KBps for a single voice stream out of the PBX to an IP network This bandwidth calculation does not include layer 2 overhead and will
167. Indications Location Key or Lamp Basic The attendant answers the call associated to the particular loops Loop keys are usually LLG Loop pale ey used to reenter to held calls answer automatic recalls Steady green lamp indicates attendant connected to the loop or called station has Loop Lamp Lamp answered Flashing green lamp indicates call On A Per one per loop waiting to be answered Steady red lamp indicates call party busy Flashing red lamp indicates call held at the console LIB L6B Loop Lamp Basic Lamp Flashing red lamp indicates automatic recall B one per loop has been activated Allows the attendant to k Process incoming calls Push button Dial Push uoni Basic Key s TE Dial m Originate calls Activate various service features Allows the attendant to speak with the calling party The associated lamp lights when the Source Basic Key amp Lamp attendant is connected The source trunk station number will be shown in the number display field Allows the attendant to speak with the called party The associated lamp lights when the DEST Destination Basic Key amp Lamp attendant is connected The destination station trunk number will be shown in the number display field Allows the attendant to join in a three way conference with the calling and called parties a pS past my When connection is established both SRC and DEST lamps will light Allows the attendant to Disconnect the calling source or called par
168. Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Busy Verification CCIS This feature permits an Attendant via the Attendant Console on the 2400 IPX or the 2000 IPS to interrupt a busy station s call at another switching office connected through CCIS Call Back CCIS This feature provides inter office Call Back A station that has dialed a busy station at another office can set Call Back CCIS by dialing a feature access code When this feature has been set the setting station will ring as soon as the busy station becomes available Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS This feature permits all calls destined for a particular station to be routed to another station or to an Attendant Console in another office in the CCIS network regardless of the status busy or idle of the called station The activation and cancellation of this feature may be accomplished by either the station user or an Attendant Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS This feature permits a call to a busy station to be immediately forwarded to a pre designated station or to an Attendant Console in another office in the CCIS network Call Forwarding Don t Answer CCIS This feature permits a call to an unanswered station to be forwarded to a pre designated station or to an Attendant Console in another office when the called station does not answer after a predetermined time period Page 9 35 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Call Forwarding Intercept C
169. Line Telephone Multiline Terminal DID E amp M Ring Down analog T1 tandem calls The data calls are transmitted via the regular ISDN network The Peg Count the number of originating call from the ISDN trunk is counted when using the ISDN line for the virtual tie line by route basis Billing information of the virtual tie line using the ISDN line is treated as regular tie line calls Billing information of the virtual tie line using the ISDN line is treated on tandem calls The voice channel of the virtual tie line is released at a programmable time after the call finishes The CCH Common Channel Handler card is required for providing Event Based CCIS 0 For Event Based CCIS using PRI the following services must be ordered from Telco on the PRI Span Each B channel must be capable of making and receiving 64K voice calls Each B channel must be capable of making and receiving 64k Unrestricted Digital Data calls The ISDN PRI span must be ordered with ISDN Indial DID service 11 The PRI trunks should be ordered with the following components included Protocol must be National ISDN 1 Calling and Called Party Sub Address NIUF Capability Package S Two B channels capable of Voice and Data simultaneously on both B channels Two Directory numbers each with a SPID 12 For any feature that requires a tandem connection Call Forward CCIS etc additional Telco BRI circuits are required More than one BRI trunk is required to allow calls
170. MODULAR 128 IP Ports CHASSIS 128 IP Ports 56 8 Virtual LT ports LT ports 56 8 Virtual ue 56 8 Virtual LT ports LT ports LT ports MC 0 256 AP Ports per System MODULAR CHASSIS Software Port Allocation Page 2 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Modular Chassis MC Installation The MODULAR CHASSIS can be installed on the desktop or into the 19 inch rack only Modular Chassis MC and Bracket The following tables show the name and specification number of MODULAR CHASSIS and bracket The bracket is selected depending on the installation method Desktop or 19 Rack Modular Chassis Description Qty Remarks SN 1737 IPSMJ Modular Chassis With Out RGU Molded Cover Bracket Description Qy Remarks RACK MOUNT KIT U 1 Modular Chassis for 19 rack mounting installation JOINT BRACKET KIT U N 1 Expansion Modular Chassis for desktop setting installation Cabling BUS Cable AC Cord Desorption ty Remarks BUS 0 4 CA X 1 Expansion MODULAR CHASSIS BUS cable for 8 Slot Chassis l BUS cable for connection between BUS 0 4 CA CHG 1 Expansion MODULAR CHASSIS 6 Slot and 8 Slot Chassis AC CORD E U 1 per MODULAR CHASSIS AC Cord Note When expanding an existing 6 slot Chassis only a two chassis configuration is supported and the 6 slot chassis must be PIM 0 PFT and Battery cable PFT and Battery connect
171. MOTE PIM B IPS IPS UNIV PIMMJ UA ICS VS BASE C UA PN CP24 C PZ M606 A SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C DMR Package for Remote PIM Provides DM Chassis for Remote PIM over IP The 8IPLA PAD card is provided Remote PIM Site License required IPS Package for Remote PIM Provides IPS PIM that can be used as Remote PIM over IP Remote PIM Site License required UNIV IPS DMR Expansion Module Adds another DM PIMMF Modular Chassis to IPS DM E UNIV PIMMJ AC CORD E U Rack Mount Kit Joint Bracket Kit BUS 0 4 CA PA 24 Port Patch Panel provide five card slots for 56 additional TDM ports UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 2 17 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Software Keys Licenses The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS systems offer both TDM Software Keys and Peer to Peer IP Seat Licenses which are designed with modularity in mind This approach allows customers a greater degree of cost control for new installations and for upgrades to features capacities and software series Description _____ ______________Remaks Basic Business Hotel Motel Features for 64 LT Ports 5 T1 s E1 s 5 ISDN PRI DCH s 48 ISDN BRI 64 Port Sys Software Trunks NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Key Keeper Parent Capacity Option Key Keeper FD Floppy Disk that holds selected Key files from below Capacity Option used w Key Keeper LT 64 Port Expands LT Ports from 64 to 1020 Ports
172. NEAXMail AD 64 system Status Monitor The Status Monitor utility monitors the voice messaging system as it answers and routes calls and it dials phone numbers to deliver messages or turn on message waiting indicators The Status Monitor utility displays any error messages for ports The Status Monitor utility can also be used to reset ports if they become unable to answer or place calls Disk full warning When the number of minutes of message storage left on the system is equal to or less than a value specified by the system manager the system asks subscribers to delete unnecessary messages On line reports NEAXMail AD 64 can provide detailed information regarding an organization s incoming telephone calls The information generated in reports can be used to help make decisions about the organization such as staffing levels productivity and telephone equipment needs Reports can be viewed on the screen or printed on a printer connected to the voice processing system Reports can also be copied to files and imported into many word processing database and spreadsheet programs There are five types of on line reports usage reports directory reports busy ports report call log and error log Usage reports These reports give an indication of how much the voice messaging system is being used over time These reports can be run for an individual guest subscriber extension number or system ID Usage of the entire voice messaging system can als
173. NIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 13 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Universal Slot One PIM provides 12 card slots for Line Trunk LT Also these card slots can be used for Application Processor AP cards without complicated limitations As this makes easy quotation and installation more number of AP cards can be mounted in one PIM DC DC Power Supply for 48V The PIM houses optional DC DC Power Supply for the cards which require 48V power such as CSI card used for interface of Cell Station CS of wireless system Since this power supply is mounted in the space under the AC DC power additional Power Module card slots are not required Extended Application Processor AP Port Capacity The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a maximum of 256 AP ports and it is independent of the 512 physical ports for legacy Line Trunk LT therefore more AP cards can be used in the system such as 11 E1 digital link etc Dual MP System The system complies with dual control system on Main Processor Note Since the system employs Cold Standby processing in MP changeover the calls in progress are terminated as a result of the MP changeover Also during the MP changeover the call originating receiving and service feature access are not effective lt takes about 30 to 60 seconds to complete the MP changeover UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model is equ
174. Number Redial This feature allows users to redial the last station to station or outside number they dialed using a feature access key or a feature access code This is useful when the called station is busy or does not answer Least Cost Routing 3 6 Digit This service feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to be programmed to route outgoing calls over the most economical facility WATS FX DDD Based on the individual area code and office code dialed 6 digit analysis the system examines the programmed tables and uses the trunk in the order specified Line Lockout This feature automatically releases a station from the common equipment if the station remains off hook for longer than a programmed interval before dialing Howler tone may be programmed to be sent to the station in Line Lockout Line Pre selection This feature provides the station user with two ways to select an idle held recalling or ringing line before going off hook Maid Status This feature allows the Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument Property Management system PMS terminal or guest room station using special access code to register the condition of each guest room UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Maintenance Administration Terminal The Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT is a personal computer PC that provides an interface to the PBX via the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS CPU card
175. ON OFF terminal ready busy ON OFF terminal ready busy Note 1 For the port 1 and 3 of APOO B card with MRC C program data speed cannot be set to 9600 bps Note 2 Upon confirming that the status of the DCD signal from the SMDR terminal is ON the system sends out call information to the SMDR terminal When the status of the DCD signal is OFF the system does not send out call information but temporarily stores the information until the SMDR terminal becomes ready to receive call information in other words until the status of the DCD signal changes to ON If the status of the DCD signal has changed from ON to OFF while transmission of specific call information is in progress the next call information is not sent out but stored into the system temporarily The same applies to CTS and DSR signals Note 3 For outout to MP built in SMDR one message is sent at intervals of one second unidirectional Page 10 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces MP built in SMDR on IP ITEM Specifications Physical Layer Ethernet Connection Layer The Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard TCP IP Protocol ARP IP ICMP UDP TCP Socket Interface Complies with 4 3 BSD socket interface Transport Protocol TCP stream type protocol Application Port Number 60010 fixed Number of Connections Client Server Client SMDR terminal Server PBX Transmission C
176. PAD and Router Switching Hub Page 5 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Series i TDM Multi line Digital Terminals The Dterm Series i digital terminals have a user friendly ergonomic design and is available in six distinct digital models Descriptions of Terminals DTR 2DT 1 BK TEL DTR 2DT 1 WH TEL DTR 4D 1 BK TEL DTR 8 2 BK TEL DTR 8 2 WH TEL DTR 8D 2 BK TEL DTR 8D 2 WH TEL DTR 16D BL 2 BK TEL DTR 16D 2 BK TEL DTR 16D 2 WH TEL DTR 16LD 1 BK TEL DTR 16LD 1 WH TEL DTR 32D 1 BK TEL DTR 32D 1 WH TEL DCR 60 1 BK CONSOLE DCR 60 1 WH CONSOLE D16 LD R ADM BK D16 LD R ADM WH UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 2 LINE TERMINAL available in black BK or white WH does not support optional adapters Fully modular with 2 Flexible 2 color LED Line keys eight Function Keys built in Speakerphone and electronic volume and tone controls 4 LINE TERMINAL available in black only Fully modular with 4 Flexible 2 color LED Line keys nine Function Keys built in Soeakerphone wall mount unit four soft keys Large LED Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand does not support optional adapters 8 LINE TERMINAL available in black BK or white WH Fully modular with 8 Flexible 2 color LED Line keys eleven Function Keys built in Speak
177. Peer Connection UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 15 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP CCIS Networking via IP Non Peer to Peer Connections Basis IP trunk connections over CCIS No 7 CCIS Common Channel Inter Office Signaling Networking via IP is used to provide telephony services between the 2000 IPS IVS IPS Retro or 2400 IMX IPX and Electra Elite IPK IPKII on opposite side which do not support peer to peer connections The IP PAD is required for connections between IP terminals and IP trunks A maximum of one IP trunk card can be accommodated per PIM with a maximum of eight IP trunk cards per system Voice compression of G 729a 8 kbps and G 723 1 5 3 kbps 6 3 kbps can be provided by the IP trunks with VCT cards Communications cost can be reduced by utilizing IP Trunks in the system to convert voice signals into IP packets and transmit them over the data network All CCIS centralized and transparent features can be used connecting up to 255 NEAX systems in a network for a total of 130 560 station ports 2000 TPS 2000 IYS TDS TDSW Intranet Point to Multipoint Connection Point to Multipoint Connection is a connection type which designates multiple destination IP addresses per IP trunk as shown below One IP trunk can be connected to multiple opposite offices in Point to Multipoint connection FEAH Pat HE sey pe HEAKJE VTAN CE HRN PTh ME AS TIGO a be Ee Mi 100 16 a
178. Programming Manual Stations can set Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding All Calls No Answer and Busy Line to the VMS The system sends out incoming call information to the VMS A call to a station that has Call Forwarding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS The MCI can control the LCD display of a Multiline Terminal for MESSAGE Indication The number of messages is not displayed When the Message Waiting lamp control is activated with the MCI the lamp control from the following equipment will not be provided From the Property Management System PMS From the Station by dialing the access code From the Direct Station Selection DSS Console From the Hotel Motel Attendant Console From the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument From the Attendant Console Only one system should be programmed via system programming to control Message Waiting lamps through the CCIS network The system controls Message Waiting lamps normally when the time interval between messages is a minimum of 350 msec or more When the VMS interface line does not answer all of the messages are sent out from the I O port of the MP APOO If the VMS is not ready for information receiving Busy Status the APOO can temporarily store up to 16 call records in its internal memory If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is generated the system will write over the oldest stored record When the RS port on the MP card is used f
179. Provided Database includes the AIMWorX Program disk which has all modules on it The core modules that are enabled are AIM WorX Manager Call Accounting and Alarm Manager included is the freely licensable Alarm Client Processor licensing allows an unlimited number of clients to access the AlMWorX applications simultaneously from remote PCs connected to the LAN Access from PCs over the Internet is also possible if the proper TCP IP port is enabled through an organizations firewall Refer to AIMWorX documentation for more information on this AIMWorX C S Customer Provided DB The AlMWorX Client Server Customer Provided Database includes the AIM WorX Program disk which has all modules on it The core modules that are enabled are AIMWorX Manager Call Accounting and Alarm Manager included is the freely licensable Alarm Client Page18 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting SQL Server licensing If you purchase SQL Server with AlMWorx the licensing is provided in multiples of five Client Access Licenses CALs All AIMWorX Client Server versions include the first five CALs Purchase additional CALs in multiples of five You may also choose to license the SQL Server database in processor licenses You purchase one processor license for each processor in the AlMWorX server and receive unlimited user login name assignments Purchase additional processor licenses from your NEC
180. R 2400 basic and extended only MCI DND Automatic Set Reset at Appointed Time and PMS Executed Task Print out Memory Expansion Card for APOO Card e The system capacity is expanded when PZ M537 is mounted on PN APOO B APOO card SMDR MCI PMS CIS Hotel Printer Interface SPN APOOB MRC F AP PZ M537 Note 1 4 line MF Receiver MFC Receiver Sender Card e Used for MF MFC R2 Signaling on DID DOD trunks e A maximum of four cards can be provided per system including the PN 4RSTC card 4 circuit MF Receiver for Enhanced 911 SPN 4RSTBA 911 AP 4 Requires CAMA Trunks SPN 4RSTC A AP 4 circuit ID Number Received for Caller ID SPN 4RSTBA B AP MFC Receiver Sender Page 4 6 NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Application Processor Cards Cont Database Memory for Wireless Roaming and OAI Applications using Free Location Facility FLF 1 Card system Wireless Roaming DCH Card for Wireless Roaming 1 Card Tie Line Route Installed with DTI Card SPN SCO01 QSIG AP MN QSIG Protocol Handler QSIG SPN SC01 DCH Q AP ISDN Primary Rate 23B D Interface Card w CSU and a in an D SPN 24PRTA QSIG AP Channel Handler DCH Also provides Name Display 32 party Conference Trunk 32 Party Conference SPN CFTC AP 8 cards per system max Note 2 Note1 The Expansion Memory PZ M537 is the on board sub memory card for the APOO B It provides
181. Secretarial This feature allows assignments to be given to members of Terminal and Circular Hunting groups to reroute calls when their hunting group is all busy to a back up hunting group Station Message Detail Recording SMDR This feature provides a call record for outgoing station to trunk calls incoming trunk to station calls including Data Call and tandem calls This facilitates cost control by identifying trunk use and misuse by individual stations Station Message Detail Recording SMDR enables call billing to customers and clients and provides a means for checking local telephone bills Station Speed Dialing This feature allows a station user to dial frequently called numbers by dialing an access code and an abbreviated code or by depressing a feature key or line key assigned for Station Speed Dialing capability Step Call This feature allows the Attendant or station user after calling a busy station to call an idle station by simply dialing an additional digit This feature will operate only if the number of the idle station is identical to that of the busy station in all respects except the last digit Supervisory Control of Peripheral Equipment When various types of peripheral equipment such as facsimiles dictation equipment Voice Mail etc are connected to the line circuits of the UNIVERGE NEAx 2000 IPS this feature allows the loop of the line circuit concerned to open for a programmable interval and
182. T CA EX 1 Stack External Battery Cable UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 2 7 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Cabling The internal and external cabling for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is as follows Internal Cabling BUS Cable The BUS Cable provides a connection between PIM s for I O Bus PCM Bus and Alarm Bus extension in a multiple PIM configuration Bus Cable NameCode Qty 48 TW 0 7 CONN CA No of PIM 1 0 7 m 2 3ft Power Control Cable The Power Control Cable provides a connection between the MP and the AC DC Power Supply for controlling battery backup function and MJ MN alarm indication Power Control Cable NameCode Qty Remarks ____ PWR CNT CA D 1 PIM Power control cable for PIMI PIM7 BWB PZ PW121 122 Included in PIM PWR CNT CA E 1 PIM Power control cable for PIMO BWB PZ PW121 122 Included in Base and PIM for Dual System DC Power Cable The DC Power Cable provides a connection between the AC DC Power Supplies for extending the 27 VDC input in a multiple PIM configuration when battery backup option is required Power Cable Internal Battery Option PWR CA A DC Power Cable 27v input BATT CA INT Internal Battery Cable Power Cable External Battery Option PWR CA A No of PIM 1 up to 4PIM DC Power Cable 27v input No of PIM 2 5 to 8PIM BATT CA EXT 1 Stack External Battery Cable AC Cord The AC cord provide
183. VERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 10 1 Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces 1400 IMS Format 1400 IMS Format is generally used to print call records on a serial printer and provides an easy to read format for printouts of outgoing incoming call activity Each record is given a serial number from 0000 to 9999 to identify each call Calling Station Number Called Number 26 digits maximum Route Number and Trunk Number Start of Call Time from month down to second Duration of Call hours minutes seconds rounded to nearest 5 sec Forced Account Authorization Code Account Code Attendant Handled Trunk Route Overflow Route Advance CPN ANI up to 16 digits Six options for 80 136 character printers SMDR Terminal Interface A Personal Computer or a Host Computer is used as the SMDR terminal for receiving and processing the call information that arrives at the MP The transmission interface specification by which the AP or MP sends out call information to the SMDR terminal are as follows SMDR with APOO MP built in SMDR on RS 232C Specifications Specifications O O dle Transmission Speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps for PN APOO B with MRC C program Note 1 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps for PN APOO B with MRC F program Data Carrier Detect DCD signal Data Carrier Detect DCD signal Detecting Method
184. VPN Permissible Delay with in these types of networks is 100ms one way 120ms Max or 200ms both way 240ms Max 6 The CPU card at Remote Site has the same system data as the CPU at Main Site the Host Site automatically downloads its system data to the Remote Site at the time of setup In normal operation Host Site automatically copies the system data to Remote Site through the network once a day UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 27 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP 10 11 12 Remote Site automatically operates by itself survival mode when Keep Alive signal sent every 30 sec between the Host Site and Remote Sits is interrupted When Keep Alive is interrupted the Remote Site is reset to change the operation from normal mode to survival mode Remote Site in survival mode checks at 30 seconds intervals if the communications to Main Site are possible When Keep Alive is detected the Remote Site automatically is reset to change the operation from survival mode to normal mode When unstable conditions occur in the network the Remote Site can be manually set to survivable mode override automatic until stability in the network is established This prevents the Remote Site from resetting normal mode to survivable mode etc User Mobility User Continuance is only available to IP enabled Dterm DtermIP and Soft Phone Dterm SP30 terminals using Protected Login Mode The SP30 is not sup
185. a Client Server configuration that includes 5 MS SQL 2000 Client Access Licenses Additional Client Access Licenses may be selected below This includes the AIMWorX Program Disk 1 CD and the AIMWorX Database Disk 1 CD The AIMWorX Database Disk provides Microsoft SQL 2000 both Personal and Standard Editions The Standard Edition is used with Windows 2000 Professional Server and with Windows NT Workstation Server C S CUST This is a Client Server configuration It does not include a database The Database must be provided by the customer Currently supported Databases are Microsoft SQL 2000 SP1 and above and Oracle 7 3 4 The customer is responsible for purchasing the database of their choice and the database licenses they desire This option includes the AIMWorX Program Disk 1 CD Call Record and User Capacity You can purchase AIMWorX in one of six tiers Basic Business Small Corporate Corporate Enterprise and Large Enterprise These tiers differ based on the number of user records each supports The smaller tiers can be run as standalone systems while others operate in a client server environment only Basic tier The Basic tier manages up to 200 extensions or users lt can be installed as a standalone system or in a client server environment and works with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 switch family the UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 switch family and some non NEC switches for SMDR collection only This system supports AIMWorX Manager call account
186. a routers IP stations can be installed behind routers that are configured to use NAT Network Address Translation at the remote location This allows IP station users at remote sites to use the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS features as same as those at local site The number portability among the sites is available so that the same IP station user can login at any site using the single login code and password The IP station has two operating modes Local Connection Mode and Remote Connection Mode Each operating mode can have individual VoIP communication parameters such as CODEC selection list and usable bandwidth so that the appropriate communication is available even if the IP station user logs in at either local site or remote site AO IPS be Lacanant2 Ju AD i a E eu Locations al a y Location 4 Ami T UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 5 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Automatic Program Download for IP Enabled Dterm This feature provides the method to download the latest firmware program of IP Enabled Dterm from the FTP TFTP server automatically by system programming The following three patterns of program download are available Program Download at Appointed Time Program Download at Login Time Program Download for Designated Terminals 2000 IPS Download Message FTP TFIP Server Program Download Hub IP Enabled D Service Condi
187. above base values are primarily used for call setup with the exception of keep alive 0 032Kbps with no voice traffic Connections between IP PAD are half duplex established call utilization is G 711 voice 64Kbps G 723 1 voice 5 3 6 3Kbps or G729a voice 8Kbps Peer to Peer IP station calls are full duplex compression can be specified by location numbers in system data Peer to Peer IP station calls even though full duplex will utilize one way for Bi directional networks such as T1 Peer to Peer IP station calls over Asymmetrical networks such as ADSL may realize higher bandwidth utilization compression can be specified by location numbers in system data Page 13 26 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Advantages The system regards the terminals accommodated in both Host Site and Remote Site as the extensions in the same office Feature transparency is superior to CCIS The Digital Remote PIM cannot accommodate some AP cards Remote PIM over IP can accommodate AP cards such as ISDN PRI and T1 This feature can reduce the bandwidth used on the WAN that is connected to CO lines at Remote Site rather than DtermIP at remote locations Since all Remote PIM over IP sites are treated as extensions in the same office software and applications only have to be implemented in the host site This provides centralized use of application for example distributing ACD agents in the
188. aced above drop ceilings The Zone Transceiver ll is also offered with a weather resistant outdoor enclosure mountable on outside building walls or poles Options for both fan cooled or heated enclosures are also available ZT IIU can be deployed using 1 pair or 2 pair wiring Note With ZT s version 7 2 or higher seamless handover can be achieved Page 16 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Wireless Specifications Zone Transceiver Il Specifications Maximum 3 Power Supply e PBX Power Supply DC 48 V e Local Power Supply AC 100 V 200 V Power Consumption Maximum 3 W Operating Conditions Ambient Temperature 10 50 C Relative Humidity 45 85 non condensing Installation Location Indoor Dimensions unit mm 160 W x139 D x40 H Excluding Antenna Approx 400 g Wire Diameter 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 19AWG AN 2500 ft 4000 ft 5500 ft 8000 ft PBX Power 762 m 1219 m 1676 m 2438 m Supply at 48 V aw 4300 ft 6900 ft 9500 ft 13000 ft 1310 m 2103 m 2895 m 3958 m AN 2000 ft 3200 ft 4700 ft 7000 ft PBX Power 609 m 975 m 1432 m 2131 m Supply at 45 V AW 3500 ft 5600 ft 8200 ft 12200 ft 1066 m 1706 m 2499 m 3718 m 1800 ft 2900 ft 4400 ft 6400 ft PBX Power 548 m 883 m 1340 m 1948 m Supply at 43 V 3100 ft 5000ft 7600 ft 11000 ft 944 m 1524 m 2316 m 3352 m 11000 ft 1300
189. adset jack or directory and message functions Specification A ee eseription O Curl Cord Length 12ft Weight no handset 510g min 24 digit x 3 line alphanumeric and some characters no back light Max 80dBSPL in output limit condition max 86dBSPL in normal condition Built in Hands Free Half duplex ltems Provided with Instrument Line cord Directory card Handset Cradle K type compatible 14 42 5 deg on the desk no housing tilt 25 53 5 deg on the desk housing tilt up 4 4 deg wall mounting 4 4 deg wall mounting Page 5 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Terminal Options WM R Unit AD A R Unit AP R R Unit AP A R Unit CT A R Unit IP R Unit AC R Unit Line Conditions Chapter 5 Station Equipment Series i Multi line Terminals with an AP R R AP A R CT A R and or an IP R Unit can be wall mounted using the WM R Unit Provides Series i Multi line Terminals ability to interface with recording device Provides Series i Multi line Terminals ability to interface with analog device such as acordless telephone facsimile machine external soeakerphone Automatic Dialer or modem Provides ringing to analog device connected Requires an AC R ADP Provides Series i Multi line Terminals ability to interface with analog device such as a cordless telephone facsimile machine external speakerphone Automatic Dialer or modem N
190. affic Internal eee a Call 0 3 70 4 70 5 0 6 0 7 Distribution Sxema 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 Line Trunk Call 0 7 ia ae ag D 4 COT 0 078 0 091 0 109 0 136 0 181 16L 8 COT 0 279 0 326 0 391 0 489 0 652 12 COT 0 525 0 612 0 735 0 918 1 224 4 COT 0 039 0 045 0 054 0 068 0 091 391 8 COT 0 140 0 163 0 196 0 244 0 326 12 COT 0 262 0 306 0 367 0 459 0 612 16 COT 0 396 0 462 0 555 0 693 0 925 4 COT 0 026 0 030 0 036 0 045 0 060 48L 8 COT 0 093 0 109 0 130 0 163 0 217 12 COT 0 175 0 204 0 245 0 306 0 406 16 COT 0 264 0 308 0 370 0 462 0 613 12 COT 0 087 0 102 0 122 0 153 0 204 96L 16 COT 0 132 0 154 0 185 0 231 0 308 20 COT 0 179 0 209 0 251 0 313 0 418 24 COT 0 228 0 266 0 319 0 398 0 531 12 COT 0 058 0 068 0 082 0 102 0 136 144L 16 COT 0 088 0 103 0 123 0 154 0 205 20 COT 0 119 0 139 0 167 0 209 0 278 24 COT 0 152 0 177 0 212 0 266 0 354 20 COT 0 090 0 104 0 125 0 157 0 209 1921 24 COT 0 144 0 133 0 159 0 199 0 266 28 COT 0 139 0 162 0 194 0 243 0 324 32 COT 0 164 0 191 0 230 0 287 0 383 20 COT 0 072 0 084 0 100 0 125 0 167 2A0L 24 COT 0 091 0 106 0 127 0 159 0 212 28 COT 0 111 0 129 0 155 0 194 0 259 32 COT 0 131 0 153 0 184 0 230 0 306 20 COT 0 060 0 070 0 084 0 104 0 139 288L 24 COT 0 076 0 089 0 106 0 133 0 177 28 COT 0 093 0 108 0 129 0 162 0 216 32 COT 0 109 0 128 0 153 0 191 0 255 28 COT 0 079 0 092 0 111 0 139 0 185 32 COT 0 094 0 109 0 131 0 164 0 219 336L 36 COT 0 108 0 127 0 152 0 190 0 253 40 COT 0 123 0 144 0 173 0 216 0 288 44 COT
191. age Reader providing Dterm users access OpenWorX text messages Optional integration with Open WorX Desktop providing PC users all the benefits of the standard Dterm based applications from a graphical user interface FASTER and MORE EFFICIENT OPERATORS BAS Call Control Functionality Call control for the BAS is a queue oriented system Just like the NEC business attendant console the BAS provides the standard familiar call queues and information However additional information about incoming calls is added to better empower the Attendant Page 11 2 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface Brief Definition of Queues Internal extension to attendant calls within the PBX External calls coming into PBX from an undefined trunk type CCSA FX TIE WATS calls coming into the PBX from trunks in CCSA FX TIE or WATS Trunk Groups Priority calls that must be answered before all other calls Paged people who have been paged to a meet me paging number but the parked person is no longer waiting to be joined Vacant vacant level intercept when a call goes to an invalid number Park T O calls that were parked and have timed out will recall here NANS T O internal calls blind transferred but not answered will recall here Station Transfer transferred to the attendant queue by another station or voice mail Attendant Transfer calls
192. aited Wallboard Interface access real time stats displayed on an electronic wallboard A quick glance delivers an accurate picture of current performance levels Specialized features for supervisors a number of specialist features are also available for supervisors including o on demand call delivery o remote log in out option o conversation monitoring intrusion o emergency queue re routing Simplified Administration The wizards and a graphical user interface help to administer all aspects of the system Adjustments to call delivery patterns queue setup agent assignment and other parameters can be made in a matter of seconds as updates are performed in real time Page 12 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Reports Q Control Because access to timely and relevant information is critical for effective contact center management a comprehensive reports package comes standard with every Q Master solution ensuring that users have the tools to run a contact center at peak efficiency An onboard database holds statistics on every facet of every contact from the time it arrives at the telephony switch through to its termination cradle to grave allowing managers to report on areas such as volume agent activity abandonment rates wrap up codes and service levels More than 120 reports are available detailing all aspects of the contact cente
193. al RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment applications are examples of centralized services that could improve portability and use throughout the enterprise network INASET Terminal Line UP The INASET terminals are available in three models Each is described below Description Remarks OOO The INASET 240G has a 3 LCD with a gray scale 240 x 160 pixel display and 16 programmable keys ITR 240G 1 Supports Power over Ethernet POE 802 3af and Cisco Discovery Protocol Available in black only BK The INASET 320C has a 5 1 color display and 32 programmable keys ITR 320C 1 BK Supports Power over Ethernet POE 802 3af and Cisco Discovery Protocol Available in black only The INASET 320G has a 5 1 LCD with gray scale display and 32 programmable keys Supports Power over Ethernet POE 802 3af and Cisco Discovery pS SAUR AEN Protocol Available in black only INASET Accessories Wall mount for the ITR LC 1 12 Foot Black Handset Cord 25 Foot Black Handset Cord AC adapter for the INASET 802 3af power Dongle for INASET Original Audio recording adapter for IP terminals External Microphone for INASET 240 320s Analog survivable adapter INASET Basic Network Capability Dual port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet switch Internal voice packet prioritization VLAN support 802 1q 802 1p frame tagging Configurable ToS bits DiffServ and IP Precedence support Powering o Inline power
194. al PN M10 PN RTA In Skin Router PZ M649 PZ M623 Mounted on PN RTA Card Provides one additional 1OBASE T port 4 or 8 Port Voice Mail card NEAXmail IM 16LX This card can provide up to 16 ports of digital PZ VMO7 4 8 line circuit interface Occupies VM slot and up to one LT slot NEAXmail IM 16LX One card per PBX is available 4 Port Voice Mail card used to expand from 8 to PZ VM08 8 16 16 ports Provides one connector for Occupies VM slot plus and one LT slots External Relay Contact Control Scanning External Relay PN DKOO Control 4 circuit CS interface for U interface ZT Two slot card 16 LT ports The PZ PW122 is required O Optical Fiber Interface Card Provides optical fiber interface for T1 E1 Digital Trunk Interface 1 5 M 2 Mbps or Remote PIM Line length 10 km 6 2 miles or less Line coding CMI In Skin Router Card 10 100BASE TX 1 1OBASE T 1 RS2332C D sub 9pin Maximum 8 cards per PIM T1 Digital Trunk Interface 1 5Mbps Card Mounted on PN RTA Card Provides a built in CSU Ether Control Card 8 circuit card Works in either mode Control_ Scanning 8 circuit O circuit 4 circuit 4 circuit O circuit 8 circuit UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 4 13 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Terminal Line Up A variety of terminal equipment may be connected to the UNIVERGE vneax 2000 IPS systems Dterm Series i Terminals Analog DTR 1 1 Si
195. alled Calling Name Display Hunt Past No Answer ACD Attendant Called Calling Number Immediate Overflow ACD Attendant Call Selection Priority Queuing ACD Attendant Console Lockout Password Queue Size Control ACD Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup and Cancel Silent Monitor ACD Attendant Interposition Calling Transfer ACD w Management Information System MIS Attendant Lamp Check Automatic Camp On Attendant Listed Directory Number Automatic Change to Daylight Saving Time Attendant Loop Release Attendant Programming Automatic Number Identification ANI Automatic Recall Attendant Training Jacks Audible Indication Control Automatic Wake Up Background Music Call Processing Indication Back Up CPU Call Queuing Bandwidth Control Call Splitting Boss Secretary Calling Call Waiting Display Broker s Call Common Route Indial Call Back Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS Call Forwarding Incoming Call Identification Attendant Call Forwarding Setup and Cancel Individual Trunk Access Call Forwarding All Calls Multi Function Key Multiple Console Operation Pushbutton Calling Attendant Only Serial Call Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Destination Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls Time Display Trunk Group Busy Display Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line Multiple Call For
196. alling party s name can be confirmed by the indications on the LCD Calling Number This feature provides a display on the LCD of a Dterm PS III Display PS receiving a call indicating the station number DTMF Sianal This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to send the DTMF signal Sender g tone to the called party terminal voice mail system etc while engaged in communication Calling Name Display PS This feature permits a Dterm PS III user Dterm user or Single Line Telephone user within the system to establish a conference among as many as six or ten parties From a Dterm PS III Dterm Single Line Telephone a maximum of 9 PSs can be paged simultaneously except the conference leader The PSs are assigned to the simultaneous paging groups as a participant by the system data beforehand Group Call Automatic Conference 6 10 Party UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 9 Issue 6 Group Call 2 Way Calling Handover Individual PS Calling Last Number Redial PS Multi Line Operation PS Multi Site Roaming UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Wired for Wireless Number Sharing Page 16 10 Chapter 16 Wireless System This feature permits a Dterm PS III Dterm Single Line Telephone can page a maximum of fifteen parties simultaneously except the group call leader After one of paged parties answers the paging becomes the 2 Way Calling between the leader a
197. ally contacted as if they d stayed on the line Gives Your Callers Control while some callers are content to wait on the line many are not Q Callback invites callers to enter their contact number leave a message and hang up without losing their position in the queue Callers using the Callback feature are handled just as quickly as if they had waited on the line Lower abandonment rates waiting on hold can be frustrating costly and time consuming for your customer You may also pay the price for leaving your caller on hold for too long causing them to hang up and take their business elsewhere Makes It Simple for Agents Callback is very flexible and can be configured on a per queue basis Use the Callback schedule to determine times of day that you want Callback to be available and specify thresholds when it should apply Agents and Supervisors can see the number of callback requests in the queue and make the adjustments to operating parameters as required Lower your network costs benefit from substantial telecommunications cost savings as Q Callback cuts the number of calls holding on your free phone numbers Answers Your Callers 24 Hours Day Q Callback can act as an automated answering service for instance after hours When agents log in first thing in the morning calls from the night before are immediately presented to their workstation for handling No voice mailbox needs to be cleared and no calls have to be requ
198. als and trunks such as Dterm Single Line telephone DSS BLF Console DtermlIP COT ISDN etc The Attendant Console Dterm Attendant position and Add on Module are not supported at the Remote Site Local Switch TDSW at Remote Site controls connections within the Remote Site if possible In the case of connections between Main Remote and Remote Remote the voice path is connected via Peer to Peer or IP PAD If the communications between Main Remote are interrupted the Remote Site survives by itself after a system reset UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 15 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Advantages of Remote PIM The system regards the terminals accommodated in both Main Site and Remote Site as the extensions in the same office Therefore the service transparency is superior to CCIS Remote PIM over IP has no limitation of distance between Main and Remote Remote Site has a switching function at local This provides the effective configuration of C O line In addition the Remote Site can accommodate AP cards This is an advantage to accommodate ISDN lines especially The Remote Site survives by itself even if the link between Main and Remote is disconnected Therefore the impact to users at the Remote Site will be smaller if the link between Main and Remote is disconnected This feature can reduce the bandwidth used on the WAN that is connected to CO lines at Remote Site rathe
199. an be programmed as Direct Station DCU 60 1 BK keys function keys or outside line keys This terminal comes in two colors Black BK and Ivory White WH When the console is used as an Add On Module an additional 25 lines trunks and the existing line trunks for the Multiline Terminal can be accessed directly maximum 41 lines trunks The station speed dialing function can be assigned for all keys on the Add On Module unit Also one of the last three keys can be used as a Day Night change keys When the console is used as a DSS BLF console up to 60 stations can be directly accessed in addition to those already appearing on the Multiline Terminal A red LED associated with each button indicates busy status for each station In addition the DSS BLF console can provide the following functions Message Waiting Set Cancel Status Display Do Not Disturb Set Cancel Status Display Automatic Wake Up No Answer Status Display Cancel Agent Busy Out UCD Status Display Line Lockout Status Display Room Cutoff Set Cancel Status Page 5 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Series E Accessories amp Adapters Ancillary Device Adapter ADA U ADA U The Ancillary Device Adapter ADA U allows for a direct connection to a tape recorder for logging recording telephone calls A dedicated set of input connectors is also provided for a recordin
200. an be used to convert indialed digits 2 The Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS must match the station numbering plan CM20 3 Multiple DNIS are supported MULTIQUEST 900 Service AT amp T s MultiQuest service can be used It is a 900 type service Also 900 service provided by other carriers can be used Service Conditions 1 The DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service must match the numbering plan CM20 of the 2000 IPS 2 Multiple DNIS numbers are supported 3 Command CM76 can be used to convert DNIS digits received from the ISDN Network Subaddress Present This feature allows a primary rate interface ISDN trunk to transfer the called party subaddress information to a destination ISDN station when the call is originated by the system Dialing the called party station number and subaddress is required Service Conditions 1 If the calling party fails to dial the called party subaddress ISDN cannot transfer any called party subaddress information to the destination party Page 15 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN 2 Ifa calling party does not wish to provide a called party subaddress the call must terminate with the key Immediate Start If the key is not entered a Timing Start operation begins The Timing Start uses the interdigit timeout operation 3 Subaddress dialing is available only on those
201. an earlier time in five minute intervals 3 Wake Up attempts whether successful or not can be printed out at a locally provided printer The results of execution of Automatic Wake Up set and cancel are also printed 4 The Automatic Wake Up call will ring a station in Do Not Disturb 5 When Automatic Wake Up call is received the station receives music or an announcement A DAT or COT card with locally provided music or announcement source is required As an option a PN DKOO card can be programmed to provide a contact closure for starting the external announcement or music source when used with a COT card 6 Data for Automatic Wake Up programming is canceled by Check Out operation 7 The number of Automatic Wake Up call attempts is programmable from one to five times 8 If the station does not answer is busy in Line Lockout or ringing recalling is initiated one minute later Recalling is repeated up to five times Each call that fails is printed When the final attempt results in failure a buzzer is sounded at the printer and a flashing LED on the DSS BLF Console is available to indicate which station does not answer 9 Call Forwarding and other features will not reroute Automatic Wake Up calls Page 17 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Check In Check Out When this feature is activated the following operations occur Check In Room Cutoff is c
202. and are generated 10 types are available Note 2 1 for External Music Source for Music on Hold Note 2 Available 2 ports Source Receiver Available Available Available Available 4 circuits Available Available MAT Interface Direct Connection 1 port 1 port Remote Connection 1 port 1 port Note 3 w Built in MODEM External Alarm Indication MJ and MN 2 circuits 120 seconds per circuit Not Available DKOO 2 circuits relay drive x1 Not Available external key scan x1 Application Key Program In ERROM In Flash ROM MP Program Download Upgrade Program via FTP Server Note 1 Note 1 CP 27 A memory is 8MB Flash and 32MB SDRAM and MP Program Download is not supported Note 2 n case of Dierm IP the synthesized melody is provided by the IP adapter on the phone Note 3 Modem on the CP31 is for Stand Alone mode IPS DML only Firmware Processor FP Firmware Processors FP are required when more than two PIM s are used The FP provides supervision and status analysis of line trunk ports which reside in the PIM The FP provides the bus interface for l O Bus PCM Bus and Alarm Bus in a multiple PIM configuration The major specifications of the FP are shown below Central Processor Unit 16 bit 25 MHz Memory Program Area 384 kb Work Area 384 kb BS01 Function PN CP15 Firmware Processor Card for use with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Page 3 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference G
203. andler Card Transmits receives signals on the common signaling channel of CCIS PN M10 M10 Optical Fiber Interface Card Provides optical fiber interface for T1 E1 Digital Trunk Interface 1 5 M 2 Mbps Line length 6 2 miles 10 km or less Line coding CMI Required Equipment for Analog CCIS NAME NAME PN SCOO CCH Common Channel Handler Card Transmits receives signals on the common signaling channel of CCIS PN 20DTA ODT 2 line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card Used as either a 2 wire E amp M trunk or a 4 wire E amp M trunk Equipped with 48V DC DC on board power supply Both Circuits O and 1 must be set to the same purpose 2 wire or 4 wire in one card Required Equipment for CCIS Networking via IP Description Remarks CCIS via IP non Peer to Peer SPN IPTB Network Interface ETHER FAST ETHER SPN 4VCTI Codec Card for IP Trunk CCIS via IP Peer to Peer PZ M606 A On board Ethernet Interface Card ETHERNET TCP IP SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C P Interface card for IP Pad PZ 24IPLA 24 channel daughter board for 8IPLA UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 19 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS IP Specifications IP PAD 8 32 channels per card Automatically seized per call FAX Communication FAX Relay Method T 30 Feature DTMF Signal Inter office Intra office Signaling A a QoS e DiffServ tras eseromsen E a 100B
204. anish DK Latin Am Spanish LA United Kingdom English UK Dutch NL Madrid Spanish ED Numeric directory assistance NEAXMail AD 64 provides directory assistance for outside callers without letters on their telephone keypad It can be set up to guide the outside caller through directory assistance using numbers Australian English AU Hebrew HE Portuguese PT One key dialing this feature allows a caller to press a single touchtone digit instead of a series of touch tones to route their calls For example you can route calls quickly to directory assistance subscriber extensions transaction boxes voice detect boxes language select boxes or interview boxes UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 17 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Opening greeting NEAXMail AD 64 plays a pre recorded greeting to callers when it answers a call The system manager usually records the opening greeting The greeting typically includes the organization s name how to reach an extension operator and directory how to send a fax etc During the greeting callers can enter extension numbers access the directory or hold for assistance Operator assistance Outside callers can press 0 for assistance at any time Personal secretary The personal secretary feature enables individual users to have calls transferred to a specified extension when temporarily away from their desk or out of the office In this way importa
205. annels from 24 to 32 using the 8IPLA w 24IPLA Note 2 The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less Each trunk line and DTI channels are required to assign the Trunk Number by system data programming and maximum number of system parameter for Trunk Number is 256 Note 3 PS DML only supports a maximum of 128 IP stations IPS DML does not support built in SMDR The IPS DML is a Stand Alone Only solution Remote PIM s off the IPS DML are not supported Page 1 22 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction IP Remote Network Capacity Total System Capacity Main plus Remote Capacity Analog Single Line Tel Diem O oo IPPAD_ NoofChame J o __2B68_ Cell Station CS Zone Transceiver ZT CCIS Trunk Peer to Peer Connection DTI CCIS Digital Link swo oO pamo o e CA B 6 10Pary Conference BPa _ _Max 4 conference groups _ 6 10 Party Conference 10 Party Max 2 conference groups 32 Party Conference Max 8 conference groups Built in Router 1 per Site DTMF Sender Receiver Max 32 circuits Attendant Consoles A B O Attendant Terminal Dterm ATT Position Max 2 Interface ports RS232 Max 1 Interface port RS232 ACD MIS or OAI Interface MIS or OAI Interface Max 1 interface Max 1 interface port Remote PIM over IP Note Up to 30 depending on network DID a Conversion OA Call Call Forwarding Outside Set Set Authorization
206. another station or to an outside party automatically when the user selects the Hotline extension House Phone This feature allows selected stations to reach the Attendant simply by going off hook Individual Attendant Access This feature permits a user to call a specific Attendant by dialing an Attendant call code Intercept Announcement This feature provides the automatic interception of Direct Inward Dialing DID and Tie Line calls which cannot be completed due to unassigned station or level The caller hears a recorded Intercept Announcement that informs the caller that an inoperative number was reached and may supply the number for information Intercom Three types of Intercoms are available Manual Intercom Automatic Intercom and Dial Intercom Each type of Intercom provides access to a small group of Multiline Terminals with simplified calling methods Page 9 21 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Manual Intercom The Manual Intercom groups have up to six Multiline Terminals sharing a common signal path Users can call other members of the Manual Intercom group by pressing a Manual Intercom key each press sends a tone burst over the speakers of all the terminals in the group When another user answers the call a speech path is activated Automatic Intercom Automatic Intercom provides a path for Voice Announcement Calls with Handsfree Answerback between two Multiline Terminals using a line key Private conversa
207. ant operates in a client server environment and can manage multiple 2000 IPS systems over a Local Area Network LAN Wide Area Network WAN DtermiP DtermiIP is an IP based Multiline Terminal which provides a built in capability of peer to peer IP communications The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS system provides the DtermIP with same IP communications capabilities of an IP Enabled Dterm The IP Enabled Dterm is a Dterm Multiline Terminal with an add on IP adapter unit Elapsed Call Timer This feature provides a display of the elapsed time while a Multiline Terminal with LCD is connected to any trunk Enhanced 911 This feature allows the PBX to transmit a caller s emergency service identification information to an Enhanced 911 Emergency system Executive Calling This feature allows a station to be assigned a VIP class This provides special ringing to a called station when that station is idle and automatic sending of three tone bursts to a called station when that station is busy provided the call was originated from a station assigned as VIP class UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Executive Override This feature allows selected users to override a busy condition on a called station A warning tone is transmitted to both stations in the busy call before the busy condition is overridden and a three party Conference is then established External Pag
208. arts while the message transmission is partially in progress this feature sees this as a squelch disconnection and performs message retransmission after the hand over is completed UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 7 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Features Feature Matrix by Configuration Type Adjunct Type Integrated Type Analog PBX CCIS Al SAREE Interface 1 Interface 2 Wired for Wireless Announcement PS No Anger RR Announcement PS Out of Cel x O x x Automatic Release Outof Cell Cals x x x Call Forwarding Not Available 0 7 x LOIS Interfaos OR Cang Name Display PS OR Cang Number Display PS RX DTM Signal Sender OR RX Group Call Automatic Conference 8 10 Pary Group Caling 2WayCaling Hanover OR RX individual PS Caig RRA Last Number Reial PSA x Multi Line Operation PS OR RX Mali Ste Roaming RX UNIVERGE nenx 2000 1PS Wired for Wireless o xo Outof Zone Indication OR RX Overlap Dating ROA PS Authorizati n OR RX PS Location Registration x RX PresetDiaing A AX ssa Roaming overIP Tank Radio Channel Changeover x RX Short Message Notification OA SpeechEnoypton OR RX Speed Dial PS RR Station Hunting NotAvallable 0 SSO Voice Mail Indication X available not available Hor X lt K X lt Xx aaa bh X lt K X lt Xx TTIW X lt K X lt Xx Page 16 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP
209. ates cost control by identifying trunk use and misuse by individual stations Station Message Detail Recording SMDR enables call billing to customers and clients and provides a means for checking local telephone bills The PBX provides three kinds of Station Message Detail Recording SMDR formats 2400 IMS Format 2400 IMS Extended Format and 1400 IMS Format 2400 and 2400 Extended Format The following call information is provided to the SMDR terminal upon completion of each outgoing or incoming C O call Type of Record Trunk Number 000 255 Trunk Route Number 00 63 Calling Called Party Information Calling Called Party I D Tenant Number 01 63 Station Number Max 5 digits Attendant Number 00 07 Trunk Route 00 63 Trunk Number 000 255 Time of Start Conversation Month Day Hour Minute Second Time of Call Completion Month Day Hour Minute Second Account Code Max 10 digits Condition Code Route Advance Information Called Number Max 24 digits Call Metering Information Calling Party Office Number Max 4 digits Billing Office Number Max 4 digits ANI Information Former Max 16 digits Extended Max 32 digits Authorization Code Max 10 digits Call Start Year Call End Year Condition Code for Advice of Charge AOC Advice of Charge AOC Note The information marked by is only for outgoing C O calls The information marked by is only for incoming calls UNI
210. ation users dial access to Radio Paging Equipment and to selectively tone or voice tone alert individuals carrying pocket paging devices The paged party when on premises can be connected to the paging party by going to the nearest station and dialing an answer back code Page 9 23 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Wide Area Telephone Service WATS Access This feature allows any station user direct dial access to outgoing WATS lines Mobility Access This feature allows a user to make receive telephone calls from a remote location using a Mobile Cell Phone via the PBX as if the user was at his her desk phone Modem over IP This feature allows the system to transmit modem communications over IP network via Local Area Networks LAN and corporate Wide Area Network WAN IP Packet Assembler Disassembler IPPAD and Voice Compression Trunk VCT are required for modem over IP network The modem transmission procedure G 711 G 726 pass through is supported using the 8IPLA 24IPLA IP PAD only MP Program Download FTP UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides Online MP Program Download via IP network The IPS downloads the MP upgrade program from FTP server using MATWorx Immediate or scheduled changeover to the upgrade program is available It is also possible to change back to the previous program that was in use before the changeover changeback Multiple Language Display A language displayed in the LCD of a Multiline Term
211. ations outside of AIMWorX Use your own development tools to create an interface using commands that talk to the AIMWorX Arena Each application will then appear as a new tab on the Users screen and you can populate the external database from inside AIMWorxX Hospitality Links Hospitality Links combines the power of your Property Management System PMS the flexibility of your UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 IMX IPX Hospitality switch and the control of AIMWorX into one solution for your Hospitality environment This module lets you manage your administrative call accounting while formatting and forwarding guest calls to your PMS for billing The AIMWorX Suite Master application is a part of Hospitality Links and lets you manage the Flexible Suiting feature of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 IMX IPX Hospitality switch Interactive Directory Interactive Directory is an electronic phone book and more It provides a directory of user information including extension fax number phone number emergency number e mail address and twelve custom fields of information The directory can be published from AIMWorX Manager or you can enter user information directly through the Interactive Directory Manager program NEAX 2000 SPE NEAX SPE is a module that lets you manage some of the switch Maintenance and Administration Terminal MAT functions from your AIMWorX computer This program is a typical example of the concept of single point of entry Once the user informatio
212. ator can now view station data via the directory or speed dials to extensions in other PBXs The other PBXs must have OAI and a TCP IP connection back to the OpenWorX server Additional OpenWorX software is also required per PBX to be added on the server Short Text Message and Nurse Call do not have multi node capabilities Page 7 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Business Application Environment Business AE UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 OWX BAS 1 Attendant 12 user Max OWX Dialer OWX Short Text Messaging STM TAP Interface OWX Incoming Call Assistant ICA Hardware Requirements Description Qty Remarks ______ Ether card 1 per system PZ M606 A For Peer to Peer connection and MAT OAI UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 7 13 Issue 6 Chapter 8 System Administration System Administration In this system the Customer Administration Terminal CAT or Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT is used for programming the system data The CAT is a digital multi function telephone Dterm which is equipped with function keys a dial pad and LCD and interfaces with the system via the MP card The Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT is a personal computer that provides an interface to the PBX via the system CPU card The MAT PC must have the MATWorX program properly installed to communicate with
213. be purchased together Some modules should not be paired AIMWorX works optimally if these modules are paired Cable Manager and Asset Manager Work Order and Trouble Ticket Asset Manager and Billing Manager NEAX SPE and Voice Mail SPE NEAX SPE and Auth Code Manager NEAX SPE 9 1 1 OSN and Alarm Manager AIMWorX Manager and Multi site Hospitality Links and Voice Mail SPE Traffic Analysis and NEAX SPE These modules are mutually exclusive and should not be purchased together Interactive Directory 2000 and Interactive Directory 2400 Interactive Directory 2000 2400 and Message Center UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page18 5 Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting Work Order should have these three modules at a minimum to work NEAX SPE Asset Manager Billing Manager Work Order will best enhance your system s capabilities when combined with these modules Trouble Ticket Auth Code Manger 9 1 1 SPE Cable Manger 9 1 1 OSN Voice Mail SPE Interactive Directory 9 1 1 SPE 9 1 1 SPE is a module that lets you download specific user location information directly to the phone company s ALI system It appears as a tab on the Users screen in AIMWorX Manager and exports the 9 1 1 user database in NENA format The 9 1 1 SPE is not involved at the time of an emergency it supplies user location information to the ALI system which then supplies it to the authorities when needed 9 1 1 On Site Notification is a feature
214. ber dialed In OPR data the system will ask if and how many digits are to be deleted from the number dialed It will then ask if any digits are to be added and if so what are the digits to add in front Besides the flexibility of getting a call out of the system restriction controls make this system one of the best There are various types of call restrictions that can be made Some of them are as follows Six Digit Least Cost Routing This allows you to restrict specific area code s from going out a specific route even though the route is included in the OPR constructed This table lets you choose the TDPTN the OPR the RA and the area code Then designate whether the area code is allowed or not Route Restriction Class RSC There are 8 different restriction classes that can be created to allow deny or toll restrict certain users from dialing certain numbers An RSC is assigned to the stations The RSC table is then constructed on a per route basis to determine whether a number dialed from a station in a specific RSC is to be allowed denied or toll restricted Page 6 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking Toll Restriction The toll code restriction data allows the system administrator to program certain restrictions for Tandem trunk to trunk and Outgoing calls Outgoing toll restriction is based on a station RSC For outgoing the parameters request the Route Number
215. bering plan for Single Digit Dialing The following features can be activated using Single Digit Dialing Trunk Answer Any Station Trunk Access Single Digit Station Numbering Operator Calls Dial 0 Page 17 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Hotel System Capacity Description Capacity Guest Administrative Station 1020 Front Desk Terminal Oo 8 o O Hotel Console Hotel Printer Ls Hotel Printer o 2 O I O port for PMS SMDR Hotel Printer I O port for SMDR PMS via LAN I O port for Hotel Printer System Specifications PMS SMDR via RS 232C Interface Model 60 only and Hotel Printer Interface PMS SMDR Interface Hotel Printer Interface CT S Note For the port 1 and port 3 of APOO B card with APOO program data speed cannot be set to 9600 bps PMS SMDR via LAN Interface Model 90 120 only lea SIS Specifications 2 E SMDR 60010 fixed Application port number PMS 60050 fixed Client Server Client SMDR PMS terminal Server PBX Quasi normal restriction condition 1 When connection is closed 2 Status monitoring text UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 17 13 Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Station Equipment Front Desk Instrument Dterm Series E Series i with Display Terminals with 16 feature keys are recommended Guest Room Phone Analog Single Line H M Analog Single
216. bility requirements and is certified for joint use within the Defense Switched Network DSN as a Private Branch Exchange PBX 2 However since PBX2s do not support the Military Unique Feature Requirements detailed in reference c connectivity to the DSN is not authorized until a waiver is granted by the CUCS PBXs are Military Department MILDEP controlled elements of the Defense Switched Network DSN PBX2 switches have no military unique features MUFs and can only serve Department of Defense DOD non DOD non governmental and foreign government users having no missions or communications requirement to ever originate or receive Command and Control C2 communications C2 users and Special C2 users are not authorized to be served by a PBX2 This interoperability test status is based on evaluation of Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff CUCS validated Generic Switching Center Requirements GSCR for PBX2s and the overall system interoperability performance The SUT also offers a Voice over Internet Protocol capability however this capability is not covered under this certification This statement was obtained from a Department of Defense document posted on there web site and full copy of the compliance document can be downloaded from the following link http jitc fhu disa mil tssi apl html UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 23 Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Module Installation Hardware Th
217. bility to place that particular station in DND When the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument places a group in DND an individual station within the group can cancel the DND setting to that station Hotel Motel Attendant Console The Attendant Console can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel Attendant Console In addition to the business features and functions of the Attendant the Hotel Motel Attendant Console can set Room Cutoff individual and group Automatic Wake Up Message Waiting and Do Not Disturb individual and group Page 17 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument This can be used to set and cancel standard H M features such as the following Do Not Disturb Room Cutoff Message Waiting Print Out Check In Check Out Automatic Wake up Room Status Do Not Disturb Override For each feature desired a dedicated line key on the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument must be assigned The Room Cutoff and Do Not Disturb features are applicable to a group of stations and individual stations There is one group available for each feature and the stations in the groups are programmed on a per station basis in system data The Print Out function provides a hard copy on the status of the following features when the feature is
218. ble and doesn t require the need to be co located with the NEAX PBX equipment INASET supports G 711 G 729a and G 723 1 audio compression for low bandwidth requirements INASET Applications The INASET is specifically suited for the enterprise environment including the following end users managers purchasing agents consultants and call agents But this is just the beginning This advanced IP business terminal can be programmed to do much more than a standard business phone For example the customizable user interface that s developed with the SDK can replace single line phones that are typically installed in cafeterias break rooms lobbies and manufacturing floors The INASET s programmability is also ideal for traders stockbrokers real estate brokers executives PR professionals and any other occupation in which professionals use Internet related information to interact with the public Additional Applications Personalization at the desktop Individual customization can bring flexibility to the desktop Software developers can enhance traditional features such as Answer Redial Conference Recall and Help menus Centralized services Information or features that need to be accessed by numerous individuals within the organization can be centralized on servers Directory service functions Intranet web site information customer records CTI applications and other work group Page 5 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Propos
219. card to receive the FSK signals for Caller ID This 4 port card mounts in any PIM 0 to 7 This card supports Loop Start trunks PN 8COTQ This card is used to provide the system with Caller ID Class SM This feature requires the SPN 4RSTC card to receive the FSK signals for Caller ID This 8 port card mounts in any PIM 0 to 7 This card supports Loop Start trunks PN 4DIDA This circuit card is a DID line trunk card which supports the functions of four DID line trunks This card provides the following functions This card is equipped with Direct Inward Dialing DID function This card is equipped with loop detection functions sending reverse signal and DTMF to DP conversion Page 6 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking PN AUCA This circuit card is used to either control two single line telephones for off premise extensions or for 2 line Direct Inward Dialing trunks Also this card will connect to single telephones for Power Failure Transfer PN 20DTA The 20DTA card is a two or four wire tie line card that mounts in any LT slot in PIM O to 7 This card provides analog tie line service for standard PBX networking or CCIS SPN 24DTAC This circuit card is a 24 channel 1 5 Mbps digital interfacing trunk card which also supports the interface between ISDN lines and CCIS lines with 1 5 Mbps AMI The following circuit cards may be used in conjunction with the 24DTA
220. ce UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Centralized E911 CCIS This feature allows the system to transmit a calling party number to the 911 Emergency system over CCIS tandem connection Consultation Hold All Calls CCIS This feature permits a station user within the CCIS network to hold any incoming or outgoing public network or Tie Line call while originating a call to another station within the CCIS network Date Line Security CCIS This service feature allows the lines which are used for data transmission through CCIS to be protected from interruptions such as Attendant Camp On Busy Verification CCIS Executive Right of Way and Attendant Override Deluxe Traveling Class Mark CCIS This feature provides outgoing call restrictions within the CCIS network The following three types of restrictions are allowed e Deluxe Traveling Class Mark Restriction e Route Restriction e Numbering Restriction Dial Access to Attendant CCIS This feature allows a station user to call an Attendant Console by dialing an operator call code through the CCIS network Digital Display Station CCIS This service feature provides a display of the station number on the Attendant Console during an Attendant to station connection within the CCIS network UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Digital Display Trunk
221. ceived from the SMDR terminal Timing to Output Billing Information o Billing information is output when a polling request is received from the SMDR terminal connected to LAN Timing to Release the Connection o The connection is released when the SMDR terminal does not receive data from the PBX in a predetermined time interval Also the connection is released when the PBX receives connection release text from the SMDR terminal or does not receive data from the SMDR terminal within a given time interval System Capacity MP Built in SMDR Number of Simultaneous Maximum No Call Records Trunk Calls 1024 SMDR with APOO When not a center office of When center office of Centralized Billing CCIS Centralized Billing CCIS No EXPMEM card on APOO 1600 EXPMEM card on APOO 27000 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 10 5 Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces Hardware Required for SMDR Description Qt o O Remarks gt SPN APOOB MRC C AP 1 per system Control card for SMDR PMS H M Printer CCIS Centralized SMDR Note 1 per system 1 per system MP Mounted card One per MP 1 per SMDR PMS 1 per SMDR PMS 1 per Printer 1 per system as Required as required Note Only one APOO can be mounted at on time in the system SPN AP00B MRC F AP 1 per system Control card for SMDR in 2400 amp 2400 Extended format only Centralized SMDR Note UA s Message Center Inter
222. check out status x x Room Data Image 17 Complete status information foraroom x x Wake Up AS Wakeup status AO Room Change Room Room change room swap status Swap Room Copy Room Occupancy Rooin Data Chance ER Room Occupancy Room Data Changes Data Connection 50 Batch processing status Maintenance Message Waiting Controlling message waiting lamps Station Message Detail 54 Station message detail information for each call ca URDD NES Setting check in check out and room change xo Room Recovery Recovery Room Recovery 57 Room information at system recovery E E Direct Data Entry 59 Data entered from a guest room station Room Data Change E Room data change information on a ae Administrative Setting administrative station name Station Name Status Inquiry si Status Inquiry Data link maintenance link maintenance X Available Not able Xx Xx x lt gt lt X lt X lt gt lt XK X lt eae XxX x Page 10 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces PMS Interface PMS with APOO B on an RS 232C Interface Description 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps asynchronous software Data Rate selectable Note 1 Operating Mode Half Duplex Electrical Interface EIA RS 232C electrical standard interface Characteristic Signal Fom Form Signal Form ElA EIA RS 404 EIA RS 404
223. cide whether or not to take a call on the basis of caller identity When using this feature the subscriber hears the caller s name and is asked to press 1 to accept the call or 2 to transfer the call to voice mail Subscribers can turn call screening on and off by telephone Daylight saving time schedule NEAXMail AD 64 can be programmed to set the clock forward or backward to automatically adjust for daylight saving time Directory listing Callers can enter the first three letters of a subscriber s name first or last depending on how the system is configured and the system routes the call appropriately Callers are told the extension number for future reference If the extension is not answered or is busy NEAXMail AD 64 automatically routes the caller to the subscriber s voice mailbox Holiday schedule Holiday dates may be programmed into NEAXMail AD 64 each year so the system automatically runs in night mode on holidays Multilingual capability The system can support up to nine different language prompt sets One system can handle several different languages at once Language choice can be per port or per user In addition callers can choose a language from a language selection box US English is the default language for all systems unless otherwise specified Available Languages American English US French Canadian FC Mexican Spanish ES Argentinean Spanish AR New Zealand English NZ Cantonese Chinese CC ltalian IT Swedish SE D
224. ckup option includes a Tape drive 1 DAT tape software cleaning cartridge and documentation Note Level I systems require the addition of a SCSI adapter card which requires 1 open PCI card slot UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply In the event of a power failure the power supply will instantly switch to its internal battery bank This keeps the NEAXMail AD 64 in continuous operation and allows the user to work and save valuable data before the platform shuts down Note NEC strongly recommends the use of a UPS for all NEAXMail AD 64 systems Optional Software Operating System and Utilities Software The Third Party software includes m Windows 2003 Server software Runtime Edition PCAnywhere 11 5 or higher Notes Windows 2003 Server software Voicemail Runtime Edition and PCAnywhere may be purchased from NEC or through a third party provider If you choose to purchase the Third Party Software from NEC you MUST also purchase a PC Server platform or in conjunction with a NEAXMail AD 64 Upgrade order If you choose to provide your own Windows 2003 server and PCAnywhere software it is the Associates responsibility to install Windows 2003 server software PCAnywhere and voice messaging software Windows 2003 Server Voicemail Runtime Edition may only be used to run the NEAXMail AD 64 related applications on the NEAXMail AD 64 platform Optional ActiveFax Software Maximum ActiveFax Software capacity is 8 in a single syst
225. clip with quick release and the other has a built in belt clip The Weather Case model offers a weather resistant material for users whose job is outdoors a majority of time There are two available headset options The Headband type is a classic banded headset with a microphone extension The Single Ear Cover type is an ear bud type with an in line microphone Note For seamless handover ZT must be ver7 2 or higher Page 5 20 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dierm SP30 SoftPhone The Dterm SP30 allows customers to capitalize on the advantages of a converged voice and data network whether they re in the office or on the road The Dterm SP30 combines traditional business communication needs with the data applications your customers require The Dterm SP30 optimally delivers high quality voice via a USB connected headset The Dterm SP30 has the ability to use a wireless handset PS or Dterm for all voice connections instead of the USB handset With a simple drag and drop the Dterm SP30 allows telephone dialing from other telephone directory applications such as Microsoft Outlook HTML pages and Word documents etc In addition the Dterm SP30 provides an interface to Microsoft s Telephony Application Programming Interface TAPI via NEC OpenWorX integration allowing TAPl enabled applications such as Outlook and ACT to make and receive calls The Dterm SP
226. cocnccccncccnconcncocnnonnnonononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnaninnnns 1 Open WorX Business Receptionist BR cooocccocnccocccccncconncccnococnnnnnonanonnnnonanonnnnonnnnnnnnonannonnnenaninanoss 6 Open Wo Communications Portals aaa ida cidss 7 Open Or Diales dal eicioda 9 Open WorX Location Status Information LSI occcccccconnccccnconnconcncccnonnnnnonnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnns 10 OpenWorX Message Reader MR cooocccocccccccccccccocococccconocncnonocconononononnnnonannnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnnonons 10 Open Worx Short Text WIESSAGING ii A a ai 11 Open WorX Incoming Call Assistant ICA oocococccccniccnncccnccncncconoconnnnnnonannonononnnnnnononnnonannnnnnnonanenoss 12 Open WorX Group Call Forward Control GCFC occcoccccccncoccccncncconnnncnconnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnonnnnnonnnnnnnonanenons 13 OpenWWoOrA Personal Gall AssiStant PCA La E 14 Open vor Name DIS DIA iaa 16 Open WorX Multiple CCIS Node Configuration ooccocccocncocncocncocncocnconnconoconnonnnonnnonnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnoos 17 OAI Application Software DevelopMent ccocccocccocccocccocccocconncconcoononcnonononononcnonrononononononnnnnonnnoncncnnnos 17 System SPECICATION Ss nn oi cis 17 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution ACD with MIS ooocccconnnnncccnononcccconncnnnccccnonannnncnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnannnnnnnnanas 1 Automatic Call DISTAIDUIORN AGO cai a ia 1 O ea ret eo a ES ne EE ee ee eg 1 BASIC AGO ESAS 3 srcrss
227. communication systems with the development of the electro mechanical system NEC successfully delivered step by step crossbar and cross reed technology to the world marketplace During this era In 1950 NEC began manufacturing some of the world s first semiconductors In 1952 NEC won the Deming prize awarded in communications In 1956 NEC introduced step by step cross reed technology and crossbar telephone switching systems to the world marketplace In 1959 NEC developed one of the first transistorized computers In 1963 January 17 1963 NEC entered the American marketplace with a sales office in New York In 1965 NEC became a world innovator in digital transmission equipment The Electronic Age NEC entered the Electronic Age with solid state technology stored program control and digital switching throughout the 1970 s and 1980 s Page 1 2 In 1972 NEC developed the world s first 10K single element LSI chip In 1976 NEC introduced the first skinny wire system In 1978 NEC introduced the first digital hybrid the Electra 100 In 1979 NEC entered the personal computer market In 1980 NEC patented its Distributor Processor design US Patent 4 210 782 This little known patented process invented by Kazunori Fujita ushered in a new era of business communications systems through the use of distributed processing modular building block concept and fully integrated voice and data switching Out of this patent came
228. connection and re connect the link within the system for efficient usage of the CCIS links Message Waiting Lamp Setting Attendant CCIS This feature allows an Attendant in the 2400 IPX to set or cancel a Message Waiting lamp indication through the CCIS network ona station in 2000 IPS Message Waiting Lamp Setting Station CCIS This feature allows a station user in the 2400 IPX to set or cancel a Message Waiting lamp indication through the CCIS network to a station in 2000 IPS with this feature Miscellaneous Trunk Access CCIS This feature provides access to all types of external and customer provided equipment facilities such as Tie Line and exchange network along with Dictation Paging Access CCIS and Code Calling through the CCIS network Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction CCIS This feature denies certain stations and dial repeating tie trunks access to specific trunk groups such as Tie Line exchange network Dictation or Paging Access CCIS through the CCIS network UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls sequence to be forwarded over a CCIS network to a station in another office Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line sequence to be forwarded over a CCIS ne
229. ctionality was designed to grant the individual user access to enterprise web based backend systems such as databases HR applications and existing business portals The Portal supports custom or company created portlets so tools can be provided to users to help them better perform their daily business tasks Users can also add Internet sites and applications personalize their settings edit screen layouts and change color and title schemes My Contacts Having the ability to find the people you need to contact is imperative The My Call List combines call logs a custom contact or buddy list this list can be comprised of individuals or groups along with personal and corporate directories in one application This makes it fast and easy to find that important contact The personal directory can be synchronized with Outlook contacts and the corporate directory links with the OpenWorX directory via LDAP Once you locate a contact My Call List makes it quick and easy for you to connect With a single click you can make a phone call launch an email start a voice video or collaboration session or initiate an instant message You simply choose the contact vehicle and launch it directly from a custom made contact list or from any directory Communications Portal logs incoming and outgoing calls whether dialed using the Communications Portal or by hand You can sort all call logs by Name Number or Time and easily return the call by
230. ctions Camp camps a caller onto a busy extension Cancel disconnects a call or cancels an existing Supervised transfer Release completes a supervised transfer or conference Override allows the operator to perform an executive override of a busy call The above functions are mapped to Function Keys F1 F12 at the top of the keyboard The spacebar can be used to answer the first call in queue and the Enter key will activate dialing or transfer based on the current call state Other Functions and Features Associated With This Screen Loop keys allow the attendant to hold up to 10 different callers simultaneously The boxes directly below the loop keys are the source and destination boxes The Source is on the left and is fully configurable to show the caller name and caller ID if known Additionally up to three lines of information chosen from the directory can be displayed below the name and number The destination box is configurable in the same way and shows available information UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 3 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface when the operator transfers the call to another party or when a station transfers a call to the operator The Number Entered box allows the operator to enter a known number for either a direct dial or a transfer The number shown in the bottom hand portion of the screen represents the number of ca
231. culation To calculate the MTBF of a single system obtain the sum of the FITs from each component For example Assume you have a complete system that consists of two components Item A FIT 31 700 Item B FIT 80 000 Total Fit 31 700 80 000 111 700 10 MTBF 8952 55 Hours 111 700 8 952 22 Hours 1 02 Years 8 60Hours Year Availability Calculations MTBF Availability OXXXXX MTBF MTTR UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Page 3 7 Chapter 3 System Highlights System Traffic In regards to the traffic capacity of electronic PABX two kinds of descriptions are usually employed One is Busy Hour Call Attempts BHCA which relates to the ability of the Central Processor Unit CPU Another is the traffic handling capacity per line that relates to the handling capacity of each station This technical information herein offers the traffic data for both cases Traffic Load Traffic load is expressed as the quantity of traffic during the busy hour the busiest one hour period of the day for traffic Traffic can be measured in minutes hours hundreds of call seconds CCS or Erlangs CCS one CCS is equal to 100 seconds of telephone time or 1 36 Erlang Erlang one Erlang is equal to one hour of telephone time or 36 CCS CCS units are convenient when traffic is measured in small increments For telephone traffic a typical business
232. current statistics and messages to call center personnel The call statistics are also collected in the MIS database and used to generate reports in text or graphical format These reports and graphs can be printed for views of activity ranging from a graph of today s activity to a retrospective report covering previous months The following features are available with the purchase of CallCenterWorX MIS 3 0 e True Multi Tenant Support e Increased Multi Split Agents from 4 to 16 split monitoring e Microsoft MSDE e ODBC Compliant e Configurable in 15 min 30 min 1 hr Increments e Conversion utility to migrate proprietary database to ODBC database e Backup and Restore e 1 5 GB database storage e New System Agent Detail Status Screen e Configurable Agent State Colors e Retains Real Time Screen Configuration UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 7 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Business System Capacities Item ACD Tenants per System Splits per ACD Tenant Splits per System Splits per Logon ID Active ACD Agents per 120 Note 2 Note 4 system Trunks per System 255 Note 4 Maximum Queue Dept Priority Levels 1 Maximum Calls in Queue per System Transfer to PBX Numbers Agent Logon ID Codes per System Agent Logon ID Code Digits Statistics Report History Limit MIS per System BB geme o f e Split Ber a l e System sees m ooo BHCA Note 1 The total
233. d NEAXmail AD 120 voice mail systems Work Order Work Order lets you create work orders that automate commands from all the other AIMWorX modules It uses a separate user interface that lets you schedule work orders manage technician s schedules track progress through completion and manage inventory and billing Additional Reference Material All additional documentation is included on the CD ROM Also included on the CD ROM is a copy of Acrobat Reader to view the documentation Page18 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Voice Mail Integration Voice mail allows callers to leave a recorded message in their own voice and exact words for another individual or group of individuals With a voice mail application people can communicate precisely and personally without having to be on the same telephone line at the same time Voice mail applications allow communication to take place without endless games of telephone tag Research has shown that only one third of all business calls achieve direct contact yet 40 of all messages are one way messages that do not require dialogue Voice mail saves time by allowing you to leave a message immediately Voice mail bypasses the problems of time zones after switchboard hours and other obstacles to communication in this fast paced business world Voice mail allows the people in your office to better manage their communica
234. d on a call basis or terminal basis by system programming The 8 IPLA IP PAD and the 24 IPLA daughter board both have built in VCT capability to provide voice compression which is required for G 729a and G 723 1 Service Conditions Intranet must be used for a CCIS network via IP Internet is not supported Maximum number of nodes in the CCIS network via IP is 255 All CCIS features are available in the CCIS networking via IP When T1 timeout of IAI is occurred an outgoing CCIS call can be routed over alternate trunk route This alternate routing can be allowed or denied on a trunk route basis by system programming Note The alternate routing is not available for tandem calls UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 5 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS CCIS Networking via IP between IP Terminals SE D E T e M Page 14 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS CCIS Networking via IP Non Peer to Peer When the distant PBX system does not support peer to peer the systems are connected with IP trunks including Voice Compression Trunks VCT via Time Division Switch TDSW Voice signals of IP terminals are transmitted via IP PADs while those of legacy terminals are directly connected to the IP trunks Call control signals between the systems are also tra
235. d to a preprogrammed station Priority Calls and Off Hook Alarms which terminate to an Attendant are also routed by this feature Call Rerouting This feature provides flexible reroute capabilities for a variety of calls when the system is in night mode Day Night Mode Change by Attendant Console This feature provides activation of DAY NIGHT Mode Change by depressing a predetermined key from the Attendant Console Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing This feature allows selected stations to activate a change from day mode to night mode by dialing a special code Day Night Mode Change by System Clock This feature provides automatic activation of DAY NIGHT Mode Change by using System Clock Night Connection Fixed This feature allows incoming calls normally terminated to the Attendant to reroute to a predetermined station when the system is placed in Night Service Night Connection Flexible This feature provides incoming calls normally terminated to the fixed night station to be Call Forwarded to another station Trunk Answer Any Station TAS This feature allows any station other than one with incoming restrictions to answer incoming calls when the system is in the night mode When this feature is activated incoming exchange network calls will activate a common alert signal at the customer premises By dialing a specified code any station may answer the call and then extend it to any other station by means of
236. d via pager or cell phone while mobile Enjoy the Benefits of Integrated Messaging For simplified message management take advantage of the NEAXMail IM 16LX s numerous features convenient access to messages and customizable user friendly settings Easy to implement easy to maintain and easy to install the NEAXMail IM 16LX is engineered to be a cost effective and efficient integrated messaging solution for your NEAX 2000 Basic Features Live Record Live Monitor Soft Keys Functionality Web Based Mailbox Manager Browser based Administration Console ANI Capture and Display Constant Message Count UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 25 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Urgent Message Count Date and Time Stamp Single Digit Dialing Subscriber Self Enrollment Special Delivery Options Future Urgent Return Receipt Speed Keys for single button access to functions Multiple Personalized Greetings Message Editing Message Rewind Pause and Fast Forward Message Waiting Lamp Notification Out dial Notification to Pager Cascade Notification Cut through paging Message Volume Control Subscriber Controlled Groups Message Cancel and Redirect Trunk Mapping for specific trunks to be routed to alternate greetings Extension Remapping Supervised and Unsupervised Transfer support Transfer to Attendant User Changeable Voice Prompts Reports Subscriber and Syst
237. d with DHCP server to provide easy administration of IP address Reduced Hardware with IP based Architecture The DtermlPs accommodated in a LAN do not require a DLC card because they can be interfaced directly with the LAN and connected on a peer to peer basis When a DtermIP is connected with station trunk which is accommodated in TSW the speech path between LAN and TSW is made via IP PAD under the call processing control of MP The number of DtermlPs can be simply expanded by adding the terminal itself an IP Seat License and IP PADs if traffic volume is increased With this system architecture the hardware such as DLC PIM Power Supply etc is reduced and easy cost effective move add change is realized Office Data Backup Enhancement The office data of UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is stored in Flash ROM Various Installation Methods To meet the specific needs of the customers environment the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides the following installation methods Floor Standing Installation Wall mounting Installation IEC standard 19 inch Rack mounting Installation Unified Circuit Card Size All the circuit cards for UNIVWERGE NEAX 2000 IPS are designed in one size PN type and installed in the PIM This maximizes the efficiency of slot utilization of the PIM High Density Line Trunk Cards Major line trunk cards used in UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS are provided with 8 circuits per card This allows the physical system size to be compact U
238. dant Console during an Attendant to station connection During an Attendant to trunk connection the same display shows the trunk route designation and a trunk identification code 4 digits Attendant Call Selection This feature allows assignment of keys on the Attendant Console to particular types of trunk routes such as WATS or FX and particular types of service calls such as Attendant recalls intercept calls etc LEDs indicate the type of incoming call and pressing the associated key allows the Attendant to answer the calls in any order Attendant Console Lockout Password This feature allows the Attendant Console to be set into a lockout mode This diables the console from originating or receiving calls and setting or resetting service features To return the Console to its manual operating condition a password is required Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel The Attendant has the ability to enter and remove individual stations from Do Not Disturb DND Additionally the Attendant can set one preassigned group of stations into or out of Do Not Disturb Attendant Interposition Calling Transfer This feature allows any Attendant to directly converse with another Attendant and also allows Attendants to transfer calls from their console to another Attendant s console in systems where Multiple Console Operation has been provided UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Attenda
239. dant assistance Service Conditions 1 If the network is notified that the destination station for the DID call is busy or a connection controlled station the network gives the calling station a Busy Tone This depends upon call forwarding services being in service 2 If the called station is nonexistent the DID call can be routed to the Attendant Console another pre designated station or to receive Reorder Tone Note Refer to the Business Features and Specifications manual for more details of DID service DID and DOD Addressing This feature allows the system to use DID and DOD on the same B channels Trunk Provisioning Service Selection is not required B channels can be used for DID and DOD without separating the trunk routes Service Conditions 1 Confirm the DID and DOD selection with the customer s local exchange carrier prior to installation 2 The DID DOD is supported without service provisioning since no facility indication to the network is required Note For more details refer to Direct Inward Dialing and Direct Outward Dialing in the Business Features and Specifications manual ISDN Terminal This feature provides the system with an ISDN Terminal or Terminal Adapter TA ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal ISDN Terminal to Single Line Telephone ISDN Terminal to Multiline Terminal and ISDN Terminal to PS connections are available Service Conditio
240. ders and third party reimbursement entities These measures impact how patient medical information is exchanged as well as accessed within a facility s data network Claims transmissions using Internet intranets extranets or private data networks are subject to HIPPA security standards as previously outlined HIPAA Compliance Patient medical data is not accessed stored or otherwise exchanged over a healthcare facility s private branch exchange PBX However an NEC manufactured private branch exchange does provide the flexibility to create detailed call accounting records that can be utilized to audit or otherwise track utilization of a facilityss NEC telecommunications system and or PBX A NEC PBX can also be configured to restrict access to designated telephone extensions Furthermore an NEC PBX can also be configured to utilize password access to individual telephones voice mailboxes etc for purposes of end user authentication So under the guise of the security standards within HIPAA NEC Private Branch Exchange equipment is HIPAA compliant and does provide the necessary security measures for use within any business setting that is subject to administrative rules outlined with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act Department of Defense Compliance The NEC NEAX 2000 Internet Protocol Switch IPS with software release D1 8 20 hereinafter referred to as the system under test SUT meets all of its critical interopera
241. ditor This is a powerful timesaving tool that enables you to create a list of UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS commands that perform tasks in the PBX This list is referred to as a script which can be saved and run at anytime You can also use the MACH Script Editor to perform many other operations UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 8 3 Issue 6 Chapter 8 System administration Traffic Management The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides traffic management reports to be used for overall analysis of system performance MAT Worx is used to request and display the type of report sample measurement time period and time increments of reports Type of Traffic Measurement Reports Number of successful attempts at outgoing access based on trunk route Number of times all trunks were busy based on trunk route Number of incoming calls based on trunk route Number of incoming calls connected to busy tone and then trunk abandoned Quantity of incoming calls with no answer and trunk abandoned based on trunk route Number of times a push button register was connected on a system basis Number of times all push button registers were busy on a system basis Number of outgoing connections using modem trunks based on modem trunk group Number of incoming connections using modem trunks based on modem trunk group Number of times all modem trunks were busy based on modem trunk group Number of times the Conference circuits
242. ds Page 2 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Integration In addition to the application processors manufactured by NEC the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS systems also deliver an open architecture for integration with other manufacturers Interface processors and specifications for communicating with computing devices support this integration These computing devices enable such service features as network and facilities management call center applications call accounting property management voice mail maintenance access terminals and management information systems for ACD reports and monitoring Unified Circuit Card All the circuit cards for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS are designed in one size PN type and installed in the PIM This maximizes the efficiency of slot utilization of the PIM High Density Line Trunk Cards Major line trunk cards used in UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS are provided with 8 circuits per card This allows the physical system size to be compact Universal Slot One PIM provides 12 card slots for Line Trunk LT Also these card slots can be used for Application Processor AP cards without complicated limitation As this makes easy quotation and installation more number of AP cards can be mounted in one PIM DC DC Power Supply for 48V The PIM houses an optional DC DC Power Supply for the cards which require 48V power such as the CSI card used
243. e fax and e mail are collected in your Inbox and made available from a single application ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging Lotus Notes GroupWise has all the easy to use features of you Inbox including drop down menus toolbar buttons context sensitive help and tool tips e Future message delivery e Sorting messages With ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging Lotus Notes GroupWise you use intuitive VCR style buttons for playing messages You can use the mouse to click on the Rewind Pause or Fast Forward buttons to move quickly through messages A position slider shows where you are in the message and lets you move Page 19 22 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems immediately to any part of the message Using the mouse you can redirect a message to any subscriber including groups of subscribers You can also redirect voice over the Internet ViewMail will save voice messages as WAV files when you attach them to an e mail message ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging Lotus Notes GroupWise can be used on Windows 98 NT 4 0 2000 and XP using Outlook 98 2000 and 2002 ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging Lotus Notes GroupWise gives you some of the same features as the basic ViewMail including e Push button message control e Sending messages to the Internet e Return receipt e Archiving messages e Rules based message handling e Copying and pasting messages to with MS E
244. e A calls a station in node B a tie line is seized and the call set up information is transmitted in band to attempt to ring down the called station If that station is busy busy tone is heard through the tie line from the destination system This acceptable practice has been used for many years in spite of how inefficient it may be The above scenario illustrates why many non CCIS tie line networks require tie line usage for calls that never get completed This is not very efficient and often results in customers needing to purchase more voice data tie lines then what would really be needed if an intelligent network were employed The intelligent CCIS network provides a Look Ahead Routing feature that helps to reduce the load on network tie lines voice data channels thereby reducing the total number of voice data channels tie lines required between two nodes When an on net call is placed to a remote node the system will Look Ahead to the destination system to determine if the called station is available This is accomplished by communications between the systems over the D channel If the called station is not available busy tone is provided to the calling party locally and a voice data channel tie line is not used This provides a decrease in the overall number of tie lines needed to carry the traffic loads between network nodes further reducing ongoing operation costs and system hardware requirements The benefits of Look Ahead Rout
245. e ISDN network provides Name Display service NI 2 DMS100 the calling party name can be displayed in place of the CPN A maximum of 16 characters The calling name from ISDN can be received by terminating systems CM30 YY 02 03 such as Trunk Direct Appearance 02 Trunk Direct Appearance TAS 03 Direct In Termination 04 Automated Attendant 09 ISDN Indial 18 and Attendant Console 14 In addition Sub address termination is available The 24PRT card is required When Call Forwarding or Call Transfer routes an incoming call from ISDN to a Multiline Terminal PS in the own office the calling name is displayed on the destination station of Call Forwarding or Call Transfer Calling Name Display on ISDN Terminals is not supported Calling Name Display or Calling Number Display can be selected as the initial display in station Class of Service The display can be changed to the calling name or calling number by pressing the display selection key on a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console while the number or name is displayed When the terminating system CM30 YY 02 03 is set to Trunk Direct Appearance or Attendant Console the calling name is displayed only after the called party answers the call Conditions on Tandem Connection a The calling name received from ISDN is relayed only via CCIS with tandem connection A maximum of 16 characters b When Call forwarding routes an incoming call from ISDN to CCIS the calling name i
246. e Up Do not Disturb Room Cutoff Check in Check out service Message Waiting and PMS connect or disconnect status In the following cases a history can be output When Automatic Wake Up is set cancelled When Automatic Wake Up from an administrative station or console is set canceled When Automatic Wake Up has been executed When Do Not Disturb is set cancelled When Room Cutoff is set canceled When Message Waiting is set canceled When a check in checkout checkout cancellation is performed from PMS When PBX PMS communication is started disconnected UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 17 3 Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Features Automatic Wake up This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call guest rooms or administration stations at specified times Upon answering the guest is connected to a recorded announcement or music source A printout of Unanswered Busy or Blocked Automatic Wake Up attempts for each guest room is provided using the Hotel Motel printer Setting and canceling can be initiated from the following Attendant Console Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument Guest Station Administrative Station Property Management System PMS terminal 1 The time is entered on a 24 hour system in one minute increments 2 A maximum of 32 stations can be set for the same Automatic Wake Up time When the setting exceeds 32 the excess stations will be set to
247. e allows the WCS to be integrated with many types of PBXs and to activate various PBX services by sending hook flash signal and DTMF tone Service Conditions 1 The signal type of the following cases can be programmed on a route by route basis between the WCS and the PBX To dial for placing a call To dial for accessing to the PBX service To dial after sending hook flash UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 1 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System The signal type of dial while a call is established is DTMF It is not programmable If the PBX requires pause timing between a trunk access code and an external number the WCS can automatically insert the pause timing The called calling party number is not displayed on the LCD of a Dterm PS III The interface between a PBX and the WCS is a LC and a COT The same number of LC and COT as Dterm PS lll are required Code Restriction and Class of Service are provided by the PBX Any type of call is originated via the PBX even a Dterm PS III to Dterm PS III call The trunk circuit of the WCS can recognize a momentary open signal as a release signal if the PBX provides it The station number of a Dterm PS Ill can be assigned flexibly The limitation of the number and maximum digits depends on the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS CCIS Interface This feature allows the WCS to be integrated with NEC PBXs with CCIS interface Service Conditions 1 T
248. e any information to the network A maximum of 16 digits can be assigned as the calling station number The maximum number of area codes and office code patterns is 15 Transmission of CPN to the ISDN network can be programmed by the Class of Service Programming is required for each station 5 The delivery of CPN information is subject to local regulations AN Page 15 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 CPN Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN To Terminating User Display This feature provides a visual display of the originating station s number and subaddress information on a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console for incoming ISDN calls This provides the terminal user with a quick and accurate way to identify the originating station s number Calling Party Number Service Conditions 1 2 10 11 12 This feature is available on the Multiline Terminal with Display Attendant Console and Dterm PSIII A maximum of 16 digits forming the originating party s number CPN including the PBX access code can be displayed For sub address a maximum of 8 digits can be displayed If the subaddress exceeds 8 digits the first 8 are displayed The CPN is flashing while the Multiline Terminal is ringing on its Prime Line The duration of display after the call is answered can be selected by system data programming display for 6 seconds or continuously If th
249. e digit string The HF is not sent to the PMS and Hotel Motel Printer Example Access code 1234567890 When the Hotel Motel Printer is used can be used to separate the data entry is not printed out but is sent out to the PMS In this case the input data including is up to 30 digits Example Access code 001 002 12345 3 Reorder tone will be received instead of service set tone if the PMS does not respond within 15 seconds or sends a negative answer to the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Do Not Disturb Console This feature allows a DSS BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Do Not Disturb DND Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console DND set status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Terminal user can set cancel the DND status of other stations using the DND Console UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 17 5 Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Do Not Disturb Hotel Motel This feature allows the Attendant Consoles Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments guest stations or Property Management System PMS terminals to place individual stations into Do Not Disturb Calls can be placed from stations set in DND Automatic Wake Up and Timed Reminder will override Do Not Disturb A station in Do Not Disturb can be called from the Attendant
250. e following is a list of some of the markets the IPS easily adapts to fit customer requirements Business Legal Telemarketing Hospitality Communication Financial Tenant Services Government Education Transportation Health Care Competitive Benefits and Advantages Advanced Technology complete IP system on one card Pentium Equivalent AMD CPU PSTN Gateway requires trunk cards Supports Both IP amp TDM Both TDM amp IP Totally Non Blocking H 323 Connectivity Smaller Foot Print Low Power Consumption Wide Selection of IP and TDM Terminals Economical Incremental Licensing Costs Reduced Hardware Costs Survivability at the Remote Site Mobility and Continuance with in a Remote PIM Network The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a unique set of advantages to users who seek an advanced information system that is both flexible and dependable Through the use of state of the art computer controlled telecommunications technology NEC is able to provide the following advantages 1 Full Featured System Station users have access to more than 300 service features that enhance user productivity reduce operating costs and improve communication efficiency In addition the control network and interface positions can accommodate features services and subsystems as required by specific applications 2 Network Integration The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS offers business industries hospitals and hotel motels t
251. e on the user s Dterm even while currently on another phone call The name lookup comes from the Personal External or Corporate Directory in OpenWorX The above order is also the search order priority Check for past or current calls to the user s Dterm on any Dterm in the system with an ICA enabled function key Look up past callers and return their calls with the information stored in ICA s database This is known as the inbound call log It will store up to 99 entries Check list of calls made by the user This is called the Outbound Call Log Up to 99 entries will be stored Supports use of and in the user extension with the limitation that the user must be at their physical device to log in if their extension contains either a or a Determine if a call was forwarded or transferred ICA Functionality ICA uses the same database as the entire OpenWorX suite of applications The following fields from the OpenWorX Database are accessible Caller name inbound and outbound call log Caller number inbound and outbound call log Date and time of each call inbound and outbound call log Whether or not the call was transferred and by whom inbound call log Whether or not the call was forwarded and by whom inbound call log The direct number dialed by the caller inbound call log ICA Benefits Able to identify callers on prime lines and sub lines before they are answered even while the user is still on another cal
252. e system manager can set which language each subscriber hears Subscribers will hear prompts in that language when they call the system to check voice mail Additional languages can be purchased separately Subscriber self enrollment Subscribers personalize their voice mailbox set up their directory listing record personal greetings and set up security codes through an easy to use touchtone telephone conversation Because self enrollment is so simple subscribers can begin using NEAXMail AD 64 immediately UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 15 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Directory listing Subscribers control whether they want to be listed in the automated attendant directory see automated attendant features Subscribers record and spell their name for the directory Personal greetings Subscribers record their individual personal greetings Callers hear the greeting before they are given an opportunity to leave a message Subscribers can change the content of their greeting from any touchtone telephone or from their desktop using Mailbox Manager at any time to reflect changes in their schedule Personal ID This number which is usually based on the subscribers extension number identifies subscribers to the voice mail system when they are calling to access their mailbox The NEAXMail AD 64 allows personal IDs of varying lengths from one to ten digits Personal security
253. eature permits the Attendant to hold an incoming call ina special mode when the desired station for the transfer is busy The Attendant sends a Camp On tone to the busy station When that station becomes idle it is automatically alerted and connected to the waiting party The Semi automatic Camp on feature works similarly to full automatic except when the station becomes idle the call on Camp on recalls to the Attendant Once the Attendant answers the Camp on recall the station is then called and the call is connected Attendant Console SN716 DESKCON The Attendant Console S5N716 DESKCON operates on a switched loop basis with a maximum of 6 Attendant loops terminating at each console on the associated Interface card The Attendant uses these loops for answering originating holding extending and reentering calls When Attendant loop release is used the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each console Attendant Called Calling Name Display This feature provides a display of the calling called party s name on the Attendant Console LCD for Attendant Called Calling Name Display On attendant to station calls the LCD display the name assigned to the primary extension of the station On attendant to trunk calls the LCD displays the name assigned to the trunk route of the trunk Page 9 6 Attendant Called Calling Number This feature provides a display of the station number and station name on the Atten
254. ec ON 0 25 sec OFF Continuous Continuous 1 sec ON 3 sec OFF 0 25 sec ON 1 25 sec OFF 0 25 sec ON 1 25 sec OFF Call Waiting Ring back Tone 440 Hz mixed with 480 Hz 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Message Waiting Indication Tone 390 Hz mixed with 440 Hz 0 125 sec ON 0 125 sec OFF Ringing Signal Specifications 20 or 25Hz Voltage 75 or 90Vrms Note The IPS has the capability to detect the above type of signal from Central Office and to transmit the above type of signal to PBX stations Dimension and Weight UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Descnption Dimensions W x D x H mm Weight kg Main Equipment PIM Fully card mounted Approx 430 x 223 x 353 Approx 11 5 BASE Approx 430 x 205 2 x 61 6 Approx 3 0 BASE TRAY for UL Approx 435 x 224 6 x 66 2 Approx 1 7 UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM IPS DML IPS DMR Deccrption Specifications p Dimensions W x D x H mm Weight kg Main Equipment NEAX IPS DM 430 W x 365 D x 88 H mm Approximately 7Kg MODULAR NEAX IPS DML CHASSIS when all slots are NEAX IPS DMR occupied Page 3 20 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM IPS DML IPS DMR System Specifications Specifications LT ports Max 56 ports MODULAR CHASSIS Max 64 ports including 8 virtual LT ports MODULAR CHASSIS Max 112 ports system AP ports Max 256 ports system IP ports Max 956 ports IPS DM Max 128 p
255. economical facility WATS FX and DDD based on the area code and office code dialed In the case of Specialized Common Carriers associated NXX patterns can be screened out via 6 digit Toll Restriction if the dialed number is not within the designated service area of that SCC The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS system provides one of the most flexible route selection capabilities of any system on the market today While many systems can add and or delete digits on incoming calls it is the capability of what can be done on outgoing calls that make the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS such a powerful and cost effective system When multiple routes are to be used for an outgoing call the system is programmed with route order priority RA Priority 1 usually being the most cost effective route for the call being made Up to eight route choices can be assigned for a call These choices would be put into an Outgoing Route Pattern OPR The system allows for up to 64 different OPRs to be constructed For true cost effective use of outgoing dialing it may be desired to change the outgoing route selection during specific times when certain carriers may offer cheaper rates These OPRs can be assigned using one of eight different Time of Day Patterns TDPTN In TDPTN data you assign what pattern is used at what time of day You then assign the Time Pattern in the OPR data Outgoing calls made using the Least Cost Routing LCR can have up to 24 digits added to the num
256. ed This service is executed only for the idle terminals This service is not executed for the terminals in Logout or busy status The actual starting time of the Program Download at Appointed Time may be varied with a range of 1 minute When 448 of IP Enabled Dterm have to be upgraded for example it takes about 450 minutes to be completed without retry CMFA YY 50 1st 01 02 counts the number of terminals that are successfully downloaded and the number of terminals that result in download failure only when the PBX sends the latest program download message to the terminals If the terminals are busy or logged out CMFA YY 50 1 02 does not count the number of terminals in download failure because the PBX does not send the download message to the terminals Program Download at Appointed Time can be suspended by CMFA YY 50 1 00 CCC clear during executing the download However you cannot suspend the download of the terminal with Downloading displayed 7 Conditions on Program Download at Login Time m Program Download at Login Time service can be assigned on a system basis by CMOC YY 90 1 02 When this service is assigned retry in download failure status is not available 8 Conditions on Program Download for Designated Terminals Program Download for Designated Terminals is assigned and executed on the Primary Extension number basis This service is executed only for idle terminals This service is not executed for
257. ed Calls Attendant Outbound Calls Attendant Interval Summary Attendant Inbound Interval Attendant Outbound Interval Total Attendant Summary Attendant Login Logout Detail Queue Reports Queue Summary Queue Abandon Calls Queue Answered Calls Queue Interval Total Queue Summary Open WorX Business Attendant System BAS NEC s Business Attendant System BAS is a powerful client server PC based tool for full time and part time UN VERGE neax 2000 IPS system answering position The BAS consists of an interactive client side application running on Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system that connects to the BAS server via the corporate LAN The BAS server software is used for UNIVERGE NEaAx 2000 IPS connectivity and runs on a Microsoft Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2003 Server UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 1 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface With a dynamic interactive directory and an Open Application Interface OAI driven call queue the operators are able to process a high call volume with minimal effort and time expenditure in today s sophisticated business environment For example an operator can answer an incoming call from one of many queues find out to whom the caller wishes to speak begin typing that name to select it in the directory and once selected hit the lt Enter gt key or click the entry to transfer the call Additionally the caller could be parked put on
258. ed at the Enter Selection prompt followed by pressing the Enter key CallCenter WorX MIS responds by displaying the requested menu screen by using one of its prompting methods to ask for more information or by displaying the appropriate data screen CallCenterWorX ACD 3 0 for Business Turnkey Software Only is available packaged for 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 and 120 Agents Each combines both the ACD and MIS software on a CD ROM and comes with a required security key for the main CallCenterWorX PC The security key attached to the main CallCenterWorX PC provides the appropriate agent capacity as well as the main CallCenterWorX supervisor position Individual security keys can also be purchased for applications requiring additional supervisor PCs CallCenter WorX ACD 3 0 for Business Turnkey Packages Business Turnkey Packages CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 10 Agent Pkg CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 80 Agent Pkg CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 100 Agent Pkg CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 120 Agent Pkg CallCenter WorX ACD 3 0 for Business Software Only Packages Business Software Only Packages CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 10 Agent SW Only CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 40 Agent SW Only CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 80 Agent SW Only CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 100 Agent SW Only CallCenterWorX B ACD 3 00 120 Agent SW Only Page 12 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request fo
259. ed directly to this card SPN IPTB A PN IPT SPN 4VCTI A W Cable Voice compression protocols G723 1 G729A G711 FAX 14 4 kbps DTMF signals Used together with PN IPTB card er 4 channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk max of four per IPTB VCT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 17 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP H 323 Connection VoIP Voice over IP allows the system to transmit voice conversations over a corporate Intranet using ITU T H 323 protocol For DtermlP to DtermlIP connection via the IP network with H 323 protocol the IPT card and IP PAD card are required to transmit and receive the control signal and voice data For voice compression the 16VCT card and 4VCT card are required For Legacy terminal connection via the IP network with H 323 protocol the IPT card is required System Outline of H 323 Connection 2000 PS 2400 IPX Legacy T mina Qiero i 1 L i I sal i a i i 1 A i o Control Signal Y LAN P NEN 2000 IFS Wore Dala i PTRAHET ROTTER H 323 Terminal Ca o alc Page 13 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP H 323 Features The following service features are available when connecting with H 323 terminal NEC product For other vender products confirmation test is required Call Transfer All Calls Outgoing Tru
260. edial 20 e Modem Data up to 19 2 kbps e Calling Party Number redial 20 e Vibration Alert The basic Dterm PS III package includes the Dterm PS III Handset and one Hand Strap A User Card explaining basic operation and a comprehensive user guide is also available Page 16 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Dterm PS lll Accessories To enhance the use of the Dterm PS III NEC Unified Solutions Inc offers several choices in each area of handset accessories They are Lithium lon Battery PS Ill Battery Pack that provides up to 6 hours of continuous talk time and 300 hours on standby Additional batteries may be required for extended use applications that require around the clock coverage Battery Charger Battery Charger for the Dterm PS Ill includes the Dterm PS III charging slot only Recharging time is a maximum of 4 hours Headsets Headsets for the Dterm PS lll come in two configurations The first is a classic banded headset with the microphone extension The second is an ear bud type with an in line microphone The banded headset is typically used in cases of prolonged active use e g customer service agent while the ear set is for occasional use or where concealment is desired e g hotel security Dterm Leather Cases Dterm Leather Cases are available in three models 1 A Leather Case for carrying the PS III when the large majority of use is i
261. eeded to compete in today s world and into tomorrow s The software is designed with modularity in mind Together these modular building blocks allow customers to initially buy what they need and add capacity and capabilities as the business demands resulting in a greater degree of cost control for new installations and for upgrades to features capacities and the software versions UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 11 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction The illustration below shows a typical system layout UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS a In skin VMS MATWorX Via IP CCIS CCIS over IP_ MATWorX ga O Via RS232C a E mn H 323 GK aE Router Server DtermIP Switching re ca Hub i MATWorX OAI Dterm DHCP a J e 1 r ii Via LAN Server Assistant Server is ere Y ca a Remote PIM over IP a with Survivability Jal DtermIP Client PC r INASET Dterm SP30 Station to Station Connection For DtermIP to DtermIP connection Peer to Peer connection the voice data is transmitted and received directly between DtermlPs on the LAN For Dterm Legacy terminal connection the IP PAD card and VCT card are required to transmit and receive the voice data These cards are used to control and convert the voice data The MP card in either of the connections above manages the control signals CCIS Connection DtermIP to DtermlP connection Peer to Pe
262. eeeeeeeseeeeas 1 WWWISIS SAO AMINO tate ts res ei EU ee 3 Wireless Short Text Message Notification OAI ccooncccocccoccccocncocncconncoonnnonnconnnnonncnnnnonnncnnncnncnnnns 7 System DSS CHOU ON A A 12 WIteless SpeciicaldOn Sussie 15 Wireless LAN ria E dt 18 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel SS Msi latest aer 1 A e UU O II a Eton 4 AA state att outa E cade hatter oateedanes T 13 SISTEMAS DSCINICATIONS neii a ee a ees accor a deere eg tele amuee ane desea 13 Staton Edu burra ia 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page iii Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call ACCOUnUNG a ees 1 AIMWorxXx E A A A A AA 1 GOontquiatlons e crasicaras eso lle Peedi 4 TREAAUVIVVOrA MANAG ai a ol 5 INtegrating AIMWO X MOQUIES tic e de e O ators 5 Additional Reference Mateu a ia 8 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems ias is 1 VOICE Mail Integration id c 1 Message Center Interface MGI scr e di 3 NEA Mall ADAL ar A AA iris deal 5 NEAX MITAD DA ata 10 NEAXMa IVETE 24 Chapter 20 System Documenta llo aiii noedieecsbivssaecsoautweassatewwasccniecanseueceesenseesancueeedank 1 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Documentation LiSt occccoccccocnnccccncccnnccncncnonnncnnnnnnnnnnoncnonnnnnnnncnonanoss 1 Page iv UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Overview of NEC NEC Corporation was founded in 1899 NEC worldwide is built on a strong tradition and global heritage NE
263. eet the following requirement Waiting time for ACK signal maximum 600ms 300ms recommended To check the above requirement send Ping command from a PC to a remote IP Enabled Dterm and see the result of the command Time shows the time to receive ACK signal If the result does not meet the above requirement abnormal operation such as connection unavailable deterioration of voice quality or abnormal state of IP terminal may occur The remote IP Enabled Dterm can be connected to the network via either of the following devices Router Dial up router Modem Cable Modem ADSL Splitter The IP terminal can be assigned to Local Connection Mode or Remote Connection Mode by entering the Administrator Mode of the IP terminal After the operation mode of the terminal is changed Local to Remote or vice versa login operation is required again The differences between Local Connection Mode and Remote Connection Mode are as follows p em o Local Connection Mode Remote Connection Mode Confirmation to Connect EE 1 time per day IP Terminal j 10 minutes from 00 00 a m 2000 IPS sends clock signal to IP Clock Control 2000 IPS sends clock signal to Enabled Dterm when the IP IP terminal on a minute basis Enabled Dterm is logged in or the clock data is entered by CM02 Individual Location number can be assigned for Local Connection Mode and Remote Connection Mode on a station number basis by system programming The IP Enabled D
264. em Port Independence allows each port to have its own set of parameters to answer calls Menu mode Option Alpha and Numeric Directory Guest Mailboxes Holiday Schedule Variable Length Security Codes and Passwords Caller Interviewing Call Screening Call Accept or Reject Remote Maintenance AIMWorX and MA4000 Integration support Fax Detect Routing and Notification Additional Features Page 19 26 Visual Messaging and Call Control Modules ViewMail ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging ViewMail for Lotus Notes ViewMail for Novell GroupWise ViewCall Plus ViewFax Hospitality Feature Package includes 5 Guest Languages and PMS Integration Active Fax Fax Mail Text To Speech Email Reader Multiple Languages UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 20 System Documentation NEC offers a full complement of documents for the UNIVERGE Nneax 2000 IPS product line Technical documentation is available on Compact Disk CD ROM or on the WEB through NTAC On Line http www ilibrary com cng docs nsf This section lists all documents included on the Compact Disk CD ROM UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS Documentation List Feature Programming Manual System Manual General Description Upgrade Guide INASET Installation Guide WCS System Manual PCS WCS System Manual PCS for Series 3300 amp up Installation Procedure Manual ISDNSystem Manual OOOO UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS User Manuals UNIVER
265. em Fax card s NEC 0161975 are not included and are sold separately Page 19 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Unified Messaging A NEAXMail AD 64 Port Software License includes 25 seats of ViewMail ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging ViewMail for Lotus Notes ViewMail for GroupWise and 25 seats of ViewCall Plus Additional seats of these applications may be purchased in 5 50 or unlimited bundles The Unlimited package provides up to 1 250 simultaneous sessions of ViewMail VMM VML and ViewCall Plus ViewCall Plus requires either TAPI or TSAPI services for enhanced mode options Please consult your NEC Sales Engineer with CTI related questions Feature Descriptions Analog Voice Card support offers greater flexibility in the overall NEAXMail AD 64 configuration Analog cards allow for a maximum port capacity of 96 ports and allow previous NEC Repartee OS 2 customers to upgrade to the NEAXMail AD 64 s Windows 2003 operating system Announcement of number and length of messages NEAXMail AD 64 announces how long messages last for example You have three new messages totaling three minutes twenty seconds Would you like to hear them Archiving The message archive feature allows subscribers to save messages longer than the preset system parameter Automated Speech Recognition ASR provides subscribers with the ability to navigate their mailbox opti
266. em equipment as one of ordinary telephones IP Packet Assembler Disassembler IP PAD and Voice Compression Trunk VCT are required for facsimile uses over IP network same as legacy stations The facsimile transmission procedure T 30 or G 711 G 726 pass through is supported with IP PAD VCT The following figure shows a typical configuration of facsimile or modem use on Peer to Peer CCIS network IPS IPS ce IP PAD FAX Cc F z F a LL dl in PC built in Modem PC built in Modem Example of FAX and Modem over IP connection UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 21 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Service Conditions 1 IP PAD and VCT are required for facsimile use on Peer to Peer CCIS network or Remote PIM over IP function 2 PN 32IPLA IP PAD card and PN 16VCTA 16VCT card do not support FAX or Modem over IP PN 32IPLA A IP PAD does not support Modem over IP 3 IP PAD card and 16VCT card support Fax over IP with the following protocol Pass Through Pass through i X X SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C Series 3300 Series 3300 software or later software or later X X SPN 8IPLA IP PAD B Series 3300 Series 3300 software or later software or later X SPN 8IPLA IP PAD A Series 3300 software or later X SPN 32IPLA IP PAD E Series 3400 software or later X Series 3300 Series 3400 Series 3200 software or later software or later software or later SPN 32IPL
267. ems supporting wireless users in a private network some users may desire the ability to take their handsets from one site to the other and still remain in touch with those who are calling Dterm PS III users can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by the plural PBXs which are interfaced by JT Q931 a common wireless roaming protocol for network wide roaming capabilities Configuration Application Integrated Type and Adjunct Type with CCIS interface Service Conditions 1 A roaming service network can be provided by maximum 512 PBXs 2 One APOOB card for Data Base Module DBM is required per PBX 3 An APOOB DBM C is required when accommodating 257 or more PS s per site 4 Visitor Location Register VLR information for maximum 512 Visitor PSs can be recorded to a system When the VLR information exceeds for more than 512 Visitor PSs APOO deletes the oldest VLR information in the system 5 When a call terminates to a Multiline Terminal from a PS the ringing of the Multiline Terminal is as follows regardless of Home PS or Visitor PS When the PS is under control of the same PBX Ringing for Internal call When the PS is under control of the other PBX Ringing for External call 6 When the Home PS is roaming the Home PBX cannot route Announcement PS No Answer PS Out of Zone to the calling party If the Visitor PBX allowed it will inform the Home PBX that the PS cannot answer the Home PBX activates Call F
268. en system industry standards such as H 323 802 1p and 802 1q MGCP TAPI JTAPI etc Voice Messaging A scalable and cost effective voice messaging solution that supports industry standards such as AMIS A VPIM LDAP and IMAP Bandwidth requirements One of the most important factors in the success of your IP network is to determine the necessary network bandwidth needed for your application Determining the appropriate bandwidth is truly a function of two factors Number of Users Phones Voice Compression for each user Number of Users The number of users is the number of simultaneous users digital phones that will be required Voice Compression NEC s IP solutions deploy voice compression in order to extend multiple users across fewer data channels The following compression algorithms are supported G 711 G 723 1 and G 729A Depending on the voice compression algorithm selected and the number of voice frames encapsulated in one data packet Select the Proper Voice Compression The best voice quality is achieved by using the non compression voice algorithm G 711 The maximum quality comes at the expense of the highest utilized bandwidth The largest vice compression is achieved by using G 729A If you are using this algorithm you will save on bandwidth and still achieve voice quality that is regarded as near toll If absolute conversation quality is your focus and bandwidth is no object you probably want to select G 711
269. enWorX database It is then accessible by the operator Also when another Dterm user calls the person they will receive their status on their Dterm display along with Return Time and Alternate Number if provided Message Reader Message Reader allows the user to read messages sent to them by the operator or other users Open Worx Name Display Name Display is an application that synchronizes the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS name database with the employee portion of the OpenWorX Database This sync is real time In the case of two people sharing a single extension the application will search through Department Division and Company in that order The first one that matches for both employees will be the one displayed Page 11 16 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface Open Worx Multiple CCIS Node Configuration OpenWorX is capable of hosting applications for multiple UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS systems on a single server All instances of this require a viable OAI connection between the OpenWorX server and the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS See the bandwidth requirements list previously in this chapter to make sure your connection is sufficient The applications once equipped with the remote TCP IP connection and multi node software operate as if they are in a single UN VERGE NEAx 2000 IPS except where noted below BAS CCIS Network Information The Business Attendant System can run
270. ension Page 9 12 Split Call Forwarding Busy Line This feature allows internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to separate destinations Destinations may be an internal station Attendant Console or voice mail Split Call Forwarding No Answer This feature allows internal and external calls to extensions that do not answer to be rerouted to separate destinations individually Call Forwarding Logout Dterm IP This feature allows a call terminated to an IP station in logout status to be forwarded to a predestinated station outside number Attendant Console or Digital Announcement Trunk DAT This feature is also applicable to the IP stations when the LAN cable is pulled out or the power is off Call Forwarding Override This feature allows the call forward destination station to call the station which set call forward The call forward setting will be ignored Group Diversion This feature allows all calls terminated to an extension that are not answered within a predetermined time to be forwarded to a pre designated station Call Park This feature enables a station user or attendant to place a call into pre designated Call Park locations The station user or attendant is then free to process other calls This feature is available system wide and for individual tenants Call Park System When a call is parked by Call Park System the call can be retrieved from Call Park by any station i
271. ent Specification for Analog Terminals tem 224mm x 165mm 5mm Length x Width Black or White DTH 1 1 black only Dial Pad 12 Key Dial Pad 4 Rows and 3 Columns Metropolitan Dial Pad with Alphabet and buttons Button 5 has a Raised Dot Function Buttons Hook flash Redial Key Speaker Monitor and Hold Key DTR 1HM Only from Surface with MW and Incoming Ring Indication Voltage Voltage 53V or Less DTR 1HM Only 8 Buttons 2 Columns Maximum 21 Digits DTH 1 1 4 buttons Maximum 21 digits 4 Levels Off Low Middle High Programmable Approvals c UL UI 60950 3rd Edition FCC part 15 68 IC Dterm Series i IP Terminals Dterm IP terminals offer features and benefits that brilliantly capture the essence of form and functions helping your business take service and performance to newer more profitable heights The Dterm IP terminals consist of four distinct models a 4 8 16 or 32 feature key terminals in order to meet diverse telephone terminal needs Descriptions of the Dterm IP Terminals Description Remarks Physical Features ITR 8D 3 BK ITR 8D 3 WH 8 Programmable Line Feature keys with Display ITR 8D 3 BB ITR 16D 3 BK 16 Programmable Line Feature keys with Display Tilt able LCD Unit ITR 16D 3 WH e Adjustable Base ITR 16D 3 BB e Built in Wall Mount Unit ITR 16LD 3 BK 16 Programmable DESI LESS Line Feature keys TR t6LD SW ITR 32D 3 BK 32 Programmable Line Feature keys with Display
272. ent to handle their call in the shortest time possible When the CallCenterWorX ACD system accepts a call it can be configured to play a message to the caller and route the call in a pre specified order to a queue of waiting calls for a particular split group of agents The queued call is then answered in sequence by the next available agent in that split The Call Control Vectors of the CallCenterWorxX ACD system allow great flexibility in routing calls permitting alternate solutions to fit almost any situation As each call progresses through the system the CallCenterWorX ACD system provides data to the CallCenterWorX MIS 3 0 which translates the call handling data into meaningful Statistics The MIS uses these statistics to offer call center managers and supervisors access to real time and historical data concerning incoming and outgoing call volume The CallCenterWorX MIS Status Screens Real time Screens provide color coded up to the second views of agent queue and system activity Statistics on the call volume and agent effectiveness are computed in real time and are displayed for the current hour and day on supervisors screens Optional wall display boards can show current statistics and messages to call center personnel The call statistics are also collected in the MIS database and used to generate reports in text or graphical format These reports and graphs can be printed for a view of activities ranging from a graph updated
273. entralized Fault Message require CCIS No 7 networking with the IPX UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 1 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS For DtermiP to DtermlIP connection via CCIS Peer to Peer connection the voice data is transmitted and received directly between DtermIPs via Intranet CCIS via IP For Dterm IP to Legacy terminal connection via CCIS the IP PAD card is required to transmit and receive the voice data This card is used to control and convert the voice to data The control signals are managed by the MP card in either of the connection above The illustration below shows a system outline of CCIS Connection System Outline of a CCIS Connection LEGACY TERMINAL LEGACY TERMINAL IPS oo PSP Z TOSW f i Pa l 7 LG DILE PPAD LG DLE NTERNET y INTRANET ccs VIA IP Ep CONTROL SIGNAL ROUTER i LAN ROUTER DTERM IF DTERM IF DTERM IF E E A A EOS M a l a VOICE DATA PEER TO PEER CONNECTION Page 14 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Common Channel Interoffice Signaling 1 64 Kbps D Channel 23 64 Kbps Clear Channel Bearer Channels Signaling Addressing Information Supervisory Information Network Information CCIS uses a common channel to provide the signaling informati
274. ents are now handling the more difficult questions call volume will most likely drop significantly therefore wait times and call abandonment will decrease Page 12 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Que WorX4 0 Que WorX 4 0 is a suite of customer service and productivity oriented applications QueWorX utilizes NEC s CTI link Infolink to deliver advanced applications to contact centers These advanced applications are tightly integrated and specially designed to work in conjunction with NEC s CallCenterWorX ACD applications for both UNIVERGE NeEax 2000 IPS and UNIVERGE neax 2400 IPX systems QueWorX integrates with CallCenterWorX Enterprise 1 4 CallCenterWorX ACD 3 0 for Business amp Enterprise QueWorX provides the same features and functionality regardless of the ACD platform it accompanies In addition QueWorX may be installed on the same server as the CallCenterWorX ACD 3 0 for Business or Enterprise QueWorX 4 0 Licensed Applications Automated Attendant Immediate Callback Scheduled Callback Web Internet Callback Estimated Time to Answer Queue Depth ANI Are Code Routing Account Code Routing Screen Pop Soft Phone QueWorX 4 0 Features Modular Licensing Multilingual Announcements Global Repeat Verification Customer Profile Records Database Unlimited Multi level Automated Attendants Customizable Announcements Custo
275. er connection via CCIS is available only when the destination office is UN VERGE NEAX 2000 IPS or UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 IPX The system provides only Point to Multipoint connection Maintenance MATWorX IPS is used as the maintenance program for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Direct connection RS 232C Modem connection and LAN TCP IP connections are available to connect to the MAT Maintenance Administration Terminal Page 1 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Hybrid System of IP peer to peer connection and TDM Switching The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS supports both pure IP switching peer to peer connections and Time Division Switching TDM The pure IP switching is provided for communications between DtermIPs and for CCIS Remote PIM connections with another UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS IPS DM IPS DML 2400 IPX CCIS over IP or Remote PIM over IP On the other hand the TDM switching is provided for communications between legacy stations trunks Connections between DtermIP CCIS or Remote PIM over IP and legacy stations trunks are made via IP PADs which converts packet based voice data to TDM based voice data and vice versa Built in DRS Device Registration Server on MP The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS incorporates DRS Device Registration Server on MP which provides a Log in Log out management of DtermIP including Registration Authentication Also the built in DRS can be inter worke
276. er office CCH CCH Internal y By niemal SAOR SHDA The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is generally used as a local office however it can be used as a center office for centralized billing if all the PBXs within the network are IPS When the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is used as a center office the billing information is sent to a SMDR system using the NEAX 2400 format and an APOO When a UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 IPX is used as a center office either the Sub Line or the My Line number can be selected by system programming to be sent to the SMDR terminal When the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is used as a center office only the My Line number can be sent to the SMDR terminal When a call is originated from a station Station A of a local office without APOO via a COT of a center office with APOO a message is sent to the center office from the local office via CCIS According to the station number of the calling party the APOO of the center office generates billing information to the SMDR terminal Maximum digits of station number is as follows Local office Tandem office using Internal SMDR six digits SMDR over IP is not supported using APOO four digits if fifth digit of all stations uses a common leading digit then five digits Center office using Internal SMDR six digits using APOO four digits if fifth digit of all stations uses a common leading digit then five digits Page 14 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal
277. erence Guide Page 5 25 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment PBX Specification Must be peer to peer IP enabled Operation Environment NEAX 2000 IPS R8 Series 3300 or higher SP30 4 software license SP30 4 ACD software license R10 Series 3500 or higher Dterm SP30 Softphone Parts List Software Licenses Accessories SP30 4 software license Package of 4 right to use IP softphone clients SP30 4 ACD software License Package of 4 right to use IP softphone w ACD function 8 IP Seat License Enables 8 IP phones and is required in addition to SP30 software License for SP30 SP30 ACD functionality installations Recommend 1 per 4 clients Dterm Extenders The NEC Dterm Extenders extends the operation of the UNIVERGE Neax 2000 IPS digital telephone to a remote location Dterm EXT Analog The Dterm Analog EXT enables telephone users to be a fully functional part of the NEC PBX with a Dterm Series E DTP 32DE 1 telephone located any distance off premises The Dterm Analog EXT consists of two modules One module identified as the Office Module connects to a digital Dterm Series E station port on your PBX The other module identified as the Remote Module connects to your NEC Dterm Series E DTP 32DE 1 telephone at your off premises location The modules communicate via a single analog telephone line The Dterm Analog EXT is transparent to the user and retains access to the features and functions of the PBX In addition an RS 2
278. erence of as many as 32 parties by dialing a specific access code The conference participants are automatically connected to the conference trunk Conference participants may call in at preset time or may be directed to do so by a conference coordinator Consecutive Speed Dialing For Speed Dialing all digits are registered as a Speed Dialing Code In the case of Consecutive Speed Dialing the common portion of the number is registered as a speed calling code and the remaining digits of each number are dialed by each individual calling station or by using a Station Speed Dial key on a Multiline Terminal Consultation Hold This feature permits a station user to hold any incoming or outgoing CO call tie line call or any intra office call while originating a call to another station user within the system Customer Administration Terminal CAT In addition to the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT programming can be done from selected Multiline Terminals with LCD The designated Multiline Terminals can be placed in program mode and system data can then be changed To prevent unauthorized changes password levels are assigned providing authorization for access to certain areas of programming Page 9 15 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Data Line Security This feature allows line circuits that are used for data transmission to be protected from interruptions such as Attendant Camp On Executive Override and Attendan
279. ering portability durability and functionality Portability has two aspects to it First the handset must be easily carried by the mobile user At slightly more than 3 8 ounces with dimensions of 5 x 1 5 x 7 8 and with a variety of carrying case options users can carry the Dterm PS lll easily Second to be truly portable the handset must also operate over a long period without having to return to base for a recharge With Talk Time at 6 hours and Standby Time at 300 hours the Dterm PS IlI will serve through most if not all of a typical day on the job Durability is another important feature of the Dterm PS III Once the cord is cut and the user is carrying the handset with them it will be dropped banged into cabinets and generally suffer a fate not experienced by business desktop terminals Drop tested to 6 feet designed to endure hostile environments temperatures to 122 F and adaptable to outdoors use with a special case this handset can meet the needs of most wireless users A wireless handset is no good to the user if it does not deliver the features and functions needed for effective communication The Dterm PS III supports a wide range of timesaving convenient business features such as e Call Hold amp Transfer e Automatic Answer immediate or delayed e Directory Dial by name 100 entries e Headset Operation e Station Speed Dial 10 with name e 4Line by 18 Digit LCD Display with scrolling e Last Number R
280. erm when the system reset should occur The registration data by Login method with password protected cannot be backed up UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 9 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP When the IP terminal with a call in progress has the LAN cable extracted or a power off occurs and restores in this situation Double Assignment is displayed on the LCD When the terminal is registered by Automatic Login method the terminal can be used automatically after about two minutes When the terminal is registered by Login method the station user can login from the same terminal after about two minutes or login from another terminal Override Logout operation from the IP terminal registered in Automatic Login method should not be done in the normal operation If the logout occurs re registration is required The registration data by Automatic Login method can be saved from the MAT by designating the area number 80 normal system data saving operation does not save the registration data Service Conditions on Encryption in System Registration 1 When the IP Enabled Dterm is registered in the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS the login code station number and password entered from the terminal can be encrypted Login code Proprietary algorithm Password Proprietary algorithm or MD5 algorithm MD5 is an algorithm defined in RFC 1321 from the IETF Encryption algorithm can be assigned on a sy
281. erphone headset jack wall mount unit four soft keys Large LED Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand 8 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL available in black BK or white WH Fully modular with 8 Flexible 2 color LED Line keys eleven Function Keys built in Speakerphone headset jack wall mount unit 24 character by 3 line display four soft keys Large LED Microphone button Message button Directory button Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand 16 LINE BACK LIT DISPLAY TERMINAL available in black only 16 flexible 2 color line keys eleven function keys built in speaker phone headset jack wall mount unit back lit 24 character 3 line display four soft keys large LED electronic volume and tone controls and tilt stand 16 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL available in black BK or white WH Fully modular with 16 Flexible 2 color LED Line keys eleven Function Keys built in Speakerphone headset jack wall mount unit 24 character by 3 line display four soft keys Large LED Microphone button Message button Directory button Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand 16 LCD DESI LESS TERMINAL 16 Flexible LCD appearances for Speed Dial DSS feature or line appearance 11 Function Keys Built in Speakerphone Half Duplex Headset Jack Wall Mount Unit 4 Soft keys In Line Power and 12 ft Handset Cord 32 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL available in black BK or white WH Fully modular with 32 Flexible
282. es N A N A CTA supported No Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A AO tele p ony AAE No Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A supported HFU supported No Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A HFU operation Half Duplex Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A Full Duplex No Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjustable legs No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Long loop supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A Hearing Aid compatible Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N A N A Cable pairs 1 1 1 1 1 1 port 2 ports UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 13 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Series E Line Conditions Loop Resistance and Distance Long Loop circuit built in a Cable Length Cable Length Line Card Terminal Loop Resistance 24 AWG Cable 24 AWG Cable Without ACA Unit With ACA Unit DTP 8 1 TEL 35 1000 ft 304 m 4000 ft 1219 m DTP 8D 1 TEL 35 1000 ft 304 m 4000 ft 1219 m 4DLC DTP 16D 1 TEL 26 650 ft 198 m 4000 ft 1219 m DTP 32D 1 TEL 21 650 ft 198 m 4000 ft 1219 m DCU 60 1 Console N A N A 1000 ft 304 m DTP 8 1 TEL 35 1000 ft 304 m 1000 ft 304 m DTP 8D 1 TEL 35 1000 ft 304 m 1000 ft 304 m 8DLC DTP 16D 1 TEL 26 650 ft 198 m 1000 ft 304 m DTP 32D 1 TEL 21 650 ft 198 m 1000 ft 304 m DCU 60 1 Console N A N A 1000 ft 304 m DTP 8 1 TEL 35 2800 ft 853 m 4000 ft 1219 m DTP 8D 1 TEL 35 2800 ft 853 m 4000 ft 1219 m 2DLCB N DTP 16D 1 TEL 26 2800 ft 853
283. es call information when forwarding a call to a subscriber s personal greeting and how it receives message waiting indication from NEAXMail AD 64 When integrated both the NEAX PBX and the NEAXMail AD 64 system share information on the origin and destination of calls It also notifies subscribers when new messages are pending Direct Digital Integration is established using the Intel Dialogic D 42 NE2 voice board s installed in the NEAXMail AD 64 Each board emulates up to four Dterm sets and transmits digital switch information between the PBX and the NEAXMail AD 64 The Dialogic board connects to the PBX using one Dterm station port for each NEAXMail AD 64 voice port The D 42 NE2 board takes a snapshot of the feature set display information and identifies the display information for caller and calling party information This integration also makes the Live Record Constant Message Count and SoftKey Navigation features possible Message Center Integration MCI is a serial data link between the NEAX PBX and NEAXMail AD 64 The voice messaging system and the switch share information about each call by passing data over this serial data link Message waiting lamp status is sent from the voice messaging system to the telephone system saving port usage to handle incoming calls MCI is used in multi switch networks whenever Common Channel Interoffice Signaling CCIS networking is used Simultaneous MCI amp Digital Integration is a
284. es it possible for you to get a firm grasp on telecommunications costs Through the use of such features as least cost routing class of service and detail call recording cost reduction and control are possible Page 1 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS In the modern information based economy timely access to accurate information is an essential resource for every successful organization In many cases it is the primary commodity being created bought or sold and anything less than the best communication system puts your organization at a disadvantage The complex interconnections of voice print and data communications demand a powerful but elegant system capable of taking you through the 21st century The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS Internet Protocol Server is a full featured IP based communications system providing a rich feature set with pure Voice over IP VoIP communications peer to peer connections across corporate Local and Wide Area Networks LAN and WAN DtermIP telephones are designed to provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop with a 100 Base T Ethernet connection to the LAN and built in hub for a PC connection to the telephone itself The system can provide peer to peer connections between DtermIP telephones with voice compression offering existing Dterm Series i telephone features On the WAN side the system can provide peer to
285. es the call originator with the charge information form the network The information will be displayed on the calling Dterm LCD for six seconds after the station has been released and be output to the SMDR port Call By Call Service Selection services can be selected on a call by call basis to all channels of a single PRI interface according to applications Services may be used on any available channel unlike Trunk Provisioning Service in which services are assigned to specific channels Called Party Recognition Service Direct In Termination DIT This feature provides an incoming Direct In Termination DIT call via an ISDN trunk to be connected to a predetermined station This application can be used for a station or modem Channel Negotiation When collisions of data occur between an outgoing call to ISDN and an incoming call from ISDN the B channel that 2000 IPS specified will be busy on the network and the network will specify another B channel This feature provides negotiation for the selection of a B channel between the 2000 IPS and the network when the SETUP message is delivered Page 9 42 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP provides the 2000 IPS to send the ISDN number of the connected party in the 2000 IPS to the calling party Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR provides the 2
286. essage Waiting Lamp of the Station set by using the Message Waiting Message Reminder feature The retrieval access code for Message Waiting Message Reminder is variable and can be set from 1 to 4 digits in system programming When all VMS ports are busy assuming the following condition Station A or outside party Calling Party Station B Called Party Station B sets Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer to the VMS Station A or outside party makes a call to Station B a Call Forwarding All Calls a Station A hears reorder tone b Outside party hears busy tone b Call Forwarding Busy Line a Station A hears busy tone and can set any busy service to station B b Outside party hears busy tone c Call Forwarding No Answer a Station B continues to ring until the VMS becomes idle regardless of whether the predetermined time for Call Forwarding No Answer has elapsed When the VMS becomes idle Station A is connected to the VMS d Direct access to VMS a If station A or outside party accesses the VMS directly the outside party hears busy tone and station A can set call back to the VMS Page 19 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 10 11 12 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Multiple Call Forwarding When the final destination for any combination of Multiple Call Forwarding is the VMS calls can be transferred to the VMS The first forwarded station s
287. ested Multi Media Q Email Q Chat Q Fax Use Q Master s multimedia modules to manage these communication media within your existing contact center infrastructure in much the same way as you currently manage your telephony calls Just as phone calls emails and web interactions are also delivered to agents via a queue as soon as they become available Contacts are fairly distributed among agents and monitoring and reporting on agent performance and response time is available across all media These modules are fully integrated into Q Master so individual agents can receive requests initiated via telephone web or email The properties of intelligent call delivery and skills based routing are applied when distributing any type of contact to agents List of feature included with Multi Media Q Email Q Chat and Q Fax Q Email integrating email communication into a contact center environment provides customers with accurate timely responses to their inquiries in a consistently professional manner Monitoring and reporting of the incoming email traffic also provides a total picture of all inbound communications Q Web Callback lets potential customers request a Callback from within a website These requests are routed to the most suitable agent in your contact center The agent receives a screen pop with the details of the request When they click the dial button Q Master automatically establishes the call Q Web Chat offers web users
288. etwork By centralizing attendant services a greater number of calls can be handled with fewer consoles based on economies of scale System hardware requirements can be reduced and overall operations costs are lower CCIS uses the Look Ahead feature discussed earlier to minimize tie line usage as both on net and off net calls are centrally serviced and distributed throughout the network UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 15 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Uniform Numbering Plans CCIS offers complete flexibility when designing network numbering plans Two primary numbering schemes can be used One scheme uses a four or five digit station numbering plan with no system node identifier In this scheme station numbers are not repeated throughout the network and usually the first digit is used as an indicator of which node the station is at For example a three node system might use station numbers 1000 2999 at node 1 3000 4999 at node 2 and 5000 6999 at node 3 The intelligence of CCIS and LCR will automatically route the call to the correct node The second scheme uses a one two or three digit node identification code followed by free station numbering In this scheme station numbers can be repeated at each node in the network if desired This scheme is especially beneficial to those customers who are upgrading a network or who are networking multiple facilities for the
289. f the Main Processor MP is used no modem at each remote site is required A cable for connection between the MP and the on site modem When the internal modem of the MP is used the above cable is not required 2 The internal modem of the MP is compatible with the following specifications Modem Specification ITU T V 22 1200 bps ITU T V 32 4800 9600 bps ITU T V 22 bis 2400 bps ITU T V 34 19 2 k 33 6 kbps Bell 212A 1200 bps 3 Any one of the following connections are also required for access to the modem Required Connection A dedicated line Attendant controlled transfer Direct Inward System Access DISA Direct Inward Termination 4 The following operations can be executed from the Remote Maintenance location Retrieval of fault data Retrieval of Peg Count information Deletion or addition of system data line trunk etc using a preprogrammed security password Data assignment by device number stations trunks and Attendant Console Copying of station data from one station to other stations when adding sequential stations in groups Release Reconnection of backup batteries Display of station line status UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 8 5 Issue 6 Chapter 8 System administration MP Program Download The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides Online MP Program Download via IP network using the CP 24C and CP31C This feature allows an MP upgrade prog
290. face MCI This feature provides an interface with a customer supplied Voice Mail System VMS which can send Message Waiting lamp control data to the system The Message Center Interface MCI can provide the following operations When terminating the call to the VMS the system sends call connection status information to the VMS through the MCI The VMS sends the Message Waiting Lamp on data to the MCI The system upon receiving this control data from the MCI illuminates the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding station The VMS upon receiving retrieved message information will send the Message Waiting lamp control data requesting the system to extinguish the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding station Service Conditions The Voice Mail System VMS is interfaced to the system through the 4LCD 8LC card The 4LCD 8LC provides disconnect supervision in the form of a momentary loop open The UCD or Station Hunting feature is usually provided with the VMS station One RS 232C port on the MP card or the Application Processor APOO is required to make a data link with a customer supplied VMS Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal DTMF telephone or the Attendant Console but not from DP telephones The MCI is available to a direct call or a forwarded call from a station trunk Attendant to the VMS Page 10 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapte
291. ference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces b SMDR with APOO o APOO without expansion memory standard up to 1600 calls if central office feature is used up to 800 calls o APOO with expansion memory optional up to 27000 calls if central office feature is used up to 26000 calls o When a call is completed the record is sent to the output device and is removed from memory o If the amount of calls exceed the SMDR memory those overflow calls will not be recorded The built in SMDR cannot be provided when APOOB with MRC C program is mounted Account Codes Forced Account Codes Authorization Codes and DISA Codes on Tandem connections SMDR with APOO only are reported in the applicable call record SMDR with APOO provides a record of incoming Tie Line tandem calls where another trunk is dial accessed For details of SMDR format data stream memory buffer etc refer to the Installation Procedure Manual Feature Programming Manual Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber s number for Automatic Number Identification ANI and CPN ISDN can be recorded in the SMDR by system programming Data Transmission Sequence for Ethernet Interface Establishing a connection outputting billing Information and releasing a connection are performed between the PBX and the SMDR terminal in the following timings Timing to Establish a Connection o Aconnection is established when a connection request is re
292. ff hook and originate a call from the line assigned as the Prime Line without depressing the associated line key Recall Key Each Multiline Terminal is equipped with a Recall Key that is used to generate a hookflash to access features provided by the outside exchange or to abandon a call while retaining the line for origination of another call Relay Control Function Key This feature provides a Multiline Terminal with the ability to activate deactivate relays on a PN DKOO to control external devices Ring Frequency Control The ring frequency of the Multiline Terminal can be controlled on a station basis in system programming eight ro fourteen frequencies are available or by use of a function key on the Multiline Terminal Ringing Line Pickup This feature provides the ability to answer any call ringing into a Multiline Terminal by just lifting the handset Page 9 27 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Soft Keys According to the status of the Multiline Terminal function keys Soft Keys are displayed in the third line on the LCD If the status of Multiline Terminal changes the Soft Keys will change automatically Also if the Help key is pressed explanation of indicated Soft Keys are shown on the LCD Volume Control Multiline Terminals are equipped with common Volume Control keys for e Built in Speaker Handset Receiver Volume e Ring Volume e C O Transmission Level e LCD Contrast e Ring Tone Frequency Remo
293. fic capacity per station line 72 3erl 384 lines 0 19 erl L UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 9 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Traffic Capacity per Line For TDM Circuits Traffic capacity per line erl L can be calculated in accordance with the calculation procedure in Section 3 4 The traffic capacity per line at various line truck configurations as the calculation result is shown in the following table Though the following table does not cover all UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS line trunk configurations it covers the typical TDM line trunk configurations likely to be required in the actual system Grade of service is considered as 0 01 Use the Erlang B Table to find the required number of DTMF register ports for a specific UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Unit erl per line Number of Trunks Use Erlang B table to determine the number of trunks at a particular grade of service after using the following formulas Incoming incoming ccs traffic ES Erlang B 36 CCS Outgoing outgoing ccs traffic ES Erlang B 36 ccs Note Traffic loads are measured in hundred call seconds or CCS Since there are 3 600 seconds in an hour a line that s tied up for one hour measures 36 CCS traffic Page 3 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Erlang B Table Tr
294. first time and wish to maintain their existing numbering plans at each facility It is also very useful in very large networks where it may be necessary to repeat station numbers at different facilities due to the total number of stations in the network CCIS Feature Chart Attendant Camp On with Tone Indication CCIS lt o Automatic Recall CCIS 2 Brokerage HotLine CCIS S d O Busy Lamp Field BLF CCIS __ o d Busy Verification CCIS ss CallBack CCIS gt Call Forwarding AllCalls CCIS OOO Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS oo O Call Forwarding Don tAnswer CCIS y OO Call Forwarding Intercept CCIS oo o O Call Forwarding Override CCIS gt Call Processing Indication CCIS OOO Call Transfer All Calls CCIS 2 Call Transfer Attendant CCIS ___ doo O Calling Station Status Display CCIS ooo Calling Name Display CCIS SS d O Calling Number Display CCIS __ _ o o O Call Transfer AllCalls CCIS oo d Centralized Billing CCIS ss Centralized E911 CCIS ss Consultation Hold All Calls CCIS o o O Deluxe Traveling Class Mark CCIS O looo y OO DialAccesstoAttendant CCIS o O Page 14 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS CCIS FEATURE CHART Cont Distinctive Ringing CCIS ss DoNotDisturb CCIS ss DualHold CCIS os Elapsed Time Display CCIS y OO Flexible Numbering of Stations CCIS o o SSS y Hands Free An
295. for SMDR collection only This system supports all AIMWorX features and modules Large Enterprise tier The Large Enterprise tier handles up to 125 000 extensions or users lt must be installed in client server format It works with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 switch family the UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 switch family and some non NEC switches for SMDR collection only This system supports all AIMWorX features and modules The AIM WorX Manager The AIM WorX Manager is the foundation of AIMWorX This allows a user to synchronize databases and to control multiple modules via a true single point of entry lt also includes a complete call accounting system offering over 20 reports each of which can be fully customized and saved for later use Reports can be scheduled far in advance to print to file in a variety of formats or to paper Reports printed to file can be viewed over the network via a small application loaded on the interested party s computers Printing times can be scheduled to suit the specific needs of the company Integrating AIM WorX modules AIMWorX modules add flexibility to your telemanagement system because you only purchase the modules that you need Nearly all of them interface with AIMWorX Manager Some are accessed directly through a tab on the Users screen while others have separate interfaces but use the call accounting database AIMWorX modules seamlessly integrate with each other To ensure this integration certain modules should
296. g coverage have considerable impact on the effective coverage area of any one Zone Transceiver Spacing of ZT s is adjusted according to these conditions resulting in considerably different quantities needed to cover equal amounts of square footage when compared from site to site Special conditions such as coverage inside elevators and stairwells both are typically not covered In addition accommodating high traffic areas will result in additional Zone Transceivers Typical deployments provide access to at least 2 ZT s from most locations identified for coverage By placing Z T s in closer proximity to each other than normal spacing access to more ZT s in any one spot is supported In any one zone an area covered by one ZT but potentially equipped with more up to 36 simultaneous calls can be supported within the given 10MHz of the U PCS band Each Zone Transceiver provides for up to three simultaneous connections to Dterm PS III users within the covered area As users communicating through a ZT move out of its range and into an area covered by another ZT the connection is automatically switched called a handover to the new ZT noticeable by a momentary disruption in talk path Note With the proper placement of ZT s throughout the facility users can move about the area while communicating or idle and have their calls follow them The ZT is supplied with mounting hardware and can be installed on walls mounted on solid ceilings or pl
297. g message playback Page 19 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Automated Attendant NEAXMail AD 64 acts as an electronic receptionist answering and routing incoming calls automatically Callers hear an opening greeting that gives instructions information and options Using the automated attendant callers can reach a subscriber directly by dialing the extension number during the opening greeting The attendant can answer several calls at the same time It can place callers on hold inform the caller how many calls are holding ahead of him or her and update this information periodically It can screen calls announce the name of the caller and wait for confirmation from the subscriber before putting the call through The automated attendant can also be set to answer a specific set of numbers so subscribers and outside callers who know the dedicated number can connect directly to the right person and the receptionist does not have to waste time transferring calls Answer call on first ring NEAXMail AD 64 can be programmed to answer calls on the first ring so incoming calls are handled as quickly as possible Caller interviewing NEAXMail AD 64 can interview callers with a series of simple questions up to 20 through the use of an interview box Call screening NEAXMail AD 64 has the ability to screen calls that are transferred to a subscriber The subscriber can de
298. g of the message Tell me who the call is for The system says Call for lt your name gt before transferring the call Integration features NEAXMail AD 64 is capable of delivering the following major features However limitations of the NEAX platform Telco service or network configuration may make one or more of these features unavailable Call forward to personal greeting This feature makes it easy for callers to leave messages for subscribers who are busy or away from their desks With this feature incoming calls routed to an unanswered or busy extension are automatically forwarded directly to a subscriber s voice mailbox where the caller can leave a personal message Message waiting indication NEAXMail AD 64 will light a message waiting lamp activate a display or provide a stutter dial tone on the subscriber s extension when new messages have been received Easy message access With this feature subscribers simply press one button on their telephone set to retrieve new messages from their voice mailboxes without entering a personal ID number To prevent unauthorized message access subscribers may also require a security code to be entered before message playback UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 19 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Live Record The feature allows the subscriber to record their telephone conversation and save them as voice messages in their ma
299. g tone unit to inform the parties that the call is being recorded The ADA U does not require an AC adapter External Hands free Unit HFU U The External Hands free Unit HFU U provides a solution for small office teleconferencing by improving the sound quality of speakerphone calls via an external microphone This unit is ideal for a working environment where hands free calling is a necessity In order to provide maximum performance two user adjustable switches are provided which allow the speakerphone to be configured for a unique environment quiet room noisy business environment and room with acoustic echo Furthermore a push to mute button is featured on the external microphone to add privacy for hands free calling HFU U Analog Port Adapter with Ringing APR U The Analog Port Adapter with Ringing APR U provides an interface for installing single line telephones SLTs modems and the NEC VoicePoint VoicePoint conferencing unit By installing the APR U calls may be initiated via a PC modem and switched to voice operation if desired Data calls at a maximum speed of 28 8 kbps are also supported with the APR U The APR U has the added benefit of detecting incoming ringing signals By providing ring detection the user may wish to install a personal fax machine or an answering machine for convenience Finally two user adjustable switches are provided on the adapter one allows for either a 600 or complex impedance interface to a
300. generates about 6 CCS per telephone during the busy hour 1 6 Erlang Busy Hour The hour during the day when traffic is highest is called the busy hour Since this is the period when users are most likely to encounter blockage the traffic load during the busy hour is the load you need to plan for Traffic tables show the amount of traffic that can be handled during the busy hour Within the busy hour peaks will occur when blockage will be higher than the design objectives It s not economical however to design a network to handle absolute peaks Most networks are designed to cause some traffic to be blocked or overflow to other services One way to establish the load during the busy hour is to schedule traffic studies for a week when you know the load is high Or you can use tables developed by traffic engineers to estimate the busy hour load BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts BHCA of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is shown below Number of PIM s 1PIM 2PIM_ 3PIM Business or Hotel Motel Max 2500 BHCA Max 5000 BHCA Max 7500 BHCA Max 8000 BHCA without ACD OAI No FP One FP Two FPs Three FPs Business or Hotel Motel with Max 2000 BHCA Max 4000 BHCA Max 5000 BHCA Max 5500 BHCA ACD OAI No FP One FP Two FPs Three FPs Page 3 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Traffic Capacity In Erlang For TDM Circuits Calculation P
301. h simple to use standard plug ended cables In addition with each unit and system having been fully factory tested prior to shipment potential obstacles to easy installation have been held to a minimum 11 Ease of Maintenance Because the system is constructed with first quality components reliability is high and operation is trouble free However if a minor fault occurs the self diagnostic programs will detect the fault and automatically make the needed corrections If the problem is beyond the internal correction capabilities of the system the self diagnostic programs will automatically print the nature of the fault and the involved unit is identified on the man machine interface equipment The faulty plug in unit can then be quickly replaced with little or no interruption of service 12 Flexible Numbering Plan The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides flexible numbering assignment to meet all forms of network integration service 13 Future Capabilities Because the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS uses a stored program control performance enhancements and new features can be easily incorporated by simple changes in software The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be upgraded by using the most current software release and when necessary additional hardware This means that the system will not become obsolete 14 Cost Controls With telecommunications costs growing it is becoming increasingly important to control them The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS mak
302. half duplex EIA RS232C asynchronous serial data link that operates under a specific message protocol and format The characteristics of the link the protocol used and the message text are shown below ITEM DESCRIPTION Data Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps asynchronous software selectable Operating Mode Half duplex ol Electrical Interface EIA RS 232C electrical standard interface Characteristic Signal Form EIA RS 404 Max 15 m 49 2 ft between PBX and VMS without modem Note When modems are used full duplex asynchronous type modems are required No parity even parity odd parity selected by PBX system data Frame Contents US ASCII 7 bit codes Priority Sequence Primary station PBX Secondary station VMS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 3 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems MCI Service Conditions 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 The UCD or Station Hunting feature is usually provided with the VMS station One RS 232C port on the MP card or the Application Processor APOO is required to make a data link with a customer supplied VMS Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal DTMF telephone or the Attendant Console but not from DP telephones The MCI is available to a direct call or a forwarded call from a station trunk Attendant to the VMS For details of the connecting patterns refer to the Installation Procedure Manual Feature
303. hange 2000 CAL per seat AD120 Exchange 2003 CAL per seat Exchange Server 2003 Voicemail Runtime Edition included with the AD 120 server licenses as designated above will exempt all voice mail only users from CAL requirements CALs are still required for all unified messaging subscribers and may be purchased from NEC or provided from a third party If AD 120 Software License is purchased without Exchange Server 2003 Voicemail Runtime Edition Exchange Server 2003 Standard Edition is required to run AD 120 Exchange Server 2003 Standard Edition requires CALs for all users on the AD 120 system whether they are voice mail only or unified messaging subscribers CALs maybe purchased from NEC or provided from a third party Platform Components The NEAXMail AD 120 provides separate platform components i e individual AD 120 Platforms Software Licenses Voice Boards and Third Party Software allowing NEC Associates a greater flexibility in meeting their customer s requirements NEC Associates may choose to order software amp voice boards only or a combination of software voice boards and a Level or Il platform A complete AD 120 system would include a Level or II Platform AD 120 Server Software License voice boards and third party software ordered together If a Unified Messaging Software License is ordered with a Level or II platform the system will ship without pre loading of software This is because installation
304. have an unlimited number of private distribution lists with an unlimited number of members per list Only subscribers may send a message to their private lists Private Distribution Lists are configured with one of two delivery methods Broadcast Delivery All members of the list hear the message when they listen to their messages Dispatch Delivery Only the first list member to listen to a message receives it The message is then automatically deleted from all remaining list members mailboxes Receipt sent for messages saved as new Subscribers requesting message receipts will receive a receipt as soon as the recipient of a message listens to any part of the message even if the recipient saves the message as new Once the recipient has opened a message the sender cannot cancel the message or change its special delivery options Redirect to Multiple Subscribers with one Introduction RSI This feature gives users the ability to redirect messages to numerous users without having to record an individual introduction for each recipient Rewind pause and fast forward While listening to a message users press 7 to move backward 8 to pause or 9 to skip forward in the message When recording a message users can press 8 to pause Special delivery options Users can mark messages with one or more of the following special delivery options urgent private future and return receipt requested Subscribers can also change
305. he ACD Line Key Features and Benefits The Dterm SP30 offers a full complement of station and converged features for an important segment of mobility and PC based applications Even though a majority of the hardware telephone features function on the softphone the main focus for the softphone is its ability to deliver PC capabilities to the telephone Features Displays call records in Quick Reference List via the Call Log Window All calls are recorded in a Call Log Telephone number date of the call and identification as to whether or not the call was received and answered are all logged You can find at a glance when and with whom you talked The Dterm SP30 also offers a call memo function whereby you can record the key points of the call so that you can visually identify the individual records UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 21 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Links with PC applications Now you can collaborate on a white board application Word or Excel document or any other application that is operating on your PC and the PC at a distant site Simply place a call to the far end Dterm SP30 user and activate the application you will be collaborating on You are now able to have a more productive conversation Internet Link The Dterm SP30 can be assigned with a common database link for fast access to a particular site This link could be an Internet link that needs to be accessed
306. he RS port on the MP card is used for the data link to the VMS the MP can store up to 15 call records If a 16th call record is generated when the MP stores 15 call records the system will write over the oldest stored record The Voice Mail Integration In band feature can be combined with voice mail through the MCI in the system The Voice Mail Integration In band feature and MCI feature can coexist in one system and either can be selected per VMS VMS station number by system programming When terminating a call with the ANI information to the VMS through the MCI the system can send the ANI information to the VMS if required This is not available through CCIS interface Hardware Required for MCI VMS MESE MODEM Cd ASrrequired S Note Only one APOO can be mounted at on time in the system UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 10 7 Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces Property Management System PMS The system provides a data interface to a locally provided Property Management System PMS This enables communication between the system and the PMS in order to provide computer control of Hotel Motel features The available PMS feature codes Feature m vaasn a reir y f y Message Waiting 13 Message waiting lamp status changes x x Seton essas BET E Restriction Control 18 aceon room station numbers X Check in Check Out 16 Room check in
307. he ability to access an extensive array of information processing and management services by serving as the central controller of an integrated information network The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS reflects the philosophy of NEC Corporation to integrate C amp C technology and can provide many voice and non voice services Page 1 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction 3 Flexible Line Size Innovative Modular hardware and software design allows from 64 ports up to 1020 ports in a main plus remote environment Modularity gives the system the ability to expand from its minimum configuration to its maximum capacity as the need arises This unique expansion capability allows the system to grow in a cost affective manner as the user requirements expand Y our initial system investment is protected through growth capability 4 Energy Saving and Space Savings Through employment of state of the art technology in the system circuitry design NEC has been able to reduce power consumption As a result the current consumption of the system has been reduced to 50 of that of any conventional electronic PBX systems This energy saving oriented system design allows for the use of much smaller capacity main power equipment and air conditioning equipment In parallel with the energy savings the space requirement for the system has been reduced to one third when compared with that of a conventional electron
308. he keyboard for the Dterm SP30 PC can be configured in such a way to allow fast access to placing calls receiving calls and termination of calls You are no longer required to utilize a combination of the keyboard and mouse to access these telephone features Call Log Export The Dterm SP30 provides for the capability of saving the call log file in a cvs file format in addition to the administrator user selecting a network storage place for the file When opening the file with application render capable of displaying cvs files columns breaking out caller direction date and time caller ID duration of the call notification of whether the call was recorded and memo information are displayed Voice Quality Alarm The Dterm SP30 is able to provide notification to the user when it is perceived to be transmitting and or receiving voice problems When the Dterm SP30 application detects a voice problem an alarm is lit on the GUI and information about the audio problem is stored in the maintenance log file 2 Line Display When the Dterm SP30 is set for a compact mode the display which is shown is only capable of displaying one line of information When configuring the Dterm SP30 to a 2 line display the display is able to switch 1 second intervals between the normal 2 lines of display Automatic Idle Return This function allows for automatic disconnection during ROT or BT tone being heard due to disconnecting by remote party Administ
309. he service conditions of each feature are the same as those of the Single Line Telephone of CCIS features except the following features Calling Number Display PS Last Number Redial PS Speed Dial PS 2 Ifthe PBX requires pause timing between a trunk access code and an external number the WCS can automatically insert the pause timing 3 The interface between a PBX and the WCS is CCIS The number of voice link depends on the traffic except PS to PS calls 4 Code Restriction and Class of Service are provided by the PBX 5 Any type of call is originated via the PBX even a Dterm PS IIl to Dterm PS III call 6 The station number of Dterm PS lll can be assigned flexibly The limitation of the number and maximum digits depends on the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS 7 Ifthe SMDR is needed APOO card is required and the upper PBX must have a center node feature of Centralized Billing CCIS Page 16 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Wireless Roaming The UNIVERGE neEax 2000 IPS supports the JT Q931a protocol and JT 11582 for signaling at Q reference point between PBXs on the private network By supporting this protocol the PSs can be used in any Calling Area on the private network Roaming can be executed only on trunk connection between PBXs based on JT Q931a protocol or IP To each trunk route of JT Q931a digital trunks IP trunks it can be specified whe
310. iately every time the phone is answered via the BAS Greetings playback can be determined based on internal or external calls on groups of caller IDs or even morning or afternoon A different greeting can be recorded for any of the scenarios above allowing the attendant to present a pleasant and consistent greeting over the telephone UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 7 11 Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Business Attendant System CCIS Network Information The following is a diagram of a simple CCIS network using the BAS MEAXIADDIMS With OAI NEAX2400MS or HEAX 200G VS 0 Connected D Comeciad MS a DCS ed PE The Business Attendant System can run in the above pictured environment with the following limitations Calls transferred from the BAS Client to a Dterm on the second PBX will not recall to the BAS operator The Dterm in the second PBX cannot be monitored by the BAS system and the monitored speed dials and status checks in the directory will not function for those extensions The system will force supervised transfers to CCIS extensions to ensure callers do not get transferred to a busy remote extension Operators need to listen for ring back tone or busy tone and then either completes the call or return back to the source caller as appropriate The message waiting lamp cannot be controlled on remote Dterms Using multi node capabilities the oper
311. ic PBX system 5 Building Block Configuration In a conventional switching system various kinds of equipment are mounted in a cabinet group and are connected to each other by use of connecting cables The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS however uses a building block modular design When installing the system the required blocks are placed on top of each other in a building block formation and interconnected by round bus cables 6 Flexible Interface Ports The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS employs a Universal Port architecture that has the flexibility to accommodate station terminal equipment trunks and adjunct processors This universality allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to optimize use of slot space and lower expansion costs 7 High Reliability The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is designed and manufactured to provide the highest level of system reliability The UN VERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is designed with such features as remote maintenance distributed call processing error correcting memory battery backup and automatic system alarm indications to insure unsurpassed reliability Only the finest components have been used In addition through the employment of LSI and custom LSI and VLSI technology the number of component parts has been greatly reduced thus lessening possible failures and insuring continuous operation 8 Intelligent Attendant Console The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS attendant console SN716 Desk Console is a compact desktop unit equipped
312. ice packet data to PCM signals The number of IP PADs depends on the traffic volume of those connections Up to eight IP PADs can be accommodated per system thus providing 256 channels Up to two IP PADs can be controlled by the MP without FP cards and additional IP PADs can be controlled by the FP cards two IP PADs per FP card Page 13 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP 8IPLA 24IPLA PN 8IPLA card provides 8 channels of IP PAD with VCT function per card Adding PZ 24IPLA daughter card on the 8IPLA card provides up to 32 channels of IP PAD with VCT function Maximum of 8 IP PAD cards can be accommodated per system thus providing 256 channels By system data setting the used ports for IP PAD can be changed to 8 16 24 32 ports Note Up to 24 channels of IP PAD are provided when using G 723 1 codec 6 The following types of connections are available on a peer to peer basis Connections between IP terminals Connections for CCIS networking via IP from to IP terminals 2000 IPS or 2400 IPX 7 The IP PADs are required for the following connections statuses Connections between IP terminals and legacy stations trunks IP trunks H 323 Connections for CCIS networking via IP from to legacy stations trunks While IP terminals are on hold Consultation Hold Call Transfer Music on Hold etc When any override service is activated Executive Override etc includi
313. icenses 24 Port Patch Panel MATWorX IPS UNIV IPS DM IP SYS PKG E IPS DM E UNIV PIMMJ AC CORD E U Rack Mount Kit SPN CP24 C CPU PZ M606 A SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE Key Keeper FD 8 Seat Licenses 24 Port Patch Panel MAT Worx IPS UNIV IPS DM DML Expansion Module 1 E IPS DM E UNIV PIMMJ AC CORD E U Rack Mount Kit Joint Bracket Kit BUS 0 4 CA PA Key Keeper FD LT Port 64 24 Port Patch Panel DM to UNIV DM Upgrade Kit SPN CP24 C CPU IPS DM UNIV Front Mask 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE MAT Worx IPS Page 2 16 Provides for up to 48 Legacy ports and 128 IP stations per system Comes with 8 IP Seat Licenses Additional IP Seats Licenses are required beyond 8 NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Provides for up to 48 Legacy ports and 952 IP stations per system Comes with 8 IP Seat Licenses Additional IP Seat Licenses are required beyond 8 NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Adds 56 additional Legacy ports for a total of 112 DM DML and supports up to 888 IP station DM Only per system DML supports 128 IP stations max Upgrades to CP24C CPU and Adds UNIVERGE Front cover UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture IP REMOTE PIM PACKAGES Remarks UNIV IPS DMR SYS PKG E IPS DM E UNIV PIMMJ SPN CP31 C CPU PZ M606 A SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C AC CORD E U Rack Mount Kit 24 Port Patch Panel UNIV IP RE
314. ide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP List of Service Features Operation X Available Not Available Remote site Service Features Multiline Terminal SLT operation X XX IP Enabled Dterm operation X 0O XX COT LDT ODT FX XK Attendant Console X o oo o o o Add On Module X a Yoo DSS Console XT XK ISDN Terminal FX S a S o IPT CCIS H 323 XA d o Builtin PT S A a OAlciet XK Pszt ES S i i Siy yo Trunk IC OG call CO Tieline X O O X J X CalerID Class O XA ooo gt o aler ID Display MFC TLAN L X ooo CalerO Staton x enhanced tT A 2 SMR xe MAT RS2320 fF XXX MATAN FX XK MAT Modem fF X a d a System Data change by MAT X lo o o J o SNMP XA VLAN oo oo KK Fault Message registration X XT Announcement Service XX RA Automated Attendant O J X lo oo o J Background Musie O Z J X lo o o o J o Y Conference Three FourParty X O XxX X Conference Six Ten Pary X lo oZ o l Y Conference 32 Party X X Note2 Internal Zone Paging XxX a S o User Mobility User Continuance Notet X Xf X Note1 User will be required to login in again once remote system starts in survival mode Note2 Available using CFTC card in the Main Site Tee UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 29 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Planning and Installation Vendor Support for Open System Standards The vendor should be committed to supporting op
315. ide all zone paging receive reorder tone Service Conditions on System Registration 1 The IP Station can be registered in the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS in Login method with password protected or Automatic Login method MAC address authentication The registration method can be assigned in a station class of service Note the DtermSP20 SP30 soft phone is registered in Automatic Login method only 2 The Login method allows the IP station user to be registered in the system by entering its own login code station number and password The station user can login to the system from any IP Enabled Dterm terminal in the system which is assigned to Login method The Automatic Login method MAC address authentication allows the IP Enabled Dterm to be registered in the system at the installation time by entering its own login code station number and a special password for installation engineers Once the terminal is registered the station user does not have to login logout to use the IP Station 3 Up to 8 digit password can be assigned by system programming O to 9 A and B can be used as a password The password can be masked by on the LCD of IP Enabled Dterm 4 The registration data by Automatic Login method MAC address authentication can be backed up in the flash ROM of the MP by MAT operation or automatic system data back up at a designated time Therefore the installation engineer does not have to re register the IP Enabled Dt
316. idual trunk by dialing an associated identification code This allows detection of faulty trunks during regular testing or after complaints The Customer Administration Terminal CAT or Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT has the capability to then busy out the trunk until repair is made Page 9 7 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Multi Function Key This feature allows the top row of keys on the Attendant Console to perform and display multiple functions in accordance with the status of call processing Multiple Console Operation This feature allows more than one Attendant Console to operate within the same system Pushbutton Calling Attendant Only This feature permits an operator to place all calls over Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF lines from the pushbutton keypad on the Attendant Console Serial Call This feature is activated by the Attendant when an incoming calling party wishes to speak with more than one internal party When the internal station subsequently disconnects from the Central Office line call the Central Office party automatically rings back to the same Attendant Time Display This feature provides a digital time display on the Attendant Console LCD Trunk Group Busy Display A visual indication is supplied to the Attendant when all trunks in a particular trunk group are busy Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Transfer By Attendant This feature allows an Attendant to transfer an incoming or outg
317. if the line button is assigned for Direct Privacy Release Page 9 26 Direct Privacy Release This feature allows a station user with a secondary appearance of another extension in the system to access that extension when it is being used by someone else This feature allows for a simplified method for establishing a conference In addition this feature can be used to emulate PC dialing where a single line extension connected to a PC can appear on a Multiline Terminal and be accessed by the Multiline Terminal user after the PC is completed dialing Manual Privacy Release This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to enter a conversation on a busy line button if the Multiline Terminal user already in the conversation allows them by releasing Privacy Private Lines Only a C O trunk assigned to that specific station is seized when a station user originates an outgoing C O call or when an incoming C O call is terminated at the station designated by Direct In Termination In this manner stations and C O trunks are to be associated on a 1 to 1 basis Property Management System Interface The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a data interface to a locally provided Property Management System PMS This enables communication between the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS and the PMS in order to provide computer control of Hotel Motel features Proprietary Multiline Terminal The are several Multiline Terminals available which can be used w
318. iguration The MODULAR CHASSIS provides 56 LT ports in hardware slots and provides 64 ports in software port allocation 56 LT ports and 8 virtual ports There are 2 types of MODULAR CHASSIS Physical MODULAR CHASSIS and Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS The Physical MODULAR CHASSIS is a hardware MODULAR CHASSIS and is used to accommodate an MP IP PADs legacy LT AP cards and power supply units The Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS is a software MODULAR CHASSIS used to accommodate IP stations and Peer to Peer CCIS Trunks by system data programming The port capacity of the Virtual MODULAR CHASSIS is varied depending on the number of Physical MODULAR CHASSIS One MODULAR CHASSIS provides 8 card slots including one card slot for Main Processor MP and other 7 slots for Line Trunk LT Application Processor AP cards 56 LT ports and 8 virtual LT ports AC LTC BUS cable connectors and power switch which are located at the rear side of MODULAR CHASSIS The following illustration shows MODULAR CHASSIS hardware configurations software port allocation face layout and rear view of MODULAR CHASSIS for IPS DM IPS DML IPS DM MODULAR CHASSIS Hardware Configuration AY ES 1 MODULAR CHASSIS 2 MODULAR CHASSIS Virtual Virtual MODULAR MODULAR CHASSIS CHASSIS 952 IP Ports 56 LT ports 56 56 MC 0 LT ports MC LT ports 256 AP Ports per System MODULAR CHASSIS Software Port Allocation UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP
319. il Recording SMDR and a Hotel Printer MP built in PMS over IP The Main Processor MP manages guest or administration room status and stores call information on each guest or administrative station The MP also provides a LAN interface port for a Property Management System PMS terminal or a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR terminal Adding an APOOB MRC F with PMS over IP allows the print out of an execution history of Automatic Wake Up Do not Disturb Room Cutoff Check in Check out service Message Waiting and PMS connect or disconnect status Hotel Console The DESKCON is programmed as a Hotel Console The Hotel Console can access Room Cutoff individual and group Automatic Wake Up Message Waiting or Do Not Disturb individual and group with the function keys in addition to the attendant features and functions Hotel Motel Front Desk Terminal The Dterm can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel Front Desk Terminal This allows setting and canceling of the following hotel features Automatic Wake Up Check In Check Out Note Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Override Message Waiting Room Cutoff Room Status Note Note When MP built in PMS on IP is provided you can set and cancel these hotel features only from PMS Station Message Detail Recording SMDR The Station Message Detail Recording SMDR sends out the outgoing incoming C O call information to an external SMDR terminal Personal Computer The SMDR is u
320. ilbox Live Record is available on Dterm sets with a properly configured feature button A programmable recording beep tone may be configured where required by law Constant Message Count Allows Dterm display set users to see messaging information on their LCD The message count is updated to provide old new and urgent message counts when users are connected to their voice mailbox Soft Key Mailbox Navigation When connected to an IVS2 or IPS system mailbox subscribers with Dterm Series E and Dterm IP sets have the option of using the four soft key buttons to manage messages and navigate their mailbox menus Using these visual menu prompts allows the subscriber to quickly select and access various mailbox features ANI Caller ID Capture and Display When using Enhanced MCI integration Automatic Number Identification ANI or Caller ID CLID integration displays the telephone number of the outside caller on a desktop PC using ViewMail ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging or ViewCall Plus or the Dterm set s display during message playback Immediate disconnect NEAXMail AD 64 immediately disconnects when callers hang up so ports free up immediately Line resource management controls out dialing This gives priority to incoming call traffic when performing out dialing operations Integration methods the NEAXMail AD 64 integrates with the NEAX PBX system in one of three ways The integration method dictates how the NEAX PBX provid
321. in a CCIS network environment with the following limitations Calls transferred from the BAS Client across a CCIS Link will not recall to the BAS operator Using multi node capabilities the operator can now view station data via the directory or speed dials to extensions in other IPS systems The other IPS systems must have OAI and a TCP IP connection back to the OpenWorX server Additional Open WorX software is also required per IPS to be added on the server Business Receptionist CCIS Network Information The Business Receptionist can run in a CCIS network environment with the following limitations Calls transferred from the Business Receptionist across a CCIS Link will not recall to the operator The Dterm across a CCIS Link cannot be monitored by the Business Receptionist system and the monitored speed dials and status checks in the directory will not function for those extensions The system will force supervised transfers to CCIS extensions to ensure callers do not get transferred to a busy remote extension The message waiting lamp cannot be controlled on a remote Dterm Note Business Receptionist does not have the same multi node capability that BAS does OAI Application Software Development For users wishing to develop their own applications NEC offers a complete library of development tools For further information contact the OAI Product Manager System Specifications Required Equipment for OAI PN CP 24 C MP
322. in the last second to a retrospective report ranging back up to 1 5GB worth of data CallCenterWorX ACD Features 1 Runs on the Windows 2000 Professional operating system using Client Server architecture making information and processing directly available from the desktop interface The MAT Client as a remote PC runs on Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP 2 Acapacity of 10 to 120 positions depending upon licensing application and PBX platform 3 Can support up to nine tenants 4 Uses a GUI interface to make commands and controls easily accessible to the user 5 Routes incoming calls using User defined sets of call handling instructions named Call Control Vectors CCVs week schedules and holiday schedules A system of priorities and call overflows designed to deliver calls rapidly and efficiently to the appropriate split or agent Page 12 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Has dock able toolbars which can be dragged to other locations on the working screen The user can also build a personal toolbar of most frequently used icons Provides toolbar icons and tool tips for all MAT commands for opening report views and for online Help and context sensitive Help Provides data entry screens with a choice of background color pattern for each screen Data entry
323. inal and Attendant Console can be selected on a per station basis or on a per operator console basis The available languages are the same as used on a system wide basis Page 9 24 Multiline Terminal Attendant Position A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function similar to an Attendant position This Attendant position has limited access to Attendant related features and functions and can be substituted where an Attendant is required but an Attendant Console is not necessary When an DCU 60 1 unit is associated with this Attendant Multiline Terminal enhanced operation is available Music on Hold This feature plays music when a line is placed on hold Music is provided by a circuit board memory chip IP adpter or a local music source such as a CD player or a radio Night Service This feature provides a variety of methods for handling incoming calls when the system is in night mode These include Attendant Night Transfer Call Rerouting Day Night Mode Change by Attendant Console Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing Day Night Mode Change by System Clock Night Connection Fixed Night Connection Flexible Trunk Answer Any Station TAS Overflow for TAS Queue Overflow Limit for TAS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Attendant Night Transfer When the Attendant Console is in Night Service any operator directed calls dial O calls are automatically route
324. inating system based on the calling party number received from the network Class of Service This feature permits all stations to be assigned a Class of Service in accordance with the degree of system use desired The Class of Service is used to assign restrictions for trunk access and feature access Code Restriction This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to be programmed to restrict outgoing calls according to specific area and or Central Office codes This restriction is controlled on the basis of a three digit area code or six digit area and office code numbering plan Conference Three Four Party This feature provides a station user the ability to add on another party trunk or station to a call already in progress Single Line Telephone users can add up to one additional party and Multiline Terminal users can add up to two additional parties UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Conference Six Ten Party This feature permits a station user or Attendant conference leader to establish a Conference among as many as six or ten parties including the Conference leader Conference 32 Party This feature permits a station user Attendant or a trunk party to establish a conference among as many as 32 parties including the conference leader Two Conference methods are available Group Call and Meet Me Conference Group Call This feature enables a station user PS
325. incoming calls Page 9 13 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Camp on This feature provides selected stations or outside calls with Camp On capability to a busy internal station Two Camp On methods are provided The call waiting method allows a station or an outside party to camp itself on to a busy station The transfer method allows a transferred outside call to be camped on to a busy station Centrex Compatibility A combination of features allows full integration of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS with Centrex service Check In Check Out When this feature is activated the following operations occur e Check In Room Cutoff is cleared e Check Out Room Status printout is supplied Do Not Disturb is reset Room Cutoff is set Message Waiting is reset Automatic Wake Up is cleared CID Call Back When an incoming call is terminated from station and trunk with Caller ID calling number information and called station does not answer the calling number is registered to the system memory and MW lamp is lit After the calling number is registered by operating from station confirmation delete call back is available Besides when the called station answers the calling number is also registered to the Last Number Redial memory The station can search and call back to that number by the operations of Last Number Redial Stack Dial feature Page 9 14 CID Call Routing This feature allows designating a call term
326. ine appearance is the only line key that cannot be reassigned Flexible Numbering Plan The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS has a Flexible Numbering Plan All access codes and station numbers and can be assigned in system programming Refer also to the Single Digit Dialing Features and Specifications which further increases the flexibility of the system Flexible Ringing Assignment This feature allows lines on Multiline Terminals to be individually programmed to ring or not ring Forced Account Code This feature forces the user to enter an Account Code up to 8 or 10 digits for all outgoing calls The Account Code must be dialed before dialing the outgoing number Calls are processed only when the dialed Account Codes are valid Page 9 20 Group Call Automatic Conference 6 10 Party This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user or single line telephone user within the system to establish a conference among as many as six or ten parties From a Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone a maximum of 9 stations can be paged simultaneously plus the originator The stations are assigned to the simultaneous paging groups as participants by the system data beforehand Group Call 2 Way Calling This feature allows a Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone to page a maximum of fifteen parties simultaneously including the originator After one of paged parties answers the paging becomes the 2 Way Calling between the originator a
327. ines they wish to monitor BR Directory Both an internal directory and an external directory exist in the Business Receptionist system The internal directory lists employees within the company while the external directory stores numbers outside the company External numbers are usually numbers that are frequently called or information about people or companies that frequently call the main listed number When answering a call from one of these external numbers fields from this entry are displayed to the operator providing more information than just the 10 digit caller ID DID for Company Lookup The directory is also capable of being partitioned by company The drop down box at the top of the window displays entries from a particular company or all companies in the system This is particularly useful in shared tenant installations where a single attendant group serves multiple organizations Additionally a DID number can be associated with each company selection in the database With this function enabled when a call comes in on a specific DID for that company the operator directory will automatically default to that company and only show those employees that are in the company BR Overhead Paging Most overhead paging is done by the creation of a direct trunk access key or a trunk access code The Business Receptionist software does not have the ability to utilize these methods Because of this if the user wishes to overhead page from
328. ing any of the UNIVERGE Family of systems or the Elite IPK This creates a powerful migration path never before available to our customers Q Master Contact Center Solutions Contact Routing Q Control Q Control is the core module of Q Master It lets users maximize contact center efficiency by providing dynamic control over the delivery of phone email and web initiated contacts Since labor is a contact center s largest expense this efficiency equates to significant operational cost savings Q Control uses skills based routing to match agent knowledge to the needs of different callers or groups of callers agents handle the inquiries they are most equipped to deal with When all the agents in a specific queue are busy Q Control automatically overflows calls to the next most suitable agent in another queue by matching agent skill sets to a variety of different queues using a predetermined call delivery matrix List of features included in Contact Routing Q Control Individual agent IDs Agents log on and off from their telephone or PC with a personalized ID number the agent not the extension is tracked Wrap up codes prompts agents to supply a Wrap up code providing detailed real time call handling information Work time allowance provides each agent with post call processing time Inter Queue Transfer even when a call is transferred from one queue to another callers maintain their position in the queue based on total time w
329. ing are also realized in applications where trunk facilities are strategically distributed throughout the network CCIS will Look Ahead when a user in node A tries to access a trunk facility from node B A tie line from node A to node B would only be used if the trunk facility requested is available UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 11 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Shared Trunk Facilities and Alternate Routing Many network applications dictate a need to strategically distribute trunk facilities throughout the network The practice of sharing trunk facilities across a network is beneficial because it reduces the overall network trunking requirements and provides additional lower cost route choices When combining this practice with the Alternate Routing capabilities of CCIS a large increase in network reliability and user productivity can be realized while reducing network operations costs The flexibility surrounding CCIS allows multiple alternate routing schemes which can be created to enhance network reliability while they are specifically designed to consider Least Cost Routing LCR benefits This provides the user with multiple alternate routes that are automatically selected with call costs as the primary factor in route selection As shown in the following diagram CCIS intelligence will also automatically use the pre configured alternate route for the D chan
330. ing calls from being directed to stations at which no agent is available Call Waiting Indication UCD This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to a UCD group is placed in queue due to an all agents busy condition An external relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting Indication Delay Announcement UCD This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller placed in queue to a UCD group A single announcement or two separate announcements can be provided Hunt Past No Answer UCD This feature allows calls targeted at a UCD group to hunt past an agents station after a no answer condition if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable or not available to answer the call Page 9 31 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Immediate Overflow UCD This feature allows a call directed to a UCD group to immediately overflow to another UCD group upon encountering an all agents busy condition Priority Queuing UCD This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis when the call enters a UCD queue When a call is a considered as priority it is placed at the beginning of the queue Queue Size Control UCD On incoming DID Tie line calls the system can be assigned a threshold that limits the number of calls in queue When the queue size threshold is
331. ing features and most AIMWorX features and modules Business tier The Business tier manages up to 500 extensions or users It can be installed as a standalone system or in a client server environment and works with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 switch family the UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 switch family and some non NEC switches for SMDR collection only This system supports all AIMWorX features and modules Small Corporate tier The Small Corporate tier manages up to 2 500 extensions or users lt can be installed as a standalone system or in a client server environment and works with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 switch family the UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 switch family and some non NEC switches for SMDR collection only This system supports all AIMWorX features and modules Page18 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting Corporate tier The Corporate tier manages up to 5 000 extensions or users It can be installed as a standalone system or in a client server environment and works with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 switch family the UN VERGE NEAX 2400 switch family and some non NEC switches for SMDR collection only This system supports all AIMWorX features and modules Enterprise tier The Enterprise tier handles up to 65 000 extensions or users lt must be installed in client server format lt works with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 switch family the UN VERGE NEAX 2400 switch family and some non NEC switches
332. ing to enhance everyone s productivity Improve communications for remote workers o OpenWorx Communications Portal is browser based and requires network access for full operation it is an ideal application to help keep remote staff members in touch with the rest of the office Remote users can have all the same capabilities as local users including managing contacts setting and viewing location status information and use of both corporate and personal directories Open Worx Dialer NEC s OpenWorx Dialer allows any user in the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS to use his or her Dterm to electronically search for the extension of another person in the UNIVERGE NEAx 2000 IPS even while the user is on the phone Once the listing is located a simple button press is all it takes to make the call or initiate a transfer Instead of thumbing through a paper directory the user now accesses the online up to date directory by pressing a function key on their Dterm Centralizing the database also ensures that all extensions are easily added and or updated no matter how often updates are made Also the user can query using division and department such as would occur in a multi site corporation Dialer Database The database used for Dialer is the same as the Business Attendant System database which allows Dialer users to have the same information available to the attendants Dialer Benefits Saves the attendant time by curtailing the need for emplo
333. ing with Meet Me This feature allows a station user or attendant dial access to local voice paging equipment and connects both parties automatically after the paged party has answered the page by dialing an access code Fax Arrival Indicator When a call from a C O line Direct Inward Termination Direct Inward Dialing Automated Attendant station or tie line has terminated to a facsimile machine a related lamp on a pre designated Multiline Terminal is caused to light indicating reception of a facsimile call Fax over IP This feature allows the system to transmit facsimile communications over IP network via Local Area Networks LAN and corporate Wide Area Network WAN Since PBX regards facsimile equipment as one of ordinary telephones IP Packet Assembler Disassembler IPPAD and Voice Compression Trunk VCT are required for facsimile uses over IP network same as legacy stations The facsimile transmission procedure T 30 or G 711 G 726 pass through is supported with IP PAD VCT Page 9 19 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Feature Activation from Secondary Extension This feature allows the Multiline Terminal user to access an appearance of another extension and program certain features from that extension Flexible Line Key Assignment Multiline Terminals can have any desired line key assignment This feature permits assignments to be tailored to each individual s needs The terminal s primary extension l
334. ion cable 5m 15ft Cable for connecting Battery to 4PFT of AC DC Power BATT CA P5 1 per MODULAR CHASSIS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 2 13 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture System Power Supply and Cooling Fan AC DC Power Supply The AC DC Power Card is mounted in the rear side of each MODULAR CHASSIS The AC DC Power card provides power to all circuit cards which are resided in the MODULAR CHASSIS AC power requirements are as follows Input Voltage 85 to 264VAC 50 60 Hz Auto sensing 100V 200V selection AC DC Power Card Description Qty Remarks AC DC Power Supply PZ PW131 1 per MODULAR CHASSIS Output 5 V 5 5A 27 V 3A Back up Power UPS or battery backup with external battery is available for backup power for AC power failure In case of battery backup sealed type battery should be used The open type battery is not available because of AC DC power specifications Required Battery Capacit Battery Backup Time Required Battery Capacity 10 minutes Built in battery 12VDC 0 8AH x 2 30 minutes External battery 12VDC 2 2AH x 2 3 hours External battery 12VDC 12AH x 2 Ring Generator Unit RGU The RGU provides ringing supply to analog SLT PN 4LCAA is no longer required however it cannot ring more than 6 analog SLT s per MODULAR CHASSIS simultaneously Therefore the simultaneous ringing has to be limited by office data setting Ring Genera
335. ion ae Receiving 0 10 pps 0 8pps Dial Speed 9 to 22 pps 20 pps 0 8 pps Break Ratio 55 to 77 67 3 or 62 3 Inter Digit Pause Min 256 msec 300 to 1 000 msec 10 pps Switch Hook Flash Detection 384 to 2 300 msec Not applicable 2 DTMF Signal Receiving A A E High Frequency Group 1200Hz 1 336Hz 1477H2 erm 1 2 Signal Code rro as Low Frequency Group 852 z 7 8 9 mnz o ALBA Frequency Deviation 1 8 0 8 Signal Duration 64 or 128 milli sec Inter Digit Pause 32 to 240 msec Signal Level 46 to 5 dBm E be Poe pb Unwanted Frequency Not Applicable 40 dB below the power of signal frequency Page 3 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Multi frequency Compelled MFC R2 SIGNAL 1 MFC Frequency Value Frequencies Forward Signals Hz Backward Signals Hz 1 380 1 140 Combination Number FO F1 3 Sender Receiver Specifications Sender Transmitted Level 8 dbm to 11 5 dBm Frequency Variation Receiver Sensitivity Range 35 dBm to 0 dBm Frequency Variation 12 dBm UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 19 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Audible Tones and Ringing Signal Audible Tones A Tone Frequency Interruption Continuous Special Dial Tone SDT 0 125 sec ON 0 125 sec OFF 0 5 sec ON 0 5 sec OFF 2 5 s
336. ion is possible by the LCR function only Note During call termination there is no indication of which service is being used 3 Up to 5 digit Network ID of Network Specific Facilities Information Element can be sent to ISDN Network 4 Transit Network Selection Information Element can be sent to ISDN Network 5 Service conditions 3 and 4 are available with the following firmware of PN 24PRTA SC 2795 IXS PRT PROG A1 Issue 2 01 or later SC 2888 IXS PRT PROG A2 Issue 1 01 or later When the firmware issue is earlier than above up to 3 digit Network ID can be sent to the ISDN Network Called Party Recognition Service Direct In Termination DIT This feature provides an incoming Direct In Termination DIT call via an ISDN trunk to be connected to a predetermined station This application can be used for a station or modem For incoming calls in a Primary Rate Interface trunk this service feature should be used only when DID trunks are not desired Note Refer to the Business Features and Specifications manual for details on service Conditions CPN To Network Present This feature allows the ISDN network to be informed of the calling party number CPN when a call originates from a terminal connected to the System Service Conditions 1 The data provided as the calling station number is assigned via MAT CAT for each ISDN circuit or station In addition if no data has been assigned as the calling station number the system will not provid
337. ipped with all the features and functions of the UN IVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS with a smaller space requirement It is a full featured PBX that supports advanced networking pure peer to peer IP telephony connectivity and traditional TDM switching capabilities Designed primarily for pure converged IP networks the UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM can also accommodate a mixed i e TDM and IP converged IP network or standalone solution The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM supports up to 952 peer to peer IP stations and 56 TDM ports in a single modular chassis Up to two chassis can be stacked providing maximum capacity of 112 legacy TDM ports while still supporting as many as 888 peer to peer IP stations or more depending on the amount of TDM stations used It uses the same CPU line trunk cards application processor cards and software of the UN IVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS and comes equipped for 19 rack mounting It offers superior port density each chassis only occupies two Rack Units 2RU Page 1 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction UNIVERGE NEAXIPS DML The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DML Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model Local is a UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM that has been optimized for Small Office Stand Alone IP Solution with from 10 to 100 IP telephones The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DML uses the SPN CP31C as the Main Processor The SPN CP31C is a cost down CPU to compete with Mitel 3100 NBX25 and CISCO 2600 Serie
338. ipped with function keys a dial pad and LCD and interfaces with the system via the MP card Programming of the system can be done from selected Multiline Terminals with LCD The designated Multiline Terminals can be placed in program mode and system data can then be changed To prevent unauthorized changes password levels are assigned providing authorization for access to certain areas of programming and denying access to others UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 8 1 Issue 6 Chapter 8 System administration Service Conditions Programming from a Customer Administration Terminal can only be used when the system is online All Multiline Terminals with LCD scanned during initialization will be Customer Administration Terminals The commands CMO0 Office Data All Clear and CM01 Office Data Partial Clear cannot be accessed from the CAT The CAT cannot delete itself from the system program Only two Customer Administration Terminals can be in program mode at the same time The data that can be changed from the CAT can be limited by the Password level assigned There are eight levels of Passwords that can be assigned in system programming The relation between Password level and access to available commands is also assigned in system programming 6 A password can consist of a maximum of any eight digits with the following limitation The password cannot be CCCCCCCC or FFFFFFFF Caution should be exerc
339. ired Each key has an associated lamp transmission Steady lamp indicates trouble conditions in ha Position When the attendant position console is Position Avalan Available available to process calls the lamp lights UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 7 5 Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position oe Position af foe When the key is pressed the lamp will light and the console will become not available Note Press the button if operators leave their seats Allows the console to place in the night answer mode and lights the associated lamp Releasing the key restores the console to normal operation Key amp Lamp UD Up and Basic Allows the attendant to adjust volume of the P Down receiver ringer and contrast of the LCD Liquid 29 LCD Crystal Display Multi Function Multi 30 Function Key Key Page 7 6 The following information will be displayed 1 line The kind of party that connects to the attendant the number of the waiting calls the date and time 2 line Basic Display Tenant number station class of service and station number belonging to the destination called party 3 Line Tenant number station class of service and station number belonging to the source calling party 4 Line Optional indication such as trunk busy Keys while idle Mode allows access to DAY NIGHT mode and LKOUT Console Lock out mode
340. is a 6 Party Conference card One card can control a conference of up to ten participants This card occupies 10 time slots per one card PN CFTC The CFTC card is a 32 Party Conference Trunk card One card can control a conference of up to 32 participants Two Conference methods are available Group Call and Meet Me Conference This card occupies 32 AP time slots per one card PN 2DATA This circuit card is a trunk card that supports a maximum of two announcements without external announcement equipment This package supports only the following announcement arrangements Two 60 second announcements Single or multiple connections to an announcement is allowed Announcements will be recorded from a Dterm Single line or Attendant Console PN 4DATC This circuit card is a trunk card that supports the announcement function for a maximum of four announcements without external announcement equipment This package supports only the following announcement arrangements Four 120 second announcements Single or multiple connections to an announcement is allowed Announcements will be recorded from a Dterm Single line or Attendant Console PN IPTB IPT The PN IPTB circuit card is an IP Trunk card Accommodates the IP network and transmits receives compressed voice or signals over an IP network Used together with maximum of four PN 4VCTI cards 16 channels 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
341. is displayed during QoS display To stop QoS display press the EXIT soft key not EXIT button Even if the call ends and the Dterm user goes on hook the QoS display remains unless pressing the EXIT soft key Page 13 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Service Conditions on Legacy Service Features 1 A DSS BLF Console can be associated with the IP Enabled Dterm terminal but the console must be connected to a DLC card 2 Multiple Line Operation with normal Multiline Terminal is available 3 Service features requiring continuous voice transmission such as the Background Music feature cannot be used because this traffic may reduce overall performance of the Local Area Network LAN CAT mode is available Soft Key and Help indication is supported Set Relocations is not available between IP Station and TDM Multiline terminal DTMF signal is sent for 112ms 128ms when Key Pad is pressed O A RA eS IP terminals do not support Add on Module feature 10 IP Enabled Dterm uses only one synthesized melody Minuet built into an IP adapter unit Music on Hold using external source is not available for the IP Enabled Dterm 11 Internal Zone Page from the IP terminals has the following conditions IP Enabled Dterm can page up to 3 Dterm IP Enabled Dterm terminals Legacy Dterm can page up to 16 Dterm IP Enabled Dterm terminals P stations cannot prov
342. is exceeded incoming callers are connected to busy tone Silent Monitor ACD This feature provides the ACD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to an ACD agent The silent monitor function gives no indication as an option to either the agent or the calling party Note The use of monitoring recording or listening devices to eavesdrop monitor retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sound activities whether or not contemporaneous with ts transmission may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation prior to monitoring or recording a telephone conversation Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties CallCenter WorX ACD 3 0 for Business CallCenterWorX ACD 3 0 for Business is a suite of hardware and software solutions that are focused on customer care Included are the Automatic Call Distribution ACD system and the Management Information System MIS elements that streamline call flow and workflow Its routing capabilities allow businesses to connect callers with the most appropriately skilled agents in the shortest time possible minimizing
343. is feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to an ACD group is placed in queue due to an all agents busy condition On external relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting Indication Delay Announcement ACD This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller placed in queue to an ACD group A single announcement or two separate announcements can be provided Hunt Past No Answer ACD This feature allows calls targeted at an ACD group to hunt past an agents station after a no answer condition if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable or not available to answer the call Page 12 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Immediate Overflow ACD This feature allows a call directed to an ACD group to immediately overflow to another ACD group upon encountering an all agents busy condition Priority Queuing ACD This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis when the call enters an ACD queue When a call is a considered as priority it is placed at the beginning of the queue Queue Size Control ACD On incoming DID Tie line calls the system can be assigned a threshold that limits the number of calls in queue When the queue size threshold
344. is table shows the names and functions of the modules Equipment Name Name Function Name Name SN1729 PIMMJ Port Interface Module PIM Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption for 30 minutes At maximum configuration the system consists of eight PIM s and provides a total of 512 physical ports 64 ports x 8 SN1730 PIMMK Port Interface Module PIM for Backup CPU System Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption for 30 minutes One PIM is required per Backup CPU System COVER PARTS COVER PARTS Cover Parts Assembly ASSEM A ASSEM One cover parts assembly is required for each PIM CS 1545 MS Base Top Cover Assembly BASE ASSEM One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack E Battery Module for housing PIM or CS ZT backup batteries BATTMH Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption for 3 hours UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 4 1 Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List This table shows the name and functions of installation hardware HANGER ASSEM B Wall Hanger Assembly One HANGER ASSEM is required per PIM for Wall Mounting Installation MOUNTING BRACKET Safety Mounting Bracket Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation Wire chain or eyebolts are to be locally provided to secure the bracket To be
345. ise are also offered In addition the ViewCall Plus module enables you to handle your live telephone traffic from your desktop PC and also works with the applications you use every day such as your Outlook contact list and your Access database The NEAXMail AD 64 provides a foundation for future growth and customization Built upon the Windows 2003 Server platform the NEAXMail AD 64 leverages the power reliability and scalability of the Microsoft Windows 2003 operating system By using the new Windows based system administration console the NEAXMail AD 64 can be administered from any Windows PC on your LAN This new console is intuitively designed and is accessible via an IP connection making system administration easier and more efficient The Windows 2003 Server also provides many of the disk maintenance utilities you already know eliminating the need to learn new software interfaces The NEAXMail AD 64 is available in 4 to 96 port configurations with analog or digital integration to your NEAX PBX The NEAXMail AD 64 may be purchased on either a Level or Level Il platform The specifications for these platforms are listed below however system specifications are subject to change without prior written notice Page 19 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Level l Level Il Platform Specifications Level I Level Il Specifications Platform Level Level
346. ised when assigning Passwords to command authorization levels If a password is forgotten access to system programming will be limited and a system initialization with subsequent programming may be required 8 When the Customer Administration Terminal is offline for programming it cannot access normal terminal functions oe lS Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT The Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT is a personal computer PC that is used for programming and maintenance of the UNIVERGE Neax 2000 IPS system The MAT can provide a Maintenance Printout Peg Count information and fault message output Additionally the MAT can be used to Remove and Restore to service any station in the system and can read or save system data from disks The MAT can assign the Key Data for the Attendant Console The MAT requires an IBM or compatible PC running Microsoft Windows 98 NT 4 0 2000 or XP and MAT Worx MATWorX is a Graphical User Interface GUI program that provides an efficient method for manipulating the PBX database This program contains extensive help files Usage Wizards and Tool Tips with hyperlinks imbedded in the text The hyperlinks provide quick access to the appropriate Add In modules Add In modules provide a user friendly intuitive method for customizing the PBX database MATWorX add ins makes it easy for you to add or remove PBX features at any time An add in is a modular component that lets you program specific feat
347. ital phones to connect to the PBX The SN716 Desk Console uses a 6 core Modular Jack inner 1 pair for signal and outer 2 pairs are for power supply to connect to the PBX system The SN716 Desk Console operates on a switched loop basis with a maximum of 6 Attendant loops terminating at each console on the associated Interface card The Attendant uses these loops for answering originating holding extending and re entering calls When Attendant loop release is used the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each console UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 7 1 Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position SN716 DESKCON General Features Character LCD 4 x 40 character LCD designation strips Software controlled LCD loop key Full access to PBX features Headset connectivity Recorder connectivity SN716 DESKCON Exclusive Features While the DESKSON has full access to PBX features the SN716 DESKCON has the following exclusive features carsi O Note For Detail of each feature refer to Chapter 9 Feature Description Page 7 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Face Layout of the SN716 DESKCON 2 1 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 7 3 Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Functions and use of Keys and Lamp
348. ite WH This 16 line display digital terminal is equipped with 8 dedicated function keys 16 Programmable line feature keys each with a two color LED built in speakerphone built in headset jack built in long loop adapter built in wall mount unit tone volume contrast control tilt stand 3 line by 24 character LCD display panel adjustable detachable four soft keys and a Large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages This terminal comes in two colors Black BK and Ivory White WH This 32 line digital terminal is equipped with 8 dedicated function keys 32 Programmable line feature keys each with a two color LED built in speakerphone built in headset jack built in long loop adapter built in wall mount unit tone volume contrast control tilt stand 3 line by 24 character LCD display panel adjustable detachable four soft keys and a Large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages This terminal comes in two colors Black BK and Ivory White WH See above for basic description of phone This phone is to be used as an ACD terminal The Silk Screening of the function keys is changed for the dedicated ACD functions UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 9 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Description of Series E Multi line Digital Terminals Cont This DSS BLF Add On Console is equipped with 60 programmable line keys DCU 60 1 WH each with a two color LED These keys c
349. ith the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Legacy Dterm Series Legacy Dterm Series E Display Non Display Dterm IP Dterm Series E Series i Display Legacy Electra Elite Display Non Display UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Automatic Idle Return This feature returns a station to the idle state after 3 seconds of reorder tone is received due to the distant end disconnecting Called Station Status Display This feature provides a display on the status of a called station on the LCD of the calling Multiline Terminal Calling Name and Number Display This feature provides a display on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal receiving a call indicating the station number trunk number of the incoming call Group Feature Key A station user can monitor the status of group member stations such as idle busy hold and ringing by lamp indication of the multiple line keys If a line is idle a station user can make a call to the member station by pressing the associated line key instead of pressing DSS key If a line is ringing or is on hold a station user can pick up the incoming call or the call on hold by using My Line and the ringing or held line is made idle Dynamic Dial Pad This feature allows a user to make an outgoing call by first pressing a key on the keypad of Multiline Terminal without pressing the Speaker key or going off hook Handsfree Unit The built in Handsfree Unit enables full
350. ks and related communication and information services UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 2 1 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Hardware Design The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS hardware is designed to provide the best of the following Flexibility Capacity Reliability Optimum use of space Minimal environmental requirements Ease of installation and maintenance A unique modular design is employed throughout the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS line of products As additional equipment modules are required they are stacked on top of each other rather than mounting the equipment in conventional frames or cabinets This innovative method reduces installation time avoids the use of bulky frames and provides for manageable future expansion virtually eliminating the possibility of outgrowing your UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Fusion of RAM and ROM Programs The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS incorporates the flexibility of Random Access Memory RAM for Office Data Memory and Flash ROM that contains the operating system This fusion of divergent memory technologies results in high performance 32 bit processing reliability in system operation as well as fast recovery time in case of system power loss This unique configuration provides improved efficiency for updates to the generic program by floppy disk and simplifies upgrades for system features and capabilities throughout its life cycle Main Processor MP with Integrated
351. ktop ensuring that they can operate at optimal efficiency Using the Agent toolbar they can Log into and out of queues Request post call work time Take a break Wrap up or resolve a call Raise an alert for assistance Q Desktop also gives agents control over phone functions e g answer transfer conference and hold from their PC and identifies incoming calls by screen popping prudent information such as ANI wait time queue name as well as caller s name account number and any other desired information from Q Master or external database Any actions taken by the agent in the contact center are reflected in real time by Q Desktop These views give agents and supervisors a lot of valuable information at a glance List of features included with Agent Desktop Q Desktop Real time information view the status of each agent and queue Supervisors can monitor contact center service levels and act immediately when issues arise unexpectedly Experience has shown that agent commitment increases when staff can view each other s performance Your agents become increasingly goal oriented and require less supervision resulting in increased productivity and accountability Caller information display Q Desktop screen pops calls as the phone or email is delivered to the agent Using Caller ID users can view the caller s name and number before answering the call saving valuable seconds Use the Phonebook Q Desktop s own database to store
352. l Identify past callers quickly without having to listen to voice mail Identify past callers when you are not at your desk Return calls quickly with dial back feature Page 11 12 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface ICA Comparison of ICA and IPS Functionality OpenWorX ICA 2000 Caller ID Call Log Capacity 99 Inbound max 24 Inbound or 99 Outbound max 19 Inbound 4 Outbound System Level Setting Dialed call types Manual TAPI OAI LNR Manual saved in Call Log Call Log Information Number Name Date Time Number only displayed Transferring Forwarding number Line rung Ringing Line Automatic Name amp Number Prime Line Automatic Sub Information line Manual key press Displayed shows Name amp Number Caller ID Name Searches Personal Displays Caller ID name and Corporate and External number form Telco CID directories for matching name can be overwritten by name to Caller ID number system defined name for 1500 numbers ICA ICA vs Camp On It should be noted that ICA and Camp On have similar end goals With camp on the user receives notification of a second call that is camped to their extension They have the choice of answering this call and putting the original caller on hold However Camp On is limits the user to 2 total callers ICA can achieve the same thing through multiple sub lines The user rolls their forwardi
353. l Forwarding should be ordered for the line to which you connect the Remote Module Note A Call waiting tone causes an interruption in data transfer between the Office and Remote Module When you use voice and data simultaneously the voice transmission will have priority over the data transmission regarding available bandwidth allocation Up to 100 passwords can be programmed into each Office Module Only one Remote Module at a time can be online with an individual Office Module lf passwords have been enabled on the Office Module authorized connections require a password 8 to 10 digits in length Passwords are retained in non volatile memory and are not affected by power outages Each password begins with two digits 00 99 These digits uniquely identify up to 100 users The 00 password is reserved for the System Administrator and can be used to change any of the user s passwords Zone paging and voice paging must be turned off via PBX programming on the ports connected to the Dterm Analog EXT The remote telephone should be programmed to ring for all incoming calls If the remote Multiline Terminal is programmed to answer multiple calls these calls should ring at the terminal Configure secondary incoming extensions for ringing Analog fax machines and modems are not operable with the DTP 32DE 1 Multiline Terminal when connected to the APR U optional adapter The NEC Dterm Cordless and Dterm Cordless Lite telephones cannot be u
354. l Indication WLAN Handset Registration Service UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Page 9 45 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Table of Features by Configuration Type Adjunct Type Integrated Type Analog PBX CCIS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Interface Interface Wired for Wireless Analog PBX Interface Xx Announcement PS No Answer Announcement PS Out of Zone Automatic Release Out of Zone Calls LX X X Call Forwarding Not Availabe Call Forwarding PS Out of Zone CciS Interface OR S o Calling Name Display PSA O Calling Number Display PS A a o Group Call Automatic Conference 6 10 Party E A A Group Caling 2 Way Calling X Multi Site Roaming RA a S UNIVERGE NEAX2000 IPS Wired for Wireless X NumberShaing TTX PS Location Indication S X Q 931a Roaming over IP Tra J Short Message Notification OA X Soft Phone WirelessHandset X Station Hunting NotAvailable X Voice Mailindication TX WLAN Handset Registration Service lt x dL OX X available not available Page 9 46 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Wireless Feature Descriptions Analog PBX Interface This feature allows the WCS to be integrated with many types of PBXs and to activate various PBX services by sending hook flash signal and DI MF tone Announcement PS No Answer Announce
355. l Office of Centralized Billing Extended 2400 IMS SMR PARMA E PN APOO B with MRC C program WIR with APOO PN APOO B with MRC F program MP MP built in SMDR on RS 232C in MP built in SMDR on RS 232C on RS 232C X Available Not available Note Only one output can be used at the local office Service Conditions SMDR can be programmed to record all outgoing calls or toll calls only depending on the customers requirements When customer provided computer equipment is connected using the RS 232C interface SMDR information will be transmitted directly to the equipment as each call record is completed If the outgoing call is directed to a trunk which does not supply answer supervision SMDR will start recording the call approximately 10 seconds after the last digit has been dialed Supervision of the status of the external RS 232C terminal is not supplied There are two kinds of SMDR features as follows a Built in SMDR The MP card has two RS 232C ports for SMDR This card provides memory for a maximum of 1024 calls and provides a record of a maximum of 255 trunk calls simultaneously for a maximum of 6 digit extension number Note n case of built in SMDR if the station number is a 7 or 8 digit number the upper one or two digits are sent as Calling office Number and the last six digits are sent as Calling Number in the call record format Page 10 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Re
356. l and is enhanced even further by the addition of the OpenWorX application suite This suite enables INASET Application Services mode adding a great deal of features and functionality Home Application This is the base application that is loaded directly to the INASET s memory It allows for the basic functionality expected from a standard IP Dterm The main difference a user will notice with this screen is the different application control buttons at the bottom of the INASET screen Without OpenWorx these buttons are static and controlled by the INASET s local memory With the addition of the OpenWorX Network Services mode the server configures these buttons The modification of a simple XML file on the server is all that is required to move add or delete additional application buttons These additional application buttons can be used for many things such as custom developed applications and direct links to web sites Corporate Directory The Corporate Directory pulls the information directly from the OpenWorX Employee database The user can search for specific people and dial using this directory Once found in the directory the user may also send a text message if Message Reader is installed send a Short Text Message to their wireless PSIII if Short Text Messaging is installed or simply view the entry to see other information or alternate dial able numbers Location Status This interface allows the user to set their status in the Op
357. l calls an ISDN Terminal or an ISDN Terminal calls a Multiline Terminal a calling station number is displayed to the calling Multiline Terminal or the ISDN Terminal In case of Point to Multipoint connection the calling station number displayed is the ISDN station number assigned by CM10 14 Station to Station calling between a PS station and an ISDN Terminal is available 15 Only Preset Dialing can be used from an ISDN Terminal Overlap dialing is not available 16 For E CCIS you must have 64K unrestricted digital data connections circuit mode The Telephone Company cannot overflow these ISDN calls to analog lines 17 Group Call This feature terminates a call to all ISDN Terminals or Terminal Adapters accommodated on the same bus Group Call is available for following connections ISDN trunk to ISDN Terminal ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal Single Line Telephone to ISDN Terminal Series 3200 R6 2 enhancement Multiline Terminal to ISDN Terminal Series 3200 R6 2 enhancement MEGACOM Access WATS AT amp T s MEGACOM WATS network as well as WATS from other carriers can be used Service Conditions 1 The available WATS service is limited to MSB Maximal Subscribed WATS Band 2 No specific band will be indicated to the Network MEGACOM 800 Service 800 WATS Ultra WATS AT amp T s MEGACOM 800 Inward WATS network as well as 800 WATS provided by other carriers can be used Service Conditions 1 Command 76 c
358. la 164 192 240 256 250 256 ES aweem 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 a 4weam 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 CCIS Trunk Peer to Peer a Max 127 DTI CCIS Digital Link woei ME 15M 2M PRT see alee ere IPPAD No Channels 64 128 192 256 IPTruk te TE TT 8 Max 8 conference groups per system 128 IA DTMF Receiver 6 Note 1 The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less Page 6 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking IPS DM DML Trunk Capacity e E A Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS pp pao o atan a o a Toopsen s 0 m E HUA Note 1 ISDN 3 Party Conference Max 16 conference groups per 5 6 Party Max 4 conference groups per system 6 10 Party Conference 10 Party Max 2 conference groups per system groups per system DTMF Sender Max 32 circuits per system IPS DMR Capacity Capacity _ MC Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS Central Office Trunk Lines DID w 4DIDA ANAW ESM imen O ISDN 4BRT card 5 Note 1 The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 6 7 Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking Least Cost Routing LCR The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS provides extensive Least Cost Routing capabilities LCR allows the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS to be programmed to route outgoing calls over the most
359. lay CCIS This feature permits the number of a calling or called party at another switching office to be displayed either on a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console CCIS Networking via IP This feature provides CCIS networks with Voice over IP VoIP capabilities to provide a converged infrastructure over corporate Wide Area Networks WAN The IP Enabled Dterm can communicate with other IP Enabled Dterm over the CCIS network IP based on a peer to peer connection basis The legacy terminals TDM based terminals can communicate with other legacy terminals or IP Enabled Dterm terminals over the CCIS network via IP Packet Assembler Disassembler IP PAD Voice compression of G 29a 8 kbps and G 723 1 5 3 kbps 6 3 kbps is available for those connections The CCIS Networking via IP provides users with all TDM based CCIS functionality such as feature transparency centralized management and centralized facilities Centralized Billing CCIS This feature is used to collect billing information from each office within the network and to direct it to the associated center office Billing information is then forwarded to the central billing centers via RS232C interfaces Centralized Day Night Mode Change CCIS This feature switches the Day Night mode of a remote office linked to the main office 2400 IPX via CCIS The mode is switched in accordance with the Day Night mode switching on the Attendant Console at the main offi
360. leared Check Out Room Status printout is supplied Do Not Disturb is reset Room Cutoff is set Message Waiting is reset Automatic Wake Up is cleared Multiline Terminals with LCD can be assigned as Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments This feature can only be activated from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument or the Property Management System PMS This feature only applies to guest room stations Refer to the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument and Property Management System Features and Specifications for more information on Check In Check Out Note When MP built in PMS on IP is provided you can set and cancel these hotel features only from PMS Direct Data Entry This feature allows a maid or other hotel personnel to enter numeric data to the Property Management System PMS using the guest room station for entry through dial operation The same numerical data can be output to a Hotel Motel Printer by system data programming This feature is activated from a guest room telephone The digits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 can be used for the input data The input data can be sent out to the PMS and or Hotel Motel Printer The output option can be selected by system data programming A maximum of 30 digits can be entered in one operation to the PMS and or Hotel Motel Printer If data exceeds 30 digits the guest room station receives reorder tone If the input data to be sent is less than 30 digits can be used to end th
361. lers to determine when an agent calls them back This feature brings a new level of flexibility to the immediate callback feature allowing customers to determine interactions with the contact center based on their timetable Internet Initiated Callbacks This feature allows customers to request a callback from an agent while browsing the organization s Web site Requests for callback will be placed into queue as are voice calls When agents become available they will receive a screen pop with collected customer information and URL information Estimated Time to Answer ETA Que Worx can provide a caller with information on the wait time expected before an agent answers the call An announcement will only be provided if the actual ETA falls within the programmed parameter thresholds Announcements can be provided in three variations stating a number of minutes and seconds approximately 2 minutes and 45 seconds only a number of minutes approximately 2 minutes or a maximum number of minutes less than 3 minutes Queue Depth QueWorX can provide an announcement indicating how many callers are ahead of a caller in the queue Threshold settings are set within the system to determine when to offer this announcement to callers For example the 2nd through 15th caller may hear their position within the queue such as The ared callers ahead of you Any caller falling outside of this range would not hear the announcement ANI
362. ll times Configurable night station or announcement when operators are not logged in Flexible DID number assigned to each operator that follows them regardless of what PC phone they use to log in Optional statistics package to track queue and operator statistics next release Optional integration with Open WorX Location Status Information to see an employee s availability return time and alternate phone number Optional integration with Open WorX Dialer providing Dterm users access to the same employee and external database lt is searchable by site department or name Optional integration with Open WorX Short Text Messaging to notify wireless users of messages UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 7 9 Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Business Attendant System Directory Both an internal directory and an external directory exist in the BAS system The internal directory lists employees within the company while the external directory stores numbers outside the company External numbers are usually numbers that are frequently called or information about people or companies that frequently call the main listed number When answering a call from one of these external numbers fields from this entry are displayed to the operator providing more information than just the 10 digit caller ID Below is an example of the internal directory screen yu Directory Bampmonz She
363. lls waiting in queue at the queue screen or total queue depth The time shown left of the queue depth describes how long the current caller has been connected Also if the operator hovers the mouse pointer over a loop key with a caller on hold the time that caller has been holding will display Left of the timer is an information screen that displays the name of the person holding while hovering the mouse pointer over a held loop Also if a caller is recalled from a park or a blind transfer their identification and the party to which they were transferred or for which they were parked will be shown here BAS Speed Dials Pad Up to forty speed dial fields are available for each individual attendant Dragging an entry from the directory onto the speed dial button automatically programs these fields Another great feature of these buttons is that they act as a Busy Lamp Field BLF When that user s phone is off hook the speed dial button becomes red and when that phone is ringing the speed dial button blinks red By right clicking the button the operator can enable or disable monitoring as well as change the name forward the person s Dterm set DND or initiate a screened blind or announced voice call This is useful for an operator who also has a set of VIPs for whom they answer calls BAS Directory Both an internal directory and an external directory exist in the BAS system The internal directory lists employees within the com
364. lmost all service features are provided to the station users accommodated in Remote PIM When the IP network main PBX recovers the Remote PIM can be restored to normal mode with a system initialization by manual operation or automatically Selectable by system data setting IPS DMR with CP31A C MP IPS PIM with CP24A B C or CP27A MP IPS Retro with CP26 or CP28 MP Page 1 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Stand Alone System Capacity IPS System Capacity Single MP System Ca ETENA Per PIM Note PIMS PIM6 PIM7 PIM8 LT Care ow tae 102 256 500 sea aas 512 No of Cards 12 24 36 48 eo 72 s4 No of Ports Max 256 ports per system No of Cards 24 Total Number of Lines Single Line Tel Dterm IP PAD No of Channel ca toe top cee tang see ane eto kong ae we re we eo nae ae Te a a ete aoe Dtem PS SO AP Card Lines Dt DPS Cell Station C5 Zone Transcever T 16 32 48 o 60 06 112 128 exe ee eee powan se oe na 12 2a ae a se mmen a ae re oe tao aa 168 102 Max tar CCIS Trunk Peer to Peer corner Max 127 a ictal N 5M2M PRT 3 4BRT card AAA IPtunk a 23 45167 18 promis peje fw fe 3 Party Conference Max 16 conference groups per system 6 Party Max 4 conference groups per system 6 10 Party Conference 10 Pa
365. many different applications These modules add interfacing capabilities to remote functions through tabs added to the AIM WorX screens Add on applications are telecommunication packages that have separate user interfaces but can use AIM WorX already established database Examples of add ons are Interactive Directory Message Center and Visual Console All optional features plug ins and applications are delivered on a single CD ROM Included as part of the package is a security mechanism hardware key that allows the customer to register the product and to activate the desired features for the product that they selected Also contained on the CD ROM are online help files for each application and a copy of all associated application documentation that can be read by the customer using a shareware tool included for this specific purpose AIM WorX is available as software only for use with customer provided PC or as a turnkey hardware system These turnkey systems are pre loaded at our customizing center on servers and desktop PCs from NEC Computer Systems Division NEC CSD AIMWorX integrates with Property Management Systems when the AIMWorX Hospitality Links module is purchased UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 18 1 Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting Multi Site Centralized Operations Multi Site operation allows AIM WorX Call Accounting to collect data from more than one SMDR source Simply p
366. ment PS Out of Zone This feature allows calls to a Dterm PS III which cannot be paged in a predetermined period of time to be routed to the announcement notifying the calling party that the Dterm PS III cannot answer Announcements can be divided between Announcement PS No Answer and Announcement PS Out of Zone depending on the Dterm PS III condition Automatic Release Out of Zone Calls When a Dterm PS III user engaged in a call moves out of the service area or enters a radio zone where all the channels are busy and the communication becomes unavailable the call will be disconnected automatically and the other party receives reorder tone Call Forwarding Not Available When a Dterm PS III is powered off or out of zone a Call directed to the Dterm PS III is forwarded to a VMS and a voice mail message can be recorded to the VMS and checked from the Dterm PS III Also the VMS can page the Dterm PS III automatically after the voice mail message is recorded Call Forwarding PS Out of Zone This feature allows calls directed to a Dterm PS Ill which is power off or out of zone to be routed to an another station an Attendant an outside number or voice mail equipment The call forwarding destination can be set cancelled from the Dterm PS III station or MAT CAT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions CCIS Interface This feature allows the WCS to be integrated wi
367. minal with a secondary appearance of the station s extension Call Forwarding No Answer This feature reroutes calls to extensions which do not answer These calls can be rerouted to another station an Attendant Console or voice mail equipment Call Forwarding No Answer can be set by the individual station user an Attendant Console or by a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station s extension Call Forwarding Destination This feature allows a station A user to set Call Forwarding All Calls from another station B within the system to the user s station A Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls When a forwarded call is rerouted to a station that has also set a Call Forward the call can be forwarded to another station A call can be forwarded up to a maximum of five times as specified in system programming Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line This feature permits a call to a busy station to be forwarded multiple times to a pre designated idle station Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer This feature permits a call to an unanswered station the ability to be forwarded multiple times to a pre designated station that does not have Call Forwarding No Answer set or to the Attendant Console Split Call Forwarding All Calls This feature allows all internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to different destinations individually regardless of the busy or idle status of the ext
368. mission line The DTI has the following functions For 24DTI e Two Directory numbers each with a SPID Unipolar Bipolar Conversion AMI B8ZS Format Alarm Detection Insertion Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission Loop Back Test Local Remote Loop Back Cyclic Redundancy Checking based on ITU T Rec G704 For 30DTI e Unipolar Bipolar Conversion HDB3 Format Alarm Detection Insertion Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission Loop Back Test Local Remote Loop Back Cyclic Redundancy Checking based on ITU T Rec G704 For connections of 24DT l and transmission line twisted pair cable can be used For connection of 30DTI and transmission line either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used DCH The D Channel Handler DCH provides the D Channel signaling interface through the DTI to an ISDN exchange and it is responsible for signaling between the PBX and the ISDN exchange under control of the system MP PRT The Primary Rate Interface Trunk PRT provides the ISDN Primary Rate Interface 1 5 Mbps PCM 23B D 2 Mbps PCM 30B D and a built in D Channel Handler DCH The PRT has the following functions For 24PRT Unipolar Bipolar Conversion AMI B8ZS Format Alarm Detection Insertion Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission Loop Back Test Local Remote Loop Back Cyclic Redundancy Checking based on ITU T Rec G704 For 30PRT Unipolar Bipolar Conversion HDB3 Format Alarm Detection Insertion
369. mizable Reports The above items are detailed below Auto Attendant The Auto Attendant provides basic call routing functions to the caller The caller receives a message with up to ten call routing options and the caller presses a key to initiate a selection The caller s selection is processed as a transfer to a destination Additional menu choices are available for customers with the multi level automated attendant The caller may be prompted for Account Code or User ID which will then be displayed on the agent s Dterm phone as the call arrives Alternatively the Account Code or User ID may appear in the Que WorX Agent Screen Pop This allows the agent to begin accessing a customer s profile while greeting the caller UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 15 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Immediate Customer Callback This feature allows callers based on their estimated time to answer to elect to receive a callback from an agent instead of waiting in queue By entering their telephone number and recording a brief message their call will remain in queue until an agent becomes available even though they have hung up The QueWorX system will automatically dial the number entered by the caller when the agent receives the call Bonus The contact center does not incur toll charges for the time call remains in queue awaiting a callback Scheduled Callbacks This feature allows cal
370. n ACD features of the system The MIS incorporates a supervisor s terminal for real time monitoring of agent activity amber and red alarms and hard copy summary reports Automatic Camp on An incoming Direct Inward Termination DIT call which has been terminated to a busy station can be Camped On automatically When the busy station becomes idle the station is automatically called and connected to the camped on incoming trunk call Page 9 9 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Automatic Change to Daylight Saving Time This feature allows the 2000 IPS system clock to automatically change from standard time to daylight saving time and vice versa Schedule to change to from daylight saving time is programmed by system data programming Automatic Number Identification ANI This feature receives the calling subscriber s number automatically sent from T1 network using MF signaling and displays the calling number on the LCD of a Multiline Terminal and an Attendant Console Automatic Recall This feature works as a timed reminder When a call remains on Hold Camp On or ringing unanswered for a fixed interval after being transferred the station that initiated the hold transfer or Camp On is automatically alerted Automatic Wake up This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call guest rooms or administration stations at specified times Upon answering the guest is connected to a recorded announcement or m
371. n DtermIPs H 323 IPT IP PAD DtermIP PROTIMS over IP DtermlP to 2000 IPS connection CCIS over IP Point to Multipoint connection H 323 IPT 4VCT card and IP PAD card are required SSS SS For connection via the IPT card UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 DTI Specifications Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Characteristics 24 Channel 30 Channel Output Line Rate Line Code Line Impedance Pulse Amplitude 3 volts 0 6 volts Base to Peak Pulse Width 324 ns 30 ns Input Line Rate Pulse Amplitude Base to Peak 1 544 Mbps 50 ppm AMI with ZCS B8ZS 100 ohms 1 544 Mbps 2000 bps 130 ppm 1 5 volts 3 volts 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3 75 ohms 100 mH Coaxial Cable 120 ohms 160 mH 2 37 volts nominal Coaxial Cable 3 volts nominal Twisted Pair Cable 244 ns nominal 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm 1 5 volts 2 7 Coaxial Cable 1 5 volts 3 3 volts Twisted Pair Cable Frame Synchronization 100011011100 Pattern Input Jitter Cable Length from PBX to MDF or External Equipment ITU T Fig 1 G743 AMI Alternate Mark Inversion ZCS Zero Code Suppression B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 ITU T Fig 1 G743 Wander 138UI 193Ul or ITU G823 138Ul 193Ul Max 200 m 656 2 ft With 0
372. n at speeds up to 19 2Kbps over universal 1 pair wiring without the use of modems Proprietary Digital Instruments Dterm may be provided to increase system flexibility and eliminate the need for conventional multiple line stations with their associated control equipment and cable plant requirements Hardware Architecture The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS systems employ the latest advancements in Large Scale Integration LSI circuits and component manufacturing techniques to create a highly reliable and serviceable communications system The IPS has changed from NEC s traditional PROM based CPUs to a Flash ROM based for system software and RAM for data programming The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS architecture consists of three major functional components Distributed Controller Digital Switching Network and Port Interface 1 Distributed Controller The Distributed Controller is composed of distributed multiprocessing units generic memory database instructions system interface and interface ports for system maintenance and administration 2 Digital Switching Network The Digital Switching Network consists of a non blocking digital time division switch allowing all ports to be used simultaneously 3 Port Interface The Port Interface provides access to the public and private network for various types of terminal devices including digital and analog telephones data terminals computers and subsystems such as Voice Mail Systems Data Switch Networ
373. n be output to a Hotel Motel Printer by system data programming Direct Digital Interface This service feature provides the capability to connect trunks from the UNIVERGE NEAXx 2000 IPS directly to T1 carrier links using either a private or public network Direct Inward Dialing DID This feature provides for incoming calls from the exchange network except FX or WATS to reach any station within the system without attendant assistance DID Call Waiting This feature allows an incoming call on a DID trunk or a tie line to automatically be Camped On to the destination station if the destination station is busy DID Digit Conversion This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to convert the digits received from the serving C O to valid station numbers when the C O numbering plan differs from the desired station numbering plan DID Name Display This feature allows name assignment for a DID number received from a public network and displays the name on an LCD of a Multiline Terminal or Attendant Console Page 9 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA This feature allows an outside caller to access the system using an exchange network connection without Attendant or station assistance The outside user may originate calls over any or all of the system s facilities such as WATS FX Tie Line or CCSA The outside user can also directly call statio
374. n is in the AIMWorX system you can program the switch with information to assign phones extensions and other administrative duties This is all done from a single screen in AIMWorX Manager Traffic Analysis Traffic Analysis intercepts the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS statistics such as peg counts from the PBX s MAT port and uses them to analyze your telecommunications needs This module shows your single or multi switch system in a graphic layout It provides a graph of call traffic between PBXs and lets you Zoom in on specific sections to assess usage of specific paths in 30 minute segments UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page18 7 Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting Trouble Ticket Trouble Ticket simplifies the trouble reporting resolution and tracking process It lets you see a database of telecom problems and their associated solutions with a simple character search Suggest simple solutions over the phone or create work orders on the same screen for the more involved problems Voice Mail SPE Voice Mail SPE is an AIMWorX module that lets you program the voice mail system from a tab on the AIMWorX Manager user s screen This interface lets you avoid the time needed and mistakes made by entering the duplicate information into two systems The AIMWorX Voice Mail SPE currently supports the Octel Overture 250 Baypoint Centigram C70 1201 120R 120S or 640 Captaris AVT CallXpress and NEAXmail AD 40 an
375. n modes for the terminal connected via the Analog Port Adapter as shown below 1 Single Port Mode A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal share the same port In this mode the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal cannot be used simultaneously 2 Dual Port Mode A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal use different ports In this mode the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal can be used simultaneously Announcement Service This feature allows station users to record messages on Digital Announcement Trunk DAT cards When a station user dials the feature access code for this feature the user receives the corresponding message from the system Answer Key An Answer Key is provided on all Multiline Terminals The Answer Key can be used to answer incoming calls on outside lines and primary or secondary extensions When the Answer Key is used to answer an incoming call with a call in progress the first party is placed on hold and the second party is connected If the Answer Key is depressed while in a three party call the user can alternate between each party and a Broker s Call is established Page 9 5 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Attendant Assisted Calling This feature allows a station user to ask an Attendant for assistance in originating a call Three methods are available non delay delay and passing dial tone Attendant Camp on Full and Semi automatic The Full Automatic Camp on f
376. n the system UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Call Park Tenant When a call is parked by Call Park Tenant the call can be retrieved from Call Park Tenant by any station within the tenant from which the call was originally parked Call Pickup This feature enables a station user to answer any call directed to another station to a Station within the user s own Call Pickup Group or to a station within a different Call Pickup Group Three Call Pickup methods are available Call Pickup Direct Call Pickup Group and Call Pickup Designated Group Call Pickup Direct This method permits a station user to pickup a call to any other station in the system by dialing a specific Call Pickup feature access code and the number of the called extension Call Pickup Group This method permits a station user to answer any calls directed to other extensions in their preset pickup group by dialing a Call Pickup Group feature access code Call Pickup Designated Group This method permits a station user to answer an incoming call directed to another group by dialing the Call Pick up Designated Group feature access code and any station within the group to which the ringing station belongs Call Redirect Without answering incoming calls or held calls that terminate to the line keys of a Multiline Terminal the calls can be transferred to a pre programmed station or Voice Mail System
377. nce Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Miscellaneous Trunk Access This feature allows the connection of various types of external facilities In addition to Loop and Ground Start Trunks the following can also be interfaced with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS CCSA Lines Code Calling Equipment Dictation Equipment Foreign Exchange FX Lines Radio Paging Equipment and Wide Area Telephone service WATS lines Refer to separate features Direct Inward Dialing DID and Tie Line Access for more applications of Miscellaneous Trunk Access CCSA Access This feature allows connection to or from a Common Control Switching Arrangement CCSA network A CCSA network is a special privately leased network constructed for one customer s exclusive use that replaces or augments the public switched network services Code Calling Equipment Access Code Calling Equipment consists of external paging units and external dialers requiring dial access from the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Dictation Equipment Access This feature permits dial access to customer provided Dictation Equipment and in some instances allows them to maintain telephone dial control of normal dictation system features Foreign Exchange FX Access An FX line is a line that is extended and terminated at a distant Central Office With this feature outgoing calls over the FX line become a local call at the distant C O Radio Paging Equipment Access This feature provides st
378. nctions e Message Waiting Set Cancel Status Display Do Not Disturb Set Cancel Status Display Automatic Wake Up No Answer Status Display Cancel Agent Busy Out UCD Status Display Line Lockout Status Display Room Cutoff Set Cancel Status Busy Out Status Console This feature allows a DCU 60 1 unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Busy Out Status Console This feature is activated by use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console Busy Out Status for each station is indicated by a red LED associated with each button Do Not Disturb Console This feature allows a DCU 60 1 unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Do Not Disturb DND Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console DND set status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Terminal user can set cancel the DND status of other stations using the DND Console Page 9 17 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Message Waiting Console This feature allows a DCU 60 1 unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Message Waiting MW Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console The Message Waiting status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Terminal user can set reset MW status using the MW Console Room
379. nd local community affairs through the dedication of their time and resources NEC affiliates and their employees donate time money and equipment to help meet everyday and emergency needs of the healthcare and other social communities In addition the NEC businesses and their people give freely of their time effort and contributions to help meet the needs of local business groups fraternal and other social organizations Education Through worldwide efforts NEC soundly supports the education of citizens and nations around the world through financial grants volunteer work donations of equipment and the sharing of knowledge Specifically the NEC Foundation of America is dedicated to encouraging and supporting the efforts of creative and effective non profit organizations in the United States and their staffs clients and volunteers who like NEC work to develop and share the benefits of technology with society in order to help improve the quality of human life UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 5 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction NEC Unified Solutions Inc Established PRIVATE Headquarters Revenues Employees Sales amp Marketing Network Manufacturing Facilities Development Activities Page 1 6 1963 as a subsidiary of NEC Corporation Tokyo Japan 6555 North State Highway 161 Irving Texas 75039 2402 PHONE 214 262 2000 3 7 billion 2 800 65 offices in 20 sta
380. nd the first answered party and paging other parties stops automatically The PSs are assigned to the simultaneous paging group as participants by the system data beforehand When the signal transmission quality becomes inferior a Dterm PS III re originates a call automatically and seizes another radio channel making the WCS handover the call to another zone transceiver to maintain the speech quality This feature allows the calling party to page the individual Dterm PS II This feature enables a Dterm PS III to store the numbers dialed in the previous five calls including the last number dialed The stack dial numbers are sequentially displayed on the LCD allowing the station user to make an out going call by selecting the desired dialed number from the display Dterm PS lll equipped with two line keys L1 key and L2 key and different station numbers can be assigned to each of two lines The number assigned to L1 key of the PS is called My Line and the other number assigned to L2 key is called Sub Line My Line and Sub Line of a Dterm PS Ill can be assigned to appear on the Flexible Line Keys of a Dterm and the Dterm can share the Dterm PS III lines Dterm PS Ill users can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by the multiple PBXs that are interfaced by JT Q93 1a This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to have the Wireless PBX feature UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides several integrated features
381. nd the first answered party automatically stops paging other parties The stations are assigned to the simultaneous paging groups as participants by the system data beforehand Group Call by Pilot Number Dialing This feature allows a station user Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone PS or a trunk party to page a group of stations simultaneously by dialing a pilot number The maximum of 32 stations can be assigned to a paging group and the paging group is associated with the pilot number After one of the paged stations answers the paging becomes a 2 way calling between the calling party and the first answered station and automatically stops paging other stations Group Listening When a Multiline Terminal user makes a call using the handset pressing the SPKR key will allow others to listen through the built in speaker of the Multiline Terminal The user may continue talking on the handset at the same time UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Hands free Answerback This feature allows the station user to answer a voice call without lifting the handset Hands free Dialing and Monitoring This feature allows the station user to dial or monitor a call without lifting the handset Hold This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progress After Hold has been set the station user can make or answer new Calls Call Hold This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progres
382. ndoors It utilizes a unique integrated swivel clip that allows the handset to rotate out of the way e g in case of sitting and a quick release mechanism to allow for easy retrieval for use 2 A Leather Case for carrying the PS III when the large majority of the use is indoors and has an integrated belt clip that doesn t swivel 3 The Weather Case model offers a weather resistant material for users whose job is outdoors a majority of time UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 13 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Zone Transceiver Il ZT Access to the communications network by the Dterm PS Ill user is gained through radio connection with one of the several Zone Transceivers installed on the premise ZT s are placed strategically around the establishment in an overlapping fashion to provide continuous radio coverage throughout the specified area The number of Zone Transceivers needed to provide service for any single establishment is defined by several factors The total area requiring wireless service which is a function of the area of operation of the users of the Dterm PS Ill handset Even in the case of providing a small number of handsets if staff whose job requires wireless service throughout the whole facility uses them the number of ZT s is determined by the size of the facility not the number of users The configuration environment and construction of the building s in the areas requirin
383. nel if configured for link redundancy in the event that the primary D channel route is disabled Alternate Routing LINK FAILURE N VOICE DATA N NETWORK N ALTERNATE ROUTE e a e e we we we we we wo ww we ww we we we ww we we we so es so os oo ew al Page 14 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Centralized System Maintenance and Administration A centralized system maintenance and administration facility can be designated at one node in the network allowing all nodes in the CCIS network to be maintained from a single location This reduces travel costs and maintenance times All system messages fault data and cyclic diagnostic reports will be transmitted over the D channel to the designated central facility as shown in the following diagram The individual system messages and diagnostic data of each node can be easily identified since each system node has an assigned name allowing messages from multiple sites to be separated Additionally each node will buffer and output system messages and diagnostic data to a local printer at the node generating the information This feature applies to the 2400s sharing a network with 2000s The 2000 IPS will pass fault information originating from the 2400s through to other 2400s When a UNIVERGE nEAx 2400 IPX is in the network the 2000 IPS will send its fault data to the 2400 IPX designated a
384. nformation can be entered from either a guest room telephone or Front Desk Instrument and will automatically be transmitted to the PMS for data update 2 Message Waiting Lamp Status Change This information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Instrument It is then automatically transmitted to the PMS for data update If the automatic MW lamp off feature is activated MW data is cleared and status is sent to PMS 3 Station Message Detail Data This information is transmitted to the PMS after completion of each local and toll call 4 Wake Up Service This information can be entered from the Attendant Console Front Desk Instrument or guest room station and is automatically transmitted to the PMS for data update 5 Do Not Disturb Room Cutoff This information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Instrument and is transmitted to the PMS by request from the PMS 6 Check In Check Out When PMS with APOO on RS 232C is provided this information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Instrument and is automatically transmitted to the PMS for status update 7 Room data image messages indicating requests for database updates and database images 8 Room change room swap and room copy for data update Note 9 Room occupancy change and room data change for data update 10 Routine activity checks between the PMS and the PBX Note Room copy is available only when MP built in PMS over IP is
385. nformed from network Number of incoming call seizure Trunk Route Number of times all trunks found to be busy trunk route Number of incoming calls terminated to busy tone Trunk Route Number of unanswered incoming calls Trunk Route Number of register connection on trunk call Trunk Route Number of conference calls Three Four way Calling Number of failures cased by all conference trunks For three way Calling being busy Number of transferred incoming calls to Attendant Console or predetermined station by Call Forwarding Don t Answer UCD PEG Count Number of answered calls on UCD station Number of incoming calls to UCD Group Number of call waiting calls for predetermined time in queuing mode on UCD Group Number of abandoned calls to UCD Group Number of incoming calls to all busy of UCD Group Number of incoming calls to UCD Group that were answered Number of times queuing Wireless PEG Count Number of Call Origination Number of Call Termination Number of Location Registration Number of Handovers Number of Out of Cell IP Network PEG Count Number of times that traffic exceeded the limit bandwidth Number of times that traffic exceeded the warning bandwidth Maximum bandwidth used Bandwidth used now Page 3 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Number of Voice Channels per IP Trunk The maximum voice channels per IP Trunk card depends on the payload
386. ng IP terminals Three four party conference including IP terminals 8 Voice compression is available for following connections Connections between IP terminals Connections via IP PAD for CCIS networking via IP from to legacy stations trunks Voice compression can be assigned on a call basis or terminal basis by system programming The following type of voice compression is available G 711 64 kbps G 729a 8 kbps G 723 1 5 3 kbps 6 3 kbps 9 The Device Registration Server DRS is built into the MP card System based DRS The System based DRS can provide log in log out function and registration authorization function of IP terminals Up to 956 IP terminals can be managed by the System based DRS 10 Payload size of voice packet can be assigned from 10 milliseconds to 40 milliseconds in 10 milliseconds increments by system programming However available payload size depends on the type of voice codec Codec Tvpe de Available Range Default Value G 711 10 milliseconds to 40 milliseconds 40 milliseconds G 729a 10 milliseconds to 40 milliseconds 40 milliseconds G 723 1 30 milliseconds fixed 30 milliseconds 11 Maximum number of voice channels per IP PAD card are as follows 8IPLA 24IPLA Payload Size eRe per IP PAD Card 8IPLA 24IPLA G 711 G 729a G 723 1 20 20ms 32 S a UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 7 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP 12
387. ng a conference All messages are sent in a whisper mode so that they are only received by one party All messages sent and received are saved automatically in the chat log Automatic pop up notification when a chat message Is received ICON notification within the chat log identifying different states of the messages UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 23 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment File Transfer File transfer lets you send one or more files to distant Dterm SP30 users With file transfer you can Send a file to other Dterm SP30 users Accept or reject transferred files Application Sharing Dterm SP30 gives you better control over how shared programs are displayed on your desktop and give the person sharing the program control over who uses it View shared programs in a frame which makes it easy to distinguish between shared and local applications on your desktop Minimize the shared program frame and do other work if you don not need to work in the current conference program Easily switch between shared programs using the shared programs taskbar Approve conference participants requests to work in the program you introduce Allow or prevent others from working in a program using the sharing dialog menu Application Collaboration Modes Supported Applications 2 Party Mode 3 E without UM4730 3 A with UM4730 Video Video Conference One Key Operation The space bar key on t
388. ng of busy calls to the next sub line ICA then gives notification of the information of the incoming caller From there the user can decide whether or not to answer the call or let it continue and roll to voice mail Open Worx Group Call Forward Control GCFC Group Call Forward Control is an application that allows forwarding patterns of individuals or user defined groups to be forwarded based on a schedule Complex schedules are supported that allow for recurring forwarding on a daily weekly monthly or even yearly basis GCFC supports call forward busy call forward no answer and call forward all calls It is possible to forward entire divisions within a company such as after 5 00 PM all calls are forwarded directly to voice mail UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 13 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface GCFC Functionality The user can navigate completely through all the tasks required of the GCFC administrator with a simple point and click of the mouse The administrator can also see a summary of what is already configured within the application The administrator can modify define and delete user accounts here There are several levels of users Administrator can access and maintain all user accounts groups and call forwarding schedules within GCFC Premium User can create and maintain sets of groups Including adding modifying and deleting group members as well as
389. ngle Line Analog DTR 1HM 1 Hospitality Single Line Analog DTH 1 1 Low End Single Line Analog Dterm Series IP Multi line Digital Terminals ITR 4D 3 4 Line display ITR 8D 3 8 Line display ITR 16D 3 16 Line display ITR 16LD 3 16 Line Desi less display ITR 32D 3 32 line display Dterm Series i TDM Multi line Digital Terminals DTR 2DT 1 2 Line non display DTR 4D 1 4 Line non display DTR 8 2 8 Line non display DTR 8D 2 8 Line with display DTR 16D BL 2 16 Line with Back lit LCD display DTR 16D 2 16 Line with display DTR 16LD 2 16 Line Desi less display DTR 32D 1 32 Line with display DCR 60 1 Console Add On Module DSS BLF D16 LD R ADM 16 button Desi less Adapter Dterm Series E Terminals Multi line TDM Digital Terminals DTP 2DT 1 2 Line Digital Terminal DTP 8 1 8 Line Digital Terminal DTP 8D 1 8 Line Digital Terminal with Display DTP 16D 1 16 Line Digital Terminal with Display DTP 32D 1 32 Line Digital Terminal with Display DTP 32DA 1 32 Line Digital Terminal with Display for ACD DCU 60 1 CONSOLE Add On Module DSS BLF Dterm Cordless Terminals DTR 4R 2 Dterm Cordless Il Terminal DTH 4R 1 Dterm Cordless Lite Il Terminal Plantronics CT Cordless UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Page 5 1 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Inaset ITR 240G 1 3 gray scale LCD and 16 programmable keys ITR 320C 1 5 1 col
390. nk Busy Announcement Do not Disturb Dterm Least Cost Routing 3 6 Digit Calling Called Number Display LCR Time of Day Routing Digital Display Trunk Attendant Manual Override Speed Calling System Echo Canceller Control Service Conditions for H 323 1 The data network used for H 323 must be a corporate Intranet 2 Gatekeeper is required for H 323 network 3 IP trunk cards must be connected with a corporate Intranet via a router 4 CCIS feature key FD is required 5 Maximum number of nodes in the network depends on the capability of the Gatekeeper 6 Maximum one IP trunk card can be accommodated per PIM and maximum eight IP trunk cards per system 7 Maximum voice channels per IP trunk card depends on the payload period as follows payload period can be assigned in system programming Payload Period Maximum Voice Channels per IP Trunk G 723 1 oe Note Maximum 96 channels can be provided per system 8 The same IP trunk card cannot be shared with CCIS network via IP and H 323 9 Tone signals to an extension are provided by the system 10 When a LAN cable is unplugged from the IP trunk card the associated calls are disconnected 11 When connected with the system by other manufacturer a pre connection test is required 12 DTMF Relay is supported UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 19 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP H 323 IP Trunk Specifications Specifications
391. nning The security key plugs into the parallel port of the server computer It is programmed in combination with your serial registration number so cannot be copied or used on other installations Information you need before installing AIMWorX Before you install any of the AIMWorX modules you need to know some information about the phone service carrier the switch the trunks amp routes the organization and how you will cost the calls AIMWorX supports but is not limited to C O Line VPS DID incoming only Conference Tie line CAS Line F X Foreign Exchange Data DM ISDN Hot Lines UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page18 3 Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting Configurations Standalone This allows the user to only access the AlMWorX applications from the server on which they are installed Network Printers and email can still be used Also the freely licensable Alarm Clients can still be used from Network PCs This includes the AlMWorX Program Disk 1 CD and the AlMWorx Database Disk 1 CD The AIMWorX Database Disk provides Microsoft SQL 2000 both Personal and Standard Editions The Standard Edition is used with Windows 2000 Professional Server and with Windows NT Workstation Server The Personal Edition is used with Windows 98 It is HIGHLY Recommended that you install Standalone AIMWorX Systems on a Microsoft 2000 Professional or Microsoft XP Professional Operating System C S NEC This is
392. ns 1 The ILC ISDN Line Circuit card and the ICH ISDN Channel handler card are required 2 The ISDN Terminal must be locally powered 3 The following connections are available Point to Point connection Point to Multipoint connection National ISDN 1 AT amp T 4 The following features are available Individual Terminal Calling Point to Multipoint connection Group Calling Point to Multipoint connection Called Party Recognition Service DIT DID Addressing DID and DOD Addressing CPN to Network Present CPN to Terminating User Display Sub Address Present Direct Outward Dialing DOD Restriction from outgoing call Toll restriction Page 15 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 O 10 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN Station to Station Calling Station Hunting Simultaneous voice and data transmission Asynchronous Data Switching Synchronous Data Switching Half Full Duplex Switchover The ISDN Terminal can provide Voice and data communication via the CCIS network The CCIS network must be digital During communication via the CCIS network the link reconnection is not available The conditions about station services are as follows Station Hunting When a Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal or an ISDN Terminal calls a busy Single Line Tele phone Multiline Terminal another Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal in Station Hunting group is called When
393. ns and access miscellaneous trunks for such features as dictation access Call Forwarding Set by DISA This feature allows an outside caller to set Call Forwarding All Calls by using Direct Inward System Access DISA code Direct Inward Termination DIT This feature automatically routes incoming network exchange calls directly to a pre selected station without Attendant assistance The call can then be processed by the called party Three party Conference Call Transfer etc are handled in the same manner as any normal trunk call Direct Outward Dialing DOD This feature permits any station user the ability to gain access to the exchange network by dialing an access code and receiving new dial tone The user may then proceed to dial the desired exchange network number UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Console This feature allows a DCU 60 1 unit associated with a legacy Multiline Terminal to be used as a Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Console When the buttons on the DCU 60 1 unit are programmed for Direct Station Selection DSS buttons up to 60 stations can be directly accessed in addition to those already appearing on the Multiline Terminal Busy status for each station is indicated by a red LED associated with each button In addition the DSS console can provide the following fu
394. nses per 4 ports Voice boards must be purchased through NEC AD120 Port License are ordered as specified in the chart below Voice Mail only Software Licenses AD120 VM Parent Exchange 2003 240 Subscribers per 4 Ports AD120 VM Parent No Exchange 240 Subscribers per 4 Ports Unified Messaging Software Licenses AD120 UM Parent Exchange 2003 240 Subscribers per 4 Ports AD120 UM Parent No Exchange 240 Subscribers per 4 Ports Page 19 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Third Party Software AD 120 Third Party S W Win2003 PCAnywhere SQL Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition per CPU If you wish to purchase the Windows 2003 operating system software package for a new system order from NEC you MUST also purchase a Level or II platform Windows 2003 is installed on AD 120 voice mail only platforms If you elect to purchase only the AD 120 software license and supply your own platform you must provide Windows software Microsoft SQL Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition is required for AD 120 configurations of 32 ports or greater One copy of SQL Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition is required for each processor in the AD 120 platform For example a 32 port AD 120 on a Dell Power Edge 2800 with Dual CPUs would require a quantity of two licenses Client Access Licenses CAL Available CALs AD120 Exchange 5 5 CAL per seat AD120 Exc
395. nside network and the outside network NAT is used for efficient use of global IP addresses and for security Tie Lines This feature allows any station user dial access or direct access to an E amp M Tie Line Tie Line Tandem Switching This feature allows trunk to trunk connections through the IPS without the need for any Attendant assistance or control The major use of this feature is in association with a dial tandem tie line network to allow tie line connections and incoming tie line calls automatic access to and completion of local UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions po Central Office calls at A See Timed Queue When a user originates an outgoing trunk call and the called party is busy or does not answer the caller can set the Timed Queue feature When this feature is set the trunk seizure is repeated and the number is redialed after a predetermined time interval Timed Reminder This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call stations at specified times Upon answering the station is connected to a recorded announcement or music source Trunk Direct Appearances This feature allows Multiline Terminal users the ability to access a CO line or E amp M Tie Line without dialing an access code For this feature trunks must be assigned to the line keys on the Multiline Terminal Incoming calls on CO lines can be answered on the a
396. nsmitted over the IP trunks Voice compression of G 729a 8Kbps and G 723 1 5 3Kbps 6 3Kbps can be provided by the IP trunks with VCT cards Service Conditions on Non Peer to Peer Connections IP trunk connections over CCIS Networking via IP are available when the distant systems are NEAX 2000 IVS NEAX 2400 IMX IPX or Electra Elite IPK that does not support peer to peer connections The IP PAD is required for connections between IP Enabled Dterm terminals and IP trunks Maximum one IP trunk card can be accommodated per PIM Maximum eight IP trunk cards can be accommodated in the system Maximum voice channels per IP trunk card depends on the payload period as follows payload period can be assigned in system programming Payload Period Maximum Voice Channels oer IP Trunk A Maximum 127 voice channels can be provided per system point to multipoint connection P trunk cards must be connected with the intranet via router UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 7 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Centralized Billing This feature is used to collect billing information from each office within the network and direct it to the associated center office Billing information is then forwarded to the central billing centers via RS232C interfaces Service Conditions 1 The Centralized Billing system is composed of local office tandem office and cent
397. nt Lamp Check This function is used to check the status of keys lamps and LCDs mounted on the Attendant Console to verify that various operations of the Attendant Console are functioning normally The check is done by a preset procedure Attendant Listed Directory Number This feature provides a display of the Listed Directory Number on the Attendant Console when the operator has answered a Listed Directory Number call Attendant Loop Release This feature allows an Attendant Console loop to become available for a second call as soon as the Attendant has directed the first call to a station even if that station does not answer Attendant Programming This function is allowed only for the Attendant Console SN716 and is used to execute DISA code set up speed dial programming and system clock set up operations Attendant Training Jacks The Attendant Console can be equipped with two headset handset jacks using an optional adapter Two jacks are equipped on the adapter and can be used for training new operators Audible Indication Control This feature allows the Attendant to adjust the volume of audible indications received at the Attendant Console Call Processing Indication This feature provides visual indications of all calls being processed or awaiting processing at the Attendant Console Call Queuing This feature provides the Attendant the ability to handle a series of exchange network calls in the order of their arrival
398. nt calls are handled by a knowledgeable person in the same department rather than by one main operator Primary or secondary answering NEAXMail AD 64 s automated attendant can be programmed to answer all incoming calls or calls that are not answered by an operator after a pre set number of rings Also the NEAXMail AD 64 can answer all or selected incoming lines Public Group Distribution Lists All subscribers on the system can send messages to open groups A subscriber can be restricted from using open groups Only subscribers can be members of an open group Schedules To accommodate organizations with operating hours that vary from day to day NEAXMail AD 64 can use up to three different schedules Subscriber controlled call holding Call holding gives a caller the option to hold for a busy extension to become available The system can place callers on hold inform callers of their holding queue position and update this information periodically Subscribers can turn call holding on and off by telephone In addition certain subscribers can be restricted from being able to turn call holding on and off Subscriber controlled directory listing Individual subscribers can control whether they want to be listed in the directory by telephone Transfer to attendant Callers with touchtone telephones can press 0 to reach a live operator at any time Callers using rotary telephones can be transferred to the operator when no touch tones are en
399. nterrupt into only Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal During data communication with an ISDN Terminal Executive Override is not allowed Busy Service Step Call Call Back When a Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal calls a busy ISDN Terminal busy service such as Step Call and Call Back cannot be provided to the ISDN Terminal It is the same when an ISDN Terminal calls a busy Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal When a Single Line Telephone is calling an ISDN Terminal or an ISDN Terminal is busy hooking service is not available Therefore at this time other services are not available A Multiline Terminal can call an ISDN Terminal via Primary Extension or Sub Line And a Multiline Terminal can be called from an ISDN Terminal via Primary Extension or Sub Line When a Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal calls an ISDN Terminal it can send the calling station number to the ISDN Terminal At this time ISDN trunk number and local number are also attached to be sent 11 Station to Station calling between an attendant console and an ISDN Terminal is not available UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 5 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN 12 In case of Point to Multipoint connection a Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal must dial ISDN Multi point station number assigned by CM1B not the ISDN Terminal number assigned by CM10 13 When a Multiline Termina
400. ntire categories of messages e g all messages from other subscribers would be played back in either LIFO or FIFO order message playback no longer grouped by subscriber name Message order allows users to hear messages in the order most convenient Playback order allows the system administrator to set playback order separately for new messages and old messages for maximum flexibility and convenience Live Monitor is a new digital feature that lets a subscriber listen to a caller leaving a message in their voice mailbox The subscriber can also pick up the call during the recording to connect Live monitor is initiated by pressing a line key on a Dterm Series IIl or higher phone This feature requires the Digital Dterm voice card s 1 e D 42 NE2 D 42JCT U or D 82JCT U Message editing by both inside and outside callers With message editing callers can edit all or part of a message they ve just recorded listen to the message add to it delete it re record it etc Message return receipts and receipt summaries Return receipts give subscribers detailed information about each message he or she sends including exactly when the recipient opened the message For a group message return receipts tell when everyone in the group opened the message for dispatch groups it identifies the person who heard the entire message and when Receipt Summaries quickly tell the user whether or not a particular subscriber opened any or all of the me
401. number Pressing the arrow down button will cycle from the last to most recent calls received placed One Touch Button in Compact Mode A button called the One Touch button has been added to the compact panel The One Touch button allows access quick access to your speed dial list Buddy List that is conditioned on the main GUI under the Member buttons By clicking the One Touch button you can place a call or transfer a call to any of the member s numbers that has pre registered on the main GUI Notification of Call Received with No Answer The Dterm SP30 Call Log button which is located on the main and compact panel will flash in blue when a call was receive by the Dterm SP30 but not answered Before the integration of the blinking call Log button the only way a user was noted that a call was received was if the remote party left a voice mail In those case where there was no voicemail message was left the user had no way of identifying whether calls were received or not Users can confirm visual that a call was received and immediately reply to the caller when they become available Client PC specification Operation Environment IBM PC AT Compatible machine OS Windows XP 2000 w NetMeeting application and DirectX 8 1software components installed 384Mb or more Pentium III 900Mhz or more Direct Sound Application version 8 1 or higher Full duplex capability UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Ref
402. number is sent to the VMS For example a call is received by Station A which is forwarded to Station B which is forwarded to Station C which is forwarded to VMS The number of Station A is sent to the VMS Ringing Transfer to an Attendant via the VMS The system allows the VMS to transfer the station or outside party to the Attendant and releases before the Attendant answers When the VMS is recalled by transferring the call to an unanswered station the system may be programmed to send the recalling extension number to the VMS A maximum of 26 digit extension numbers including DTMF signal after the VMS answered can be programmed to a One Touch key of a Multiline Terminal Message Center Interface MCI This feature provides an interface to the Voice Mail System VMS which can send Message Waiting lamp and other control data to the system The Message Center Interface MCI can provide the following operations 1 When terminating the call to the VMS the system sends call connection status information to the VMS through the MCI The VMS sends the Message Waiting Lamp on data to the MCI The system upon receiving this control data from the MCI illuminates the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding station The VMS upon receiving retrieved message information will send the Message Waiting lamp control data requesting the system to extinguish the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding station The MCI interface is a
403. number of splits per system 150 is shared among the total number of tenants up to 9 Note 2 Agent positions available depend on the installed security key s capacity for logged on agents The total number of agents is shared among the total number of tenants up to 9 Security keys are available in the following capacities 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 amp 120 Note 3 The MIS tracks Split queue calls as High and Standard Note 4 Dependent upon the CallCenterWorX configuration formula based on the OAI monitoring limitations Agents x 2 Pilots and or Personal Pilots Trunks IVR Ports must be equal to or less than 256 Note 5 BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts Number of PIM s 1PIM_ 2PIM 5PIM__ 6PIM 8PIM Business or Max 2000 BHCA Max 4000 BHCA Max 5000 BHCA Max 5500 BHCA No FP One FP Two FPs Three FPs Hotel Motel with ACD OAI Page 12 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS PBX Requirements PBX Requirements Remark _ _ _ _ _ PZ M606 A On board Ethernet Interface card Ethernet TCP IP Related Documents Title CallCenterWorX System Manual CallCenterWorX Features and Specifications Manual Dterm Series E Supervisor Console User Guide Dterm Series E Agent Console User Guide CallCenterWorX Sales Slick ICS ACD System Manual Abacus User s Guide Navigator Configuration
404. o Answer ACD This feature allows calls targeted at an ACD group to hunt past an agent s station after a no answer condition if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable or not available to answer the call UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Immediate Overflow ACD This feature allows a call directed to an ACD group to immediately overflow to another ACD group upon encountering an all agents busy condition Priority Queuing ACD This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis when the call enters an ACD queue When a call is considered as a priority it is placed at the beginning of the queue Queue Size Control ACD On incoming DID Tie line calls the system can be assigned a threshold which limits the number of calls in queue When the queue size threshold is exceeded incoming callers are connected to busy tone Silent Monitor ACD This feature provides the ACD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to an ACD agent The silent monitor function gives no indication as an option to either the agent or the calling party Automatic Call Distribution with Management Information System MIS The Automatic Call Distribution ACD with Management Information System MIS feature provides a management information system to be used in conjunction with the built i
405. o Negotiation or 100Mbps Full Duplex is selectable When mounting 24DSP PZ 24IPLA card this card can provides up to 32 channel of IP PAD SPN 32IPLAA IP PAD E 32 When using G 723 1 provides up to 24 channel of IP PAD Two cards can be accommodated per built in FP FP card maximum 8 per system 10BASE T 100BASE TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card 24 channel IP PAD and VCT daughter board Mounts on SPN 8IPLA to provide up to 32 G 711 G 729a and 16 G 723 1 PAD channels T 30 T 38 is not supported 16 channel CODEC Card for IP PAD e Used with IP PAD card e Two cards can be accommodated per IP PAD card maximum 16 per system e Voice compression protocols e G 723 1 G 729a G 711 e FAX 14 4 Kbps DTMF signals PZ 24IPLA SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD B Page 4 10 NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Line Trunk LT Cards Cont Po Remarks O 8 line Central Office Trunk Card Loop Start Ground Start Trunk Provides loop detection sending detecting ground on Tip Ring wire 8 line Central Office Trunk Card Loop Start Trunk Provides loop detection receiving sending the Caller ID CLASS SM signal PN 8COTS PN 8COTQ Analog C O Trunk 4 line Central Office Trunk Card Loop Start Ground Start Trunk Provides loop detection sending detecting ground on Tip Ring wire PN 4COTB 4 line Central Office Trunk Card Lo
406. o accommodate batteries covering up to a 4 PIM system 2 BATTMs support maximum system configuration The BATTM is available for Floor Standing Installation or 19 inch Rack mounting When the system is Wall mounted the BATTM cannot be installed with the PIM Modules PIMMJ SN1729 PIMMJ Single MP System PIM O PIM 7 Dual MP System PIM 1 PIM 7 PIMMK SN1730 PIMMK Single MP System Not used Dual MP System PIM O BATTM SN1731 BATTMH 1 per STACK Max 2 per system UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 2 5 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Installation Hardware Base Top Assembly The Base Top Assembly includes a Base Unit and a Top Cover for the PIM One Base Top Assembly is required for each PIM stack The Base Unit also serves as the AC power distribution panel for up to a four PIM configuration Hanger Assembly The Hanger Assembly is used for Wall mounting Installation One set of Hanger Assembly is required for each PIM 19 inch Bracket The 19 inch Bracket is a set of hardware used for 19 inch Rack mounting Installation The 19 INCH RACK BRACKET A is installed on both sides of the PIM One set of 19 inch Bracket A is required for each PIM The 19 INCH RACK BRACKET B is installed at the BASE of stack One 19 INCH BRACKET B is required for each stack If the system is 2 PIM or more configurations with 19 INCH BRACKET B one set of 19 INCH BRACKET A is also re
407. o be tracked The Usage Bar Graph Report shows the percentage of each hour that a person or box was using the voice mail system The bar graph report for the entire system shows the percentage of each hour that the voice mail system s ports were in use This percentage equals the number of minutes the ports were busy divided by the number of minutes they could have been busy The number of minutes they could have been busy equals 60 minutes multiplied by the number of ports on the system The Usage Table Report may be run for an individual guest subscriber and extension number ID or system ID and reports the total number of calls by system port and total duration of calls in minutes A usage table for the entire system shows the total number of calls answered by each system port for each hour of the day and the duration of calls in total number of minutes The report also includes grand totals for day night and entire 24 hour periods Directory reports Directory reports show the structure of the system its subscribers system IDs and message groups It is possible to run the report for everyone enrolled in the system for all extension IDs or for message groups Directory reports include a subscriber report extension list and group reports Subscriber Reports Subscriber reports list each subscriber and guest enrolled in the system The report includes each personal ID the number of new messages waiting the total number of new and old messages
408. o ringing is provided Connects a Series i Multi line Terminal to a PC providing a complete turnkey package with graphical telephone user interface and call logging Shipped with Multi line Phone Kits software Supports Serial interface A compact plug and play device that installs into the base of a Dterm Series display terminal Integrated two port 10 100baseT Ethernet Pass through hub that permits using one port to connect the network interface card NIC from the PC to the IP network The other is plugged directly into a LAN or an IP network device such as a router DSL modem or cable modem Requires an AC R ADP AC adapter for DSS BLF Console AP A AP R or IP R Unit Cable Length Note 1 with AC Adapter Dterm 32 32D 8DLC 200m 656ft Note2 4DLC 200m 656ft 1200m 3937ft 2DLC 850m 2789ft 1200m en DSS BLF Console Notes ADLC Dterm Seriesi Dterm 4D 8DLC 300m 984ft Note2 2 Dterm 8 8D ADLC 300m 984ft 1200m 3937ft Note 4 Dterm 16 16D 16LD all 2DLC 850m 2789ft 1200m 3937ft Note 4 Note 1 Cable length is based on the following conditions Diameter of the cable is 0 5 mm The Protection arrester is not inserted between the terminal and PBX Note 2 When using 8DLC card long line function is not availability even if it is equipped with AC Adapter Note 3 The DSS BLF Console requires local AC DC supply Note 4 The DIR 4D 1 does not support an AC adapter UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For P
409. ode 7 bit ASCII code Quasi normal Restriction Condition 1 When connection is closed 2 Status monitoring text Note 1 The MP card in main site communicates with the SMDR terminal Therefore in the communication settings at SMDR terminal side set the IP address to connected to the address specified by office data CMOB Y 00 gt 00 or CMOB Y 02 gt 03 and application port number shown in the above table Note 2 One message is sent each time a request is received from SMDR terminal Combinations between SMDR and SMDR Output Format Extended 2400 IMS 2400 IMS Format 1400 IMS SMDR with APOO PN APOO B with MRC C program SMDR with APOO PN APOO B with MRC F program X Available Not available Combinations available at the same time SMDR with APOO Pattern A Pattern B Pattern C Pattern D SMDR with APOO Xx Xx PN APOO B with MRC F program AA MP built in SMDR on RS 232C Xx MP built in SMDR on IP X Available Not available UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 10 3 Issue 6 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces Combinations for Center Office of Centralized Billing Extended 2400 IMS SM OA PTA N PN APOO B with MRC C program ST DR with APOO PN APOO B with MRC F program 2 built in SMDR on RS 232C MP built in SMDR on IP X Available Not available Note Only one output can be used at the center office Combinations for Loca
410. oing call Additionally the Attendant Console can place a group of stations in the Do Not Disturb condition Do Not Disturb Group This feature allows the system to schedule to set cancel Do Not Disturb for a group of stations at appointed time The system has up to four patterns of timetable and each timetable has time to set cancel Do Not Disturb in a day the time is programmable by the system The timetable can be assigned for day of the week The different timetable can also be assigned for specific dates of the year Do Not Disturb Hotel Motel This feature allows the Attendant Console s Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument s guest stations or Property Management System PMS terminal s to place individual stations into Do Not Disturb Calls can be placed from stations set in DND Do Not Disturb System This feature simultaneously restricts incoming calls to a pre assigned group of stations by operation from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument s Attendant Console s and Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments can use the DND OVR key to override this Do Not Disturb setting UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Dterm Assistant Dterm Assistant is Web based software which resides on the server and provides end users with the ability to maintain their Dterm Multiline Terminals and the 2000 IPS telephony features such as Speed Dialing from their Web enabled PCs The Dterm Assist
411. oing call on one trunk to an outgoing trunk and exit the connection before the called party answers Page 9 8 Attendant Delay Announcement This feature provides an announcement via a Digital Announcement Trunk Card to external calls that are not answered by the attendant within a predetermined time Attendant Lockout This feature denies an Attendant the ability to reenter an established trunk or station connection without being recalled by that Station after the call is put in consultation hold Attendant Overflow When an incoming call which has terminated from a trunk to the Attendant Console remains unanswered after a predetermined time period this feature provides a change to Night Service for that particular trunk Attendant Override This feature permits an Attendant to enter a busy connection station or trunk using the Attendant Console When this feature is activated a warning tone is sent to the connected parties after which they are connected with the Attendant in a three way bridge Authorization Code An Authorization Code is a numerical code which will temporarily change a station s Class of Service to a Class of Service assigned to that Authorization Code This new Class of Service allows access to trunks dialing patterns and or features that would otherwise be restricted Automated Attendant This feature allows the system to answer incoming trunk calls The system will supply a message and or
412. olely upon numbering plan limitations Hands Free Answerback CCIS This feature allows a Multiline Terminal station user to respond to a voice call through the CCIS network without lifting the handset Hot Line CCIS This feature allows two stations at different nodes in the CCIS network to be mutually associated on an automatic ringdown basis through the CCIS network House Phone CCIS This feature allows selected stations to call an Attendant Console through the CCIS network simply by going off hook Incoming Call Identification CCIS This feature allows an Attendant to visually identify the type of service and or trunk group which is arriving or waiting to be answered at the Attendant Console through the CCIS network Individual Attendant Access CCIS This feature permits a station user to calla specific Attendant Console in the CCIS network using an individual Attendant Identification Number LDN Night Connection CCIS This feature routes Listed Directory Number LDN calls to a pre selected station in the CCIS network when the Night mode has been entered Page 9 38 Link Alarm Display CCIS This feature provides an indication on external equipment when the CCIS link is connected disconnected when the system is initialized or when the CCH is in make busy Link Reconnect CCIS This feature provides the system connected to CCIS network with the capability to release the redundant CCIS link
413. ommon Control Cards Name Name MP Card for Single MP System Provides LAN control function system based Device Registration Server DRS built in FP built in OAI built in SMDR Virtual IPT Virtual CSH 33 MHz PCI BUS Memory SDRAM 64 MB Flash ROM 16 MB TDSW 1024CH x 1024CH 16 line CFT PB sender Clock 2 line PLO receiver mode source mode two RS 232C ports 2 line DAT Recording duration PN CP24 MP Maximum 128 seconds DK 4 line PB receiver Modem for remote maintenance 33 6 Kbps Music on Hold tone BUS interface BUS interface functions as a driver receiver of various signals adjusts gate delay timing cable delay timing monitors I O Bus and PCM BUS Supports MP Program Download One card is required per system Main Processor Card for Backup CPU system Provides LAN control function system based Device Registration Server DRS Virtual FP built in OAI built in SMDR Virtual IPT Virtual CSH 33 MHz PCI BUS Memory SDRAM 32 MB Flash ROM 9 MB TDSW 1024CH x 1024CH 16 line CFT PB sender Clock 2 line PLO receiver mode source mode two RS 232C ports 2 line DAT Recording duration Maximum 128 PN CP97 MP seconds DK 4 line PB receiver Modem for remote maintenance 33 6 Kbps Music on Hold tone BUS interface BUS interface functions as a driver receiver of various signals adjusts gate delay timing cable delay timing monitors I O Bus and PCM BUS Two cards are required per Backup CPU system One
414. ompatibility SERVICES AND FEATURES INTER EXCHANGE CARRIERS CA etc DS AT amp T aT amp T NTI mel SPRINT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 priced ON aess NET PMS NET NET SWITCHED DATA 250 64 kbps Clear Channel X X 64 kbps Restricted X X 56 kbps Restricted X O o O International 64 kbps Clear X X International 64 kbps Restricted X a International 56 kbps Restricted X XA HO 384 kbps X c OA H11 1526 kbps X SS N x 64 kbps X x 7 i NTI AT amp T AT amp T MCI SPRINT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK Beal NET NET 64 kbps Clear Channel X X 64 kbps Restricted X X 56 kbps Restricted X EI 1 International 64 kbps Clear X X International 64 kbps Restricted X ne International 56 kbps Restricted X X Po HO 384 kbps X NAAA AA H11 1526 kbps X A EP N x 64 kbps x x _ DED CA eee AT amp T at amp T NT MCI sPRINT UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 he ie one 4ess NET DMS NET NET IPS SWITCHED DATA 250 64 kbps Clear Channel X X 64 kbps Restricted X X 56 kbps Restricted X X International 64 kbps Clear X X International 64 kbps Restricted X nn o International 56 kbps Restricted X X HO 384 kbps X a H11 1526 kbps X E N x 64 kbps o x x X Feature Available NOT Available Page 15 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN NTI AT amp T AT amp T VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK 4ESS
415. on 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps LAN based on IEEE 802 100Mbps LAN is recommended IP Stations support Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP External DHCP server is required Network based DRS external DRS 3 0 is not supported 21 Switching hub s are required 22 Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1d function is not available 23 LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol IEEE 802 3ad function is not available 24 The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can configure the speed mode of the LAN interface for MP IP PAD card in addition to Auto Negotiation default The speed mode for the MP card can be set to 100 Mbps full duplex in system data programming System initialization is required for the mode to take effect The speed mode for the 32IPLA 32IPLA A card can be set to 100 Mbps full duplex 100 Mbps half duplex or 10 Mbps half duplex using the rotary switch on the card The card initialization is required for the mode to take effect The speed mode for the 8IPLA card can be set to 100 Mbps full duplex using the DIP switch on the card The card initialization is required for the mode to take effect 25 When the QoS Display function key is pressed on IP Enabled Dterm the QoS information number of lost packets codec type and payload size is displayed A function key on IP Enabled Dterm should be assigned as QoS Display key in system data programming No other LCD information from PBX such as Clock Calendar calling station number and name
416. on between two systems nodes The information transmitted in the signaling channel between two systems includes addressing information supervisory information and centralized network information This signaling information is to be transmitted between all network nodes for a fully integrated network This information includes dialed digits called number and calling party identification CCIS provides the ability to provide calling number identification or the name of the calling party to any display station across the network Users can screen calls by looking at the display prior to answering the call This information includes station status call set up and termination information This information includes centralized billing information system fault data messages message waiting indication control information voice processing integration information and data related to other network feature control CCIS and ISDN Since the first CCIS system was installed in 1985 CCIS has proven to be the most reliable and versatile proprietary network system available The delays in achieving nation wide ISDN compatibility and the fact that a total global ISDN network is not yet available exemplify the true values of an intelligent proprietary CCIS network Additionally it is easy to understand that a global network that only needs to be compatible with one family of telecommunications products can easily offer much more feature transparency and
417. on concerning questions not covered in this guide corrections and or comments are most welcome and should be sent to NEAX2000 necunifiedsolutions com NEC Unified Solutions Inc UNIVERGE neEax 2000 IPS Product Management 6555 North State Highway 161 Irving TX 75039 2402 http www necunifiedsolutions com Copyright 2006 NEC Unified Solutions Inc Printed in the U S A Chapter T INTO CUINA eee ees 1 OVERVICW OT NEC id A 1 COMPONEN O sarren A 3 COMMC UON enan a a a a a aaa tieeee a emnians 4 SocA CONTIDOS A T a a tafe ah bee caceyeuereaaads 4 Global RES OUNCES ireren RE E S 4 NEG United SOMOS ME da dd Aaa AE 6 Mercal Markelo anan atico 8 Competitive Benefits and AdvVantages occcoccccoccoconicocnnonnccnnnononononnnnnnnonnnonannnnnnonnnonannnnnnnnnnnenaninaninenons 8 UNIVE RGE NEAX 2000P Scar an 11 UNIVE RGE NESAP SD Misal codi 14 UNIVERGE NESSIP SD Li A as 15 UNIVEAGE NEAX IPS DMR iusi a a 15 stand Alone SYSICIM Capac oea a E 17 IP Remote NetWork Capaci sisene r a be EE 23 Chapter 2 System ArehitC Crue ismin aaa a eaaa a an a a 1 Haraware ATCA CU ooir cia 1 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS System Configuration occccccccccocncconnncccnnnononononnnconnnonnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnononoss 4 UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM IPS DML IPS DMR System Configuration ccooccccoccnccccnccccnoconcnccncnnno 11 Ma A A A 15 Chapter 3 System HOOD a id dd aaa ie 1 PP 0 O dee ee 1 Reliability and AV alla o codo tii ic doi pica 4 A ee ee
418. on of that Call Forwarding All Calls setting UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 12 1 Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS Service Conditions Cont 7 An ACD group number can be used as the destination station of Direct Inward Termination DIT or as a designated Night Service station 8 An ACD group number can be assigned as the destination station of Off Hook Alarms Priority Calls and Attendant Night Transfer 9 ACD group pilot numbers should not be placed in Station Hunting groups The Station Hunting feature would take priority over the ACD function 10 Two types of traffic measurements can be provided for ACD a ACD group Peg Count Count of incoming calls Count of answered calls Count of abandoned calls Count of waiting calls Count of all busy calls b ACD station Peg count Count of answered calls 11 Upon initial installation or after a system initialization reset each agent must lift and restore handset of their station to begin receiving calls for the ACD group Basic ACD Features Busy In Busy Out ACD This feature allows an agent in an ACD group to log their station onto or off of the group This allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the ACD group goes to that station or not This prevents incoming calls from being directed to stations at which no agent is available Call Waiting Indication ACD Th
419. once arrived at a mail box of the STM Server external equipment to be automatically distributed to the addressee Dterm PS Ill via Open Application Interface OAI This feature also provides TM Full notification on the display LCD of the address Dterm PS III that is busy and if the Dterm PS III is out of zone the feature makes retransmission of the STM after the PS returns to the zone Note This describes STM Facilities available for external STM OAI application Actual functionality depends on the application Configuration Application Integrated Type Service Conditions The feature is available only for My Line L1 of a two line Dterm PS III not provided for Sub Line L2 1 STM transmission route is only one way STM server fi Dterm PS III 2 One STM can contain 128 byte data at the maximum 3 The following features are not available at this feature Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding Not Available 4 Ifthe following occur STM is not distributed but stays in the mail box of the STM server The STM is safely transmitted later by this feature s retransmission function Addressee Dterm PS III is out of zone Addressee Dterm PS III is power off The line of addressee Dterm PS III is busy on hold or ringing Dterm PS Ill is in a state of hand over Note 5 With this feature PCS Roaming is not available Note When hand over unexpectedly st
420. one company switching systems Network transmission systems Business communication systems Broadcast equipment Space electronics Social Contributions As a global corporation NEC aims at achieving a higher level of coexistence with society We will also strive to become an outstanding corporation respected by all those related to us and fully capable of offering high standards In order to achieve this we appreciate the great importance of contributing to society as a good corporate citizen and walk hand in hand with the world toward a better society Global Resources The primary elements in a company s ability to respond to marketplace buyer and customer demands are the scope of its resources and strategy by which it uses those resources NEC has established a worldwide network of human physical financial and intellectual resources These are deployed through localized operations strategically located professionally staffed and thoroughly equipped This enables NEC to deliver leading edge products and innovative services to businesses with hundreds of locations across the country or one location across town People NEC has a global network of dedicated employees with offices in many countries Our experienced management engineers installers trainers and staff pride themselves in a high level of job performance and customer support More than 7 000 employees in the U S help maintain NEC s technological leadership
421. ons using speech commands By speaking simple commands into any telephone you can navigate your voice mailbox and change personal options Caller ID information is accessible via the telephone When a user checks a message that has Caller ID information associated with it the number will appear on their Dterm s LCD display Caller ID can also be retrieved through the soft key menu CID or through ASR by saying Caller ID This feature requires the Digital Dterm voice card s i e D 42 NE2 D 42JCT U or D 82JCT U Call Return is a feature that allows a subscriber to callback the sender of a voice message based upon the Caller ID captured during that message This feature requires the Digital Dterm voice card s i e D 42 NE2 D 42JCT U or D 82JCT U Date and time stamp At the end of every message NEAXMail AD 64 indicates how long ago a message was sent providing subscribers with accurate information about their messaging activity Greetings Each subscriber mailbox can have up to three greetings standard busy or alternate Greetings can be rerecorded or switched by the subscriber via their Dterm set touchtone phone or through the Mailbox Manager application If you do not record greetings in your own voice the system plays greetings that include your recorded name or your extension Standard greeting plays when your extension is unanswered A typical standard greeting is Hello this is Pat Green am not at my desk righ
422. op Start Trunk Provides loop detection receiving sending the Caller ID CLASS SM signal 2 line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card Used as either a 2 wire E amp M trunk or a 4 wire E amp M trunk Equipped with 48 V DC DC on board power supply Both No 0 and No 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose 2 wire or 4 wire in one card 4 circuit analog 2W 4W Tie line card The PZ PW122 48V Power Supply is required in case of E amp M Type signaling PN 4COTG PN 20DTA Analog Tie Line Trunk PN 40DTA 4 line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card e Provides loop detection sending reverse PN 4DIDA signal and PB to DP signal conversion Analog DID Trunk 2L ANALOG UNIVERSAL TRUNK Used as 2 Line Long Line Circuit with PFT or 2 Line DID Loop Resistance MAX 25000hms LLC Two Reverse Circuits Included On Board Power 48VDC included 8 line PB Receiver Card Used for a PB station line DID or tie line 4 line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on PN AUCA DTMF Receiver PN 8RSTG PN 4RSTF A Caller ID Sender 4 analog single line telephones PN 4LLCB is required Max 4 sys UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 4 11 Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Line Trunk LT Cards Cont Conference Trunk PN CFTB w 6 10 Party Conference Trunk with Amp 6 party 1 CFTB card 10 ports 10 party 2 CFTB cards 20 ports 2 circuit Digital Announcement Trunk Digital PESADA EN
423. or home M for mobile or wireless and W for any business line The Outbound section is similar to the Inbound section except it records calls made by Manual Dialing Open WorX Dterm Applications Desktop or TAPI at the telephone not calls received UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 15 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface Desktop Location Status With Desktop the user can set their status including return date return time and alternate number with the click of a mouse In addition Desktop allows for the use of Custom statuses instead of only the 10 pre defined messages available via Dterm operation Desktop Message Reader Previous to Desktop the only way for an individual to check messages sent by Message Reader was by using the key on the Dterm or by calling the attendant and having the message read back to them Now the user can use a Web Browser with Desktop to check their messages Also as mentioned in the Directory section the user may send these messages to other users of Message Reader No longer is it just the attendants who can send messages The message can also include a number and the Desktop user simply needs to click on the telephone handset icon next to the number to return the call from their Dterm set PCA Open Worx INASET The INASET is now a part of Personal Call Assistant as a standard feature NEC s INASET is a powerful IP termina
424. or LCD and 32 programmable keys ITR 320G 1 5 1 gray scale LCD and 32 programmable keys Wireless Handset Dterm PSII Dterm IP Soft Phones Dterm SP20 Dterm SP30 Dterm Extenders Dterm Extender Analog Analog Terminals NEC offers three distinct analog terminals Descriptions of the Analog Terminals Description Remarks YO DTR 1 1 WH TEL Fully modular with Redial key Flash key Message Waiting lamp Data Jack DTR 1 1 BK TEL and Ring Handset Receive Volume Fully modular with Redial key Flash key Message Waiting Lamp Data Jack eight programmable Feature Speed Dial keys and Ring Handset Receive Volume Fully modular with Redial key Flash key Mute Key Message Waiting Lamp DTH 1 1 BK TEL Data Jack four programmable Feature Speed Dial keys and Ring Handset Receive Volume DTR 1HM 1 WH TEL DTR 1HM 1 BK TEL Line Conditions of the Analog Terminals Cable Length Cable 0 5 24 AWG PN 4LCD A max 600 ohms loop resistance Approximately 1 43km 88 miles PN 8LCAA max 600 ohms loop resistance Approximately 1 43km 88 miles PN AUCA max 2500 ohms loop resistance Approximately 12 29km 7 63 miles PN 4LLCB max 2500 ohms loop resistance Approximately 12 29km 7 63 miles Note Cable length is based on the diameter of the cable and the terminal impedance Page 5 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipm
425. or the data link to the VMS the MP can store up to 15 call records If a 16th call record is generated when the MP stores 15 call records the system will write over the oldest stored record The Voice Mail Integration In band feature can be combined with voice mail through the MCI in the system The Voice Mail Integration In band feature and MCI feature can coexist in one system and either can be selected per VMS VMS station number by system programming When terminating a call with the ANI information to the VMS through the MCI the system can send the ANI information to the VMS if required This is not available through CCIS interface Page 19 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems NEAXMail AD 120 The NEAXMail AD 120 Product offers the following two choices for system configuration Voice Mail Only provides voice mail only services Voice mail only systems are shipped with all software preloaded Unified Messaging provides full voice messaging capabilities plus an unlimited seat license for the View Mail for Outlook VMO Unified Messaging client software Third Party Fax Integration and Text to Speech are available as optional components Unified Messaging systems are shipped without software pre loaded All software must be loaded on site in order to effectively join the customer s existing Windows network The AD 120 offers both analog and digital s
426. ork LAN interconnectivity Private Branch Exchange PBX Systems Software and Peripheral Products COMMUNICATIONS TERMINALS Analog amp Digital Telephones Cellular Mobile Telephones Facsimile Equipment Narrowband amp Broadband Personal Communications Services PCS Products Numeric amp Alphanumeric Pagers Enhanced Wireless Products messaging voice data amp accessories Scope Of Business Development manufacturing sale service and support of Telecommunications Products and Network Management systems to the public and private sectors Engineering and Marketing of Integrated Computer and Communications C amp C Systems and Networks including Broadband Multimedia Products Customization of ATM Switching Systems Business Communication Systems Data Communications Radio and Transmission Equipment UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 7 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Vertical Markets The UNIVERGE nNeax 2000 IPS is a full featured IP based communications system that addresses the telecommunications market by providing a rich feature set of both Key and PBX features The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS is positioned to provide a more cost effective solution for the small to medium size business hotel property or networked environment The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS provides unparalleled investment protection by allowing the user to take full advantage of today and tomorrow s technology advancements Th
427. ort TDM SYS PKG IPS IPS UNIV PIMMK UA ICS VS BASE C UA SPN CP27A CPU SPN CP27A CPU 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE MAT Worx IPS IPS IVS UNIV Upgrade Kit SPN CP24 C CPU IPS DM UNIV Front Cover 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 IP Starter Kit Package Supports up to 8 IP Dterm s 64 LT Ports 5 T1 s E1 s 5 ISDN PRI DCH s 48 ISDN BRI Trunks NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Supports up to 64 LT Ports amp 1 T1 NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Package is equipped with 64 TDM ports and 8 IP Provides matching CPU cards with the same CPU number With matching CPU s only one set of software is needed NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Package is equipped with 64 TDM ports License for each CPU Provides matching CPU cards with the same CPU number With matching CPU s only one set of software is needed NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Upgrades CPU to CP24 C and Adds UNIVERGE Front Cover NEC Customer Software License Agreement Required Page 2 15 Chapter 2 System Architecture UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM IPS DML System Packages pl Description _____Remarks _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ UNIV IPS DML IP SYS PKG IPS DM E UNIV PIMMJ AC CORD E U Rack Mount Kit SPN CP31 C CPU PZ M606 A SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE Key Keeper FD 8 Seat L
428. ort and message storage capacities with all the features you ve come to expect from the most advanced NEC voice messaging products Designed specifically for the NEAX 2000 IPS the internal card set also offers reliability soace and cost saving advantages Up to 490 hours of messages can be stored on the NEAXMail IM 16LX The integrated messaging solution scales from 4 to 16 ports and expands from 2 to 4 fax ports making it an ideal messaging choice for the NEAX 2000 business communication platform The integrated design of the NEAXMail IM 16LX takes up less space than a standalone messaging solution It can also save you money Because the NEAXMail IM 16LX fits inside the NEAX 2000 you don t have to buy line cards normally required for a standalone system It also uses less energy because it s powered by the NEAX 2000 In the event of a power failure it will operate off the same battery backup of the NEAX 2000 adding another measure of reliability to your communication system Unified Messaging and Call Management A feature rich business communications solution the NEAXMail IM 16LX simplifies message management with convenient access to voice fax and email messages from any networked PC Unified Messaging yields fewer misunderstood or lost messages and faster message returns The result Employees can prioritize their messages and streamline their workload With Voice Messaging recorded messages can be left and responded to 24x7 Users
429. orts IPS DML DMR system Card slots 8 slots MODULAR CHASSIS including 1 slot for MP FP card System Specifications System Capacity Circuit Card All LT AP cards of the UN IVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be used for the IPS Mounted in DM IPS DML IPS DMR with the exception of 4LLCB 40DTA and 4CSIA MODULAR CHASSIS cards AC100V 240V automatically adjusted Installation Method Desk top setting 19 rack mounting Temperature 5 C 40 C when the system is operating Humidity 20 80 when the system is operating Safety Standard Complied with UL60950 CSA22 2 No 950 EN60950 AS3260 EMC Complied with VCCI Class A FCC Part 15 Class A EN55022 Class A AS NZS 3548 Class A Open Industry Standards UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS IP Precedence Ipv6 In skin router card required RTA Conditions UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 21 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights IP Specifications Remarks _ _ _ eee Encoding G 729a 8 kbps CS ACELP G 723 1 5 3 k 6 3 k MP MLQ ACELP G 711 64 kbps PCM Automatically seized per call FAX FAX Relay Method T 30 32 IPLA PAD card is required Communication G3 FAX up to 14 4 kbps Feature Super G3 Reciprocal Not supported 8 IPLA PAD B card w R9 software Pass thru FAX Method required 32 IPLA not supported z H 245 S S H323 IPT IP PAD Dtermi P PAD DtermIP _ office Signaling DtermIP to IP PAD connection H 323 H
430. orwarding Not Available 7 Billing of Home PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number 8 While the Home PS is roaming billing information cannot be recorded 9 The Visitor PS can allow following service features Originating a call to a station of the same office Originating a call to a station of the different office Terminating a call from a roaming trunk PS Exclusive Hold Call Forwarding 10 The visitor PS cannot allow Calling Name Display 11 Maximum 64 Visitor PSs can originate or receive a call in a network at the same time 12 The Visitor PS can answer a call only from the roaming trunk 13 Billing of Visitor PS is executed to its Virtual LC Number 14 Billing information for the Visitor PS can be recorded only when the Visitor PS originates a call Page 16 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Q 931a Roaming over IP Trunk Dterm PS lll user can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by the plural PBXs which are interfaced by JT Q931 a protocol over IP Trunks Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk is available only on the Point to Multipoint connection Roaming by Q931a digital private line and Roaming by IP network cannot be used together in one PBX A Roaming IP network consists of maximum 255 PBXs Roaming via Virtual IPT and Roaming via Physical IPT cannot be used together in one PBX IP PAD card is required for the Roaming via
431. osting data analysis and provides a large reduction in operation costs Centralized Call Accounting Billing RS 232C Interface ZSB un brine CALL RECORD NEAX2400 E CENTRALIZED BILLING CALL RECORD CENTER NEAX2000 CALL RECORD RA CCIS LINK NEAX2400 or CALL RECORD NEAX2000 Page 14 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Centralized Voice Processing Messaging Voice Processing Systems such as voice mail fax mail and Integrated Voice Response IVR systems can be centralized in a CCIS network This eliminates the need for costly independent systems to be purchased and maintained for each node in the network Maintenance is simplified by locating the system at the centralized maintenance facility or any other facility within the CCIS network The information required for full integration from any of these types of systems will be transmitted over the D channel to the required node as required by the integration logic of the voice processing system Increased network reliability and substantial operating cost savings can be realized CCIS Centralized Voice Mail NEAX2400 NEAX2000 SYSTEM e E CCIS LINK NEAX2400 NEAX2000 S NEAX2400 NEAX2000 VOICE MAIL NEAX2400 NEAX2000 Centralized Attendant Consoles CCIS allows the centralization of attendant consoles to service calls from any system in the n
432. overwhelmed by the volume of contacts and the variety of communication forms enables anyone to interrupt at any time Today s business professional must be empowered to manage their communications Open WorX Communications Portal integrates all of these channels into a unified web accessible portal that puts the individual back in control of their own communications All contacts can be simply and easily managed from a single application reducing the complexity of dealing with multiple communication types and increasing personal productivity Today s business person is mobile yet they are dependent on communications to maintain the flow of their business Most business communication attempts fail on the first attempt because the receiving individual is away from their desk or is otherwise engaged The OpenWorX Communications Portal will understand the individual s status Using flexible rules and capitalizing on the integration of voice and data it will selectively route contacts and messages based on the identity of the sender as well as the status of the individual This allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 7 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface business user to define who they want to interact with in real time to complete those critical projects and who they would prefer to get back to at a later time Communications Portal Functionality Portal The Portal fun
433. ovides several integrated features adding on the adjunctive configuration Number Sharing This feature allows the Multiline Terminal user to have a Dterm PS lll as Sub Station and to get service with one telephone number In case that one user has both a Multiline Terminal and Dterm PS III with this feature used the user is not required to have two separate telephone numbers When a user is at his desk a call is terminated to his Dterm When a user leaves their desk with Dterm PS Ill a call is automatically terminated to the Dterm PS III In this feature the Multiline Terminal and Dterm PS lll are referred as Main Station and Sub Station respectively Out of Zone Indication When a Dterm PS III user moves out of the service area and the electric field strength becomes weak this feature notifies the user with a warning tone and an LCD display Overlap Dialing This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to receive dial tone and dial the desired number to originate a call Preset Dialing This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to confirm the number to be dialed before originating a call UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 PS Authorization This feature is to confirm the identity of a Dterm PS III to avoid an unauthorized Dterm PS III from accessing the system PS Location Indication When a Dterm PS III calls a Multiline Terminal Attendant Console or vice versa this feature allows
434. p A IP Trunk Point to Multipoint Connection Page 13 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Service Conditions IP CCIS via IP Trunk cards 1 Maximum voice channels per IP trunk card depends on the payload period as follows payload period can be assigned in system programming 2 Maximum 127 voice channels can be provided per system point to multipoint connection 3 IP trunk cards must be connected with the intranet via router IP Trunk Card Specifications Description_____________ Specifications QoS signaling IP Precedence DiffServ Speech encoding decoding G 711 G 729a G 723 1 Davlosd pe d G 711 G 729a 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms AEAN G 723 1 30 ms fixed FAX communications protocol FAX mode detection timer O to 5 min 1 min increment PAD control Controlled in a node basis tandem connecdion IPT to IPT IPT to ACIS available but voice quality may deteriorate IPT to ISDN available Fixed Connection Mode or Automatic Disconnect Mode can be IPT connection mode CESE assigned per IPT trunk or destination node in system programming Dynamic jitter buffer 10 to 600 ms 10 ms increment Required Equipment for IP CCIS via IP Trunk cards Equipment Name Functional Name IP Trunk Card Accommodates the IP network and transmits receives compressed voice or signals over IP network 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX twisted pair cable is connect
435. p Manage PDD Jones Hany 18 Li eee SSL knige ngela 1904 Engreel SEO Levitsky Ron 1902 Programa POD Herman Heras 13903 Sar A a A AI O 550 cor e Search hor Fulana Apply secondary soiton Fulhiame Sort amp Seeech Many of the title bars at the top of the screen are capable of producing a directory sort by clicking the mouse on the title bar The information displayed is configurable by the administrator There are several different fields available for display and four of these fields can be user defined This window is also expandable for viewing more fields The Search field searches dynamically as the information is typed in the field selected The directory is also capable of being partitioned by company The drop down box at the top of the window displays entries from a particular company or all companies in the system This is particularly useful in shared tenant installations where a single attendant group serves multiple companies Page 7 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Business Attendant System Speed Dials Pad Another versatile screen is the Speed Dial pad shown below 1 Speed Dialz Mfp finca abua ioc a INN ps A E E Up to forty 40 Speed Dial fields are available for each attendant Dragging an entry from the directory onto the speed dial button automatically
436. pany while the external directory stores numbers outside the company External numbers are usually numbers that are frequently called or information about people or companies that frequently call the main listed number When answering a call from one of these external numbers fields from this entry are displayed to the operator providing more information than just the 10 digit caller ID There are several different fields available for display and four of these fields can be user defined The Search field searches dynamically as the information is typed in the field selected The directory is also capable of being partitioned by company The drop down box at the top of the window displays entries from a particular company or all companies in the system This is particularly useful in shared tenant installations where a single attendant group serves multiple organizations DID for Company Lookup A DID number can be associated with each company selection in the database With this function enabled when a call comes in on a specific DID for that company the operator directory will automatically default to that company and only show those employees that are in the company A screen pop will also occur letting the operator know which DID was called Page 11 4 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface BAS Overhead Paging Most overhead paging is done by the creation of a direct
437. peer connections over IP networks with the voice compression on a CCIS basis CCIS over IP or Remote PIM Remote PIM over IP The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS can provide legacy station trunk interfaces to support the existing Time Division Multiplexing TDM based infrastructure such as analog telephones analog networks and digital networks T1 E1 ISDN etc At maximum configuration the system can provide 1020 ports for IP and legacy devices and 256 ports for Application cards Communications between legacy stations trunks and DtermlP telephones IP networks are made via IP PAD which converts packet based voice data to TDM based voice data and vice versa Both peer to peer connections and TDM based connections are controlled by the Main Processor MP card The MP card incorporates a built in Device Registration Server DRS and a single interface point of IP connection to IP telephone MATWorX Voice Mail and OAI ACD servers UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS users have access to hundreds of service features that are used in building unique telephony applications that enhance productivity reduce operating costs and improve communications efficiently The innovative modular hardware and software design allows efficient effective growth within each module from its minimum to its maximum configuration The UNIVERGE NEaAx 2000 IPS software design is as advanced as its hardware It ensures the system will support evolving applications and have the reliability n
438. plementary print out individual and summary can be provided Items indicated are as follows Set status of Do Not Disturb Set status of Message Waiting Set status of Room Cutoff Automatic Wake Up Time if set Check In Check Out status Maid Status The status of the function is indicated by a green LED associated with each function key Check In Check Out set Do Not Disturb set Message Waiting set Room Cutoff set Automatic Wake Up set LCD displays time set The Room Status of stations can be printed at the Hotel Motel printer if available by pressing the print PR key on the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument prior to pressing the STS key Single Digit Dialing This feature provides the station user the ability to dial single digit codes to access certain features while still allowing the same digit dialed to be used as the first digit of guest room station numbers This feature is available on a numbering plan basis Up to four different numbering plans are available per system For multiple tenant applications each tenant can be assigned to one of these four numbering plans When this feature is assigned digits in the numbering plan can overlap and Single Digit Dialing is based on a time out after dialing the first digit The timing duration before the system stops looking for a second digit is programmable from two eight seconds The default setting is four five seconds Digits 0 9 and can be assigned within each num
439. ported when used in collaboration mode with a Dterm or wireless PS For User Mobility User Continuance to operate at the visitor site Main or Remote site a virtual station port for each visitor station is required Each visitor port assigned reduces the total number of virtual FP ports available to that site Main or Remote Site which reduces the total number DtermIP terminals While logged in as a visitor the location number tenant number and service features depend on the setting of the site that the terminal is logged into At the time if login at the visitor site stack dial and last number redial are erased Required Hardware and Software Host Site EquipmentName Remarks _ _ _ SPN 32IPLAA IP PAD Provides Packet assembly disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line Trunk interface SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD B for compression or T 30 FAX Optional R PIM 1 Site License 1 required for each Remote site Note Registration of Host CPU and software required Remote Site EquipmentName Remarks _ _ _ PZ 24IPLA 24 Port PAD Expansion mounts on SPN 8IPLA SPN 32IPLAA IP PAD Provides Packet assembly disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line Trunk interface SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD B for compression or T 30 FAX Optional Note Registration of software is not required Core software of remote site should be the same version as main site Page 13 28 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Gu
440. ports of the activity Basic ACD The UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS has basic ACD that comes standard with any basic system package Service Conditions 1 A maximum of 16 ACD groups can be assigned per system Each ACD group is assigned a pilot number Calls directed to the pilot number are directed to that ACD group 2 The maximum number of stations in an ACD group is 60 The maximum number of ACD groups in the system is 16 If ACD MIS is used the maximum number of ACD stations is 60 3 Assignment of ACD groups is performed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT 4 ACD groups consist of a pilot station and one or more member stations Hunting is initiated in a circular fashion and then based on which member has been idle the longest period of time 5 If all stations within the ACD group are busy incoming calls may be serviced in the following ways remain in queue until an agent becomes available Ring back Tone provided immediately overflow to another group to a station or to the Attendant remain in queue until an agent becomes available Delay Announcement or Music on Hold provided remain in queue for a preset time Ring back Tone Delay Announcement or Music on Hold provided and then overflow to another group to a station or to the Attendant 6 When the pilot station has set Call Forwarding All Calls incoming calls to the ACD group will be transferred to the destinati
441. ppropriate trunk line appearance Trunk Queuing Outgoing This allows a station user upon encountering a busy signal on a trunk to dial a feature access code and enter a first in first out queue As soon as an outgoing trunk becomes available stations in the queue will be called back on a first in first out basis Trunk to Trunk Connection This feature provides any station user with the ability to conference together two outside trunk calls and abandon the connection without dropping the Trunk to Trunk Connection Timed Forced Release This feature will restrict Long duration calls by forcibly releasing the call after a preset time The feature is available for outgoing incoming and tandem calls UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Uniform Call Distribution UCD The Uniform Call Distribution UCD feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a prearranged group of stations Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within the group based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time Stations may log on log off from the UCD group Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of agents Busy In Busy Out UCD This feature allows an agent in a UCD group to log their station onto or off of the group This allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the UCD group goes to that station or not This prevents incom
442. provide external alarm indication Boss Secretary Calling A secretary with a Multiline Terminal can use an appearance of the boss extension to screen calls for that extension and announce and or transfer calls to that extension Additionally the secretary can call the boss during a busy condition and send a Message Waiting Indication to the boss station UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Broker s Call This feature allows a Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone user to alternate between two parties talking to one party while the other party remains on Hold on the same line The Multiline Terminal user uses the TRF or ANS key to alternate between the two parties The Single Line Telephone user uses the Hold feature to alternate between the two parties Call Back This feature allows a calling party to set an automatic Call Back when a busy or no answer condition is encountered When the busy station becomes idle the station that set the Call Back will be called In case of Call Back no answer the Call Back to the setting station is initiated immediately after the called station goes on hook after making a call or accessing a feature UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Call Forwarding Call Forwarding allows calls directed to a Station to be routed to another station an Attendant an outside number or
443. quired for the topmost PIM Optional Brackets The Mounting Bracket is used for Floor Standing Installation Without Mounting Bracket 1 1G shockproof is provided for 1 to 3 module stack and 0 5G shockproof is provided for 4 or more module stack To enhance the shockproof capability to 1 1G one set of Mounting Bracket is required for each 4 or more module stack and attached to the topmost PIM The I F Bracket is used for Floor Standing Installation to join the neighboring topmost PIM in 6 PIM or more configurations One set of I F Bracket is required for multiple stacks The Base Tray Assembly is used for Floor Standing Installation for stationary equipment UL complied One set of Base Tray Assembly is required for each stack Installation Hardware Abbrev Description Quantity OO TOP COVER ASSEM 1 STACK BASE ASSEM is local supply Base Top ASSEM SN1545 BASERE 1 STACK HANGER ASSEM UL 1 PIM Wall mounting Installation 19 inch Bracket 1 PIM 19 inch Rack mounting Installation Page 2 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY AC DC Power Supply The AC DC Power Card is mounted in the left side of each PIM The AC DC Power card provides power to all circuit cards which reside in the PIM AC power requirements are as follows Input Voltage 90 to 132 Vrms or 180 to 264 Vrms selectable by switch 50 60 Hz A
444. r Elite system The Dterm IP Gateway s main function is to extend Dterm station ports off of the corporate NEAX or Elite system to users over the LAN Dterm IP Gateway or WAN such as telecommuters or small branch office workers 8 Port Unit The Dterm IP Adapter connects to a Dterm Series E display terminal to provide voice access to a corporate NEAX or Elite system for a single user or local user Voice and signaling traffic generated by the Dterm Series E will Dterm IP Adapter be placed in IP packets and sent out to the LAN via a 10Base T Ethernet IPA U10 Unit connection to the Dterm IP Gateway Used for connecting a single user Dterm IP Branch The Dterm IP Branch converts NEAX or Elite systems voice and signaling 42 Port Unit into packets which can be sent and received through a network connection The Dterm IP Branch supports up to 8 or 12 users per stackable unit Dterm IP Branch 8 Port Unit Used for connecting multiple users from a single location Page 13 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP IP Station IP station is a DtermIP terminal Dterm Series E Series i with an IP Adapter Unit INASET and Dterm SP30 SP30 ACD Softphone IP stations provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop with a 10Base T 100Base TX Ethernet connection to corporate Local Area Networks LAN The IP station can communicate with other IP stations or CCIS network
445. r is a compact plug and play device that installs into the base of a Dterm display terminal It has an integrated two port 10BaseT Ethernet pass though hub that permits using one port to connect the network interface card NIC from the PC to the IP network and the other port is plugged directly into a LAN or into an IP network device such as a router DSL modem or cable modem Dterm IP Branch Designed for small branch offices the Dterm IP Branch resides at the distant office On one side it has an AMP connector that is used to interface with Dterm terminals On the other side it connects to an IP packet network though a 10BaseT Ethernet port or circuit network though a DB25 WAN port It communicates over the IP network or circuit network to the Dterm IP Gateway units UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 1 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Extended Enterprise IP Solution Cont P Gara PAra eit yl i 5 if if as Sia E bl Kn fs e Cerparaie Faciilp L IF adage Breach Dia Typical IP Gateway Branch and Adapter configurations Required Equipment for NEC s Extended Enterprise IP Solution The table below shows the equipment list for NEC s Extended Enterprise IP Solution Equipment Name Dterm IP Gateway The Dterm IP Gateway is a rack mountable or desktop digital voice 12 Port Unit termination device that connects to the Dterm station ports of the NEAX o
446. r 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces Stations can set Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding All Calls No Answer and Busy Line to the VMS The system sends out incoming call information to the VMS A call to a station that has Call For warding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS The MCI can control the LCD display of a Multiline Terminal for MESSAGE Indication The number of messages is not displayed When the Message Waiting lamp control is activated with the MCI the lamp control from the following equipment will not be provided From the Property Management System PMS From the station by dialing the access code From the Direct Station Selection DSS Console From the Hotel Motel Attendant Console From the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument From the Attendant Console Only one system should be programmed via system programming to control Message Waiting lamps through the CCIS network The system controls Message Waiting lamps normally when the time interval between messages is a minimum of 350 msec or more When the VMS interface line does not answer all of the messages are sent out from the I O port of the MP APOO If the VMS is not ready for information receiving Busy Status the APOO can temporarily store up to 16 call records in its internal memory If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is generated the system will write over the oldest stored record When t
447. r 5 Station Equipment Descriptions of Series E Multi line Digital Terminals DTP 2DT 1 WH DTP 8 1 WH DTP 8 1 BK DTP 8D 1 WH DTP 8D 1 BK DTP 16D 1 WH DTP 16D 1 BK DTP 32D 1 WH DTP 32D 1 BK DTP 32DA 1 WH DTP 32DA 1 BK This 2 line non display digital terminal is equipped with 2 programmable line feature keys each with a two color LED 8 dedicated function keys a built in speakerphone and large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages The terminal comes in Ivory White WH only This 8 line non display digital terminal is fully modular with 8 dedicated function keys 8 programmable line feature keys each with a two color LED built in speakerphone built in headset jack built in long loop adapter built in wall mount unit tone volume contrast control tilt stand and a large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages The terminal comes in two colors Black BK and Ivory White WH This 8 line display digital terminal is equipped with 8 dedicated function keys 8 Programmable line feature keys each with a two color LED built in speakerphone built in headset jack built in long loop adapter built in wall mount unit tone volume contrast control tilt stand 3 line by 24 character LCD display panel adjustable detachable four soft keys and a Large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages This terminal comes in two colors Black BK and Ivory Wh
448. r Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 12 Automatic Call Distribution with MIS CallCenterWorX MIS 3 0 CallCenterWorX MIS 3 0 runs on the Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems It provides MIS services for both CallCenterWorX Business and CallCenterWorX Enterprise The CallCenterWorX ACD 3 0 for Business suite includes the Automatic Call Distribution ACD system and the Management Information System MIS The CallCenterWorX ACD system supplements the call processing capabilities of the platform being used Typical call routing is designed to connect each caller with the most appropriate agent to handle the call in the shortest time possible avoiding long wait times and getting the caller directly to someone who can deal with their request As each call progresses through the system the ACD system provides call handling data to the MIS which translates this data into meaningful statistics The MIS uses these statistics to offer call center managers and supervisors access to real time and historical data concerning incoming and outgoing call volume in the call center The CallCenterWorX MIS Status Screens Real time Screens provide color coded up to the second views of agent queue and system activity Statistics on the call volume and on the effectiveness of the agents handling those calls are computed in real time and can be displayed up to the second on supervisors screens Optional wall display boards can show
449. r an outgoing call from the 2000 IPS to ISDN network Overlap Sending is a procedure used in call establishment of an outgoing call to enable the user to send called party number digits to the network in successive messages Sub Address Present This feature allows a Primary Rate Interface ISDN trunk to transfer the Called Party Sub address information to a destination ISDN station when the call is originated by the system Dialing the called party station number and sub address is required Trunk Provisioning Service Selection Each channel of a PRI interface can be dedicated to a particular service Services are designated to specific channels once designated a channel can be used only for that service Page 9 43 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Q SIG Feature List Calling Connected Line ID Presentation CLIP COLP Calling Connected Name ID Presentation CNIP CONP CCIS Tandem Call Calling Party Number CPN Delivery to ISDN amp Q SIG Networks Q SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call ETSI Version Q SIG Feature Descriptions Calling Connected Line ID Presentation CLIP COLP Calling Connected Name ID Presentation CNIP CONP In between Q SIG networks this feature allows calling or called party information to be displayed on the Dterm LCD CLIP COLP conforms to ETS 300 173 and IS 11572 network CNIP CONP conforms to ETS 300 238 and IS 11572 network e Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Calling par
450. r both inbound and outbound calls Agents and supervisors can perform all required call delivery tasks in this environment minimizing operational complexity and training and maximizing labor efficiency Reports allows the contact center manager to view campaign information and details of specific campaigns in an easy to read format that helps manage outbound campaigns Interactive Voice Response Q IVR Q IVR is fully customizable interactive voice response technology that allows callers to interact directly to a database through the key pad on their phone to place orders manage their account check the status of an existing order or have other routine questions answered What is unique about Q IVR is that it is fully integrated with the call center List of features included with Interactive Voice Response Q IVR Reduce call traffic to agents enable customer to place orders manage their account check the status of their order and get answers for routine questions automatically thought the use of the IVR By enabling this feature agents can address more complex issues better utilize agent time and reduce customer wait time throughout the organization by eliminating time consuming simple tasks that customers can now handle on their own Make it a 24 x 7 operation after normal business hours customers can still utilize the IVR capabilities allowing automated services 24 hours seven days a week Reduce call abandonment since ag
451. r connections over CCIS Networking via IP are available when the distant systems are 2000 IPS or 2400 IPX supporting peer to peer connections The built in IP trunks CCH on the MP card are assigned with the Virtual Application Processors AP and can support up to 127 trunks per system One Virtual AP can support up to 64 trunks and up to two Virtual APs can be assigned per system The 8 IPLA IP PAD is required for connections between legacy stations trunks IP terminals and legacy stations trunks over the CCIS networking via IP The IP PAD converts voice packet data to PCM signals and one IP PAD can provide 8 PCM channels or one 8 IPLA plus one 24 IPLA can provide 32 PCM channels The number of IP PADs depends on the traffic volume of those connections and up to eight 8 IPLA IP PADs with 24 IPLA daughter boards can be accommodated per system thus providing 256 PCM channels in total Up to two IP PADs can be controlled by the MP without FP cards and additional IP PADs can be controlled by the FP cards two IP PADs per FP card Note Legacy stations trunks means the ones connected to the Time Division Switch TDSW Examples of legacy station trunk cards are LC DLC COT PRT CCT DTI etc Voice Compression Voice compression is available for CCIS networking via IP to from legacy stations trunks The following type of voice compression is available G 711 64Kbps G 729a 8Kbps G 723 1 5 3Kbps 6 3Kbps Voice compression can be assigne
452. r operation List of feature included with Reports Q Control Detailed queue and agent reporting analysis Business reports on wrap ups and service levels Ability to reformat data into graphs and tables Single integrated reports package covering telephony email web based and outbound contacts Automatic report scheduling Simplified Wizards to configure and run reports data export to compatible packages Historical data archiving and retrieval Announcements Q Announce Holding for any length of time is a frustrating experience for callers and projects the wrong image for a business With Q Announce users can configure each queue to play informative specific messages that a hold a callers attention and reduce the chance that they will abandon the call With Calling Line ID enabled Q Announce can recognize and play customized messages to a particular customer Perhaps the most powerful feature of Q Announce is its ability to keep callers informed of their position in the queue and the estimated wait time This improves customer satisfaction and ensures that callers won t hang up just before they reach the front of the queue List of features included with Announcements Q Announce Progress Announcements this simple technique significantly reduces the number of abandoned calls Our results have proved that informed callers are 30 more likely to wait on hold Automated Attendant splits a single telephone number into numerous queues
453. r than DtermiP at remote location or the Media Converter MC accommodation Characteristics of the UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM IPS DML IPS DMR Compact and Small Size MODULAR CHASSIS One MODULAR CHASSIS provides 8 card slots 56LT ports 8 virtual LT ports are available per MODULAR CHASSIS in addition to 56LT ports 2 MODULAR CHASSIS can be used per system for IPS DM DML IPS DMR MP Main Processor PN CP24A B C for IPS DM the same MP as the UNIVERGE NEAX2000 IPS PN CP31C for IPS DML and PN CP31A C for IPS DMR Power Failure Transfer PFT Power Failure Transfer PFT for the IPS DM is provided with PZ 4PFTA card The PZ 8PFTB is not available for the IPS DM Installation Methods The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM IPS DML IPS DMR can be installed on a desktop or into the 19 inch rack Wall Mount Installation is not available Remote PIM over IP with Survivability The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can have a PIM installed at a remote site through an IP network At the main site the UNIVERGE NEAX IPS IPS DM is installed and UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS IPS DM IPS DMR or IPS Retro is installed at the remote site The main site controls call processing and service feature access for station users located at both the main and remote sites When the Remote PIM cannot be connected with main site due to the IP network and or main PBX failure the Remote PIM initializes the system and re starts operation by its own Main Processor survival mode In the survival mode a
454. r two Desk cons Occupies two physical slots width per card Main Power Supply Card PZ PW121 AC DC Input AC120 V 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz PWR Output 27 V 4 4 A 5 V 7 2 A CR 38 mA 90 V 80 mA One card is pre installed per PIM Power Supply Card for CS ZT and PN 4LLCB for Long Line Input 24 V DC pz pwi22 OA Output 48 V DC 1 7 A One card per PIM Maximum 16 ZT s per card Requires Ferrite Core for Long Line function Ethernet Card 1 per MP For Peer to Peer Connection and MAT OAI PZ M606 ETHER Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit receive a signal of TCP IP protocol Provides Auto Negotiation function Always set to Page 4 4 NEAX2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Application Processor Cards The following table shows a summary of the Application Processor cards for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS systems Maximum 24 cards per system Maximum 256 ports per system Application Processor Card Name and Function Digital Trunk Interface T1 Digital Trunk Interface 1 5 Mbps DTI PRT BRT Card SPN 24DTAC B AP Accommodates 24 channel PCM digital lines Available up to 256 AP ports T1 w CSU E1 Digital Trunk Interface 2 Mbps Card SPN 30DTC C AP Accommodates 30 channel PCM digital lines Available up to 128 AP ports ISDN Primary Rate 23B D Interface Card w CSU SPN 24PRTA D AP Provides a built in D Channel Handler DCH and b
455. raffic is present on either IP stations or trunk routes no Keep Alive packet is generated UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 31 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Bandwidth utilization The following chart shows the amount of bandwidth for IP overhead per the fill times set in the PBX system The higher the fill time used better performance from the PBX and IP network can be realized due to the smaller number yet larger in size packets generated Codec 10 msec _ Filler Time 20 msec 40 msec 16 Kbps 10 67 Kbps 8 Kbps 16 Kbps 10 67 Kbps 8 Kbps N A 10 67 Kbps N A N A 10 67 Kbps N A This chart shows the total amount of bandwidth in layer 3 per voice call during the transmit stream from an IP trunk or IP station The value shown is based on the fill time from the table above and the bandwidth required by th Ee 10 msec G 711 64 Kbps 96 Kbps G 729a 8 Kbps 40 Kbps G 723 1 6 3 Kbps G 723 1 5 3 Kbps e encoding decoding algorithm that is used codec Total Bandwidth per transmit stream 20 msec 40 msec 80 Kbps 74 67 Kbps 72 Kbps 24 Kbps 18 67 Kbps 16 Kbps N A 16 97 Kbps N A N A 15 97 Kbps N A This chart shows bandwidth usage G 729A based on an idle state followed by a keep alive message with a call setup and voice usage next Time is not to scale Bandwidth Call Setup Bandwidth in Kbps ver Process Time not to scale
456. ram to be downloaded to the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS MP card with the PBX on line and during the download process all features and functions are available The MP Program Download feature is available to a stand alone system or a Remote system in a Remote PIM network The IP S downloads the MP upgrade program from FTP server using MATWorX MATWorX and the FIP server can be installed and running on the same PC A single FTP server or multiple FTP servers can be used Immediate or scheduled changeover to the upgrade program is available It is also possible to change back to the previous program that was in use before L PJ Li from F Ja Regue Program Download Request from MP Active to FTP Server Program Download Execution MP Program ot oe et Program ChangeaverChangeback 1 st from MATYYors to i a Backup MPC Active Program the changeover changeback Program Download Command from PEN LAN M4 TWWorx to MP Active TP Server to MP Upgrade 5 Changeover Copy Active to Upgrade comets a ra ora O Backup and Upgrade to Active Program ane laa ae i E gt Changeback Copy Backup to a Active Upgrade FTF Server Program CD ROM 6 System Reset eee P a ing PH CP24 C PROP 31 0 MP Download Process Service Conditions General Service Conditions The MP program download can be executed to the PN CP24 C PN CP31 C MP card when a PZ M606 A is mounted For the Retrofit system and Backup CPU
457. range of the available TCP UDP RTP port numbers used in 2000 IPS For Dterm IP 2000 IPS 1024 65535 MP Built in DRS of Main Site Assign by CMOB Y 10 gt 60 2000 IPS MP Built in DRS of Remote Site 1024 65535 Dterm IP Assign by Dterm IP set up User Menu Port of Login to DRS UDP Base Port 1024 65534 2000 IPS pr a e A Port No Virtual FP No Default 50000 64 x Virtual FP No 1024 65534 Dterm IP Assign by Dterm IP set up User Menu For Voice Control Voice Packet 1024 65535 Port for Voice User Menu Control UDP 1024 65534 IP PAD 50000 Assign by CMOA Y 10 17 30 37 100 115 gt 90 1024 65534 Dterm IP Assign by Round Robin method Port for H 245 Use From the lowest in blank port n o Base Port 1024 65534 Assign by CMOA Y 10 17 IP PAD 6000 7024 30 37 100 115 gt 92 Set every 1025 port Page 13 34 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP For Voice Control Voice Packet 1024 65534 Dterm IP 3462 Assign by Round Robin method Use From the lowest in blank port Port for Voice IP PAD 9998 10317 Packet RTP Base Port 1024 65534 Assign by CMOA Y 10 17 30 37 100 115 gt 93 IPT CCIS 96000 56062 Base Port Fixed to 56000 IPT H 323 56000 56047 For CCIS Virtual IPT Base Port 20000 65000 Assign by CMBA Y 34 Default 56000 Port Type Default Port No Port for Server 65534 PBX TCP SEN P NS one
458. rator user can choose to disable or enable this function within the user configuration The default for this configuration is disabled Page 5 24 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment PB tone sending During a call a PB tone of the dial number which is set on the member button can be sent by selecting the send PB tone with a right mouse click of speed dial number Pause into Dialing string This feature allows the user to insert a pause using a comma into the dialed number during the following conditions Drag drop into the LCD or telephone ICON Copy Paste Placing transferring a call with Call to tag Placing transferring a call and sending the PB tone with using the member button Last Number Redial A Dterm SP30 user can do a quick access and call to the most recent call placed by the SP30 During the idle stage a user can redial the telephone numbers previously dialed by selecting the Redial in pop up menu which appears by right clicking on a Call button Redial via Call Log The Dterm SP30 is capable of displaying the last 32 calling called telephone numbers This is done by depressing the Up Down arrow key Keyboard when the LCD field is highlighted First number displayed on LCD screen will be the most recent called received telephone number Pressing the arrow up will cycle from the most recent to the latest calls received telephone
459. rchitecture UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS System Configuration The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS consists of single or multiple Port Interface Modules PIM depending on the system configuration and there are two types of PIM s Physical PIM and Virtual PIM The Physical PIM is hardware PIM which is used to accommodate an MP FPs IP PADs legacy LT cards AP cards and power supply units One Physical PIM provides up to 64 LT ports and up to 8 Physical PIM s can be accommodated in a Stand Alone system A Virtual PIM is a software PIM and provides up to 64 ports per PIM for use by system programming as DtermIP telephones Wireless PS stations or Peer to Peer PTP CCIS trunks The system consists of up to 16 PIM s by the combination of Physical PIM s and Virtual PIM s thus providing 1020 ports When the use of Virtual PIM s exceeds 8 then the number Physical PIM s is reduced by one for each additional Virtual PIM required The illustration below shows examples of 1020 port configuration by the combination of TDM LT ports Dterm IP telephones Wireless PS stations and Peer to Peer PTP CCIS trunks Example 1 Example 2 PIM 3 PIM 7 PIM 11 PIM 15 PIM 2 PIM 6 PIM 401PIM 14 PIM 1 PIM 5 i a 448 LT ports 252 DIP 128 192 LT ports 508 D IP 128 64 IP PADs Wireless 128 64 IP PADs Wireless 128 PTP CCIS PTP CCIS Physical PIM Virtual PIM Page 2 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal R
460. re house or a customer Page 9 25 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Optical Interface The Optical Interface Card PN M10 provides an internal optical fiber modem to the T1 E1 or Remote PIM network The PN M10 provides a bandwidth of 6 3 Mbps and supports a maximum distance of 10 kilometers or 6 25 miles point to point The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS only supports Single Mode optical fiber Pad Lock This feature temporarily restricts telephones from making unauthorized calls by dialing special access code when station users are away from their seats Periodic Time Indication Tone This feature provides a periodic tone to the station user who has made an outgoing call This feature can be allowed or denied for each station Pooled Line Access A line key can be assigned to access Pooled Lines Each line key will allow incoming outgoing or both way access to a trunk route Power Failure Transfer This feature provides for specified trunks to be automatically connected to designated Single Line Telephones in the event of AC power loss It is normally used when the system is not equipped with reserve power Priority Call This feature allows the Attendant to answer a call before other calls at the Attendant s discretion Privacy This feature restricts Multiline Terminal users from depressing a busy line button and entering a conversation unless permitted by the Multiline Terminal user currently on that line button or
461. rences and much more Page 19 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Record Edit From a PC or a telephone subscribers can record their directory name and record and edit their personal greetings which the NEAXMail AD 64 plays to incoming callers Administer private distribution list groups subscribers oversee their private distribution lists adding or deleting recipients as necessary Change directory listing status individual subscribers can control whether or not they want to be listed in the directory Change telephone password subscribers can change their telephone password from within the Mailbox Manager Change transfer options subscribers can turn call transfer on or off and change the extension or telephone number to which incoming calls are transferred When call transfer is turned off incoming calls are sent directly to the subscribers mailbox This feature is particularly useful for employees who have offices in multiple facilities frequently work at home or work as part of a team that requires them to spend a significant amount of time in a colleague s office By using Mailbox Manager to change call transfer options callers and subscribers are connected quickly to provide improved customer service and efficient personal administration of call traffic Set conversation options subscribers can specify whether or not they want the default
462. requency Hoping FHSS Spread Spectrum radio technology The handset radio transmits and receives packets at up to 11Mb s The Wireless Telephone supports Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP as defined by the 802 11 specification NEC Unified Solutions Inc offers the product with both 40 bit and 128 bit encryption WEP increases the security of the wireless LAN to the level similar to a wired Ethernet LAN Wireless LAN Documentation For details on Wireless LAN related hardware and configurations refer to system documentation online at the following links Some or all links may require a valid login and password for access http www iliorary com cng docs nsf See System Documentation http www necunifiedsolutions com main Products ProProductCategoryMain asp catid 161 Page 16 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Hospitality features are included in the basic system software of the UNIVERGE vneax 2000 IPS Additional software is not required Any Business system can use the Hospitality features and any Hospitality system can use any Business features as necessary The UNIVERGE vneax 2000 IPS Hotel Motel features allow the hotel s administrative staff to control the telephone activity and check status of guest rooms Service staff can also communicate the condition of the guest rooms back to the front desk By dialing access codes from the guest room stations the service s
463. rocedure TDSW X o Va aon Traffic STA Y E NO x 15 NV External Traffic C O ao 7 E erl Total system traffic capacity T erl is obtainable by the following formula T erl I erl E erl In the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS external traffic capacity is obtained from the Central Office Trunk COT quantity by employing the Erlang B Table There is no limitation for the internal traffic capacity The time slot is assigned for individual station and the connection between stations can be made without limitation through TDSW Time Division Switch Consequently when describing the traffic capacity in Erlang it is meaningless unless specifying the ratio of the internal and external traffic From the above idea total system traffic capacity T erl is actually obtained by the following formula T erl Internal Traffic l erl External Traffic E erl E erl Ratio of external traffic When assuming the external and internal traffic is even T erl E erl 0 5 For example System configuration e 384 Lines e 64 C O Trunks e External traffic Internal traffic 7 4 In this system external traffic capacity is obtained from Erlang B table That is 64 C O Trunks at grade of service of 0 01 can carry 50 6 erl Total traffic capacity of this system is obtained from above 50 6 erl and ratio of external traffic as shown below T erl E erl Ratio of external traffic 50 6 T FS 72 3 erl Traf
464. roposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 7 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Series E Multi line Digital Terminals The Dterm Series E terminals were strategically designed to provide ergonomic form and user friendly functions With advanced digital circuitry the Dterm Series E terminals consist of five distinct telephone models and one DSS BLF console to meet users diverse terminal needs The Dterm Series E family of terminals offers adjustable display and non display units with menu driven soft key operation allowing users to program terminals at the desktop The display units are equipped with large LCD panels with three lines of display each with 24 characters Each terminal offers an optional full duplex soeaker phone operation for two way conversation Standard features include headset jacks wall mount units and adjustable base units Laser printer designation cards are available in Metallic Green MG Black BK and Soft White WH Standard features HOLD Press key to place an internal or external call on hold TRANSFER Allows the station user to transfer established calls to another station without attendant assistance ANSWER When LED on this key is lighted press key to answer a waiting call SPEAKER Controls the built in speaker that can be used for Hands Free Dialing Monitoring and Voice Call REDIAL Press key to activate redial feature Press redials and scrolls back through numbers tha
465. rs to forward a copy of a message to another subscriber easily Subscribers can also record an introduction to the forwarded message Multiple replies to one message Subscribers can respond to old or new messages as many times as necessary Text To Speech for Exchange GroupWise and Lotus Notes TTS TTS supports US English UK English Australian English or Dutch however only one language can be loaded on the system TTS is supported with all voice board models and has a maximum of 32 TTS sessions ViewMail for Lotus Notes VML integration is similar to the current ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging VMM application and gives subscribers PC access to their voice messages from their Notes Inbox 25 Seats of VML are included with any new NEAXMail AD 64 version 2 3 S W Port License or 2 3 S W Version Upgrade ViewMail for GroupWise VMG integration is similar to the current ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging VMM application and gives subscribers PC access to their voice messages from their GroupWise Inbox 25 Seats of VMG are included with any new NEAXMail AD 64 version 2 3 S W Port License or 2 3 S W Version Upgrade Voice sampling rate The voice sampling rate 24Kbps 6KHz provides a high standard of voice messaging Voice sampling rate The voice sampling rate 24Kbps 6KHz provides a high standard of voice messaging Volume control Subscribers can raise or lower the volume of a message by pressing the 5 key durin
466. rtment or company for calls equipment and services It is not a full blown accounting system but a subsystem of AIMWorX that will export phone related charges in formats acceptable to your organization s current accounting package This module works with the AIMWorX Manager Asset Manager and Work Order to provide a billing solution for your telemanagement needs Page18 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 18 Call Accounting Bill Reconciler Bill Reconciler compares monthly billing statements from the telephone service carrier to CDR generated by AIMWorX You can also save the results from this comparison and create reports using this cost your cost or the billed cost or the differences between them Cable Manager Cable Manager lets you maintain information on the cable and wire layout of your facility It lets you perform powerful end to end searches and recommends a cable path lets you review it then reserves it You can define each down to the levels of rooms and closets in a drag and drop graphic representation On other screens assign switch nodes and ports frames blocks pairs cross connects locations and include descriptions Cable Manager complies with EIA TIA 568 A amp B wiring standards and the EIA TIA 606 Wire Records Keeping procedures recommended by the International Standards Body Custom SPE Writer Custom SPE Writer lets you create AIMWorX SPE modules for applic
467. rts require a minimum of 2GB RAM 24 ports to 32 require a minimum of 3GB RAM above 32 ports require 4GB RAM Systems above 48 ports require dual processors Systems with 32 ports or higher must also purchase the proper quantity of SQL Standard Server 2000 Runtime Edition Level Il Server Software License with Exchange 2003 4 Port D 42 NE2 Digital Voice Board A NEAXMail AD 120 Software License includes NEAXMail AD 120 Version 2 8 software SQL MSDE version 4 28 ports only Exchange 2003 Server Voicemail Runtime edition Designated Voice Port license Unified messaging seats or Voice mail seats 240 per 4 ports System key amp documentation Microsoft Exchange 2003 Server Voice Mail Run time edition satisfies the requirement for Exchange 2003 Client Access Licenses CALs for all voice mail only users on the system CALs are still required for all unified messaging subscribers and may be purchased from NEC or provided through a third party NEC Authorized Associates may elect to provide their own server platform and third party software i e Microsoft Windows 2003 PCAnywhere Exchange 2003 and SQL 2000 The NEC Associate assumes all responsibility for providing a Microsoft certified Windows 2003 server NEC s warranty excludes any Associate supplied computer platform or software used in conjunction with the NEAXMail AD 120 system Unified Messaging license and Voice Mail only license provide 240 seat lice
468. rty Max 2 conference groups per system 32 Party Conference Max 8 conference group per system Built in Router Max 8 cards per PIM DTMF Sender Max 32 circuits per system DTMF Receiver 32 Attendant Consoles UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 1 17 Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction IPS System Capacity Single MP System cont d EE Cmos pw mo pma pms pme P7 Pme Attendant Terminal Dterm ATT Position Max 8 sets per system Max 2 Interface ports RS232 Max 1 interface port IP per system Max 1 Interface port RS232 Max 1 interface port E e per system Max 1 interface port per system IP N f PIM for R ili me Smee eee Up to 30 depending on network Authorization Code Forced Account Code Remote Access to System DISA Code Speed Calling Station Station Speed Dial Set 10000 MP built in SMDR Call Record 1024 Note System Capacity is for Main site only For Total System Capacity see IP Remote Network System Capacity Page 1 18 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction IPS System Capacity Dual MP System Pimi Pim2 Pim3 Pima PIMS Pime PIM7 Pim8 eer MEPA Wo ne Cie AEPD E 256 no i biem Pote IP NASET PIP Comedion 952 ans 824 760 696 632 568 504 Cell Station CS Zone Transceiver ZT 32 ee 32 48 80 96 112 128 A O Max 127 A pau an eos A5M 2M PRT IS
469. runk circuit to provide 911 information CAMA type interface The trunks to be used for the E 911 System must be ordered from the local telephone company provider as E 911 trunks corresponding to the CAMA standards Note Ground Start trunks cannot be utilized for E 91 1 service PZ M606 ETHERNET TCP IP Peer to Peer IP Stations or Trunks require the PZ M606 Ether Control Card This card is mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet transmit and receive a signal of TCP IP protocol 10 Base T 100 BASE TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card SPN SIPLA IP PAD The PN 8IPLA IP PAD card is an 8 channel IP to TDM Gateway with integrated G 711 CODEC 64 Kbps and G 723 1 5 3 Kbps G 729a 8 Kbps compression PZ 24IPLA IP PAD The PZ 24IPLA card can be mounted to the 8IPLA card to provide 32 channels of IP PAD with compression SPN 32IPLAA IP PAD The SPN 32IPLAA IP PAD card is a 32 channel IP to TDM Gateway with integrated G 711 CODEC Compression G 729 G 723 requires one PN 16VCTAA IP PAD for 16 channels and two PN 16VCTAA IP PAD cards for 32 channels SPN 16VCTAA IP PAD This card provides G723 and G729a vice compression for Peer to Peer IP Trunking UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 6 5 Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking System Trunking Capacity IPS Trunking Capacit System Capacity IPIN 2PIN 3PIN PIN SPIN SPIN 7PIN 3PIN Central Office Trunk Lines BID wi Ta
470. s Central Fault MAT system administration also benefits from the ability to perform high speed adds moves or changes from the centralized facility for any node in the network without the addition of costly peripheral equipment The costs savings in this area are immediately realized Centralized Maintenance Facility RS 232C Interface NEAX p NEAX2400 2400 FAULT RECORD CENTRALIZED MANAGEMENT CENTER FAULT RECORD NEAX2000 FAULT RECORD AAA CCIS LINK NEAX2400 or NEAX2000 FAULT RECORD UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 14 13 Issue 6 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS Centralized Call Accounting Billing Systems Standard tie line networks require independent call accounting billing equipment for each node in the network This results in a costly investment of peripheral equipment higher maintenance costs and the need to service this equipment at each node In a CCIS network it is not necessary to purchase independent call accounting billing equipment for each node in the network One call accounting billing system can be centrally located connected to any one system in the network and the intelligent CCIS network will transmit the SMDR data from each system in the network over the D channel to the designated centralized collection point as shown in the following diagram This increases reliability by minimizing hardware requirements simplifies call c
471. s This system targets users with up to 112 TDM station 128 IP stations and can be used as an end point in a peer to peer CCIS network The following options that are built in on the CP24 are not available with the CP31 No built in DAT Only one RS Port No built in DK external relay key No MN Alarm Indication UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DMR The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DMR Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model Remote is an UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DM that has been optimized for Remote PIM over IP applications The UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DMR uses the SPN CP31C as the Main Processor The SPN CP31C is a cost down CPU to compete with Mitel 3100 NBX25 and CISCO 2600 Series This system targets users who have up to 30 relatively small offices that accommodate 10 30 extensions at the Remote Site The MP card at Remote Site has the same system data as that at Main Site because Remote Site automatically gets the data from Main Site at the time of setup In normal operation Main Site automatically copies the system data to Remote Site through the network once a day The following options that are built in on the CP24 are not available with the CP31 in an UNIVERGE NEAX IPS DMR No built in DAT No built in Modem Only one RS Port No built in DK external relay key No MN Alarm Indication System Outline for Remote PIM The MP card at Main Site controls system processing and Remote Site follows the Main Site Remote Site can accommodate most termin
472. s Line Test function 4 line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i E DSS Console 48 V version two wire type PZ PW122 required PN 4DLCT 2 line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i E Dterm Elite DSS Console 48 V version two wire type PN 2DLCN e Provides Line Test function e Equipped with 48 V DC DC on board power supply Max 850 m 2788 7 ft UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 4 9 Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Line Trunk LT Cards Cont Name Port 32 channel IP PAD card e Provides Packet Assembly Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line Trunk interface e Used with a maximum of two 16VCT cards e Two cards can be accommodated per built in FP FP card a maximum of eight per system e 100 BASE TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card e Supports T 30 or Pass Through Fax G 711 G 726 16VCT is not required for G 711 16VCT is required for G 726 R9 enhancement e Auto Negotiation or 100Mbps Full Duplex is selectable 8 channel IP PAD Card Provides LAN Interface Packet Assembly Disassembly to accommodate Legacy Line Trunk interface And provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice compression control DTMF relay e Voice compression protocols G 711 64 kbps G 723 1 5 3 Kbps 6 3 Kbps o e e Pasedieiiiah G 711 G 726 IP Station i e protocol Pass throug 711 G r sa AS IP e Aut
473. s a connection between the AC DC Power Card and Base Unit AC Cord NameCode Qty Remarks _ _ _ AC CORD B U 1 PIM__ AC power cable Included in PIM AC CORD D U 1 BASE AC power cable for BASE Included in BASE Page 2 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture External Cabling IP Connection MP with PZ M606 A and IP PAD Name Code Qty Remarks IP TRK BUS Cable 0 1m 0 33ft oe WET included in SPN 16VCTA IP PAD IP Trunk H 323 CCIS over IP w IVS2 NameCode Qty Remarks PTRKBUSCA IP TRK BUS Cable 0 1m 0 33ft IP TRK BUS CA 1 VCT Included in SPN 4VCTI A or SPN 4VCTI B Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT RS 232C Direct Connection MAT Cable Direct Name code ay Remake MAT CA T 1 MAT RS 232C cable 2m 6 6ft MAT CA P 1 MAT RS 232C cable 4m 13 1ft Remote connection Remote connection is available via an internal modem in the MP or an external modem MAT Cable for external modem Name Code RS NORM 4S CA A 1 MAT RS 232C cable 4m 13 1ft UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 2 9 Issue 6 Chapter 2 System Architecture Built in SMDR MCI on MP The MP card provides RS 232C interface ports for SMDR MCI connection No 0 1 Port Async 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Connection to SMDR is made on a port basis by a front cable Cable
474. s at any point during the call and save the recording or forward it to other subscribers Accurate messages can be passed on to others and phone conversations can be archived for future reference Setting your mailbox feature options is quick and efficient using the NEAXMail IM 16LX s Web based Mailbox Manager Application Subscribers can modify their own mailbox greetings security codes notifications groups conversation preferences and other settings through the intuitive graphical user interface accessed with their Microsoft Internet Explorer browser Hospitality Feature Package NEAXMail IM 16LX offers a version specifically designed for the special needs of the hospitality industry and integrates with over 60 Property Management Systems PMS Personalized guest messaging is available for every room and guests can choose from an extensive list of foreign language prompts The guest directory allows callers to contact the hotel guests or leave messages without going through an operator The hospitality package s wake up feature allows guests to add delete change and confirm a wake up call at any time during their stay Guest information lines answer routine questions 24 hours a day The hospitality package also improves internal communication The entire hotel staff can be alerted to a message simultaneously Employees working different schedules can leave messages for each other Housekeeping maintenance and room service can be alerte
475. s by sending a hookflash and dialing the Call Hold feature access code or by pressing the Call Hold key This line can then be used for Originating another call or returning to a previously held call Dual Hold This feature permits a station user who is placed on Hold by another station to place that station on Hold also Exclusive Hold This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold and to exclude all other station users from retrieving the held call Non exclusive Hold This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold that may be retrieved by any station that has an appearance of the held line Hotel Motel Attendant Console The Attendant Console can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel Attendant Console In addition to the business features and functions of the Attendant the Hotel Motel Attendant Console can set Room Cutoff individual and group Automatic Wake Up Message Waiting and Do Not Disturb individual and group UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument This can be used to set and cancel standard H M features such as Message Waiting Do Not Disturb Automatic Wake Up and Room Cutoff Hotline Inside Outside This feature causes the terminal to place a call to
476. s relayed via CCIS to the destination of Call Forwarding c When the calling name from NI 2 is received as a FACILITY message the name cannot be relayed to CCIS Only when the calling name from NI 2 is received as a SETUP message the name can be relayed to CCIS d Only when the calling name from DMS100 is received as a SETUP message the name can be relayed to CCIS 13 Conditions with Other Services a The calling name received from ISDN has priority over the calling name registered to Station Speed Dialing by CM74 so the former is displayed even though the latter has been assigned by CM74 b If the calling name is not received from ISDN the calling name assigned by CM 4 is displayed if available c When a call is relayed to CCIS with tandem connection the calling name is not relayed to CCIS if the name is not received from NI 2 even though the calling name has been assigned by CM74 However when Call Forwarding No Answer routes an incoming call from ISDN to CCIS with tandem connection the calling name assigned by CM74 is relayed to CCIS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 3 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN DID Addressing This feature allows incoming ISDN PRI calls to terminate to stations Attendant Console Automated Attendant etc based on the Called Party number Direct Inward Dial trunks will be terminated to preprogrammed destinations without Atten
477. s require a total of 2GB RAM 4 sessions require a total of 3GB RAM Above 5 sessions require 4GB RAM Above 3 sessions requires a Level Il platform Above 8 sessions require Dual Xeon 2 8 GHz processor option RealSpeak Text To Speech Reader 1 Session Third Party Fax Server Integration The following fax servers are supported Omtool Fax Sr v 3 Interstar Technologies LightningFax v 5 5 or higher Fenestrae FAXination v 4 or higher RightFax v 6 or higher Optus FACSys v 4 5 or higher FAXCOM for Exchange version 6 19 or higher and Esker FaxGate v 7 or higher PBX Integration Software All AD 120 systems include the NEAX Digital and Serial MCI switch integrations The following components provide integration support for Cisco Call Manager ver 2 4 or above and SMDI Serial systems T1 integration is not currently supported with Dual IP PBX Support Enhanced NEAX OAI Integration must be ordered for each AD 120 in the cluster or whenever Live Record is desired in an analog port configuration Load Balancing is required when you want to cluster 2 AD120 s and have them automatically load balance the calls Page 19 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Description ________ AD120 Dual Integration IP PBX AD120 SMDI Serial Integration AD120 Enhanced NEAX OAI Integration AD120 Load Balancing Platform Specifications NEAXMail AD 120 Specifications PCI Slots
478. scheduled events My Outlook synchronizes with additional Outlook functionality making it easy to initiate tasks and manage your mail Communications Portal Benefits Improve efficiency by combining all telephone and messaging activities within a single application Page 11 8 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface o Open WorX Communications Portal allows staff members to manage all of their communications needs within a single window This allows individuals to place calls return calls send and receive email manage their contact information and check messages without having to switch applications Fewer applications streamline work processes and minimize confusion Enhance customer satisfaction with call management o Staff members can identify calls from priority customers and have them routed based on the source giving the individual the flexibility to handle these calls quickly even when away from the office Key individuals remain available to callers regardless of their location so mobility isn t a hindrance to productivity Improve organizational productivity o The ability of the OpenWorX Communications Portal to track location status can help the entire organization stay better connected The ability to locate key personnel who are often away from their desks for a variety of reasons for a period of time can keep processes within the organization mov
479. screens can accept new data or revise previously entered data with immediate confirmation of the action These screens list operational data in drop down menus Each data entry screen can open to a report view showing the currently programmed data The font style and size and the column headings in the report can be reset to suit your preference The report view can open to a print preview showing the report as it would be printed and can send the report to a printer A report can be saved to a data file saved to a Microsoft Excel file or exported to a Microsoft Access database An optional workbook area showing a tab for each open screen with the MAT command icon for that screen A report icon on top of the command icon for those screens open to the report view Multiple screens can be open simultaneously A screen is made the active screen by selecting the appropriate Workbook tab Has an optional status bar which reflects the state of the active screen Supports 6 languages English Japanese French German Italian and Spanish for display to the agent s Dterm position Uses a Trace Client to view ACD call processing on screen CCV programming diagnostics let you monitor the call flow in real time to design or re engineer your installation ACD client MAT provides the ability to program multiple CallCenterWorX ACD s from one GUI in a network List up includes the ability to view multiple reports and to export these reports in
480. sed in conjunction with the DTP 32DE 1 Multiline Terminal and Dterm Analog EXT The NEC CTA U optional adapter cannot be installed to a NEC PBX remote Multiline Terminal to provide TAPI functionally with the PBX The auto answer feature for PBX ACD is not operable while in Call on Demand mode The Dterm PC and Dterm PC II are not functional with the Dterm Analog EXT The HFU U hands free adapter is not operable with the DTP 32DE 1 Multiline Terminal for Dterm Analog EXT operation when used in a home environment due to FCC restrictions However it is permitted for use in an office environment UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 27 Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking Type of Trunks The following list reflects the type of trunk and the package that supports it Type of Trunk Circuit Package Central Office Foreign Exchange PN 4COTB WATS Analog PN 8COTS PN 4COTG Central Office Caller ID Class SM PN 8COTQ Direct in Dial DID oo A SPN 2ACCTA Digital CCIS SPN 24DTAC amp SC00 ne ao 30DTC amp SCOO PN A 8 SCOO AnalogCCIS AnalogCCIS PN 40DTA 8 SCOO IP CCIS Peer to Peer Virtual PIM SPN IPTB A IP CCIS non Peer to Peer SPNAVCOTLA SPN 24PRTA ISDN PRI SPN 24DTAC amp SCO1 SPN 30DTC amp SCOT SPN BRTC PRENER SPN 4BRTA e PN 4COTB gINg PN 8COTS Conference PN CFTB SPN CFTC eo Register Sender Four wire E amp M tie trunks LT AP Ports K O
481. size as follows payload size can be assigned in system programming CCIS Point to Multipoint Payload Size G 729a G 711 G 723 1 16 Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel VoIP H 323 Payload Size G 729a G 711 G 723 1 8 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel Payload size for Virtual IPT Max Voice Channels Per IPT ES G 723 1 i om 83 3 a 16 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 13 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights IP PAD Calculation IP PAD Calculation __ Number ofextensions 8 16 Egacy Number ot PAD Pons L s j e e 12 0 Legacy Number of PAD Ports 5 6e 9 12 145 10 Mmr eaea a La l fa 4 ff Legacy Number of PAD Pors 4 e 9 11 4 20 1 toa ft Legacy Number of PADPorts 4 6 8 11 14 30 Legacy Number of PADPorts 4 6 8 10 13 40 noscere paneas ft Eft Legacy Number of PAD Ports 4 5 7 9 12 50 Nmr aneas fa 44 dd Legacy Number of PAD Pots 4 5 7 8 a 60 Number ofIP PAD Cars 1 4 1 1 a lr Legacy Number of PADPorts 3 4 6 7 75 NumberofIP PAD Cars 1 1 1 1 Legacy Number of PAD Ports 4 80 NumberofIPPADCards 1 4 1 1 Legacy 88 NumberofIP PAD Cards 1 1 1 1 Legacy Number of PAD Ports 2 2 3 95 NumberofIPPADCards 1 4 1 1 Legacy Number of PAD Ports 3 3 4 99 0 Number of IPPADCards 1 1 4 1 e
482. ssages sent and whether he or she left the sender any messages Message waiting notification The NEAX PBX s message waiting indicator is activated when a subscriber has new messages This may be the extension s Message Waiting Lamp or Stutter dial tone Multiple subscriber interfaces Individual subscribers on the same system have a choice of using the easy 1 for Yes 2 for No interface or the Menu options interface 1 for Yes 2 for No interface Using the 1 for Yes and 2 for No option users access all functions by responding to simple yes or no questions Menu options NEAXMail AD 64 offers a traditional voice mail menu interface as well as the yes and no interface Menu options make it easy for experienced users to access all functions quickly Quick keys Yes and no interface users can utilize the 4 through 7 keys to jump to specific options or features Outside caller group messaging Outside callers can leave a message for a group of subscribers instead of a single subscriber Messages can be left to either a public or private group and will follow the delivery method assigned to the group Personal Mailbox Each subscriber within an organization can have a private voice mailbox The NEAXMail AD 64 s internal database provides up to 65 000 voice mailboxes Page 19 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Private Distribution Lists Subscribers may
483. st served basis Paging Access CCIS This feature provides dial access to paging equipment from an Attendant Console or a station through the CCIS network Restriction from Outgoing Calls CCIS This feature automatically restricts users of pre selected stations from placing outgoing calls and or certain miscellaneous trunk calls through CCIS without Attendant assistance Service Display CCIS This feature generates LCD displays on the Multiline Terminal corresponding to the various features as they are initiated Single Digit Station Calling CCIS This feature allows the assignment of Single Digit Station numbers Station Controlled Conference CCIS This feature allows any station of the 2400 IPX to establish a conference among a maximum of eight parties of stations and or trunks inside and outside parties of the 2000 IPS through CCIS Page 9 39 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Station to Station Calling CCIS This feature permits any station user to dial another station directly through CCIS without Attendant assistance Station to Station Calling Operator Assistance CCIS This feature allows a station user to call another station in the CCIS network with the assistance of an Attendant Console operator Toll Restriction 3 6 Digits CCIS This feature allows the system to be programmed to restrict outgoing calls through CCIS according to specific Area and or Office Codes This restriction is
484. stem wide basis no encryption is also available Encryption is available for Login method password protected and Automatic Login method MAC address authentication Up to 8 digit password can be assigned 0 9 A and B can be used as a password When the password is not assigned the registration is not allowed and Unauthorized is displayed on the terminal When the encrypted password is manipulated in the network the registration is not allowed and Unregistered is displayed on the terminal Service Conditions on VLAN UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS supports VLAN based on IEEE 802 1Q Tag VLAN 2 VLAN can be assigned to IP port s of MP IP PAD and IP Enabled Dterm and cannot be assigned to IP ports of IP trunks and IPELC The VLAN assignment to the IP Enabled Dterm is provided by Configuration Mode 3 One IP port can have one VLAN ID Multiple VLAN IDs cannot be assigned to the same IP port 4 VLAN ID can be assigned from 1 to 4094 VLAN ID 0 is handled as Null VLAN ID and is effective to assign priority only 5 Switching hub must support VLAN If the switching hub does not support VLAN the VLAN function is not effective even when the system data of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is assigned Page 13 10 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Service Conditions on Remote Connections 1 The network between NEAX 2000 IPS and IP Enabled Dterm must m
485. sually used in conjunction with the PMS and used for the following purposes Management of guest administrative station call o The PMS does not manage the guest administrative station call Backup of guest administrative station call for a PMS failure Management of either guest or administrative station call o For example the SMDR manages an administrative station call and the PMS manages a guest station call Page 17 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Hotel Printer When PMS with APOO on RS 232C is provided the various system messages and the guest room status can be obtained through a locally provided Hotel Printer The following information is automatically printed out as a system message Wake Up attempts whether successful or not Remaining messages for the station which are set to Check Out Codes and quantities of the goods requested from a guest room by Direct Data Entry If the print out function key is provided on the Front Desk Terminal the status of the following features are printed out when the feature is set or reset and Room Status print out is activated Automatic Wake Up Check In Check Out Do Not Disturb Message Waiting Room Cutoff Room Status individual guest station all guest stations Executed Task Print Out Using the built in PMS on the MP and an APOOB MRC F will allow the print out of an execution history for Automatic Wak
486. swer Back CCIS y OO House Phone CCIS os HotLine CCIS os Incoming Call Identification CCIS S y O Individual Attendant Access CCIS OOO LDNNightConnection CCIS Link AlarmDisplay CCIS ss pLinkReconnect CCIS ss Message Waiting Lamp Setting Attendant CCIS ____________ Message Waiting Lamp Setting Station CCIS _____________ Miscellaneous Trunk Access CCIS y OO Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction CCIS Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls CCIS o ooo Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line CCIS o SSS y Multiple Call Forwarding Don tAnswer CCIS o oS y Multiple Console Operation CCIS Night Connection Fixed CCIS Night Connection Flexible CCIS oo O Outgoing Trunk Queuing CCIS PagingAccess CCIS ss Restriction from Outgoing Calls CCIS _______________ ServiceDisplay CCIS ss Single Digit Station Calling CCIS Station to Station Calling CCIS Station to Station Calling Operator Assistance CCIS _______ _ _ _ Toll Restriction 3 6 Digi CCIS l o O Trunk Answer from Any Station CCIS Trunk to Trunk Restriction CCIS O Uniform Number Plan CCIS SO Voice Call CCIS ss Voice MailIntegration CCIS Voice Mail Live Record CCISNote gt __________ Voice Mail Private Password CCIS y O Asynchronous Data Switching CCIS Data Interface Automatic Answer CCIS SSS Data Line Security CCIS ss DataTransparency CCIS Simultaneous Voice and Data Transmission
487. system remote download of MP program is not available The call processing is stopped while the system is initialized by the program changeover execution Remote download of AP program is not available While the PBX is off line you cannot execute the program downloading or program changeover changeback program version matching immediate However it is possible to read various information and set the schedule date time for program changeover changeback program version matching even while the PBX is off line When the PN 32IPLA is mounted in the system the MP program download FIP is not available When the PN 32IPLA A or PN 8IPLA is mounted it is available in the system Page 8 6 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 8 System Administration Program Download Service Conditions Do not reset the PBX and the MATWorX during MP program downloading Do not pull out the LAN cable during MP program downloading FTP File Transfer Protocol is used as the protocol for the remote download of MP program Only the file specified in File Name of CHECKSUM TXT can be downloaded to the PBX If you do not set the directory name to save the program files and CHECKSUM TXT by MATWorx they are saved to the FTP directory default If you do not set the password and user ID of the FTP server by MATWorx login to the FTP server with anonymous If required FTP server information is not set when
488. t 3 4 kHz above Attenuation level 40 dBm or less at 3 4 KHz and above 0 dBm or less at 50 kHz and above Line Conditions Specifications Loop Resistance including Telephone Set Analog Standard Line Max 600 ohms Max 600 ohms Analog Long Line Max 2 500 ohms DP 10pps Max 1 700 ohms DP 20pps Max 1 200 ohms DTMF Loop Resistance including Opposite End Resistance Central Office Trunk Max 1 700 ohms Tie Line Trunk Loop Dial Max 2 500 ohms Cable Length Note 1 SN716 Desk Console Tie Line Trunk E amp M Max 900 ohms only E wire condition 8DLC 4DLC 2DLC Card Max 350 meters Max 300 meters for 8DLC card 4DLC 2DLC Card with Max 1 200 meters AC Adapter Dterm Series i E 8DLC 4DLC Card Max 200 meters Max 300 meters for Dterm 8 and Dterm 8D 2DLC Card Max 850 meters ADLC 2DLC Card with Max 1 200 meters AC Adapter DSS BLF Console ADLC 2DLC Card with Max 1 200 meters AC Adapter Zone Transceiver ZTII U for U Interface Max 1 210 meters 2 wire Max 2 100 meters 4 wire 48V Max 970 meters 2 wire Max 1 700 meters 4 wire 45V ZTII U with AC Adapter Max 3 950 meters Note 1 Cable length is based on cable with 0 5mm diameter and without lightning arresters UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 17 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Rotary Dial Pulse and DTMF Signaling 1 Rotary Dial Signal F Specifications Descript
489. t Override Delayed Ringing This feature enables trunks and station lines to ring immediately at the terminating station but also after a programmable period of time has elapsed to ring at secondary Multiline Terminals with that trunk or line appearance Diagnostics To assist maintenance personnel the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides diagnostic capabilities such as fault code generation device status information and alarm information recording which can be accessed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT Dial By Name This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to search for a desired number by name The number and name are registered in the system and they are shown on Multiline Terminal LCD The Multiline Terminal user can search for the desired number by name using up or down soft keys When the Multiline Terminal user finds the desired number the call can be originated by pressing the Line Trunk key or going off hook Dial Conversion The system can be assigned to use rotary Dial Pulse DP or Dual Tone Multi frequency DTMF trunks and stations This feature provides for the repeating of digits dialed by the station user onto the C O trunks Direct Data Entry This feature allows a maid or other hotel personnel to enter numeric data to the Property Management System PMS using the guest room station for entry through dial operation The same numerical data ca
490. t have been dialed When desired number is displayed press the key to activate dialing CONF Press key to establish a three way conversation RECALL Press key to terminate established call and re seize internal dial tone FEATURE Used to activate terminal setup functions and to program One Touch Speed Dial Feature Keys MIC Press to turn on and off the microphone Dterm Series E Soft keys The Dterm Series E Display Terminals have four Soft keys located just under the Display of each Terminal These menu driven Soft keys allow user s convenient access too many features Each Soft key may have up to 4 features programmed on it Soft keys will be functional for specific states of the terminal such as idle during dialing ringing etc The state of the terminal will determine what Soft key is available to the user According to the status of the Multiline Terminal functions of the Soft keys are displayed in the third line on the LCD and if the status of the Multiline Terminal changes the Soft Key displayed will change automatically Also if the HELP key is pressed an explanation of the indicated Soft key is shown on the LCD Typical Soft key Applications are Business Hotel Multi tenant and Networking applications where it is necessary to save key space on the telephone and also provide a variety of quickly accessible features Page 5 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapte
491. t now Please leave a message Busy greeting plays when your extension is busy A typical busy greeting is Hello this is Pat Green am on the phone now Please leave a message For callers to hear your busy greeting it must activated Alternate greeting plays for special occasions such as a vacation A typical alternate greeting is Hello this is Pat Green am out of the office today and will return tomorrow When your alternate greeting is active the system plays it instead of any of your other greetings UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 13 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Guests A guest is a person who is hosted by a particular subscriber and given a guest mailbox Guest privileges allow a person to communicate with their host subscriber through voice messages Hacker Prevention Features are as follows Mandate a default password on each new box so they are not left unprotected Allow system administrators to change the default security code via the administration console Force new subscribers to change the default security code upon first time enrollment Hospitality is an optional special guest messaging service which offers room guests a shortened system conversation for ease of use This package includes 5 guest languages and PMS Integration Last in First out First In First out LIFO FIFO System administrator can set LIFO FIFO for e
492. t up used to the address PagerlD Wdomain com 2000 wireless user com is a good example The server will then parse the Pager ID out of the heading and send the message to the wireless handset with that extension NEC has verified this functionality on Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes STM Functionality in a TAP Environment STM can also be configured to use an RS 232c TAP interface for sending or receiving alphanumeric messages to the user s wireless handsets Thus a TAP enabled pager program can be used to send a message STM Benefits Allow users to send messages directly to users when not available for call transfer Short messages can be left as text pages instead of voice mails Internal Text messages can be sent directly to wireless handsets via email Facilitates quick call back Call me at 555 1212 Bob Can immediately be returned via the same device Automated reminders can be set up via your email to be sent directly to your PSII UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 11 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface Open Worx Incoming Call Assistant ICA Incoming Call Assistant ICA is a service that gives Dterm users a powerful tool to manage incoming and outgoing calls These functions can be accessed with the simple touch of an associated function key ICA Functionality The user can View the caller s name and number on the LCD display for any line or sub lin
493. taff can report to the front desk area that a room Needs repair Repairs are complete Cleaning in progress Cleaning complete Room has been checked and other important service functions By dialing access codes from the guest rooms the time spent dialing waiting for answer and communicating the message to someone is eliminated The UNIVERGE neEax 2000 IPS Hospitality package offers the features that will be described in detail in the following sections Hotel Feature List MEA Automatio Wake Up oa nee Oo IN S IET EI IE Direct Data Enty XP o d XK Do NotDisturb Hotel Motel X X J X Xx x O OS a a Hotel Motel Attendant Console ere E IE ICI E ES Instrument House Phone Phone oso AAA Message Registration XX Message Waiting XxX J Xx Xx x Property Management System PMS Interface Room Room Cutoff E E E SI E Single Digit Dialing XxX X MN X Applicable Not applicable Note When MP built in PMS on IP is provided you can set and cancel this hotel feature only from PMS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 17 1 Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Application Processor PMS with APOO on RS 232C The Application Processor AP manages guest or administration room status and stores call information on each guest or administrative station The AP also provides interface ports for a Property Management System PMS Station Message Deta
494. tation port integration PBX Integration All AD 120 systems include the NEAX Digital and Serial MCI switch integrations The following components provide integration support for Cisco Call Manager Version 2 4 or above and SMDI Serial systems T1 integration is not currently supported with Dual IP PBX Support Enhanced NEAX OAI Integration must be ordered for each AD 120 in the cluster or whenever Live Record is desired in an analog port configuration System Architecture Microsoft Exchange 2003 Server ships with AD 120 S W Port Licenses that include Exchange Associates may elect to purchase Exchange through NEC or to provide their own copies Microsoft SQL 2000 Server is the underlying database for AD 120 SQL is provided either in MSDE or Server Standard 2000 Runtime Edition license versions MSDE is provided with S W Port Licenses from 4 to 28 ports Port Licenses above 28 ports require the purchase of SQL Server Standard 2000 Processor License As a Processor License SQL must be purchased in quantities equivalent to the number of CPUs in the server Therefore a Dell PE2800 with dual processor s requires two licenses NEC Authorized Associates may elect to provide their own copies if desired UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 5 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems Voice Cards Voice boards must be purchased for all NEAXMail AD 120 orders Note Systems 4 to 20 po
495. tch key on the Soft Phone Speech Encryption This feature protects a call from being tapped Speed Dial PS This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to dial the certain frequently called numbers using two digit abbreviated call codes Station Hunting Not Available This feature allows a call placed to a Dterm PS IIl station which is out of zone or power off to be forwarded to an idle station in a hunt group Two Station Hunting arrangements are available Station Hunting Circular processes the call regardless of which station in the hunt group is called Station Hunting Terminal initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of a hunt group is called Voice Mail Indication When a message is mailed in the Dterm PS Ill an indication of the envelope icon is displayed in the LCD of the Dterm PS III WLAN Handset Registration Service This feature allows the 2000 IPS to accommodate the WLAN Handset as a station A terminal is connected to the 2000 IPS through Access Point and Gateway and operates under the control of the virtual CS on the Gateway Station to Station calls between WLAN stations and calls between WLAN stations and existing stations trunks are available Page 9 49 Chapter 10 System Input Output I O Interfaces Station Message Detail Recording SMDR This feature provides a call record for outgoing Station to Trunk calls incoming Trunk to Station calls including Data Call and tandem calls This facilit
496. te Hold This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user or an attendant to place a call on hold on the line button of the destination terminal by pressing the Hold key Remote PIM over IP When IPS DMR or 2000 IPS PIM are installed at remote site and connected to a 2000 IPS or IPS DM at main site over IP network the Main Site system controls and maintains the remote DMR or IPS PIM operation as one single system If a communication failure occurs between the Main Site and Remote Site the Remote Site automatically changes over to a survival mode and operates as a stand alone system IPS DMR IPS Distributed Model Remote with CP31 A B C IPS DM IPS Distributed Model with CP24 A B C Reserve Power This feature provides backup power from a 24V battery source in the event of a commercial power failure Page 9 28 Resident System Program This feature provides the installers a simple procedure to have the system generate system data according to the system hardware configuration thereby providing immediate operation and shorter programming time When activated the system scans hardware configuration such as line trunk card slot location and assigns system data Such as extension numbers trunk numbers etc according to a predetermined generic program assignment Return Message Schedule Display This feature permits any station user to register his Return Schedule from his phone when he leaves his desk or the premises and
497. te with other 2000 IPS 2400 IPX systems over the CCIS networking via IP on a peer to peer connection basis MP controls a connection between the IP station and IP trunk built into the MP The built in IP trunk communicates with IP trunks of the distant systems 2000 IPS 2400 IPX over CCIS networks via IP Voice packets are transmitted over the LAN and WAN via router Voice compression of G 729a 8 kbps and G 723 1 5 3 kbps 6 3 kbps is available for its connections Protocol TDSW Profocol Protocol PROTIMS ccs TRM PROTIMS IP PAD ae PE j lr D y 7 j a a IP Enabled p IP Enabled D Page 13 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Connections to Legacy Stations and Trunks The IP station can communicate with legacy stations and trunks including H 323 trunks via IP PAD that converts voice packet data to PCM signals Call control signals are transmitted to MP over the LAN while voice packets are transmitted via IP PAD The number of IP PADs depends on the traffic volume of connections between the IP station and legacy stations and trunks LTD A i r p gt c 3 et m Call be ol ed i 3 LE ee ee A TES PES PE TP Em abled pr IP Enabled pia IP Enabled f Remote Connections of IP Stations The IP stations can be located at remote sites over an intranet internet PSTN ISDN vi
498. tendant System BAS is a powerful client server PC based tool for full time and part time NEAX PBX systems answering positions The BAS consists of an interactive client side application running on Windows 98 SE Windows 2000 SP2 or Windows XP SP1 operating system that connects to the BAS server via the corporate LAN The BAS server software is used for PBX connectivity and runs on a Windows 2000 Server SP2 or Windows 2003 Server With a dynamic interactive directory and an Open Application Interface OAI driven call queue the operators are able to process a high call volume with minimal effort and time expenditure in today s sophisticated business environment For example an operator can answer an incoming call from one of many queues find out to whom the caller wishes to speak begin typing that name to select it in the directory and once selected hit the lt Enter gt key or click the entry to transfer the call Additionally the caller could be parked put on hold or sent to voice mail Several operators can monitor the same queues and share the same directory for call operation These few examples barely scratch the surface of the capabilities and features available for the system operator positions a Line Status z Line Gel Optons Window Halp Commands ueucs Eo mema 1 Pe i Front Sin er External 0 TIE Paged 0 Perk TIO 0 Ad fer 0 DESA ll WATS 0 acant ll Hang TGD Me i Loops
499. tered Voice detect This feature allows outside callers using rotary telephones to access the voice mail system by speaking instead of by pressing touch tones Callers make choices or respond to prompts by saying yes or remaining silent for no rather than pressing touchtone keys on one key dialing menus Voice detect call holding Voice detect call holding allows callers without touch tones to hold by saying yes instead of pressing 1 Audiotext Many offices and organizations want to provide around the clock information to clients NEAXMail AD 64 audiotext features allow an organization to make this information available to callers at all times The voice messaging system can offer callers menu trees and messages that can vary depending upon the telephone number called or the time of day Callers use touch tones to select an item or subject that they want to hear Even multilingual services can be provided The audiotext recording can be of any length and there is no limit to the number of audiotext boxes available with the system Mailbox Manager This application brings many voice mail features to your Microsoft Windows based desktop PC The graphical user interface GUI gives subscribers the ability to set up and control personal mailbox settings in addition to the Telephone User Interface TUI With this new tool subscribers may modify their greetings security code notification methods groups conversation prefe
500. term Cordless II to a standard wall plate Dterm Cordless II 6 hours of Talk Time or 4 days of Standby Capacity UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 5 15 Issue 6 Chapter 5 Station Equipment Dterm Cordless Lite Il DTH 4R 1 BK The Dterm Cordless Lite Il is digital and operates in the 900 MHz narrow band frequency range It includes Base Unit Handset one telephone cord 2 AC Adapters 2 Rechargeable Batteries Spring Belt Clip Battery Charger and Wall Mounting Plate Specifications Frequency Security Voice Channel Interface Port Multi Line Capability Hand Set LCD Screen System Caller ID Remote Base Unit 2nd Battery Charging system Auto Talk Auto Standby Talk Time Standby Time Silent Alert System Handset Size Ring On Off Ke Selectable Ring Tones MES Battery Type NiMH Battery 3 6V 700mAh 3Tone sss 3 Tone Message Waiting Indicator Belt Clip Belt Clip Transfer YEG YES Headset Jack Transfer VES SO CTI YES YES Mute VES Backlit Keypad 4 LINE KEY Hot Swap Battery Options Unit Description _________________ EXP9660 Replacement Wall Mount Unit Use to wall mounts the Dterm Cordless Lite Terminal AD9500 Replacement AC Adapter for Charging Base Unit AD960 Lite Charging Unit Replacement AC Adapter for Charging Unit Provides 9Vdc to the Dterm Cordless Requires 120V 60Hz 14W AC input from standard AC plug BT90
501. term can work based on the location number in each mode When the Location number for the station is changed login operation is required again NAT Network Address Translation is supported using remote Dterm IP terminals only For NAT support a Global IP Address programmed in the NEAX 2000 IPS CPU is required UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 11 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP 7 Because the IP station can have only two operation mode Location number when the number of remote sites Location numbers is over two there is a case that the appropriate communications may not be available Refer to Example 2 for details Location number in each operation mode for each IP station lt IP stations in Location 0 STA 200 and 201 gt Remote Connection Mode Location 1 Local Connection Mode Location 0 lt IP stations in Location 1 STA 202 and 302 gt Remote Connection Mode Location 1 Local Connection Mode Location 0 or 2 lt IP stations in Location 2 STA 300 and 301 gt Remote Connection Mode Location 1 Local Connection Mode Location 2 Operation mode for each IP terminal lt IP terminals in Location 0 gt Local Connection Mode lt IP terminals in Location 1 gt Remote Connection Mode lt IP terminals in Location 2 gt Local Connection Mode Example 1 When Sta 200 logs in Location 1 STA 200 logs out from Location 0 and then logs in from IP terminals in Loca
502. tes throughout the United States Puerto Rico and Canada HILLSBORO OREGON Fiber Optic Transport Systems Digital Loop Carrier Systems Very Small Aperture Terminals Satellite VSATs Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Switching Systems Digital PBXs Digital Multiplex Systems Automotive Electronic Systems Cellular Telephone and Pagers TECNOLOGIAS NEC DE MEXICO S A DE C V Cellular Telephones and Pagers DALLAS TEXAS Advanced Switching Computer Telephony Software Radio amp Satellite Communications Software Wireless Communication Products HERNDON VIRGINIA Transmission Software amp Firmware SAN JOSE CALIFORNIA Transmission Software HILLSBORO OREGON Transmission Hardware amp Software UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Major Product PUBLIC NETWORKING Areas Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Switching Broadband Access Systems Digital Loop Carrier Systems Fiber Optic Transmission Systems Microwave Radio Systems Network Management Systems Satellite Communications Systems SONET Transport Systems Internet Access Systems Narrowband Wave Division Multiplexing Systems Personal Access Communications System PACS Infrastructure Equipment CORPORATE NETWORKING Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Switches Audio Video Teleconference Systems Telemedicine Products Distance Learning Products Data Communications Products Key Telephone Systems Local Area Netw
503. th NEC PBXs with CCIS interface Calling Name Display PS Without answering incoming calls or hold calls terminates to the Dterm PS Ill the calling party s name can be confirmed by the indications on the LCD Calling Number Display PS This feature provides a display on the LCD of a Dterm PS lll receiving a call indicating the station number DTMF Signal Sender This feature allows a Dterm PS III user to send the DTMF signal tone to the called party terminal voice mail system etc while engaged in communication Group Call Automatic Conference 6 10 Party This feature permits a Dterm PS III user Multiline Terminal user or Single Line Telephone user within the system to establish a conference among as many as six or ten parties From a Dterm PS II D term Single Line Telephone a maximum of 9 PSs can be paged simultaneously except the conference leader The PSs are assigned to the simultaneous paging groups as participants by the system data beforehand Page 9 47 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Group Call 2Way Calling This feature permits a Dterm PS III Multiline Terminal and Single Line Telephone to page a maximum of fifteen parties simultaneously except the group call leader After one of paged parties answers the paging becomes the 2 Way Calling between the leader and the first answered party and paging other parties stops automatically The Dterm PS III is assigned through system data as participants
504. the PC and the PBX Service Conditions 1 Connection through modems is available providing remote maintenance capabilities 2 MATWorX can be connected to the system either directly or remotely Direct connection is through the RS connector on the MP card Remote connection is available via either an internal modem on the MP card or an external modem for high speed Remote connection via the internal modem is through the COT card Connection between the modem and the COT is accomplished through internal switching of the TDSW Remote connection via an external modem is through the MP card 3 The following functions can be performed from MAT Worx System station and trunk data entry change and copy Loading saving and verification of system data to and from a disk ROM check readout of generic program Display of fault fault cleared messages On site or remote access to the system Printout of system data when printer is connected to PC Display and setting of system clock calendar Numbering Plan Least Cost Routing LCR System initialize UCD Station Hunting Call Pickup Group 4 The PC used with MAT WorX must have an RS 232C port and cannot be located more than 50 feet 15m from the system when connected on premises 5 When stations or trunks are expanded moved or changed office data for a Multiline Terminal key station trunk can be copied and multiple assignments of related office data is possible MACH Script E
505. the Call Transfer feature UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Overflow for TAS Queue If the TAS call is not answered by predetermined time the call will be forwarded to predetermined station Attendant Console Announcement Service Queue Limit for TAS When a DID call is converted to TAS and the number of using lines reaches queue limit this feature provides the system to restrict the next call terminating No CID Call Routing This feature allows designating a call terminating system based on the reason for the absence of calling party number received from the network Off hook Alarm This feature allows a station user to call the Attendant or a pre designated station by simply staying off hook for a preprogrammed period of time The calling number is automatically displayed at the Attendant Console or the pre designated station if equipped with an LCD Off Premises Extensions This feature allows the connection of a single line telephone in an off premises location The connection to the Off Premises Extension can be through direct copper or through the local telephone company Open Application Interface OAI Provides a computer to PBX interface allowing a computer to control the function of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS The IPS can be customized to accommodate most customer applications Application software can be provided by NECAM an outside softwa
506. the status of other employees via their web browser INASET integration allows INASET users to see employee statuses in their view of the corporate directory Open Worx Message Reader MR Message Reader is a convenient application that allows users to retrieve their messages taken by the attendants from any Dterm phone set enabled with the proper OAI function key The messages can be sent from BAS INASET or Desktop MR Functionality Message Reader is quite easy to use Simply go to any Dterm phone set that has the Message Reader function key configured then press the key and enter the extension for which you wish to read messages In the event more than one user is assigned to a phone the user may choose from a list of employees to designate for whom to read messages and then enter the proper password if required If no extension number is entered Message Reader will default to the extension you are using for this connection Once having entered the extension and the password the user may easily peruse all their messages and after a message is read it may be deleted or saved If the person leaving the message left a return phone number Message Reader can even dial the call back number automatically MR Database MR uses the Open WorX database This common database allows for other applications such as BAS INASET or Desktop to access LSI information Page 11 10 NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6
507. ther Roaming is provided or not The JT Q931a digital trunks IP trunks can be used by single line telephone stations and Dterm stations for originating or receiving calls as same as common trunks The Data Base Module DBM card PN APOO B is required per PBX The DBM card cannot be used as billing application processor for SMDR MCI PMS or Hotel printer System data stored in the memory of the DBM card can be saved loaded and verified from a MAT A Roaming network can consist of maximum 512 PBXs Visitor Location Register VLR information for maximum 512 Visitor PSs can be recorded to a system VLR information is the various information of Visitor PS and is made in the memory of DBM on the Visitor PBX when the PS is roaming When the VLR information exceeds for more than 512 PSs DBM overwrites the oldest VLR information One of the following two Roaming service is available in the PBX Roaming service via D channel private line using Q931a digital trunks Multi Site Roaming Roaming service via IP network using Virtual IPT Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk The following sections describe the system outline and system configuration of Multi Site Roaming Q931a Roaming over IP Trunk UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 16 3 Issue 6 Chapter 16 Wireless System Multi Site Roaming In a mixed network of both UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 IPX and UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS systems or a network of UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS syst
508. ting with a caller For NEAX PBXs enabled with TAPI services i e TAPI Link or PC Telephony Adaptors ViewCall Plus also offers an Enhanced mode that adds powerful new features such as the ability to drag and drop dialing information To make a call simply drag the name from the contact list or Call Log to the telephone window and ViewCall Plus will dial the correct number ViewCall Plus includes PhoneBASIC which allows programmers familiar with Microsofts Visual Basic to customize ViewCall Plus in almost unlimited ways ViewCall Plus can be configured to access and interact with databases work with spreadsheets direct calls according to a set of pre established rules handle predictive dialing functions and more For example ViewCall Plus can make calls from within an application such as Microsoft Access or Outlook Here are just a few of the features available with ViewCall Plus e Call status Three integrated windows e Conference calling Enhanced Mode e Visual Basic scripting e Multiple call handling TETAS e Drag and drop between windows e Caller identification in Enhanced mode when supported by the telephone system UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 23 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems NEAXMail IM 16 LX An enhanced integrated messaging solution the NEAXMail IM 16LX is the next generation of internal card based voicemail unified messaging system It delivers scalable p
509. tion 1 STA 200 works in Remote Connection Mode because IP terminals in Location 1 are assigned to Remote Connection Mode under the conditions of Location 1 because STA 200 in Remote Connection Mode is assigned to operate under the condition of Location 1 In this case the appropriate communication is available because the operating condition of STA 200 matches the actual Location number Location 1 Example 2 When Sta 200 logs in Location 2 STA 200 logs out from Location 0 and then logs in from IP terminals in Location 2 STA 200 works in Local Connection Mode because IP terminals in Location 2 are assigned to Locale Connection Mode under the conditions of Location 0 because STA 200 in Local Connection Mode is assigned to operate under the condition of Location 0 In this case the appropriate communication may not be available because the operating condition of STA 200 Location 0 does not match the actual Location number Location 2 ETA FS ie Rial ej i a Latation Intemebt Intranet STAM mH iial l N i A ial ur y i i i S Hin ra Fa ETAHI i i ay Loc a ontd A A d E y y Location ps Tami 8 Following features are not available for IP terminals at remote sites Multiple Line Operation Assignment of feature keys which the lamp indication and ringer is controlled by other IP terminals Page 13 12 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP
510. tion or 6 8 party conference mode Videoconferencing The Dterm SP30 audio and videoconferencing feature lets you communicate with anyone on the NEC Network Share ideas information and applications using video and audio Send and receive real time images using Windows compatible equipment Allows for broadcasting of the live video to other Dterm SP30 users which might not have video transmission capabilities Use of a video camera to instantly view items such as hardware devices road conditions or even personnel which are displayed in front of the camera Whiteboard The whiteboard lets you collaborate in real time with other Dterm SP30 users via graphic design With the whiteboard you can review create and update graphic information Manipulate contents by clinking dragging and dropping information on the white board with a mouse keyboard Copy cut and paste information from any Windows based application into the whiteboard Use different colored pointers to easily differentiate participants comments Save the whiteboard contents either at the local side or distant end location Load saved whiteboard pages enabling you to prepare information before a conference then drag and drop it into the whiteboard during an audio meeting Chat The chat functionality lets you conduct real time conversations via text with as many Dterm SP30 users as you like With chat you can Type text messages to communicate with other co workers duri
511. tions 1 Up to 956 IP terminals can be accommodated per system 2 Total number of ports for IP terminals legacy stations trunks except for AP cards and IP PADs is up to 1020 per system See chapter 1 for capacities of stand alone and network configurations Note Legacy stations trunks means the ones connected to the Time Division Switch TDSW Examples of legacy station trunk cards are LC DLC COT PRT CCT DTI 8RST DTMF receivers CF TB Conference trunk etc 3 IP terminals are accommodated in the Virtual PIM s Virtual FPs so that the hardware PIM s are not required to accommodate IP Enabled Dterm terminals The Virtual PIM is software defined PIM used for data assignment for IP Enabled Dterm terminals and Virtual IP trunks for CCIS Networking via IP Maximum nine 15 Virtual PIM s are provided per system Total number of the Virtual PIM s for IP terminals and hardware PIM s is up to 16 per system 4 Minimum one hardware PIM is required per system to accommodate the MP card The number of hardware PIM s depends on the number of legacy stations trunks and IP PADs Up to two hardware PIM s 128 LT ports can be controlled by the MP without the addition of an FP card With three FP cards up to eight hardware PIM s 512 LT ports can be controlled One FP card controls up to two hardware PIM s 128 LT ports 5 The IP PAD is required for connections between IP terminals and legacy stations trunks The IP PAD converts vo
512. tions and time Voice mail features can be used by accessing the VMS directly from an extension If a station sets its call forwarding destination to the VMS calls to this station are connected to the VMS and the messages can be registered according to the VMS instruction In addition the Message Waiting lamp of the station can be turned on automatically by the VMS The following voice mail systems to integrate to the UN VERGE NEAx 2000 IPS system NEAXMail AD 120 The AD 120 is available in 4 to 72 port configurations and offers both analog and digital station port integration The AD 120 may cluster up to 5 72 port systems supporting a total of 360 ports The AD 120 also provides a range of capabilities from voice messaging to Unified Messaging NEAXMail AD 64 The AD 64 is available in 4 to 96 port configurations and is digitally integrated to the NEAX 2000 IPS PBX The NEAXMail AD 64 comes as a Level or Level II system and offers a 25 free seat license of TeLANophy along with other optional features NEAXMail IM 16 LX A card type voice processing system with various features and is mounted into the LT slot of the PBX The basic system of the NEAXMail IM 16 LX provides 4 or 8 ports of voice mail Adding an additional expansion card provides 4 or 8 additional ports yielding a maximum of 16 voice mail ports UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 19 1 Issue 6 Chapter 19 Voice Messaging Systems
513. tions can be held by using the Multiline Terminal handsets The Busy Idle status of the associated Multiline Terminal is displayed on the Automatic Intercom line key LED Dial Intercom Dial Intercom comprises up to 10 Multiline Terminals which can call each other using a dedicated Dial Intercom line key with abbreviated dialing Dial Intercom calls can be Voice Announce with Handsfree Answerback or ringing calls Internal Tone Voice Signaling Multiline Terminals can signal incoming internal calls by Voice Announcement or by ringing according to the programmed mode Voice first or Ring first of the called terminal The caller can dial the digit 1 to change from Voice Announcement to Ring Tone or vice versa The Multiline Terminal assigned this feature can program the following two modes e Voice Mode allows an incoming call to terminate with Voice Announcement e Tone Mode allows an incoming call to terminate with ringing Internal Zone Paging with Meet Me This feature allows the Attendant Console and system users to page over the built in speakers of the Multiline Terminals within the assigned zone or all zones Page 9 22 IP Enabled Dterm This feature provides a Dterm Series E i Terminal combined with an IP Adapter unit with the capability to connect UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS via IP networking IP Enabled Dterm The IP Enabled Dterm provides users with all features currently available in Dterm series E terminals Last
514. to 2000 IPS connection or the 2000 IPS to IPS connection Incomplete Number Handling When a DID number incoming from ISDN is incomplete the call can be transferred to a predetermined station or attendant console ISDN Terminal This feature provides the system with an ISDN Terminal or Terminal Adapter TA ISDN Terminal to ISDN Terminal ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal ISDN Terminal to Single Line Telephone ISDN Terminal to Multiline Terminal and ISDN Terminal to PS connections are available MEGACON Access WATS AT amp T s MEGACOM WATS network as well as WATS from other carriers can be used MEGACOM 800 Service 800 WATS Ultra WATS AT amp T s MEGACOM 800 Inward WATS network as well as 800 WATS provided by other carriers can be used MULTIQUEST 900 Service AT amp T s MultiQuest service can be used It is a 900 type service Also 900 service provided by other carriers can be used UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Overlap Receiving Overlap Receiving is available for an incoming call to the 2000 IPS from ISDN network Overlap Receiving is a procedure used in Call establishment of an incoming call to enable the network to send called party number digits to the user in successive messages as and when they are made available from the remote network Overlap Sending Overlap Sending is available fo
515. to go back to the PBX that transferred or forwarded a call al SS ONS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 15 7 Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN Business Feature List Business Feature List Elapse Call Timer Forced Account Code Group Listening Fault Messages Do Not Disturb o S Page 15 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN ISDN Network Requirements for Layer One 1 Interface T1 1 544 M only Framing ESF 24 Multi frame only Line Coding B8ZS only D Channel Rate 64 kbps only D Channel T1 Channel 24 24th channel Note ndividual B Channels cannot be looped back local or remote Supported Network Services Trunk provisioned only AT amp T NT Software Defined Network Global Software Defined Network International 800 Service International MEGACOM AT amp T s Alternate Destination Call Redirection feature is supported by the IPS Incoming Note Private Tie WATS 800 WATS Outgoing Note DID DOD Note Services that do not require NSF can be supported by NEAX 2000 IPS UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Page 15 9 Chapter 15 Integrated Services Data Network ISDN ISDN PRI Specifications DTI The Digital Trunk Interface DTI interfaces the PBX directly to 24 30 channel PCM trans
516. to place outgoing calls using the Attendant Assisted Calling feature If the station under Room Cutoff status dials a C O line access code and or a special area code the station is rerouted to one of the following Reorder tone Attendant Console Room Cutoff is automatically set by Check Out operation and it is automatically reset by Check In operation Station to station calling and service feature access such as Maid Status are still available Room Cutoff Console This feature allows a DSS BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Room Cutoff Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console The Room Cutoff status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Terminal user can set cancel Room Cutoff to another station using the Room Cutoff Console The Room Cutoff Console only displays cancels the set status for those stations that were set into room cutoff by the station user of the Room Cutoff Console Indication is not provided when another Room Cutoff console the Attendant Console a Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument or a PMS changes the RC status of a station UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 17 11 Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Room Status This feature provides the Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument with a visual display of the guest s room status A sup
517. to this card PN 4VCTI VCT The PN 4VCTI circuit card is a 4 channel CODEC card for IP Trunks four VCT cards per IPT card Voice compression protocols G723 1 G729A G711 FAX 14 4kbps DTMF signals Used together with PN IPTB card Page 6 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking PN 8RSTG DTMF Receiver The RSTA card receives DTMF signals sent by single line telephones DID lines and tie lines This card mounts in any LT slot in any PIM and provides 8 RST circuits per card Usually at least one card per system is required This card uses 8 time slots This card is required for a 512 Port System The 128 Port System s CPU is equipped with 4 RST circuits PN 4RSTBA MF Receiver for T1 MF ANI This MF receiver card is required when using the T1 ANI feature This card receives the Multi Frequency MF signals sent by the CO to ID the calling party One RSTB card provides four MF receiver ports This card mounts in any AP slot in PIM s 0 to 7 PN 4RSTC ID Number Receiver The Caller ID Class feature requires this card to receive and store Caller ID information from the CO Frequency Shift Keying FSK is used to send calling number and calling name information to the PBX The RSTC card receives this information from the CO and provides flexible options for the use of the Caller ID messages PN 4RSTBA 911 MF Sender This MF Sender card is used in conjunction with a t
518. tomatically downloads a copy the system data to Remote Site through the network once a day Because the CP31 as a DMR Is designed as a Remote PIM CPU the following options that are built in on the CP24 are not available with the CP31 No built in Modem No built in DAT Only one RS Port No built in DK external relay key No MN Alarm Indication Network Conditions and Payload tem Requirement O mates Maximum 120ms one way 240ms return Recommended Support the quality class A Delay Time 150ms one way 300ms return Maximum B of IP Telephone UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 13 25 Issue 6 Chapter 13 Voice Over IP VoIP Bandwidth Requirement With G7 23 1 5 3k 6 3k Compression a 1 a fel See see Note This information is an estimation based on an established call Slightly Higher Control values will occur at time of call origination and termination stablishec With G729a 8k Without Compression Compression G 711 Voice Calls Base values Originating from a station 9 6 Kbps Call estimated Terminating to a station 5 76 Kbps Call estimated Originating to C O 11 5 Kbps Call estimated Terminating from C O 5 76 Kbps Call estimated Keep Alive to Remote Site 0 032Kbps estimated Other control packets for Remote Site 4Kbps estimated G 723 1 voice 5 3Kbps one way G 729a voice 8Kbps one way G 711 voice 64Kbps one way The
519. tor Unit RGU Card Qty PZ PW139 MODULAR CHASSIS Ring Voltage 85 75Vac Ring Current 0 05A Ring Generator Unit Cooling FAN The cooling FAN is mounted at the right side of each MODULAR CHASSIS The FAN should be replaced every 4 years in order to ensure the cooling system Cooling FAN Description ay mas o O OO 109P0624H Each Modular Chassis is equipped with a 7D09 FAN KPOP NS G RS Cooling Fan this part is for replacement only Page 2 14 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Software Architecture Chapter 2 System Architecture The UNIVERGE NEax 2000 IPS systems offer very attractive system starting points Listed below are the System Expansion Packages available with the UNIVERGE neax 2000 IPS family System Packages UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS System Packages oo Description _____ _________Remarks UNIV IPS IP 8 Seat System Package IPS UNIV PIMMJ UA ICS VS BASE C UA SPN CP24 C CPU PZ M606 A SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE KEY KEEPER FD 8 SEAT LICENSE MAT Worx IPS UNIV IPS 64 Port Basic System Package SPN CP24 C CPU IPS UNIV PIMMJ UA ICS VS BASE C UA 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE MATWorX IPS UNIV IPS Back Up CPU 8 IP Seat SYS PKG IPS UNIV PIMMK UA ICS VS BASE C UA SPN CP27A CPU SPN CP27A CPU PZ M606 A PZ M606 A SPN 8IPLA IP PAD C 64 Port SYS SOFTWARE KEY KEEPER FD 8 SEAT LICENSE KEY MAT Worx IPS UNIV IPS Back Up CPU 64 P
520. tory and access their speed dials From each they can dial and from within the corporate directory a user may send a Short Text Message if STM is installed email or OpenWorX Message Personal Directory In addition to the standard OpenWorX corporate directory Desktop gives users an additional Personal Directory The Personal Directory is different for each individual user but the Corporate Directory is common among all users For example the user could have an entry for their Mother and it would only be for use with their individual phone Desktop Call History The lists of calls that have been received by the phone are displayed in the Inbound Section of this screen The number Name and Date are included The Name is only included if there is a match for the number in the database The user can also click on the telephone handset icon next to the number to return the call from their Dterm set In addition to searching the corporate directory ICA will now search the Personal Directory of that station as well For example if 214 555 1111 calls one individual who has Mom defined in their Personal Directory for that number the ICA pop and record in Desktop will say Mom For another person who does not have Mom defined in their Personal Directory no name will be attached or can also have a different number defined for Mom ICA also indicates the phone type found in the Personal contact using appending H f
521. transferred from other attendants will arrive on this queue Me This queue is for the attendant s personal monitored number or calls made directly to their extension Brief Description of Call Control Function Answer answers the oldest call in queue or in the priority queue Park allows the operator to park a caller on an orbit number Once there dialing that orbit from any telephone in the system retrieves the caller This function is also known as Meet me Paging Dial allows the operator to make an outgoing call from his or her extension Retrieve enables the attendants to retrieve parked calls by selecting a caller to retrieve from a menu of callers that are parked Hold place a caller on hold on one of the loop keys or un hold them as well The Dterm will become idle Transfer initiates a supervised transfer once a number has been entered or a directory entry selected Blind Transfer initiates an un supervised transfer As with Transfer a number must be selected beforehand Join Park allows the operator to join an existing caller with a parked caller that is selected from the parked call menu Conference a conference between the source caller the destination caller and the operator Source Destination used when a supervised transfer is initiated Before the transfer is completed the operator may switch voice path back and forth between the existing source and destination conne
522. transmit them through the same data communication line as IP network Intranet Using this system both voice and data communication lines are integrated into one communication line and communication cost can be reduced The following VoIP solutions are available with the UN VERGE neax 2000 IPS system VoIP Solutions Extended Enterprise IP Solution H 323 Connection IP Station Peer to Peer Fax over IP CCIS Networking via IP Modem over IP Remote PIM over IP Extended Enterprise IP Solution Teleworkers usually working from an off site location can place a call through the corporate PBX KTS by simply dialing the number as if they were in their office The Dterm phones can be connected to either a multiple user unit called the Dterm IP Branch or a single user device called the Dterm IP Adapter The Dterm IP Gateway Dterm IP branch and Dterm IP Adapter units are linked through a wide variety of network devices TA FRAD and CSU DSC and network types ISDN IP Frame Relay T1 Fractional T1 ATM Dterm IP Gateway is a Multiline module available in 8 or 12 port units On one side it has an AMP connector that is used to interface with Digital station ports On the other side it connects to an IP packet network though a 10BaseT Ethernet port or circuit network through a DB25 WAN port It communicates over the IP network to the Dterm IP Adapter s or over an IP network or circuit network to Dterm IP Branch unit s Dterm IP Adapte
523. twork to a station in another office Multiple Call Forwarding Don t Answer CCIS This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple Call Forwarding Don t Answer sequence to be forwarded over a CCIS network to a station in another office Multiple Console Operation CCIS This feature provides console operation where Attendant Consoles are installed in more than one node in the CCIS network Network Station Number CCIS FCCS When 2000 IPS is connected to a 2400 IPX via CCIS link the Network Station Number can be moved to other office within the network by a simple command operation from the Centralized MAT in the 2400 IPX Night Connection Fixed CCIS This feature routes calls normally directed to the Attendant Console to a pre selected station in another office through the CCIS network when the Night mode has been entered UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Night Connection Flexible CCIS This feature provides an inter office night connection service via the CCIS network when the calling station and the night station belong to different offices Outgoing Trunk Queuing CCIS This feature allows a CCIS network station upon encountering an all trunk busy signal to dial a specified access code and enter a first in first out queue As soon as a CCIS trunk becomes available stations in the queue will be called back on a first come fir
524. ty destination from the loop Cancel Cancel Basic Key Disconnect an outgoing trunk or tone seized by the attendant Disconnect the station recalling attendant for transfer assistance Allows the attendant to hold a call at the Hold Key console and or to activate it to serial call State Allows the attendant to release from an Release Release Basic Key established connection freeing the console for processing of new calls Allows the attendant to answer incoming Answer calls in the order in which they arrive at the console Allows the attendant to extend an outgoing Start Start Basic Key amp Lamp call to a station Completion of outgoing pulse will be recognized Page 7 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 7 Attendant Answering Position Incoming Call Identification These eight non locking keys with associated lamps provide attendant access to specific types of incoming calls A flashing lamp indicates a call waiting to be answered A steady lamp indicates a call answered The standard arrangement of these keys is shown on the face layout Allows the attendant to answer incoming Tie TIE Tie Line Basic Key amp Lamp Line calls when the distant station dials Caron arcu aes Allows the attendant to answer incoming Busy line Basic Key amp Lamp calls to specified station when the station is busy 13 Allows the attendant to answer incoming Call Forwarding Don t
525. ty number ID is displayed on the called party s Dterm LCD e Connected Line ID Presentation COLP Called party number ID is displayed on the calling party s Dterm LCD e Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP Calling party information Name ID is displayed on the called party s Dterm LCD e Connected Name Identification Presentation CONP Called party information Name ID is displayed on the calling party s Dterm LCD This feature is also available when networking with a CCIS interface CCIS Tandem Call Calling Party Number CPN Delivery to ISDN amp Q SIG Networks This feature is provided for the call from tie line CCIS line or Q SIG or a station is sent to the public ISDN network AT amp T NT NI 2 or Q SIG network Q SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call ETSI Version This feature enables NEC s PBX to connect to NEC s PBX or other manufacturer by using Layer 3 protocol for the signaling for the support of circuit mode bearer services at the Q reference point Q SIG conforms to ETS 300 172 Page 9 44 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Wireless Feature List Individual PS Calling Last Number Redial PS PS Location Registration Multi Line Operation PS Q 931a Roaming over IP Trunk Radio Channel Changeover Short Message Notification OAI Soft Phone Wireless Handset Speech Encryption Speed Dial P S Station Hunting Not Available Voice Mai
526. uals and can be calculated by 1020 number of Multiline Terminals Dterm DtermIP Total Virtuals available Stack Dial This feature enables a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console to remember the numbers dialed in the preceding five calls including the last number dialed The stack dial numbers are sequentially displayed on the LCD display thus allowing the station user to make an outgoing call by selecting the desired dialed number from the display Station Hunting Three Station Hunting arrangements are available Station Hunting Circular processes the call no matter which station in the hunt group is called Station Hunting Terminal initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of a hunt group is called Station Hunting Secretarial is initiated when a busy station in a Station Hunting Circular group or Station Hunting Terminal group is reached Station Hunting Circular When a busy station in a hunt group is called this feature permits the call to be processed automatically through the hunt group in a preprogrammed order from that station s position within the hunt group Station Hunting Terminal When a pilot number is dialed and that number is busy sequential Station Hunting will be initiated However if a number other than the pilot number is dialed and that number is busy busy tone will be provided rather than initiate Station Hunting Page 9 29 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Station Hunting
527. uide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Application Processor AP Application Processors communicate directly to the MP bypassing the FP Features such as SMDR Property Management System PMS Digital Trunks T1 CCIS etc are Application Processors System Capacity for Application Processor Card Maximum of 24 cards per system Maximum of 256 ports per system There are several different AP cards The table below provides a list of APs and their functions Application Processor AP Cards APA e SS SPN SCO1 DCH AP SPN SCO38CSH AP CS ZT Handler CSF SPN APOOB MRC F AP DND Group PMS Executed History Print out SMDR 2400 Format amp MCI UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 3 3 Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Reliability and Availability Mean Time Between Failures MTBF The MTBF represents the minimum time frame in which a failure of any common equipment such as processors memory switching and etc may cause a partial system outage The following table shows the MTBF in hours and in years for each card and terminal Reliability and Availability Chart Reliability Description MTBF MTBF MTTR Availability EI ETTE EN ICS VS PIMMJ ICS VS PIMMJ BWB 1868 32136156 99 99 999813 ne al al E AN O CN Page 3 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 3 System Highlights Reliability and Availability Chart
528. uilt in CSU CCIS 1 5 Mbps Trunk Card Provides a built in Common Channel Handler CCH of CCIS SPN 24CCTA A AP 2 line Basic Rate 2B D Interface Trunk Card Accommodates two two channel PCM digital lines SPN 2BRTC AP 4 line Basic Rate 2B D Interface Trunk Card SPN 4BRTA F AP Accommodates four two channel PCM digital lines Point to Point Connection Only UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request For Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 4 5 Issue 6 Chapter 4 Equipment List Application Processor Cards Cont Name Common Channel Handler for CCIS 1 Trunk Route Transmits receives signals on the common signaling channel of CCIS Common Channel Handler for NO 7 CCIS SPN SC00 CCH D AP D Channel Handler Card Transmits receives signals on the D Channel of ISDN Primary Rate 23B D interface D Channel Handler SPN SC0O1 DCH C AP for ISDN PRI ISDN channel Handler Card Provides the D Channel signaling interface and controls a maximum of four ILC cards Layer 2 and 3 D Channel Handler SPN SCO3B 8ICH AP for ISDN Station CS ZT Handler Card Provides the D Channel signaling interface and controls a maximum of two CSI cards eight CS ZT s Supports Dukane Nurse Call system ZT Handler SPN SCO3B 8CSH C AP Application Package for SMDR 2400 basic and 1400 only PMS Hotel Printer CCIS Centralized SMDR Default data supported SPN APOOB MRC C AP Application Package for SMD
529. uin a occa asec apa a Ti ed ogc ends won tape ae ean nate eee 2 CallCenterWorX ACD 3 0 for BUSINESS oocccocnccocccocnoconococononcononononoonnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnons 3 calGenter WOX MIS sti ii ii did d s 6 A ce Tae Fehr Ne et ees eae ate ete ae alta hy Paige eae dane 10 DUS VV OI LO arsine AN 15 Professional Services for QUSWO sui a iii 18 Page ii UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter T3 Volce over IP VolP Acos ah xakdccassel tienneunoaueuecaaees 1 MOP SONION Sa Seis ccesee essence id ina 1 Extended Enterprise IP SOON sara 1 A ee PS CO a ee ae 3 COIS NEWOrkKNG Via Porsman e aa a a Maitre ks bint e cen Ea aes 14 Fel 929 CONNeSCiO Nr 18 FAX and MOdEmr over WP cea site acne A 21 Remote PIM Over Poean 25 Planning and Installations sssusa l aE eE E 30 System Conditions Limitations Peer to Peer IP cooocccocnccccncccnococncconocanncnnnononnnnnnnonnnonanonannonanenons 36 Chapter 14 Common Channel Inter Office Signaling CCIS cccseeeeesscsssseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeooesseeessenseoes 1 CCRN SON oi dedo 3 Digital a o Analog CGMS oaen etn hots Sie a deat a tala neues 4 io A PA a a 5 Centralized Dll a tada 8 Centralized ES VM COS A A betaedstedn 10 cali SEN OTC S initial Ea 11 WOOK ACA ROUINO oia do 11 Shared Trunk Facilities and Alternate Routing coocccocnocccncocnonoccncocnconnncnnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnononaninnns 12
530. ures such as Caller ID Station Assignments Day Night Modes and Line Key Assignments Because an add in is modular you can add remove and upgrade them individually from within MATWorX An Add in lets you modify your PBX s features without having to upgrade the MATWorX application itself MATWorX also gives you a convenient way to launch other commonly used applications such as Microsoft Word or Excel directly from its Toolbar There are three ways to connect your PC to an NEC PBX Use a modem to establish a dial up connection Use a serial cable to establish a direct connection Use TCP IP over your Local Area Network LAN Page 8 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 8 System Administration The method you use depends on how you installed and configured the device to which you want to connect A serial cable direct connection offers better performance than a modem connection but requires that the PC and device be within 50 feet of each other A TCP IP connection offers excellent performance and flexibility but requires a network connection to both your PC and the device PBX Configuration Wizard The PBX Configuration Wizard is a custom tool in MAT WorX that enables you to establish the proper communication settings between your computer and the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS The Wizard asks you simple questions and then uses the information to automatically configure the connection for
531. users and Attendants to enter a cost accounting or client billing code up to 16 digits into the system Add On Module This feature allows the Add On Module to be combined with a legacy Multiline Terminal when there are insufficient line or trunk keys provided at the Multiline Terminal When the DCU 60 1 unit keys are programmed as line trunk keys the additional 25 lines trunks and the existing lines trunks set for the Multiline Terminal can be accessed directly maximum of 49 lines trunks The station speed dialing function can be assigned for all keys on the DCU 60 1 unit Also one of the last 3 keys can be used as a Day Night change key Alarm Indications Faults are indicated by the Major Minor MJ MN lamps located on the AC DC Power Supply and optionally an external alarm display unit Alphanumeric Display The DTR 16DC 1 Multiline Terminals are each equipped with a 3 line 24 character Liquid Crystal Display LCD These displays are used to provide alphanumeric information including clock calendar and call processing information Station Application All Multiline Terminals with an LCD display UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Analog Port Adapter This feature allows an APR U AP R R or APA U AP A R unit combined with a legacy Multiline Terminal to connect to an analog terminal such as an analog telephone Modem and PC with built in Modem There are two communicatio
532. usic source A printout of unanswered or blocked Automatic Wake Up attempts for each guest room is provided using the Hotel Motel printer Background Music Background Music can be provided on a dial up basis over legacy Multiline Terminal speakers Incoming voice announcements ringing and recalls override Background Music Up to 10 music programs can be offered Page 9 10 Back Up CPU UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a dual CPU system with two MP cards When Emergency Notification from hardware is detected the changeover from an active MP card to a standby MP card will occur If the active MP card becomes out of order for any reason the standby MP card starts up automatically The standby MP card employs a Cold Standby System that will restart initialization by the changeover from the active MP card Bandwidth Control This feature allows to assign an available bandwidth threshold for VoIP traffic within a Location and between Locations and to restrict outgoing incoming calls when the VoIP traffic exceeds the threshold The Location is a group of VoIP devices IP Enabled Dterm IP PAD or Peer to Peer IP trunks built in IP trunks which the same VoIP communications parameters such as codec selection list and ToS field value are assigned When the VolP traffic over CCIS exceeds the threshold the call can be routed to legacy trunks TDM network When exceeding the threshold the system can store fault information and
533. ut a site is a PBX or group of PBXs If you have several separate PBXs operating independently whether on or off premises Multi Site operation is required to let AIM WorX collect the call data and process it for each site Multi Site collects SMDR via polling direct connection or a combination of both How AIM WorX handles each PBX is configured in its PBX setup screens AIMWorX databases AIMWorX supports both Microsoft SQL databases You may purchase client server version of AIM WorX with SQL Server 2000 database or without a database AlMWorX demonstration systems may use the free version of SQL Server called Microsoft Database Engine MSDE This is included on the AIMWorX CD Description Notes AIMWorX Standalone DB AIMWorX Program Disk with Microsoft SQL 2000 Integrated Disk 1 Client Access License AIMWorX C S NEC Provided DB AIMWorX Program Disk with Microsoft SQL 2000 Integrated Disk 5 Client Access Licenses AIMWorX C S Cust Provided DB AIMWorX Program Disk No Database Customer provided AIMWorX Standalone DB The AIM WorX Standalone Database includes the AIMWorX Program disk which has all modules on it The core modules that are enabled are AlMWorX Manager Call Accounting and Alarm Manager included is the freely licensable Alarm Client The standalone version only allows one person to access the AIM WorX application at a time from the AIM WorX server AIMWorX C S NEC Provided DB The AlMWorx Client Server NEC
534. vide feature dial tone or recall the Attendant Four house phone groups are available Each house phone group can be assigned to automatically call the Attendant Console or a predestinated station Maid Status This feature allows the Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument Property Management System PMS terminal or guest room station using special access code to register the condition of each guest room There are a maximum of eight types of room conditions Although the system provides for a maximum of eight types of room conditions the eight codes 1 8 provided are not fixed for a given condition This provides the end user with the flexibility to select any code 1 8 to serve as the Maid Status code for any condition When Maid Status is displayed or printed out the digit s dialed as the code when the Maid Status was last changed are displayed or printed When dialing from a guest station a Maid Identification Code maid ID code can be provided up to two digits This is allowed or denied in system programming Status number Room condition example see below Check In Check Out Under Cleaning Cleaning Finished Check Finished Out of Service Needs Maintenance Maintenance Complete CONDOR WN Page 17 8 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 17 Hotel Motel System Message Registration This feature provides output from the IPS to the Propert
535. vided stand alone type Voice Mail System VMS The VMS connected to the using single line circuit LC is controlled by sending receiving DTMF signals using this LC The VMS s voice mail feature can be used by accessing this VMS directly from an extension If a station sets its call forwarding destination to the VMS calls to this station are connected to the VMS and the messages can be registered according to the VMS instruction In addition the Message Waiting lamp of the station can be turned on automatically by the VMS Voice Mail Private Password Voice Mail Password can be prevented from displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when connected to the Voice Mail System UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Voice Mail Transfer This feature has two functions that provide streamlined transfer access to voice mail 1 One touch access to VMS When an Attendant transfers an external call to a sta tion and if the station is busy or unanswered the Attendant can transfer the call to a VMS by dialing 9 or by pressing a function key provided for this feature Chapter 9 Descriptions Voice Over IP H 323 Provides the ability for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to connect via IP Trunk to other non NEAX systems that are compliant with H 323 Allows Transparent Dialing and Calling Station Number Display between the systems Gate keeper GK1000 software and customer supplied server is
536. warding No Answer Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Transfer By Attendant UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Page 9 1 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Business Hotel Data Feature List Cont Split Call Forwarding No Answer DirectInward Dialing DID Call Forwarding Logout DtermlIP Call Park Tenat Direct Inward Termination DIT Call Pickup dl Call Pickup dl Direct Direct Outward Dialing DOD Dialing Direct Outward Dialing DOD Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field Call Pickup Direct DSS BLF Console Dial y Name SSCS Dial Conversion O SSS Page 9 2 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Business Hotel Data Feature List Cont UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Foreign Exchange FX Access Wide Area Telephone Service WATS l Hold l Use Indication Access Issue 6 Page 9 3 Chapter 9 Feature Descriptions Business Hotel Data Feature List Cont Single Digit Dialing Uniform Numbering Plan UNP Voice and Data Station Hunting Secretarial Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SS Page 9 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 9 Descriptions Business Hotel Data Feature Descriptions AAA IN Account Code This feature when used with Station Message Detail Recording SMDR allows station
537. were used on a system basis Number of times Conference circuits were all busy on a system basis Number of times an incoming call was Call Forwarded No Answer to the Attendant or another station on DID Tie or DIT lines on a system basis Number of Tandem Connections on a system basis Number of times a push button register was connected to a trunk based on trunk route Number of Attendant calls including recalls on a system basis Number of station to station calls on a system basis Number of times senders were all busy on a system basis Number of ring generator capacity overflows on a system basis Number of DTE to DTE connections on a system basis UCD Peg Count Number of answered calls by UCD group Number of incoming calls by UCD group Number of waiting calls for a pre determined time into queuing mode on the UCD group Number of incoming calls to all busy stations in the UCD group Number of answered calls in the UCD group MATWorX PC Requirements MAT WorX requires an IBM or compatible PC running Microsoft Windows ME 2000 or XP Recommended Pentium III 350 MHz processor Pentium IV 1 GHz processor 128 MB RAM 256 MB RAM Available hard disk space Available hard disk space before installation before installation 200 MB Full Installation 200 MB Minimum installation MATWorX uses about 100 MB MATWorX uses about 100 MB SVGA monitor 800 x 600 15 SVGA monitor 1024 x resolution 768 resolution 3 5
538. wing circuit cards may be used in conjunction with the 30DTC SPN SCO1 This circuit card controls the signal link D channel when Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN PRI Primary Rate Interface 30B 1D is employed in the system This package will support one signaling link on a single DTA package A maximum of 4 ISDN spans are allowed per system SPN SCOO This circuit card controls signal links when Common Channel Interoffice Signaling CCIS is employed in the system This package will support one signaling link on a single DTA package A maximum of 3 CCIS links per system is allowed UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 6 3 Issue 6 Chapter 6 Trunking SPN BRTC This card has one circuit of Basic Rate interface 2B D and provides connectivity for Voice High Speed Data Switched Video and G4 Fax calls to be placed and received via ISDN Basic Rate BRI to the ISDN Network The BRTC card has built in DCH D channel handler and has a ST interface A locally provided NT1 device is required to connect to the ISDN Network One BRI trunk provides two incoming outgoing voice connections and or two 64k bps channels for high speed data This card is used for BRI trunks from the Telco to the PBX PN 4BRTA F This card has four circuits of Basic Rate interface 2B D and provides two 2 channel PCM digital lines This card is used for BRI trunks from the Telco to the PBX PN CFTB The CFTB card
539. with fresh ideas and the energy to turn them into reality Facilities The physical resources of the company are the tangible assets that allow it to respond to your system s needs and your communication demands in a timely and effective manner NEC takes pride in maintaining smooth working facilities with all resources required to provide the highest level of system service and client support NEC has invested millions of dollars in facilities tools equipment and inventory located in hundreds of corporate locations direct offices distributors and affiliates worldwide to create one of the broadest multi level support systems in the industry Page 1 4 UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Issue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Assets NEC s ability to manufacture and market its offerings depends in large part on its ability to remain profitable With a substantial revenue base worldwide NEC has built a strong financial and operational base a strong foundation of support our customers can depend on Innovation Top training knowledge experience and creativity are the hallmarks of intellectual excellence and of NEC s professional staff Our telecom experts combine the skills and desire needed to provide the highest level of responsiveness to a system s service needs and your company s communication support requirements Community NEC and its employees are active in worldwide national regional a
540. xchange Server other applications ViewCall Plus ViewCall Plus gives you total control over all your incoming outgoing external and internal telephone traffic by managing calls on a PC via a Windows graphical user interface ViewCall Plus provides live telephone call management on your PC in the same way that unified messaging enables you to manage voice mail and manage data about each caller with the applications such as Microsoft Office that you use everyday With ViewCall Plus you simply click a mouse to take calls send calls to a voice mail box transfer calls to other extensions ask callers to hold or hear the callers name You can do all this from the desktop PC without picking up the telephone which means you can handle several callers at once without interrupting conversations Three completely integrated windows let you control every aspect of your telephone traffic The Telephone Control window shows the flow of calls to and from your extension and allows you to interact with callers without interrupting conversations The Call Log window records all call activity You can sort or print the information in any order and you can utilize the information to return calls or add contacts to your database by dragging it to those areas with the mouse The Contact List manages data about each caller including multiple telephone numbers and action items and provides you with on screen information stored in your personal database before connec
541. xecuted the program is changed after the program version matching is completed The program changeover cannot be executed if the program downloading or program version matching is interrupted or fails If the program changeover immediate is set the setting is invalid The program changeover for which the schedule date time has been set is executed only when the PBX is on line When immediate program changeover is executed after a schedule date time for program changeover execution is set the schedule Is invalid Required Hardware Comments CP24C CP31C Stand Alone or Remote PIM network MATWorX IPS Version 11 0 0 PC for MATWorX Note See MATWorX PC Requirements above Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional PC Work station for FTP Note Internet Information Server IIS supplied with Windows 2000 XPProfessional can be used Note MATWorX and FTP server program can be used on the same PC UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 8 7 Issue 6 Chapter 8 System administration MA4000 Management System MA4000 Management System is a web based powerful voice server management configuration suite MA4000 offers centralized management for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Voice Server as well as simple and powerful tools for managing moves adds and changes MA4000 also offers flexibility and security and allows the end user to manage their voice server in the same ways
542. y Management System PMS This allows the PMS system to receive call record reports for guest room phone calls The PMS system can combine the phone charges with the room charges allowing for a presentable final bill to the guest upon check out Message registration is a condensed SMDR record designed to provide only the necessary call information to the PMS system This feature is a function of the PMS feature and is optional The standard SMDR output can be used along with this feature Message Waiting This feature allows the Attendant Console Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument administrative station or Property Management System PMS terminal to light a lamp on an uninterrupted or interrupted basis on a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal to indicate a message is waiting In addition to the lamp indication control this feature also provides the Voice Message Waiting service that an originating station user can set the Message Waiting with a prerecorded message by using the Digital Announcement Trunk card PN 2DATA Voice Message Waiting System An originating station user can choose the prerecorded message to be set by dialing the message number associated The predetermined station records the messages Voice Message Waiting Individual When setting Message Waiting an originating station user announces the message to be recorded after dialing the station number Message Waiting Console This feature allows a
543. yback can be determined based on internal or external calls on groups of caller IDs or even morning or afternoon A different greeting can be recorded for any of the scenarios above allowing the attendant to present a pleasant and consistent greeting over the telephone BR Authorization and Account Code Dialing Business Receptionist supports dialing with Account Codes or Authorization Codes See the previous section on BAS for details of operation BR Attendant PC Minimum Hardware Requirements Business Receptionist hardware requirements are the same as the BAS requirements see previous section for details Open Worx Communications Portal Business communications in the 21 century is no longer defined strictly as phone calls and documents It has become pervasive in the business day taking many forms phone calls to the desk phone calls to cell phones emails voice mail faxes and instant messaging The OpenWorX Communications Portal provides the added value of including communication tools within the portal This enables information technology organizations to provide their users with a single interface for multiple communication applications The consistent interface across the organization can streamline administration management and user training while providing the greatest level of functionality to users Many daily business activities rely on communications but at the same time business people can easily be
544. yees to dial 0 to get a phone number or extension of someone in the company directory Provides a centralized company phone directory Eliminates outdated printed copies of the company directory UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 9 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface Open Worx Location Status Information LSI LSI is a useful service that allows other system users to obtain information regarding your current location and status when you are away from your office This can be done through any Dterm phone that has the associated function key programmed The user can Set Modify or Delete their location information View the location information of your colleagues Query an extension to determine whether location information is set and call that extension if the person is available Check the status of other users simply by dialing their extension if configured to do so LSI Database LSI uses the Open WorX database This common database allows for other applications such as BAS INASET or Desktop to access LSI information LSI Benefits Never have to guess about someone s whereabouts Know when someone is expected to return and how to contact them while they are away Securely set your own location through any Dterm phone in the office BAS integration allows attendants to check status via their directory Desktop integration allows all employees to view
545. zation Code 2145551212 1234567890 The exclamation point or the dollar sign delineate to BAS where the dial able number ends and where the code begins In the account code example 2145551212 is the phone number and 1234567890 is the account code UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Request for Proposal RFP Reference Guide Page 11 5 Issue 6 Chapter 11 Open Application Interface Open Worx Business Receptionist BR The OpenWorxX Business Receptionist is a PC based call processing application designed primarily for departmental executive assistants The OpenWorx Business Receptionist enables multiple users to answer calls search the directory for a desired party check the Dterm status and perform call processing functions including making answering transferring and parking calls The OpenWorX Business Receptionist is a line based system unlike the Business Attendant System BAS which is queue based Therefore the OpenWorx Business Receptionist is also an effective tool for other Dterm users such as help desks security desks etc The OpenWorX Business Receptionist like all Open WorX applications uses the common OpenWorxX database and is integrated with a multitude of OpenWorx applications BR Speed Dials Pad The BR speed dial pad is modeled off the BAS speed dial See the previous section on BAS for details of operation Note n order for the BR operator to monitor the speed dials they must be given TAPI rights to the l

NEC UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents